OpenCores
URL https://opencores.org/ocsvn/or1k/or1k/trunk

Subversion Repositories or1k

[/] [or1k/] [trunk/] [gdb-5.3/] [gdb/] [doc/] [gdb.texinfo] - Blame information for rev 1765

Details | Compare with Previous | View Log

Line No. Rev Author Line
1 1181 sfurman
\input texinfo      @c -*-texinfo-*-
2
@c Copyright 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1998,
3
@c 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002
4
@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
5
@c
6
@c %**start of header
7
@c makeinfo ignores cmds prev to setfilename, so its arg cannot make use
8
@c of @set vars.  However, you can override filename with makeinfo -o.
9
@setfilename gdb.info
10
@c
11
@include gdb-cfg.texi
12
@c
13
@settitle Debugging with @value{GDBN}
14
@setchapternewpage odd
15
@c %**end of header
16
 
17
@iftex
18
@c @smallbook
19
@c @cropmarks
20
@end iftex
21
 
22
@finalout
23
@syncodeindex ky cp
24
 
25
@c readline appendices use @vindex, @findex and @ftable,
26
@c annotate.texi and gdbmi use @findex.
27
@syncodeindex vr cp
28
@syncodeindex fn cp
29
 
30
@c !!set GDB manual's edition---not the same as GDB version!
31
@set EDITION Ninth
32
 
33
@c !!set GDB manual's revision date
34
@set DATE December 2001
35
 
36
@c THIS MANUAL REQUIRES TEXINFO 4.0 OR LATER.
37
 
38
@c This is a dir.info fragment to support semi-automated addition of
39
@c manuals to an info tree.
40
@dircategory Programming & development tools.
41
@direntry
42
* Gdb: (gdb).                     The @sc{gnu} debugger.
43
@end direntry
44
 
45
@ifinfo
46
This file documents the @sc{gnu} debugger @value{GDBN}.
47
 
48
 
49
This is the @value{EDITION} Edition, @value{DATE},
50
of @cite{Debugging with @value{GDBN}: the @sc{gnu} Source-Level Debugger}
51
for @value{GDBN} Version @value{GDBVN}.
52
 
53
Copyright (C) 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1998,@*
54
              1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
55
 
56
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
57
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
58
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the
59
Invariant Sections being ``Free Software'' and ``Free Software Needs
60
Free Documentation'', with the Front-Cover Texts being ``A GNU Manual,''
61
and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below.
62
 
63
(a) The Free Software Foundation's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have
64
freedom to copy and modify this GNU Manual, like GNU software.  Copies
65
published by the Free Software Foundation raise funds for GNU
66
development.''
67
@end ifinfo
68
 
69
@titlepage
70
@title Debugging with @value{GDBN}
71
@subtitle The @sc{gnu} Source-Level Debugger
72
@sp 1
73
@subtitle @value{EDITION} Edition, for @value{GDBN} version @value{GDBVN}
74
@subtitle @value{DATE}
75
@author Richard Stallman, Roland Pesch, Stan Shebs, et al.
76
@page
77
@tex
78
{\parskip=0pt
79
\hfill (Send bugs and comments on @value{GDBN} to bug-gdb\@gnu.org.)\par
80
\hfill {\it Debugging with @value{GDBN}}\par
81
\hfill \TeX{}info \texinfoversion\par
82
}
83
@end tex
84
 
85
@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
86
Copyright @copyright{} 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
87
1996, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
88
@sp 2
89
Published by the Free Software Foundation @*
90
59 Temple Place - Suite 330, @*
91
Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA @*
92
ISBN 1-882114-77-9 @*
93
 
94
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
95
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
96
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the
97
Invariant Sections being ``Free Software'' and ``Free Software Needs
98
Free Documentation'', with the Front-Cover Texts being ``A GNU Manual,''
99
and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below.
100
 
101
(a) The Free Software Foundation's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have
102
freedom to copy and modify this GNU Manual, like GNU software.  Copies
103
published by the Free Software Foundation raise funds for GNU
104
development.''
105
@end titlepage
106
@page
107
 
108
@ifnottex
109
@node Top, Summary, (dir), (dir)
110
 
111
@top Debugging with @value{GDBN}
112
 
113
This file describes @value{GDBN}, the @sc{gnu} symbolic debugger.
114
 
115
This is the @value{EDITION} Edition, @value{DATE}, for @value{GDBN} Version
116
@value{GDBVN}.
117
 
118
Copyright (C) 1988-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
119
 
120
@menu
121
* Summary::                     Summary of @value{GDBN}
122
* Sample Session::              A sample @value{GDBN} session
123
 
124
* Invocation::                  Getting in and out of @value{GDBN}
125
* Commands::                    @value{GDBN} commands
126
* Running::                     Running programs under @value{GDBN}
127
* Stopping::                    Stopping and continuing
128
* Stack::                       Examining the stack
129
* Source::                      Examining source files
130
* Data::                        Examining data
131
* Macros::                      Preprocessor Macros
132
* Tracepoints::                 Debugging remote targets non-intrusively
133
* Overlays::                    Debugging programs that use overlays
134
 
135
* Languages::                   Using @value{GDBN} with different languages
136
 
137
* Symbols::                     Examining the symbol table
138
* Altering::                    Altering execution
139
* GDB Files::                   @value{GDBN} files
140
* Targets::                     Specifying a debugging target
141
* Remote Debugging::            Debugging remote programs
142
* Configurations::              Configuration-specific information
143
* Controlling GDB::             Controlling @value{GDBN}
144
* Sequences::                   Canned sequences of commands
145
* TUI::                         @value{GDBN} Text User Interface
146
* Emacs::                       Using @value{GDBN} under @sc{gnu} Emacs
147
* Annotations::                 @value{GDBN}'s annotation interface.
148
* GDB/MI::                      @value{GDBN}'s Machine Interface.
149
 
150
* GDB Bugs::                    Reporting bugs in @value{GDBN}
151
* Formatting Documentation::    How to format and print @value{GDBN} documentation
152
 
153
* Command Line Editing::        Command Line Editing
154
* Using History Interactively:: Using History Interactively
155
* Installing GDB::              Installing GDB
156
* Maintenance Commands::        Maintenance Commands
157
* Remote Protocol::             GDB Remote Serial Protocol
158
* Copying::                     GNU General Public License says
159
                                how you can copy and share GDB
160
* GNU Free Documentation License::  The license for this documentation
161
* Index::                       Index
162
@end menu
163
 
164
@end ifnottex
165
 
166
@contents
167
 
168
@node Summary
169
@unnumbered Summary of @value{GDBN}
170
 
171
The purpose of a debugger such as @value{GDBN} is to allow you to see what is
172
going on ``inside'' another program while it executes---or what another
173
program was doing at the moment it crashed.
174
 
175
@value{GDBN} can do four main kinds of things (plus other things in support of
176
these) to help you catch bugs in the act:
177
 
178
@itemize @bullet
179
@item
180
Start your program, specifying anything that might affect its behavior.
181
 
182
@item
183
Make your program stop on specified conditions.
184
 
185
@item
186
Examine what has happened, when your program has stopped.
187
 
188
@item
189
Change things in your program, so you can experiment with correcting the
190
effects of one bug and go on to learn about another.
191
@end itemize
192
 
193
You can use @value{GDBN} to debug programs written in C and C++.
194
For more information, see @ref{Support,,Supported languages}.
195
For more information, see @ref{C,,C and C++}.
196
 
197
@c OBSOLETE @cindex Chill
198
@cindex Modula-2
199
Support for Modula-2
200
@c OBSOLETE and Chill
201
is partial.  For information on Modula-2, see @ref{Modula-2,,Modula-2}.
202
@c OBSOLETE For information on Chill, see @ref{Chill}.
203
 
204
@cindex Pascal
205
Debugging Pascal programs which use sets, subranges, file variables, or
206
nested functions does not currently work.  @value{GDBN} does not support
207
entering expressions, printing values, or similar features using Pascal
208
syntax.
209
 
210
@cindex Fortran
211
@value{GDBN} can be used to debug programs written in Fortran, although
212
it may be necessary to refer to some variables with a trailing
213
underscore.
214
 
215
@menu
216
* Free Software::               Freely redistributable software
217
* Contributors::                Contributors to GDB
218
@end menu
219
 
220
@node Free Software
221
@unnumberedsec Free software
222
 
223
@value{GDBN} is @dfn{free software}, protected by the @sc{gnu}
224
General Public License
225
(GPL).  The GPL gives you the freedom to copy or adapt a licensed
226
program---but every person getting a copy also gets with it the
227
freedom to modify that copy (which means that they must get access to
228
the source code), and the freedom to distribute further copies.
229
Typical software companies use copyrights to limit your freedoms; the
230
Free Software Foundation uses the GPL to preserve these freedoms.
231
 
232
Fundamentally, the General Public License is a license which says that
233
you have these freedoms and that you cannot take these freedoms away
234
from anyone else.
235
 
236
@unnumberedsec Free Software Needs Free Documentation
237
 
238
The biggest deficiency in the free software community today is not in
239
the software---it is the lack of good free documentation that we can
240
include with the free software.  Many of our most important
241
programs do not come with free reference manuals and free introductory
242
texts.  Documentation is an essential part of any software package;
243
when an important free software package does not come with a free
244
manual and a free tutorial, that is a major gap.  We have many such
245
gaps today.
246
 
247
Consider Perl, for instance.  The tutorial manuals that people
248
normally use are non-free.  How did this come about?  Because the
249
authors of those manuals published them with restrictive terms---no
250
copying, no modification, source files not available---which exclude
251
them from the free software world.
252
 
253
That wasn't the first time this sort of thing happened, and it was far
254
from the last.  Many times we have heard a GNU user eagerly describe a
255
manual that he is writing, his intended contribution to the community,
256
only to learn that he had ruined everything by signing a publication
257
contract to make it non-free.
258
 
259
Free documentation, like free software, is a matter of freedom, not
260
price.  The problem with the non-free manual is not that publishers
261
charge a price for printed copies---that in itself is fine.  (The Free
262
Software Foundation sells printed copies of manuals, too.)  The
263
problem is the restrictions on the use of the manual.  Free manuals
264
are available in source code form, and give you permission to copy and
265
modify.  Non-free manuals do not allow this.
266
 
267
The criteria of freedom for a free manual are roughly the same as for
268
free software.  Redistribution (including the normal kinds of
269
commercial redistribution) must be permitted, so that the manual can
270
accompany every copy of the program, both on-line and on paper.
271
 
272
Permission for modification of the technical content is crucial too.
273
When people modify the software, adding or changing features, if they
274
are conscientious they will change the manual too---so they can
275
provide accurate and clear documentation for the modified program.  A
276
manual that leaves you no choice but to write a new manual to document
277
a changed version of the program is not really available to our
278
community.
279
 
280
Some kinds of limits on the way modification is handled are
281
acceptable.  For example, requirements to preserve the original
282
author's copyright notice, the distribution terms, or the list of
283
authors, are ok.  It is also no problem to require modified versions
284
to include notice that they were modified.  Even entire sections that
285
may not be deleted or changed are acceptable, as long as they deal
286
with nontechnical topics (like this one).  These kinds of restrictions
287
are acceptable because they don't obstruct the community's normal use
288
of the manual.
289
 
290
However, it must be possible to modify all the @emph{technical}
291
content of the manual, and then distribute the result in all the usual
292
media, through all the usual channels.  Otherwise, the restrictions
293
obstruct the use of the manual, it is not free, and we need another
294
manual to replace it.
295
 
296
Please spread the word about this issue.  Our community continues to
297
lose manuals to proprietary publishing.  If we spread the word that
298
free software needs free reference manuals and free tutorials, perhaps
299
the next person who wants to contribute by writing documentation will
300
realize, before it is too late, that only free manuals contribute to
301
the free software community.
302
 
303
If you are writing documentation, please insist on publishing it under
304
the GNU Free Documentation License or another free documentation
305
license.  Remember that this decision requires your approval---you
306
don't have to let the publisher decide.  Some commercial publishers
307
will use a free license if you insist, but they will not propose the
308
option; it is up to you to raise the issue and say firmly that this is
309
what you want.  If the publisher you are dealing with refuses, please
310
try other publishers.  If you're not sure whether a proposed license
311
is free, write to @email{licensing@@gnu.org}.
312
 
313
You can encourage commercial publishers to sell more free, copylefted
314
manuals and tutorials by buying them, and particularly by buying
315
copies from the publishers that paid for their writing or for major
316
improvements.  Meanwhile, try to avoid buying non-free documentation
317
at all.  Check the distribution terms of a manual before you buy it,
318
and insist that whoever seeks your business must respect your freedom.
319
Check the history of the book, and try to reward the publishers that
320
have paid or pay the authors to work on it.
321
 
322
The Free Software Foundation maintains a list of free documentation
323
published by other publishers, at
324
@url{http://www.fsf.org/doc/other-free-books.html}.
325
 
326
@node Contributors
327
@unnumberedsec Contributors to @value{GDBN}
328
 
329
Richard Stallman was the original author of @value{GDBN}, and of many
330
other @sc{gnu} programs.  Many others have contributed to its
331
development.  This section attempts to credit major contributors.  One
332
of the virtues of free software is that everyone is free to contribute
333
to it; with regret, we cannot actually acknowledge everyone here.  The
334
file @file{ChangeLog} in the @value{GDBN} distribution approximates a
335
blow-by-blow account.
336
 
337
Changes much prior to version 2.0 are lost in the mists of time.
338
 
339
@quotation
340
@emph{Plea:} Additions to this section are particularly welcome.  If you
341
or your friends (or enemies, to be evenhanded) have been unfairly
342
omitted from this list, we would like to add your names!
343
@end quotation
344
 
345
So that they may not regard their many labors as thankless, we
346
particularly thank those who shepherded @value{GDBN} through major
347
releases:
348
Andrew Cagney (releases 5.3, 5.2, 5.1 and 5.0);
349
Jim Blandy (release 4.18);
350
Jason Molenda (release 4.17);
351
Stan Shebs (release 4.14);
352
Fred Fish (releases 4.16, 4.15, 4.13, 4.12, 4.11, 4.10, and 4.9);
353
Stu Grossman and John Gilmore (releases 4.8, 4.7, 4.6, 4.5, and 4.4);
354
John Gilmore (releases 4.3, 4.2, 4.1, 4.0, and 3.9);
355
Jim Kingdon (releases 3.5, 3.4, and 3.3);
356
and Randy Smith (releases 3.2, 3.1, and 3.0).
357
 
358
Richard Stallman, assisted at various times by Peter TerMaat, Chris
359
Hanson, and Richard Mlynarik, handled releases through 2.8.
360
 
361
Michael Tiemann is the author of most of the @sc{gnu} C@t{++} support
362
in @value{GDBN}, with significant additional contributions from Per
363
Bothner and Daniel Berlin.  James Clark wrote the @sc{gnu} C@t{++}
364
demangler.  Early work on C@t{++} was by Peter TerMaat (who also did
365
much general update work leading to release 3.0).
366
 
367
@value{GDBN} uses the BFD subroutine library to examine multiple
368
object-file formats; BFD was a joint project of David V.
369
Henkel-Wallace, Rich Pixley, Steve Chamberlain, and John Gilmore.
370
 
371
David Johnson wrote the original COFF support; Pace Willison did
372
the original support for encapsulated COFF.
373
 
374
Brent Benson of Harris Computer Systems contributed DWARF2 support.
375
 
376
Adam de Boor and Bradley Davis contributed the ISI Optimum V support.
377
Per Bothner, Noboyuki Hikichi, and Alessandro Forin contributed MIPS
378
support.
379
Jean-Daniel Fekete contributed Sun 386i support.
380
Chris Hanson improved the HP9000 support.
381
Noboyuki Hikichi and Tomoyuki Hasei contributed Sony/News OS 3 support.
382
David Johnson contributed Encore Umax support.
383
Jyrki Kuoppala contributed Altos 3068 support.
384
Jeff Law contributed HP PA and SOM support.
385
Keith Packard contributed NS32K support.
386
Doug Rabson contributed Acorn Risc Machine support.
387
Bob Rusk contributed Harris Nighthawk CX-UX support.
388
Chris Smith contributed Convex support (and Fortran debugging).
389
Jonathan Stone contributed Pyramid support.
390
Michael Tiemann contributed SPARC support.
391
Tim Tucker contributed support for the Gould NP1 and Gould Powernode.
392
Pace Willison contributed Intel 386 support.
393
Jay Vosburgh contributed Symmetry support.
394
 
395
Andreas Schwab contributed M68K @sc{gnu}/Linux support.
396
 
397
Rich Schaefer and Peter Schauer helped with support of SunOS shared
398
libraries.
399
 
400
Jay Fenlason and Roland McGrath ensured that @value{GDBN} and GAS agree
401
about several machine instruction sets.
402
 
403
Patrick Duval, Ted Goldstein, Vikram Koka and Glenn Engel helped develop
404
remote debugging.  Intel Corporation, Wind River Systems, AMD, and ARM
405
contributed remote debugging modules for the i960, VxWorks, A29K UDI,
406
and RDI targets, respectively.
407
 
408
Brian Fox is the author of the readline libraries providing
409
command-line editing and command history.
410
 
411
Andrew Beers of SUNY Buffalo wrote the language-switching code, the
412
Modula-2 support, and contributed the Languages chapter of this manual.
413
 
414
Fred Fish wrote most of the support for Unix System Vr4.
415
He also enhanced the command-completion support to cover C@t{++} overloaded
416
symbols.
417
 
418
Hitachi America, Ltd. sponsored the support for H8/300, H8/500, and
419
Super-H processors.
420
 
421
NEC sponsored the support for the v850, Vr4xxx, and Vr5xxx processors.
422
 
423
Mitsubishi sponsored the support for D10V, D30V, and M32R/D processors.
424
 
425
Toshiba sponsored the support for the TX39 Mips processor.
426
 
427
Matsushita sponsored the support for the MN10200 and MN10300 processors.
428
 
429
Fujitsu sponsored the support for SPARClite and FR30 processors.
430
 
431
Kung Hsu, Jeff Law, and Rick Sladkey added support for hardware
432
watchpoints.
433
 
434
Michael Snyder added support for tracepoints.
435
 
436
Stu Grossman wrote gdbserver.
437
 
438
Jim Kingdon, Peter Schauer, Ian Taylor, and Stu Grossman made
439
nearly innumerable bug fixes and cleanups throughout @value{GDBN}.
440
 
441
The following people at the Hewlett-Packard Company contributed
442
support for the PA-RISC 2.0 architecture, HP-UX 10.20, 10.30, and 11.0
443
(narrow mode), HP's implementation of kernel threads, HP's aC@t{++}
444
compiler, and the terminal user interface: Ben Krepp, Richard Title,
445
John Bishop, Susan Macchia, Kathy Mann, Satish Pai, India Paul, Steve
446
Rehrauer, and Elena Zannoni.  Kim Haase provided HP-specific
447
information in this manual.
448
 
449
DJ Delorie ported @value{GDBN} to MS-DOS, for the DJGPP project.
450
Robert Hoehne made significant contributions to the DJGPP port.
451
 
452
Cygnus Solutions has sponsored @value{GDBN} maintenance and much of its
453
development since 1991.  Cygnus engineers who have worked on @value{GDBN}
454
fulltime include Mark Alexander, Jim Blandy, Per Bothner, Kevin
455
Buettner, Edith Epstein, Chris Faylor, Fred Fish, Martin Hunt, Jim
456
Ingham, John Gilmore, Stu Grossman, Kung Hsu, Jim Kingdon, John Metzler,
457
Fernando Nasser, Geoffrey Noer, Dawn Perchik, Rich Pixley, Zdenek
458
Radouch, Keith Seitz, Stan Shebs, David Taylor, and Elena Zannoni.  In
459
addition, Dave Brolley, Ian Carmichael, Steve Chamberlain, Nick Clifton,
460
JT Conklin, Stan Cox, DJ Delorie, Ulrich Drepper, Frank Eigler, Doug
461
Evans, Sean Fagan, David Henkel-Wallace, Richard Henderson, Jeff
462
Holcomb, Jeff Law, Jim Lemke, Tom Lord, Bob Manson, Michael Meissner,
463
Jason Merrill, Catherine Moore, Drew Moseley, Ken Raeburn, Gavin
464
Romig-Koch, Rob Savoye, Jamie Smith, Mike Stump, Ian Taylor, Angela
465
Thomas, Michael Tiemann, Tom Tromey, Ron Unrau, Jim Wilson, and David
466
Zuhn have made contributions both large and small.
467
 
468
Jim Blandy added support for preprocessor macros, while working for Red
469
Hat.
470
 
471
@node Sample Session
472
@chapter A Sample @value{GDBN} Session
473
 
474
You can use this manual at your leisure to read all about @value{GDBN}.
475
However, a handful of commands are enough to get started using the
476
debugger.  This chapter illustrates those commands.
477
 
478
@iftex
479
In this sample session, we emphasize user input like this: @b{input},
480
to make it easier to pick out from the surrounding output.
481
@end iftex
482
 
483
@c FIXME: this example may not be appropriate for some configs, where
484
@c FIXME...primary interest is in remote use.
485
 
486
One of the preliminary versions of @sc{gnu} @code{m4} (a generic macro
487
processor) exhibits the following bug: sometimes, when we change its
488
quote strings from the default, the commands used to capture one macro
489
definition within another stop working.  In the following short @code{m4}
490
session, we define a macro @code{foo} which expands to @code{0000}; we
491
then use the @code{m4} built-in @code{defn} to define @code{bar} as the
492
same thing.  However, when we change the open quote string to
493
@code{<QUOTE>} and the close quote string to @code{<UNQUOTE>}, the same
494
procedure fails to define a new synonym @code{baz}:
495
 
496
@smallexample
497
$ @b{cd gnu/m4}
498
$ @b{./m4}
499
@b{define(foo,0000)}
500
 
501
@b{foo}
502
0000
503
@b{define(bar,defn(`foo'))}
504
 
505
@b{bar}
506
0000
507
@b{changequote(<QUOTE>,<UNQUOTE>)}
508
 
509
@b{define(baz,defn(<QUOTE>foo<UNQUOTE>))}
510
@b{baz}
511
@b{C-d}
512
m4: End of input: 0: fatal error: EOF in string
513
@end smallexample
514
 
515
@noindent
516
Let us use @value{GDBN} to try to see what is going on.
517
 
518
@smallexample
519
$ @b{@value{GDBP} m4}
520
@c FIXME: this falsifies the exact text played out, to permit smallbook
521
@c FIXME... format to come out better.
522
@value{GDBN} is free software and you are welcome to distribute copies
523
 of it under certain conditions; type "show copying" to see
524
 the conditions.
525
There is absolutely no warranty for @value{GDBN}; type "show warranty"
526
 for details.
527
 
528
@value{GDBN} @value{GDBVN}, Copyright 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc...
529
(@value{GDBP})
530
@end smallexample
531
 
532
@noindent
533
@value{GDBN} reads only enough symbol data to know where to find the
534
rest when needed; as a result, the first prompt comes up very quickly.
535
We now tell @value{GDBN} to use a narrower display width than usual, so
536
that examples fit in this manual.
537
 
538
@smallexample
539
(@value{GDBP}) @b{set width 70}
540
@end smallexample
541
 
542
@noindent
543
We need to see how the @code{m4} built-in @code{changequote} works.
544
Having looked at the source, we know the relevant subroutine is
545
@code{m4_changequote}, so we set a breakpoint there with the @value{GDBN}
546
@code{break} command.
547
 
548
@smallexample
549
(@value{GDBP}) @b{break m4_changequote}
550
Breakpoint 1 at 0x62f4: file builtin.c, line 879.
551
@end smallexample
552
 
553
@noindent
554
Using the @code{run} command, we start @code{m4} running under @value{GDBN}
555
control; as long as control does not reach the @code{m4_changequote}
556
subroutine, the program runs as usual:
557
 
558
@smallexample
559
(@value{GDBP}) @b{run}
560
Starting program: /work/Editorial/gdb/gnu/m4/m4
561
@b{define(foo,0000)}
562
 
563
@b{foo}
564
0000
565
@end smallexample
566
 
567
@noindent
568
To trigger the breakpoint, we call @code{changequote}.  @value{GDBN}
569
suspends execution of @code{m4}, displaying information about the
570
context where it stops.
571
 
572
@smallexample
573
@b{changequote(<QUOTE>,<UNQUOTE>)}
574
 
575
Breakpoint 1, m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
576
    at builtin.c:879
577
879         if (bad_argc(TOKEN_DATA_TEXT(argv[0]),argc,1,3))
578
@end smallexample
579
 
580
@noindent
581
Now we use the command @code{n} (@code{next}) to advance execution to
582
the next line of the current function.
583
 
584
@smallexample
585
(@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
586
882         set_quotes((argc >= 2) ? TOKEN_DATA_TEXT(argv[1])\
587
 : nil,
588
@end smallexample
589
 
590
@noindent
591
@code{set_quotes} looks like a promising subroutine.  We can go into it
592
by using the command @code{s} (@code{step}) instead of @code{next}.
593
@code{step} goes to the next line to be executed in @emph{any}
594
subroutine, so it steps into @code{set_quotes}.
595
 
596
@smallexample
597
(@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
598
set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<QUOTE>", rq=0x34c88 "<UNQUOTE>")
599
    at input.c:530
600
530         if (lquote != def_lquote)
601
@end smallexample
602
 
603
@noindent
604
The display that shows the subroutine where @code{m4} is now
605
suspended (and its arguments) is called a stack frame display.  It
606
shows a summary of the stack.  We can use the @code{backtrace}
607
command (which can also be spelled @code{bt}), to see where we are
608
in the stack as a whole: the @code{backtrace} command displays a
609
stack frame for each active subroutine.
610
 
611
@smallexample
612
(@value{GDBP}) @b{bt}
613
#0  set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<QUOTE>", rq=0x34c88 "<UNQUOTE>")
614
    at input.c:530
615
#1  0x6344 in m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
616
    at builtin.c:882
617
#2  0x8174 in expand_macro (sym=0x33320) at macro.c:242
618
#3  0x7a88 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=209696, td=0xf7fffa30)
619
    at macro.c:71
620
#4  0x79dc in expand_input () at macro.c:40
621
#5  0x2930 in main (argc=0, argv=0xf7fffb20) at m4.c:195
622
@end smallexample
623
 
624
@noindent
625
We step through a few more lines to see what happens.  The first two
626
times, we can use @samp{s}; the next two times we use @code{n} to avoid
627
falling into the @code{xstrdup} subroutine.
628
 
629
@smallexample
630
(@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
631
0x3b5c  532         if (rquote != def_rquote)
632
(@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
633
0x3b80  535         lquote = (lq == nil || *lq == '\0') ?  \
634
def_lquote : xstrdup(lq);
635
(@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
636
536         rquote = (rq == nil || *rq == '\0') ? def_rquote\
637
 : xstrdup(rq);
638
(@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
639
538         len_lquote = strlen(rquote);
640
@end smallexample
641
 
642
@noindent
643
The last line displayed looks a little odd; we can examine the variables
644
@code{lquote} and @code{rquote} to see if they are in fact the new left
645
and right quotes we specified.  We use the command @code{p}
646
(@code{print}) to see their values.
647
 
648
@smallexample
649
(@value{GDBP}) @b{p lquote}
650
$1 = 0x35d40 "<QUOTE>"
651
(@value{GDBP}) @b{p rquote}
652
$2 = 0x35d50 "<UNQUOTE>"
653
@end smallexample
654
 
655
@noindent
656
@code{lquote} and @code{rquote} are indeed the new left and right quotes.
657
To look at some context, we can display ten lines of source
658
surrounding the current line with the @code{l} (@code{list}) command.
659
 
660
@smallexample
661
(@value{GDBP}) @b{l}
662
533             xfree(rquote);
663
534
664
535         lquote = (lq == nil || *lq == '\0') ? def_lquote\
665
 : xstrdup (lq);
666
536         rquote = (rq == nil || *rq == '\0') ? def_rquote\
667
 : xstrdup (rq);
668
537
669
538         len_lquote = strlen(rquote);
670
539         len_rquote = strlen(lquote);
671
540     @}
672
541
673
542     void
674
@end smallexample
675
 
676
@noindent
677
Let us step past the two lines that set @code{len_lquote} and
678
@code{len_rquote}, and then examine the values of those variables.
679
 
680
@smallexample
681
(@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
682
539         len_rquote = strlen(lquote);
683
(@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
684
540     @}
685
(@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_lquote}
686
$3 = 9
687
(@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_rquote}
688
$4 = 7
689
@end smallexample
690
 
691
@noindent
692
That certainly looks wrong, assuming @code{len_lquote} and
693
@code{len_rquote} are meant to be the lengths of @code{lquote} and
694
@code{rquote} respectively.  We can set them to better values using
695
the @code{p} command, since it can print the value of
696
any expression---and that expression can include subroutine calls and
697
assignments.
698
 
699
@smallexample
700
(@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_lquote=strlen(lquote)}
701
$5 = 7
702
(@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_rquote=strlen(rquote)}
703
$6 = 9
704
@end smallexample
705
 
706
@noindent
707
Is that enough to fix the problem of using the new quotes with the
708
@code{m4} built-in @code{defn}?  We can allow @code{m4} to continue
709
executing with the @code{c} (@code{continue}) command, and then try the
710
example that caused trouble initially:
711
 
712
@smallexample
713
(@value{GDBP}) @b{c}
714
Continuing.
715
 
716
@b{define(baz,defn(<QUOTE>foo<UNQUOTE>))}
717
 
718
baz
719
0000
720
@end smallexample
721
 
722
@noindent
723
Success!  The new quotes now work just as well as the default ones.  The
724
problem seems to have been just the two typos defining the wrong
725
lengths.  We allow @code{m4} exit by giving it an EOF as input:
726
 
727
@smallexample
728
@b{C-d}
729
Program exited normally.
730
@end smallexample
731
 
732
@noindent
733
The message @samp{Program exited normally.} is from @value{GDBN}; it
734
indicates @code{m4} has finished executing.  We can end our @value{GDBN}
735
session with the @value{GDBN} @code{quit} command.
736
 
737
@smallexample
738
(@value{GDBP}) @b{quit}
739
@end smallexample
740
 
741
@node Invocation
742
@chapter Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}
743
 
744
This chapter discusses how to start @value{GDBN}, and how to get out of it.
745
The essentials are:
746
@itemize @bullet
747
@item
748
type @samp{@value{GDBP}} to start @value{GDBN}.
749
@item
750
type @kbd{quit} or @kbd{C-d} to exit.
751
@end itemize
752
 
753
@menu
754
* Invoking GDB::                How to start @value{GDBN}
755
* Quitting GDB::                How to quit @value{GDBN}
756
* Shell Commands::              How to use shell commands inside @value{GDBN}
757
@end menu
758
 
759
@node Invoking GDB
760
@section Invoking @value{GDBN}
761
 
762
Invoke @value{GDBN} by running the program @code{@value{GDBP}}.  Once started,
763
@value{GDBN} reads commands from the terminal until you tell it to exit.
764
 
765
You can also run @code{@value{GDBP}} with a variety of arguments and options,
766
to specify more of your debugging environment at the outset.
767
 
768
The command-line options described here are designed
769
to cover a variety of situations; in some environments, some of these
770
options may effectively be unavailable.
771
 
772
The most usual way to start @value{GDBN} is with one argument,
773
specifying an executable program:
774
 
775
@smallexample
776
@value{GDBP} @var{program}
777
@end smallexample
778
 
779
@noindent
780
You can also start with both an executable program and a core file
781
specified:
782
 
783
@smallexample
784
@value{GDBP} @var{program} @var{core}
785
@end smallexample
786
 
787
You can, instead, specify a process ID as a second argument, if you want
788
to debug a running process:
789
 
790
@smallexample
791
@value{GDBP} @var{program} 1234
792
@end smallexample
793
 
794
@noindent
795
would attach @value{GDBN} to process @code{1234} (unless you also have a file
796
named @file{1234}; @value{GDBN} does check for a core file first).
797
 
798
Taking advantage of the second command-line argument requires a fairly
799
complete operating system; when you use @value{GDBN} as a remote
800
debugger attached to a bare board, there may not be any notion of
801
``process'', and there is often no way to get a core dump.  @value{GDBN}
802
will warn you if it is unable to attach or to read core dumps.
803
 
804
You can optionally have @code{@value{GDBP}} pass any arguments after the
805
executable file to the inferior using @code{--args}.  This option stops
806
option processing.
807
@smallexample
808
gdb --args gcc -O2 -c foo.c
809
@end smallexample
810
This will cause @code{@value{GDBP}} to debug @code{gcc}, and to set
811
@code{gcc}'s command-line arguments (@pxref{Arguments}) to @samp{-O2 -c foo.c}.
812
 
813
You can run @code{@value{GDBP}} without printing the front material, which describes
814
@value{GDBN}'s non-warranty, by specifying @code{-silent}:
815
 
816
@smallexample
817
@value{GDBP} -silent
818
@end smallexample
819
 
820
@noindent
821
You can further control how @value{GDBN} starts up by using command-line
822
options.  @value{GDBN} itself can remind you of the options available.
823
 
824
@noindent
825
Type
826
 
827
@smallexample
828
@value{GDBP} -help
829
@end smallexample
830
 
831
@noindent
832
to display all available options and briefly describe their use
833
(@samp{@value{GDBP} -h} is a shorter equivalent).
834
 
835
All options and command line arguments you give are processed
836
in sequential order.  The order makes a difference when the
837
@samp{-x} option is used.
838
 
839
 
840
@menu
841
* File Options::                Choosing files
842
* Mode Options::                Choosing modes
843
@end menu
844
 
845
@node File Options
846
@subsection Choosing files
847
 
848
When @value{GDBN} starts, it reads any arguments other than options as
849
specifying an executable file and core file (or process ID).  This is
850
the same as if the arguments were specified by the @samp{-se} and
851
@samp{-c} (or @samp{-p} options respectively.  (@value{GDBN} reads the
852
first argument that does not have an associated option flag as
853
equivalent to the @samp{-se} option followed by that argument; and the
854
second argument that does not have an associated option flag, if any, as
855
equivalent to the @samp{-c}/@samp{-p} option followed by that argument.)
856
If the second argument begins with a decimal digit, @value{GDBN} will
857
first attempt to attach to it as a process, and if that fails, attempt
858
to open it as a corefile.  If you have a corefile whose name begins with
859
a digit, you can prevent @value{GDBN} from treating it as a pid by
860
prefixing it with @file{./}, eg. @file{./12345}.
861
 
862
If @value{GDBN} has not been configured to included core file support,
863
such as for most embedded targets, then it will complain about a second
864
argument and ignore it.
865
 
866
Many options have both long and short forms; both are shown in the
867
following list.  @value{GDBN} also recognizes the long forms if you truncate
868
them, so long as enough of the option is present to be unambiguous.
869
(If you prefer, you can flag option arguments with @samp{--} rather
870
than @samp{-}, though we illustrate the more usual convention.)
871
 
872
@c NOTE: the @cindex entries here use double dashes ON PURPOSE.  This
873
@c way, both those who look for -foo and --foo in the index, will find
874
@c it.
875
 
876
@table @code
877
@item -symbols @var{file}
878
@itemx -s @var{file}
879
@cindex @code{--symbols}
880
@cindex @code{-s}
881
Read symbol table from file @var{file}.
882
 
883
@item -exec @var{file}
884
@itemx -e @var{file}
885
@cindex @code{--exec}
886
@cindex @code{-e}
887
Use file @var{file} as the executable file to execute when appropriate,
888
and for examining pure data in conjunction with a core dump.
889
 
890
@item -se @var{file}
891
@cindex @code{--se}
892
Read symbol table from file @var{file} and use it as the executable
893
file.
894
 
895
@item -core @var{file}
896
@itemx -c @var{file}
897
@cindex @code{--core}
898
@cindex @code{-c}
899
Use file @var{file} as a core dump to examine.
900
 
901
@item -c @var{number}
902
@item -pid @var{number}
903
@itemx -p @var{number}
904
@cindex @code{--pid}
905
@cindex @code{-p}
906
Connect to process ID @var{number}, as with the @code{attach} command.
907
If there is no such process, @value{GDBN} will attempt to open a core
908
file named @var{number}.
909
 
910
@item -command @var{file}
911
@itemx -x @var{file}
912
@cindex @code{--command}
913
@cindex @code{-x}
914
Execute @value{GDBN} commands from file @var{file}.  @xref{Command
915
Files,, Command files}.
916
 
917
@item -directory @var{directory}
918
@itemx -d @var{directory}
919
@cindex @code{--directory}
920
@cindex @code{-d}
921
Add @var{directory} to the path to search for source files.
922
 
923
@item -m
924
@itemx -mapped
925
@cindex @code{--mapped}
926
@cindex @code{-m}
927
@emph{Warning: this option depends on operating system facilities that are not
928
supported on all systems.}@*
929
If memory-mapped files are available on your system through the @code{mmap}
930
system call, you can use this option
931
to have @value{GDBN} write the symbols from your
932
program into a reusable file in the current directory.  If the program you are debugging is
933
called @file{/tmp/fred}, the mapped symbol file is @file{/tmp/fred.syms}.
934
Future @value{GDBN} debugging sessions notice the presence of this file,
935
and can quickly map in symbol information from it, rather than reading
936
the symbol table from the executable program.
937
 
938
The @file{.syms} file is specific to the host machine where @value{GDBN}
939
is run.  It holds an exact image of the internal @value{GDBN} symbol
940
table.  It cannot be shared across multiple host platforms.
941
 
942
@item -r
943
@itemx -readnow
944
@cindex @code{--readnow}
945
@cindex @code{-r}
946
Read each symbol file's entire symbol table immediately, rather than
947
the default, which is to read it incrementally as it is needed.
948
This makes startup slower, but makes future operations faster.
949
 
950
@end table
951
 
952
You typically combine the @code{-mapped} and @code{-readnow} options in
953
order to build a @file{.syms} file that contains complete symbol
954
information.  (@xref{Files,,Commands to specify files}, for information
955
on @file{.syms} files.)  A simple @value{GDBN} invocation to do nothing
956
but build a @file{.syms} file for future use is:
957
 
958
@smallexample
959
gdb -batch -nx -mapped -readnow programname
960
@end smallexample
961
 
962
@node Mode Options
963
@subsection Choosing modes
964
 
965
You can run @value{GDBN} in various alternative modes---for example, in
966
batch mode or quiet mode.
967
 
968
@table @code
969
@item -nx
970
@itemx -n
971
@cindex @code{--nx}
972
@cindex @code{-n}
973
Do not execute commands found in any initialization files.  Normally,
974
@value{GDBN} executes the commands in these files after all the command
975
options and arguments have been processed.  @xref{Command Files,,Command
976
files}.
977
 
978
@item -quiet
979
@itemx -silent
980
@itemx -q
981
@cindex @code{--quiet}
982
@cindex @code{--silent}
983
@cindex @code{-q}
984
``Quiet''.  Do not print the introductory and copyright messages.  These
985
messages are also suppressed in batch mode.
986
 
987
@item -batch
988
@cindex @code{--batch}
989
Run in batch mode.  Exit with status @code{0} after processing all the
990
command files specified with @samp{-x} (and all commands from
991
initialization files, if not inhibited with @samp{-n}).  Exit with
992
nonzero status if an error occurs in executing the @value{GDBN} commands
993
in the command files.
994
 
995
Batch mode may be useful for running @value{GDBN} as a filter, for
996
example to download and run a program on another computer; in order to
997
make this more useful, the message
998
 
999
@smallexample
1000
Program exited normally.
1001
@end smallexample
1002
 
1003
@noindent
1004
(which is ordinarily issued whenever a program running under
1005
@value{GDBN} control terminates) is not issued when running in batch
1006
mode.
1007
 
1008
@item -nowindows
1009
@itemx -nw
1010
@cindex @code{--nowindows}
1011
@cindex @code{-nw}
1012
``No windows''.  If @value{GDBN} comes with a graphical user interface
1013
(GUI) built in, then this option tells @value{GDBN} to only use the command-line
1014
interface.  If no GUI is available, this option has no effect.
1015
 
1016
@item -windows
1017
@itemx -w
1018
@cindex @code{--windows}
1019
@cindex @code{-w}
1020
If @value{GDBN} includes a GUI, then this option requires it to be
1021
used if possible.
1022
 
1023
@item -cd @var{directory}
1024
@cindex @code{--cd}
1025
Run @value{GDBN} using @var{directory} as its working directory,
1026
instead of the current directory.
1027
 
1028
@item -fullname
1029
@itemx -f
1030
@cindex @code{--fullname}
1031
@cindex @code{-f}
1032
@sc{gnu} Emacs sets this option when it runs @value{GDBN} as a
1033
subprocess.  It tells @value{GDBN} to output the full file name and line
1034
number in a standard, recognizable fashion each time a stack frame is
1035
displayed (which includes each time your program stops).  This
1036
recognizable format looks like two @samp{\032} characters, followed by
1037
the file name, line number and character position separated by colons,
1038
and a newline.  The Emacs-to-@value{GDBN} interface program uses the two
1039
@samp{\032} characters as a signal to display the source code for the
1040
frame.
1041
 
1042
@item -epoch
1043
@cindex @code{--epoch}
1044
The Epoch Emacs-@value{GDBN} interface sets this option when it runs
1045
@value{GDBN} as a subprocess.  It tells @value{GDBN} to modify its print
1046
routines so as to allow Epoch to display values of expressions in a
1047
separate window.
1048
 
1049
@item -annotate @var{level}
1050
@cindex @code{--annotate}
1051
This option sets the @dfn{annotation level} inside @value{GDBN}.  Its
1052
effect is identical to using @samp{set annotate @var{level}}
1053
(@pxref{Annotations}).
1054
Annotation level controls how much information does @value{GDBN} print
1055
together with its prompt, values of expressions, source lines, and other
1056
types of output.  Level 0 is the normal, level 1 is for use when
1057
@value{GDBN} is run as a subprocess of @sc{gnu} Emacs, level 2 is the
1058
maximum annotation suitable for programs that control @value{GDBN}.
1059
 
1060
@item -async
1061
@cindex @code{--async}
1062
Use the asynchronous event loop for the command-line interface.
1063
@value{GDBN} processes all events, such as user keyboard input, via a
1064
special event loop.  This allows @value{GDBN} to accept and process user
1065
commands in parallel with the debugged process being
1066
run@footnote{@value{GDBN} built with @sc{djgpp} tools for
1067
MS-DOS/MS-Windows supports this mode of operation, but the event loop is
1068
suspended when the debuggee runs.}, so you don't need to wait for
1069
control to return to @value{GDBN} before you type the next command.
1070
(@emph{Note:} as of version 5.1, the target side of the asynchronous
1071
operation is not yet in place, so @samp{-async} does not work fully
1072
yet.)
1073
@c FIXME: when the target side of the event loop is done, the above NOTE
1074
@c should be removed.
1075
 
1076
When the standard input is connected to a terminal device, @value{GDBN}
1077
uses the asynchronous event loop by default, unless disabled by the
1078
@samp{-noasync} option.
1079
 
1080
@item -noasync
1081
@cindex @code{--noasync}
1082
Disable the asynchronous event loop for the command-line interface.
1083
 
1084
@item --args
1085
@cindex @code{--args}
1086
Change interpretation of command line so that arguments following the
1087
executable file are passed as command line arguments to the inferior.
1088
This option stops option processing.
1089
 
1090
@item -baud @var{bps}
1091
@itemx -b @var{bps}
1092
@cindex @code{--baud}
1093
@cindex @code{-b}
1094
Set the line speed (baud rate or bits per second) of any serial
1095
interface used by @value{GDBN} for remote debugging.
1096
 
1097
@item -tty @var{device}
1098
@itemx -t @var{device}
1099
@cindex @code{--tty}
1100
@cindex @code{-t}
1101
Run using @var{device} for your program's standard input and output.
1102
@c FIXME: kingdon thinks there is more to -tty.  Investigate.
1103
 
1104
@c resolve the situation of these eventually
1105
@item -tui
1106
@cindex @code{--tui}
1107
Activate the Terminal User Interface when starting.
1108
The Terminal User Interface manages several text windows on the terminal,
1109
showing source, assembly, registers and @value{GDBN} command outputs
1110
(@pxref{TUI, ,@value{GDBN} Text User Interface}).
1111
Do not use this option if you run @value{GDBN} from Emacs
1112
(@pxref{Emacs, ,Using @value{GDBN} under @sc{gnu} Emacs}).
1113
 
1114
@c @item -xdb
1115
@c @cindex @code{--xdb}
1116
@c Run in XDB compatibility mode, allowing the use of certain XDB commands.
1117
@c For information, see the file @file{xdb_trans.html}, which is usually
1118
@c installed in the directory @code{/opt/langtools/wdb/doc} on HP-UX
1119
@c systems.
1120
 
1121
@item -interpreter @var{interp}
1122
@cindex @code{--interpreter}
1123
Use the interpreter @var{interp} for interface with the controlling
1124
program or device.  This option is meant to be set by programs which
1125
communicate with @value{GDBN} using it as a back end.
1126
 
1127
@samp{--interpreter=mi} (or @samp{--interpreter=mi1}) causes
1128
@value{GDBN} to use the @dfn{gdb/mi interface} (@pxref{GDB/MI, , The
1129
@sc{gdb/mi} Interface}). The older @sc{gdb/mi} interface, included in
1130
@value{GDBN} version 5.0 can be selected with @samp{--interpreter=mi0}.
1131
 
1132
@item -write
1133
@cindex @code{--write}
1134
Open the executable and core files for both reading and writing.  This
1135
is equivalent to the @samp{set write on} command inside @value{GDBN}
1136
(@pxref{Patching}).
1137
 
1138
@item -statistics
1139
@cindex @code{--statistics}
1140
This option causes @value{GDBN} to print statistics about time and
1141
memory usage after it completes each command and returns to the prompt.
1142
 
1143
@item -version
1144
@cindex @code{--version}
1145
This option causes @value{GDBN} to print its version number and
1146
no-warranty blurb, and exit.
1147
 
1148
@end table
1149
 
1150
@node Quitting GDB
1151
@section Quitting @value{GDBN}
1152
@cindex exiting @value{GDBN}
1153
@cindex leaving @value{GDBN}
1154
 
1155
@table @code
1156
@kindex quit @r{[}@var{expression}@r{]}
1157
@kindex q @r{(@code{quit})}
1158
@item quit @r{[}@var{expression}@r{]}
1159
@itemx q
1160
To exit @value{GDBN}, use the @code{quit} command (abbreviated
1161
@code{q}), or type an end-of-file character (usually @kbd{C-d}).  If you
1162
do not supply @var{expression}, @value{GDBN} will terminate normally;
1163
otherwise it will terminate using the result of @var{expression} as the
1164
error code.
1165
@end table
1166
 
1167
@cindex interrupt
1168
An interrupt (often @kbd{C-c}) does not exit from @value{GDBN}, but rather
1169
terminates the action of any @value{GDBN} command that is in progress and
1170
returns to @value{GDBN} command level.  It is safe to type the interrupt
1171
character at any time because @value{GDBN} does not allow it to take effect
1172
until a time when it is safe.
1173
 
1174
If you have been using @value{GDBN} to control an attached process or
1175
device, you can release it with the @code{detach} command
1176
(@pxref{Attach, ,Debugging an already-running process}).
1177
 
1178
@node Shell Commands
1179
@section Shell commands
1180
 
1181
If you need to execute occasional shell commands during your
1182
debugging session, there is no need to leave or suspend @value{GDBN}; you can
1183
just use the @code{shell} command.
1184
 
1185
@table @code
1186
@kindex shell
1187
@cindex shell escape
1188
@item shell @var{command string}
1189
Invoke a standard shell to execute @var{command string}.
1190
If it exists, the environment variable @code{SHELL} determines which
1191
shell to run.  Otherwise @value{GDBN} uses the default shell
1192
(@file{/bin/sh} on Unix systems, @file{COMMAND.COM} on MS-DOS, etc.).
1193
@end table
1194
 
1195
The utility @code{make} is often needed in development environments.
1196
You do not have to use the @code{shell} command for this purpose in
1197
@value{GDBN}:
1198
 
1199
@table @code
1200
@kindex make
1201
@cindex calling make
1202
@item make @var{make-args}
1203
Execute the @code{make} program with the specified
1204
arguments.  This is equivalent to @samp{shell make @var{make-args}}.
1205
@end table
1206
 
1207
@node Commands
1208
@chapter @value{GDBN} Commands
1209
 
1210
You can abbreviate a @value{GDBN} command to the first few letters of the command
1211
name, if that abbreviation is unambiguous; and you can repeat certain
1212
@value{GDBN} commands by typing just @key{RET}.  You can also use the @key{TAB}
1213
key to get @value{GDBN} to fill out the rest of a word in a command (or to
1214
show you the alternatives available, if there is more than one possibility).
1215
 
1216
@menu
1217
* Command Syntax::              How to give commands to @value{GDBN}
1218
* Completion::                  Command completion
1219
* Help::                        How to ask @value{GDBN} for help
1220
@end menu
1221
 
1222
@node Command Syntax
1223
@section Command syntax
1224
 
1225
A @value{GDBN} command is a single line of input.  There is no limit on
1226
how long it can be.  It starts with a command name, which is followed by
1227
arguments whose meaning depends on the command name.  For example, the
1228
command @code{step} accepts an argument which is the number of times to
1229
step, as in @samp{step 5}.  You can also use the @code{step} command
1230
with no arguments.  Some commands do not allow any arguments.
1231
 
1232
@cindex abbreviation
1233
@value{GDBN} command names may always be truncated if that abbreviation is
1234
unambiguous.  Other possible command abbreviations are listed in the
1235
documentation for individual commands.  In some cases, even ambiguous
1236
abbreviations are allowed; for example, @code{s} is specially defined as
1237
equivalent to @code{step} even though there are other commands whose
1238
names start with @code{s}.  You can test abbreviations by using them as
1239
arguments to the @code{help} command.
1240
 
1241
@cindex repeating commands
1242
@kindex RET @r{(repeat last command)}
1243
A blank line as input to @value{GDBN} (typing just @key{RET}) means to
1244
repeat the previous command.  Certain commands (for example, @code{run})
1245
will not repeat this way; these are commands whose unintentional
1246
repetition might cause trouble and which you are unlikely to want to
1247
repeat.
1248
 
1249
The @code{list} and @code{x} commands, when you repeat them with
1250
@key{RET}, construct new arguments rather than repeating
1251
exactly as typed.  This permits easy scanning of source or memory.
1252
 
1253
@value{GDBN} can also use @key{RET} in another way: to partition lengthy
1254
output, in a way similar to the common utility @code{more}
1255
(@pxref{Screen Size,,Screen size}).  Since it is easy to press one
1256
@key{RET} too many in this situation, @value{GDBN} disables command
1257
repetition after any command that generates this sort of display.
1258
 
1259
@kindex # @r{(a comment)}
1260
@cindex comment
1261
Any text from a @kbd{#} to the end of the line is a comment; it does
1262
nothing.  This is useful mainly in command files (@pxref{Command
1263
Files,,Command files}).
1264
 
1265
@cindex repeating command sequences
1266
@kindex C-o @r{(operate-and-get-next)}
1267
The @kbd{C-o} binding is useful for repeating a complex sequence of
1268
commands.  This command accepts the current line, like @kbd{RET}, and
1269
then fetches the next line relative to the current line from the history
1270
for editing.
1271
 
1272
@node Completion
1273
@section Command completion
1274
 
1275
@cindex completion
1276
@cindex word completion
1277
@value{GDBN} can fill in the rest of a word in a command for you, if there is
1278
only one possibility; it can also show you what the valid possibilities
1279
are for the next word in a command, at any time.  This works for @value{GDBN}
1280
commands, @value{GDBN} subcommands, and the names of symbols in your program.
1281
 
1282
Press the @key{TAB} key whenever you want @value{GDBN} to fill out the rest
1283
of a word.  If there is only one possibility, @value{GDBN} fills in the
1284
word, and waits for you to finish the command (or press @key{RET} to
1285
enter it).  For example, if you type
1286
 
1287
@c FIXME "@key" does not distinguish its argument sufficiently to permit
1288
@c complete accuracy in these examples; space introduced for clarity.
1289
@c If texinfo enhancements make it unnecessary, it would be nice to
1290
@c replace " @key" by "@key" in the following...
1291
@smallexample
1292
(@value{GDBP}) info bre @key{TAB}
1293
@end smallexample
1294
 
1295
@noindent
1296
@value{GDBN} fills in the rest of the word @samp{breakpoints}, since that is
1297
the only @code{info} subcommand beginning with @samp{bre}:
1298
 
1299
@smallexample
1300
(@value{GDBP}) info breakpoints
1301
@end smallexample
1302
 
1303
@noindent
1304
You can either press @key{RET} at this point, to run the @code{info
1305
breakpoints} command, or backspace and enter something else, if
1306
@samp{breakpoints} does not look like the command you expected.  (If you
1307
were sure you wanted @code{info breakpoints} in the first place, you
1308
might as well just type @key{RET} immediately after @samp{info bre},
1309
to exploit command abbreviations rather than command completion).
1310
 
1311
If there is more than one possibility for the next word when you press
1312
@key{TAB}, @value{GDBN} sounds a bell.  You can either supply more
1313
characters and try again, or just press @key{TAB} a second time;
1314
@value{GDBN} displays all the possible completions for that word.  For
1315
example, you might want to set a breakpoint on a subroutine whose name
1316
begins with @samp{make_}, but when you type @kbd{b make_@key{TAB}} @value{GDBN}
1317
just sounds the bell.  Typing @key{TAB} again displays all the
1318
function names in your program that begin with those characters, for
1319
example:
1320
 
1321
@smallexample
1322
(@value{GDBP}) b make_ @key{TAB}
1323
@exdent @value{GDBN} sounds bell; press @key{TAB} again, to see:
1324
make_a_section_from_file     make_environ
1325
make_abs_section             make_function_type
1326
make_blockvector             make_pointer_type
1327
make_cleanup                 make_reference_type
1328
make_command                 make_symbol_completion_list
1329
(@value{GDBP}) b make_
1330
@end smallexample
1331
 
1332
@noindent
1333
After displaying the available possibilities, @value{GDBN} copies your
1334
partial input (@samp{b make_} in the example) so you can finish the
1335
command.
1336
 
1337
If you just want to see the list of alternatives in the first place, you
1338
can press @kbd{M-?} rather than pressing @key{TAB} twice.  @kbd{M-?}
1339
means @kbd{@key{META} ?}.  You can type this either by holding down a
1340
key designated as the @key{META} shift on your keyboard (if there is
1341
one) while typing @kbd{?}, or as @key{ESC} followed by @kbd{?}.
1342
 
1343
@cindex quotes in commands
1344
@cindex completion of quoted strings
1345
Sometimes the string you need, while logically a ``word'', may contain
1346
parentheses or other characters that @value{GDBN} normally excludes from
1347
its notion of a word.  To permit word completion to work in this
1348
situation, you may enclose words in @code{'} (single quote marks) in
1349
@value{GDBN} commands.
1350
 
1351
The most likely situation where you might need this is in typing the
1352
name of a C@t{++} function.  This is because C@t{++} allows function
1353
overloading (multiple definitions of the same function, distinguished
1354
by argument type).  For example, when you want to set a breakpoint you
1355
may need to distinguish whether you mean the version of @code{name}
1356
that takes an @code{int} parameter, @code{name(int)}, or the version
1357
that takes a @code{float} parameter, @code{name(float)}.  To use the
1358
word-completion facilities in this situation, type a single quote
1359
@code{'} at the beginning of the function name.  This alerts
1360
@value{GDBN} that it may need to consider more information than usual
1361
when you press @key{TAB} or @kbd{M-?} to request word completion:
1362
 
1363
@smallexample
1364
(@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble( @kbd{M-?}
1365
bubble(double,double)    bubble(int,int)
1366
(@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble(
1367
@end smallexample
1368
 
1369
In some cases, @value{GDBN} can tell that completing a name requires using
1370
quotes.  When this happens, @value{GDBN} inserts the quote for you (while
1371
completing as much as it can) if you do not type the quote in the first
1372
place:
1373
 
1374
@smallexample
1375
(@value{GDBP}) b bub @key{TAB}
1376
@exdent @value{GDBN} alters your input line to the following, and rings a bell:
1377
(@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble(
1378
@end smallexample
1379
 
1380
@noindent
1381
In general, @value{GDBN} can tell that a quote is needed (and inserts it) if
1382
you have not yet started typing the argument list when you ask for
1383
completion on an overloaded symbol.
1384
 
1385
For more information about overloaded functions, see @ref{C plus plus
1386
expressions, ,C@t{++} expressions}.  You can use the command @code{set
1387
overload-resolution off} to disable overload resolution;
1388
see @ref{Debugging C plus plus, ,@value{GDBN} features for C@t{++}}.
1389
 
1390
 
1391
@node Help
1392
@section Getting help
1393
@cindex online documentation
1394
@kindex help
1395
 
1396
You can always ask @value{GDBN} itself for information on its commands,
1397
using the command @code{help}.
1398
 
1399
@table @code
1400
@kindex h @r{(@code{help})}
1401
@item help
1402
@itemx h
1403
You can use @code{help} (abbreviated @code{h}) with no arguments to
1404
display a short list of named classes of commands:
1405
 
1406
@smallexample
1407
(@value{GDBP}) help
1408
List of classes of commands:
1409
 
1410
aliases -- Aliases of other commands
1411
breakpoints -- Making program stop at certain points
1412
data -- Examining data
1413
files -- Specifying and examining files
1414
internals -- Maintenance commands
1415
obscure -- Obscure features
1416
running -- Running the program
1417
stack -- Examining the stack
1418
status -- Status inquiries
1419
support -- Support facilities
1420
tracepoints -- Tracing of program execution without@*
1421
               stopping the program
1422
user-defined -- User-defined commands
1423
 
1424
Type "help" followed by a class name for a list of
1425
commands in that class.
1426
Type "help" followed by command name for full
1427
documentation.
1428
Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
1429
(@value{GDBP})
1430
@end smallexample
1431
@c the above line break eliminates huge line overfull...
1432
 
1433
@item help @var{class}
1434
Using one of the general help classes as an argument, you can get a
1435
list of the individual commands in that class.  For example, here is the
1436
help display for the class @code{status}:
1437
 
1438
@smallexample
1439
(@value{GDBP}) help status
1440
Status inquiries.
1441
 
1442
List of commands:
1443
 
1444
@c Line break in "show" line falsifies real output, but needed
1445
@c to fit in smallbook page size.
1446
info -- Generic command for showing things
1447
 about the program being debugged
1448
show -- Generic command for showing things
1449
 about the debugger
1450
 
1451
Type "help" followed by command name for full
1452
documentation.
1453
Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
1454
(@value{GDBP})
1455
@end smallexample
1456
 
1457
@item help @var{command}
1458
With a command name as @code{help} argument, @value{GDBN} displays a
1459
short paragraph on how to use that command.
1460
 
1461
@kindex apropos
1462
@item apropos @var{args}
1463
The @code{apropos @var{args}} command searches through all of the @value{GDBN}
1464
commands, and their documentation, for the regular expression specified in
1465
@var{args}. It prints out all matches found. For example:
1466
 
1467
@smallexample
1468
apropos reload
1469
@end smallexample
1470
 
1471
@noindent
1472
results in:
1473
 
1474
@smallexample
1475
@c @group
1476
set symbol-reloading -- Set dynamic symbol table reloading
1477
                                 multiple times in one run
1478
show symbol-reloading -- Show dynamic symbol table reloading
1479
                                 multiple times in one run
1480
@c @end group
1481
@end smallexample
1482
 
1483
@kindex complete
1484
@item complete @var{args}
1485
The @code{complete @var{args}} command lists all the possible completions
1486
for the beginning of a command.  Use @var{args} to specify the beginning of the
1487
command you want completed.  For example:
1488
 
1489
@smallexample
1490
complete i
1491
@end smallexample
1492
 
1493
@noindent results in:
1494
 
1495
@smallexample
1496
@group
1497
if
1498
ignore
1499
info
1500
inspect
1501
@end group
1502
@end smallexample
1503
 
1504
@noindent This is intended for use by @sc{gnu} Emacs.
1505
@end table
1506
 
1507
In addition to @code{help}, you can use the @value{GDBN} commands @code{info}
1508
and @code{show} to inquire about the state of your program, or the state
1509
of @value{GDBN} itself.  Each command supports many topics of inquiry; this
1510
manual introduces each of them in the appropriate context.  The listings
1511
under @code{info} and under @code{show} in the Index point to
1512
all the sub-commands.  @xref{Index}.
1513
 
1514
@c @group
1515
@table @code
1516
@kindex info
1517
@kindex i @r{(@code{info})}
1518
@item info
1519
This command (abbreviated @code{i}) is for describing the state of your
1520
program.  For example, you can list the arguments given to your program
1521
with @code{info args}, list the registers currently in use with @code{info
1522
registers}, or list the breakpoints you have set with @code{info breakpoints}.
1523
You can get a complete list of the @code{info} sub-commands with
1524
@w{@code{help info}}.
1525
 
1526
@kindex set
1527
@item set
1528
You can assign the result of an expression to an environment variable with
1529
@code{set}.  For example, you can set the @value{GDBN} prompt to a $-sign with
1530
@code{set prompt $}.
1531
 
1532
@kindex show
1533
@item show
1534
In contrast to @code{info}, @code{show} is for describing the state of
1535
@value{GDBN} itself.
1536
You can change most of the things you can @code{show}, by using the
1537
related command @code{set}; for example, you can control what number
1538
system is used for displays with @code{set radix}, or simply inquire
1539
which is currently in use with @code{show radix}.
1540
 
1541
@kindex info set
1542
To display all the settable parameters and their current
1543
values, you can use @code{show} with no arguments; you may also use
1544
@code{info set}.  Both commands produce the same display.
1545
@c FIXME: "info set" violates the rule that "info" is for state of
1546
@c FIXME...program.  Ck w/ GNU: "info set" to be called something else,
1547
@c FIXME...or change desc of rule---eg "state of prog and debugging session"?
1548
@end table
1549
@c @end group
1550
 
1551
Here are three miscellaneous @code{show} subcommands, all of which are
1552
exceptional in lacking corresponding @code{set} commands:
1553
 
1554
@table @code
1555
@kindex show version
1556
@cindex version number
1557
@item show version
1558
Show what version of @value{GDBN} is running.  You should include this
1559
information in @value{GDBN} bug-reports.  If multiple versions of
1560
@value{GDBN} are in use at your site, you may need to determine which
1561
version of @value{GDBN} you are running; as @value{GDBN} evolves, new
1562
commands are introduced, and old ones may wither away.  Also, many
1563
system vendors ship variant versions of @value{GDBN}, and there are
1564
variant versions of @value{GDBN} in @sc{gnu}/Linux distributions as well.
1565
The version number is the same as the one announced when you start
1566
@value{GDBN}.
1567
 
1568
@kindex show copying
1569
@item show copying
1570
Display information about permission for copying @value{GDBN}.
1571
 
1572
@kindex show warranty
1573
@item show warranty
1574
Display the @sc{gnu} ``NO WARRANTY'' statement, or a warranty,
1575
if your version of @value{GDBN} comes with one.
1576
 
1577
@end table
1578
 
1579
@node Running
1580
@chapter Running Programs Under @value{GDBN}
1581
 
1582
When you run a program under @value{GDBN}, you must first generate
1583
debugging information when you compile it.
1584
 
1585
You may start @value{GDBN} with its arguments, if any, in an environment
1586
of your choice.  If you are doing native debugging, you may redirect
1587
your program's input and output, debug an already running process, or
1588
kill a child process.
1589
 
1590
@menu
1591
* Compilation::                 Compiling for debugging
1592
* Starting::                    Starting your program
1593
* Arguments::                   Your program's arguments
1594
* Environment::                 Your program's environment
1595
 
1596
* Working Directory::           Your program's working directory
1597
* Input/Output::                Your program's input and output
1598
* Attach::                      Debugging an already-running process
1599
* Kill Process::                Killing the child process
1600
 
1601
* Threads::                     Debugging programs with multiple threads
1602
* Processes::                   Debugging programs with multiple processes
1603
@end menu
1604
 
1605
@node Compilation
1606
@section Compiling for debugging
1607
 
1608
In order to debug a program effectively, you need to generate
1609
debugging information when you compile it.  This debugging information
1610
is stored in the object file; it describes the data type of each
1611
variable or function and the correspondence between source line numbers
1612
and addresses in the executable code.
1613
 
1614
To request debugging information, specify the @samp{-g} option when you run
1615
the compiler.
1616
 
1617
Most compilers do not include information about preprocessor macros in
1618
the debugging information if you specify the @option{-g} flag alone,
1619
because this information is rather large.  Version 3.1 of @value{NGCC},
1620
the @sc{gnu} C compiler, provides macro information if you specify the
1621
options @option{-gdwarf-2} and @option{-g3}; the former option requests
1622
debugging information in the Dwarf 2 format, and the latter requests
1623
``extra information''.  In the future, we hope to find more compact ways
1624
to represent macro information, so that it can be included with
1625
@option{-g} alone.
1626
 
1627
Many C compilers are unable to handle the @samp{-g} and @samp{-O}
1628
options together.  Using those compilers, you cannot generate optimized
1629
executables containing debugging information.
1630
 
1631
@value{NGCC}, the @sc{gnu} C compiler, supports @samp{-g} with or
1632
without @samp{-O}, making it possible to debug optimized code.  We
1633
recommend that you @emph{always} use @samp{-g} whenever you compile a
1634
program.  You may think your program is correct, but there is no sense
1635
in pushing your luck.
1636
 
1637
@cindex optimized code, debugging
1638
@cindex debugging optimized code
1639
When you debug a program compiled with @samp{-g -O}, remember that the
1640
optimizer is rearranging your code; the debugger shows you what is
1641
really there.  Do not be too surprised when the execution path does not
1642
exactly match your source file!  An extreme example: if you define a
1643
variable, but never use it, @value{GDBN} never sees that
1644
variable---because the compiler optimizes it out of existence.
1645
 
1646
Some things do not work as well with @samp{-g -O} as with just
1647
@samp{-g}, particularly on machines with instruction scheduling.  If in
1648
doubt, recompile with @samp{-g} alone, and if this fixes the problem,
1649
please report it to us as a bug (including a test case!).
1650
 
1651
Older versions of the @sc{gnu} C compiler permitted a variant option
1652
@w{@samp{-gg}} for debugging information.  @value{GDBN} no longer supports this
1653
format; if your @sc{gnu} C compiler has this option, do not use it.
1654
 
1655
@need 2000
1656
@node Starting
1657
@section Starting your program
1658
@cindex starting
1659
@cindex running
1660
 
1661
@table @code
1662
@kindex run
1663
@kindex r @r{(@code{run})}
1664
@item run
1665
@itemx r
1666
Use the @code{run} command to start your program under @value{GDBN}.
1667
You must first specify the program name (except on VxWorks) with an
1668
argument to @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Invocation, ,Getting In and Out of
1669
@value{GDBN}}), or by using the @code{file} or @code{exec-file} command
1670
(@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
1671
 
1672
@end table
1673
 
1674
If you are running your program in an execution environment that
1675
supports processes, @code{run} creates an inferior process and makes
1676
that process run your program.  (In environments without processes,
1677
@code{run} jumps to the start of your program.)
1678
 
1679
The execution of a program is affected by certain information it
1680
receives from its superior.  @value{GDBN} provides ways to specify this
1681
information, which you must do @emph{before} starting your program.  (You
1682
can change it after starting your program, but such changes only affect
1683
your program the next time you start it.)  This information may be
1684
divided into four categories:
1685
 
1686
@table @asis
1687
@item The @emph{arguments.}
1688
Specify the arguments to give your program as the arguments of the
1689
@code{run} command.  If a shell is available on your target, the shell
1690
is used to pass the arguments, so that you may use normal conventions
1691
(such as wildcard expansion or variable substitution) in describing
1692
the arguments.
1693
In Unix systems, you can control which shell is used with the
1694
@code{SHELL} environment variable.
1695
@xref{Arguments, ,Your program's arguments}.
1696
 
1697
@item The @emph{environment.}
1698
Your program normally inherits its environment from @value{GDBN}, but you can
1699
use the @value{GDBN} commands @code{set environment} and @code{unset
1700
environment} to change parts of the environment that affect
1701
your program.  @xref{Environment, ,Your program's environment}.
1702
 
1703
@item The @emph{working directory.}
1704
Your program inherits its working directory from @value{GDBN}.  You can set
1705
the @value{GDBN} working directory with the @code{cd} command in @value{GDBN}.
1706
@xref{Working Directory, ,Your program's working directory}.
1707
 
1708
@item The @emph{standard input and output.}
1709
Your program normally uses the same device for standard input and
1710
standard output as @value{GDBN} is using.  You can redirect input and output
1711
in the @code{run} command line, or you can use the @code{tty} command to
1712
set a different device for your program.
1713
@xref{Input/Output, ,Your program's input and output}.
1714
 
1715
@cindex pipes
1716
@emph{Warning:} While input and output redirection work, you cannot use
1717
pipes to pass the output of the program you are debugging to another
1718
program; if you attempt this, @value{GDBN} is likely to wind up debugging the
1719
wrong program.
1720
@end table
1721
 
1722
When you issue the @code{run} command, your program begins to execute
1723
immediately.  @xref{Stopping, ,Stopping and continuing}, for discussion
1724
of how to arrange for your program to stop.  Once your program has
1725
stopped, you may call functions in your program, using the @code{print}
1726
or @code{call} commands.  @xref{Data, ,Examining Data}.
1727
 
1728
If the modification time of your symbol file has changed since the last
1729
time @value{GDBN} read its symbols, @value{GDBN} discards its symbol
1730
table, and reads it again.  When it does this, @value{GDBN} tries to retain
1731
your current breakpoints.
1732
 
1733
@node Arguments
1734
@section Your program's arguments
1735
 
1736
@cindex arguments (to your program)
1737
The arguments to your program can be specified by the arguments of the
1738
@code{run} command.
1739
They are passed to a shell, which expands wildcard characters and
1740
performs redirection of I/O, and thence to your program.  Your
1741
@code{SHELL} environment variable (if it exists) specifies what shell
1742
@value{GDBN} uses.  If you do not define @code{SHELL}, @value{GDBN} uses
1743
the default shell (@file{/bin/sh} on Unix).
1744
 
1745
On non-Unix systems, the program is usually invoked directly by
1746
@value{GDBN}, which emulates I/O redirection via the appropriate system
1747
calls, and the wildcard characters are expanded by the startup code of
1748
the program, not by the shell.
1749
 
1750
@code{run} with no arguments uses the same arguments used by the previous
1751
@code{run}, or those set by the @code{set args} command.
1752
 
1753
@table @code
1754
@kindex set args
1755
@item set args
1756
Specify the arguments to be used the next time your program is run.  If
1757
@code{set args} has no arguments, @code{run} executes your program
1758
with no arguments.  Once you have run your program with arguments,
1759
using @code{set args} before the next @code{run} is the only way to run
1760
it again without arguments.
1761
 
1762
@kindex show args
1763
@item show args
1764
Show the arguments to give your program when it is started.
1765
@end table
1766
 
1767
@node Environment
1768
@section Your program's environment
1769
 
1770
@cindex environment (of your program)
1771
The @dfn{environment} consists of a set of environment variables and
1772
their values.  Environment variables conventionally record such things as
1773
your user name, your home directory, your terminal type, and your search
1774
path for programs to run.  Usually you set up environment variables with
1775
the shell and they are inherited by all the other programs you run.  When
1776
debugging, it can be useful to try running your program with a modified
1777
environment without having to start @value{GDBN} over again.
1778
 
1779
@table @code
1780
@kindex path
1781
@item path @var{directory}
1782
Add @var{directory} to the front of the @code{PATH} environment variable
1783
(the search path for executables) that will be passed to your program.
1784
The value of @code{PATH} used by @value{GDBN} does not change.
1785
You may specify several directory names, separated by whitespace or by a
1786
system-dependent separator character (@samp{:} on Unix, @samp{;} on
1787
MS-DOS and MS-Windows).  If @var{directory} is already in the path, it
1788
is moved to the front, so it is searched sooner.
1789
 
1790
You can use the string @samp{$cwd} to refer to whatever is the current
1791
working directory at the time @value{GDBN} searches the path.  If you
1792
use @samp{.} instead, it refers to the directory where you executed the
1793
@code{path} command.  @value{GDBN} replaces @samp{.} in the
1794
@var{directory} argument (with the current path) before adding
1795
@var{directory} to the search path.
1796
@c 'path' is explicitly nonrepeatable, but RMS points out it is silly to
1797
@c document that, since repeating it would be a no-op.
1798
 
1799
@kindex show paths
1800
@item show paths
1801
Display the list of search paths for executables (the @code{PATH}
1802
environment variable).
1803
 
1804
@kindex show environment
1805
@item show environment @r{[}@var{varname}@r{]}
1806
Print the value of environment variable @var{varname} to be given to
1807
your program when it starts.  If you do not supply @var{varname},
1808
print the names and values of all environment variables to be given to
1809
your program.  You can abbreviate @code{environment} as @code{env}.
1810
 
1811
@kindex set environment
1812
@item set environment @var{varname} @r{[}=@var{value}@r{]}
1813
Set environment variable @var{varname} to @var{value}.  The value
1814
changes for your program only, not for @value{GDBN} itself.  @var{value} may
1815
be any string; the values of environment variables are just strings, and
1816
any interpretation is supplied by your program itself.  The @var{value}
1817
parameter is optional; if it is eliminated, the variable is set to a
1818
null value.
1819
@c "any string" here does not include leading, trailing
1820
@c blanks. Gnu asks: does anyone care?
1821
 
1822
For example, this command:
1823
 
1824
@smallexample
1825
set env USER = foo
1826
@end smallexample
1827
 
1828
@noindent
1829
tells the debugged program, when subsequently run, that its user is named
1830
@samp{foo}.  (The spaces around @samp{=} are used for clarity here; they
1831
are not actually required.)
1832
 
1833
@kindex unset environment
1834
@item unset environment @var{varname}
1835
Remove variable @var{varname} from the environment to be passed to your
1836
program.  This is different from @samp{set env @var{varname} =};
1837
@code{unset environment} removes the variable from the environment,
1838
rather than assigning it an empty value.
1839
@end table
1840
 
1841
@emph{Warning:} On Unix systems, @value{GDBN} runs your program using
1842
the shell indicated
1843
by your @code{SHELL} environment variable if it exists (or
1844
@code{/bin/sh} if not).  If your @code{SHELL} variable names a shell
1845
that runs an initialization file---such as @file{.cshrc} for C-shell, or
1846
@file{.bashrc} for BASH---any variables you set in that file affect
1847
your program.  You may wish to move setting of environment variables to
1848
files that are only run when you sign on, such as @file{.login} or
1849
@file{.profile}.
1850
 
1851
@node Working Directory
1852
@section Your program's working directory
1853
 
1854
@cindex working directory (of your program)
1855
Each time you start your program with @code{run}, it inherits its
1856
working directory from the current working directory of @value{GDBN}.
1857
The @value{GDBN} working directory is initially whatever it inherited
1858
from its parent process (typically the shell), but you can specify a new
1859
working directory in @value{GDBN} with the @code{cd} command.
1860
 
1861
The @value{GDBN} working directory also serves as a default for the commands
1862
that specify files for @value{GDBN} to operate on.  @xref{Files, ,Commands to
1863
specify files}.
1864
 
1865
@table @code
1866
@kindex cd
1867
@item cd @var{directory}
1868
Set the @value{GDBN} working directory to @var{directory}.
1869
 
1870
@kindex pwd
1871
@item pwd
1872
Print the @value{GDBN} working directory.
1873
@end table
1874
 
1875
@node Input/Output
1876
@section Your program's input and output
1877
 
1878
@cindex redirection
1879
@cindex i/o
1880
@cindex terminal
1881
By default, the program you run under @value{GDBN} does input and output to
1882
the same terminal that @value{GDBN} uses.  @value{GDBN} switches the terminal
1883
to its own terminal modes to interact with you, but it records the terminal
1884
modes your program was using and switches back to them when you continue
1885
running your program.
1886
 
1887
@table @code
1888
@kindex info terminal
1889
@item info terminal
1890
Displays information recorded by @value{GDBN} about the terminal modes your
1891
program is using.
1892
@end table
1893
 
1894
You can redirect your program's input and/or output using shell
1895
redirection with the @code{run} command.  For example,
1896
 
1897
@smallexample
1898
run > outfile
1899
@end smallexample
1900
 
1901
@noindent
1902
starts your program, diverting its output to the file @file{outfile}.
1903
 
1904
@kindex tty
1905
@cindex controlling terminal
1906
Another way to specify where your program should do input and output is
1907
with the @code{tty} command.  This command accepts a file name as
1908
argument, and causes this file to be the default for future @code{run}
1909
commands.  It also resets the controlling terminal for the child
1910
process, for future @code{run} commands.  For example,
1911
 
1912
@smallexample
1913
tty /dev/ttyb
1914
@end smallexample
1915
 
1916
@noindent
1917
directs that processes started with subsequent @code{run} commands
1918
default to do input and output on the terminal @file{/dev/ttyb} and have
1919
that as their controlling terminal.
1920
 
1921
An explicit redirection in @code{run} overrides the @code{tty} command's
1922
effect on the input/output device, but not its effect on the controlling
1923
terminal.
1924
 
1925
When you use the @code{tty} command or redirect input in the @code{run}
1926
command, only the input @emph{for your program} is affected.  The input
1927
for @value{GDBN} still comes from your terminal.
1928
 
1929
@node Attach
1930
@section Debugging an already-running process
1931
@kindex attach
1932
@cindex attach
1933
 
1934
@table @code
1935
@item attach @var{process-id}
1936
This command attaches to a running process---one that was started
1937
outside @value{GDBN}.  (@code{info files} shows your active
1938
targets.)  The command takes as argument a process ID.  The usual way to
1939
find out the process-id of a Unix process is with the @code{ps} utility,
1940
or with the @samp{jobs -l} shell command.
1941
 
1942
@code{attach} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} a second time after
1943
executing the command.
1944
@end table
1945
 
1946
To use @code{attach}, your program must be running in an environment
1947
which supports processes; for example, @code{attach} does not work for
1948
programs on bare-board targets that lack an operating system.  You must
1949
also have permission to send the process a signal.
1950
 
1951
When you use @code{attach}, the debugger finds the program running in
1952
the process first by looking in the current working directory, then (if
1953
the program is not found) by using the source file search path
1954
(@pxref{Source Path, ,Specifying source directories}).  You can also use
1955
the @code{file} command to load the program.  @xref{Files, ,Commands to
1956
Specify Files}.
1957
 
1958
The first thing @value{GDBN} does after arranging to debug the specified
1959
process is to stop it.  You can examine and modify an attached process
1960
with all the @value{GDBN} commands that are ordinarily available when
1961
you start processes with @code{run}.  You can insert breakpoints; you
1962
can step and continue; you can modify storage.  If you would rather the
1963
process continue running, you may use the @code{continue} command after
1964
attaching @value{GDBN} to the process.
1965
 
1966
@table @code
1967
@kindex detach
1968
@item detach
1969
When you have finished debugging the attached process, you can use the
1970
@code{detach} command to release it from @value{GDBN} control.  Detaching
1971
the process continues its execution.  After the @code{detach} command,
1972
that process and @value{GDBN} become completely independent once more, and you
1973
are ready to @code{attach} another process or start one with @code{run}.
1974
@code{detach} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after
1975
executing the command.
1976
@end table
1977
 
1978
If you exit @value{GDBN} or use the @code{run} command while you have an
1979
attached process, you kill that process.  By default, @value{GDBN} asks
1980
for confirmation if you try to do either of these things; you can
1981
control whether or not you need to confirm by using the @code{set
1982
confirm} command (@pxref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and
1983
messages}).
1984
 
1985
@node Kill Process
1986
@section Killing the child process
1987
 
1988
@table @code
1989
@kindex kill
1990
@item kill
1991
Kill the child process in which your program is running under @value{GDBN}.
1992
@end table
1993
 
1994
This command is useful if you wish to debug a core dump instead of a
1995
running process.  @value{GDBN} ignores any core dump file while your program
1996
is running.
1997
 
1998
On some operating systems, a program cannot be executed outside @value{GDBN}
1999
while you have breakpoints set on it inside @value{GDBN}.  You can use the
2000
@code{kill} command in this situation to permit running your program
2001
outside the debugger.
2002
 
2003
The @code{kill} command is also useful if you wish to recompile and
2004
relink your program, since on many systems it is impossible to modify an
2005
executable file while it is running in a process.  In this case, when you
2006
next type @code{run}, @value{GDBN} notices that the file has changed, and
2007
reads the symbol table again (while trying to preserve your current
2008
breakpoint settings).
2009
 
2010
@node Threads
2011
@section Debugging programs with multiple threads
2012
 
2013
@cindex threads of execution
2014
@cindex multiple threads
2015
@cindex switching threads
2016
In some operating systems, such as HP-UX and Solaris, a single program
2017
may have more than one @dfn{thread} of execution.  The precise semantics
2018
of threads differ from one operating system to another, but in general
2019
the threads of a single program are akin to multiple processes---except
2020
that they share one address space (that is, they can all examine and
2021
modify the same variables).  On the other hand, each thread has its own
2022
registers and execution stack, and perhaps private memory.
2023
 
2024
@value{GDBN} provides these facilities for debugging multi-thread
2025
programs:
2026
 
2027
@itemize @bullet
2028
@item automatic notification of new threads
2029
@item @samp{thread @var{threadno}}, a command to switch among threads
2030
@item @samp{info threads}, a command to inquire about existing threads
2031
@item @samp{thread apply [@var{threadno}] [@var{all}] @var{args}},
2032
a command to apply a command to a list of threads
2033
@item thread-specific breakpoints
2034
@end itemize
2035
 
2036
@quotation
2037
@emph{Warning:} These facilities are not yet available on every
2038
@value{GDBN} configuration where the operating system supports threads.
2039
If your @value{GDBN} does not support threads, these commands have no
2040
effect.  For example, a system without thread support shows no output
2041
from @samp{info threads}, and always rejects the @code{thread} command,
2042
like this:
2043
 
2044
@smallexample
2045
(@value{GDBP}) info threads
2046
(@value{GDBP}) thread 1
2047
Thread ID 1 not known.  Use the "info threads" command to
2048
see the IDs of currently known threads.
2049
@end smallexample
2050
@c FIXME to implementors: how hard would it be to say "sorry, this GDB
2051
@c                        doesn't support threads"?
2052
@end quotation
2053
 
2054
@cindex focus of debugging
2055
@cindex current thread
2056
The @value{GDBN} thread debugging facility allows you to observe all
2057
threads while your program runs---but whenever @value{GDBN} takes
2058
control, one thread in particular is always the focus of debugging.
2059
This thread is called the @dfn{current thread}.  Debugging commands show
2060
program information from the perspective of the current thread.
2061
 
2062
@cindex @code{New} @var{systag} message
2063
@cindex thread identifier (system)
2064
@c FIXME-implementors!! It would be more helpful if the [New...] message
2065
@c included GDB's numeric thread handle, so you could just go to that
2066
@c thread without first checking `info threads'.
2067
Whenever @value{GDBN} detects a new thread in your program, it displays
2068
the target system's identification for the thread with a message in the
2069
form @samp{[New @var{systag}]}.  @var{systag} is a thread identifier
2070
whose form varies depending on the particular system.  For example, on
2071
LynxOS, you might see
2072
 
2073
@smallexample
2074
[New process 35 thread 27]
2075
@end smallexample
2076
 
2077
@noindent
2078
when @value{GDBN} notices a new thread.  In contrast, on an SGI system,
2079
the @var{systag} is simply something like @samp{process 368}, with no
2080
further qualifier.
2081
 
2082
@c FIXME!! (1) Does the [New...] message appear even for the very first
2083
@c         thread of a program, or does it only appear for the
2084
@c         second---i.e.@: when it becomes obvious we have a multithread
2085
@c         program?
2086
@c         (2) *Is* there necessarily a first thread always?  Or do some
2087
@c         multithread systems permit starting a program with multiple
2088
@c         threads ab initio?
2089
 
2090
@cindex thread number
2091
@cindex thread identifier (GDB)
2092
For debugging purposes, @value{GDBN} associates its own thread
2093
number---always a single integer---with each thread in your program.
2094
 
2095
@table @code
2096
@kindex info threads
2097
@item info threads
2098
Display a summary of all threads currently in your
2099
program.  @value{GDBN} displays for each thread (in this order):
2100
 
2101
@enumerate
2102
@item the thread number assigned by @value{GDBN}
2103
 
2104
@item the target system's thread identifier (@var{systag})
2105
 
2106
@item the current stack frame summary for that thread
2107
@end enumerate
2108
 
2109
@noindent
2110
An asterisk @samp{*} to the left of the @value{GDBN} thread number
2111
indicates the current thread.
2112
 
2113
For example,
2114
@end table
2115
@c end table here to get a little more width for example
2116
 
2117
@smallexample
2118
(@value{GDBP}) info threads
2119
  3 process 35 thread 27  0x34e5 in sigpause ()
2120
  2 process 35 thread 23  0x34e5 in sigpause ()
2121
* 1 process 35 thread 13  main (argc=1, argv=0x7ffffff8)
2122
    at threadtest.c:68
2123
@end smallexample
2124
 
2125
On HP-UX systems:
2126
 
2127
@cindex thread number
2128
@cindex thread identifier (GDB)
2129
For debugging purposes, @value{GDBN} associates its own thread
2130
number---a small integer assigned in thread-creation order---with each
2131
thread in your program.
2132
 
2133
@cindex @code{New} @var{systag} message, on HP-UX
2134
@cindex thread identifier (system), on HP-UX
2135
@c FIXME-implementors!! It would be more helpful if the [New...] message
2136
@c included GDB's numeric thread handle, so you could just go to that
2137
@c thread without first checking `info threads'.
2138
Whenever @value{GDBN} detects a new thread in your program, it displays
2139
both @value{GDBN}'s thread number and the target system's identification for the thread with a message in the
2140
form @samp{[New @var{systag}]}.  @var{systag} is a thread identifier
2141
whose form varies depending on the particular system.  For example, on
2142
HP-UX, you see
2143
 
2144
@smallexample
2145
[New thread 2 (system thread 26594)]
2146
@end smallexample
2147
 
2148
@noindent
2149
when @value{GDBN} notices a new thread.
2150
 
2151
@table @code
2152
@kindex info threads
2153
@item info threads
2154
Display a summary of all threads currently in your
2155
program.  @value{GDBN} displays for each thread (in this order):
2156
 
2157
@enumerate
2158
@item the thread number assigned by @value{GDBN}
2159
 
2160
@item the target system's thread identifier (@var{systag})
2161
 
2162
@item the current stack frame summary for that thread
2163
@end enumerate
2164
 
2165
@noindent
2166
An asterisk @samp{*} to the left of the @value{GDBN} thread number
2167
indicates the current thread.
2168
 
2169
For example,
2170
@end table
2171
@c end table here to get a little more width for example
2172
 
2173
@smallexample
2174
(@value{GDBP}) info threads
2175
    * 3 system thread 26607  worker (wptr=0x7b09c318 "@@") \@*
2176
                               at quicksort.c:137
2177
      2 system thread 26606  0x7b0030d8 in __ksleep () \@*
2178
                               from /usr/lib/libc.2
2179
      1 system thread 27905  0x7b003498 in _brk () \@*
2180
                               from /usr/lib/libc.2
2181
@end smallexample
2182
 
2183
@table @code
2184
@kindex thread @var{threadno}
2185
@item thread @var{threadno}
2186
Make thread number @var{threadno} the current thread.  The command
2187
argument @var{threadno} is the internal @value{GDBN} thread number, as
2188
shown in the first field of the @samp{info threads} display.
2189
@value{GDBN} responds by displaying the system identifier of the thread
2190
you selected, and its current stack frame summary:
2191
 
2192
@smallexample
2193
@c FIXME!! This example made up; find a @value{GDBN} w/threads and get real one
2194
(@value{GDBP}) thread 2
2195
[Switching to process 35 thread 23]
2196
0x34e5 in sigpause ()
2197
@end smallexample
2198
 
2199
@noindent
2200
As with the @samp{[New @dots{}]} message, the form of the text after
2201
@samp{Switching to} depends on your system's conventions for identifying
2202
threads.
2203
 
2204
@kindex thread apply
2205
@item thread apply [@var{threadno}] [@var{all}]  @var{args}
2206
The @code{thread apply} command allows you to apply a command to one or
2207
more threads.  Specify the numbers of the threads that you want affected
2208
with the command argument @var{threadno}.  @var{threadno} is the internal
2209
@value{GDBN} thread number, as shown in the first field of the @samp{info
2210
threads} display.  To apply a command to all threads, use
2211
@code{thread apply all} @var{args}.
2212
@end table
2213
 
2214
@cindex automatic thread selection
2215
@cindex switching threads automatically
2216
@cindex threads, automatic switching
2217
Whenever @value{GDBN} stops your program, due to a breakpoint or a
2218
signal, it automatically selects the thread where that breakpoint or
2219
signal happened.  @value{GDBN} alerts you to the context switch with a
2220
message of the form @samp{[Switching to @var{systag}]} to identify the
2221
thread.
2222
 
2223
@xref{Thread Stops,,Stopping and starting multi-thread programs}, for
2224
more information about how @value{GDBN} behaves when you stop and start
2225
programs with multiple threads.
2226
 
2227
@xref{Set Watchpoints,,Setting watchpoints}, for information about
2228
watchpoints in programs with multiple threads.
2229
 
2230
@node Processes
2231
@section Debugging programs with multiple processes
2232
 
2233
@cindex fork, debugging programs which call
2234
@cindex multiple processes
2235
@cindex processes, multiple
2236
On most systems, @value{GDBN} has no special support for debugging
2237
programs which create additional processes using the @code{fork}
2238
function.  When a program forks, @value{GDBN} will continue to debug the
2239
parent process and the child process will run unimpeded.  If you have
2240
set a breakpoint in any code which the child then executes, the child
2241
will get a @code{SIGTRAP} signal which (unless it catches the signal)
2242
will cause it to terminate.
2243
 
2244
However, if you want to debug the child process there is a workaround
2245
which isn't too painful.  Put a call to @code{sleep} in the code which
2246
the child process executes after the fork.  It may be useful to sleep
2247
only if a certain environment variable is set, or a certain file exists,
2248
so that the delay need not occur when you don't want to run @value{GDBN}
2249
on the child.  While the child is sleeping, use the @code{ps} program to
2250
get its process ID.  Then tell @value{GDBN} (a new invocation of
2251
@value{GDBN} if you are also debugging the parent process) to attach to
2252
the child process (@pxref{Attach}).  From that point on you can debug
2253
the child process just like any other process which you attached to.
2254
 
2255
On HP-UX (11.x and later only?), @value{GDBN} provides support for
2256
debugging programs that create additional processes using the
2257
@code{fork} or @code{vfork} function.
2258
 
2259
By default, when a program forks, @value{GDBN} will continue to debug
2260
the parent process and the child process will run unimpeded.
2261
 
2262
If you want to follow the child process instead of the parent process,
2263
use the command @w{@code{set follow-fork-mode}}.
2264
 
2265
@table @code
2266
@kindex set follow-fork-mode
2267
@item set follow-fork-mode @var{mode}
2268
Set the debugger response to a program call of @code{fork} or
2269
@code{vfork}.  A call to @code{fork} or @code{vfork} creates a new
2270
process.  The @var{mode} can be:
2271
 
2272
@table @code
2273
@item parent
2274
The original process is debugged after a fork.  The child process runs
2275
unimpeded.  This is the default.
2276
 
2277
@item child
2278
The new process is debugged after a fork.  The parent process runs
2279
unimpeded.
2280
 
2281
@item ask
2282
The debugger will ask for one of the above choices.
2283
@end table
2284
 
2285
@item show follow-fork-mode
2286
Display the current debugger response to a @code{fork} or @code{vfork} call.
2287
@end table
2288
 
2289
If you ask to debug a child process and a @code{vfork} is followed by an
2290
@code{exec}, @value{GDBN} executes the new target up to the first
2291
breakpoint in the new target.  If you have a breakpoint set on
2292
@code{main} in your original program, the breakpoint will also be set on
2293
the child process's @code{main}.
2294
 
2295
When a child process is spawned by @code{vfork}, you cannot debug the
2296
child or parent until an @code{exec} call completes.
2297
 
2298
If you issue a @code{run} command to @value{GDBN} after an @code{exec}
2299
call executes, the new target restarts.  To restart the parent process,
2300
use the @code{file} command with the parent executable name as its
2301
argument.
2302
 
2303
You can use the @code{catch} command to make @value{GDBN} stop whenever
2304
a @code{fork}, @code{vfork}, or @code{exec} call is made.  @xref{Set
2305
Catchpoints, ,Setting catchpoints}.
2306
 
2307
@node Stopping
2308
@chapter Stopping and Continuing
2309
 
2310
The principal purposes of using a debugger are so that you can stop your
2311
program before it terminates; or so that, if your program runs into
2312
trouble, you can investigate and find out why.
2313
 
2314
Inside @value{GDBN}, your program may stop for any of several reasons,
2315
such as a signal, a breakpoint, or reaching a new line after a
2316
@value{GDBN} command such as @code{step}.  You may then examine and
2317
change variables, set new breakpoints or remove old ones, and then
2318
continue execution.  Usually, the messages shown by @value{GDBN} provide
2319
ample explanation of the status of your program---but you can also
2320
explicitly request this information at any time.
2321
 
2322
@table @code
2323
@kindex info program
2324
@item info program
2325
Display information about the status of your program: whether it is
2326
running or not, what process it is, and why it stopped.
2327
@end table
2328
 
2329
@menu
2330
* Breakpoints::                 Breakpoints, watchpoints, and catchpoints
2331
* Continuing and Stepping::     Resuming execution
2332
* Signals::                     Signals
2333
* Thread Stops::                Stopping and starting multi-thread programs
2334
@end menu
2335
 
2336
@node Breakpoints
2337
@section Breakpoints, watchpoints, and catchpoints
2338
 
2339
@cindex breakpoints
2340
A @dfn{breakpoint} makes your program stop whenever a certain point in
2341
the program is reached.  For each breakpoint, you can add conditions to
2342
control in finer detail whether your program stops.  You can set
2343
breakpoints with the @code{break} command and its variants (@pxref{Set
2344
Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}), to specify the place where your program
2345
should stop by line number, function name or exact address in the
2346
program.
2347
 
2348
In HP-UX, SunOS 4.x, SVR4, and Alpha OSF/1 configurations, you can set
2349
breakpoints in shared libraries before the executable is run.  There is
2350
a minor limitation on HP-UX systems: you must wait until the executable
2351
is run in order to set breakpoints in shared library routines that are
2352
not called directly by the program (for example, routines that are
2353
arguments in a @code{pthread_create} call).
2354
 
2355
@cindex watchpoints
2356
@cindex memory tracing
2357
@cindex breakpoint on memory address
2358
@cindex breakpoint on variable modification
2359
A @dfn{watchpoint} is a special breakpoint that stops your program
2360
when the value of an expression changes.  You must use a different
2361
command to set watchpoints (@pxref{Set Watchpoints, ,Setting
2362
watchpoints}), but aside from that, you can manage a watchpoint like
2363
any other breakpoint: you enable, disable, and delete both breakpoints
2364
and watchpoints using the same commands.
2365
 
2366
You can arrange to have values from your program displayed automatically
2367
whenever @value{GDBN} stops at a breakpoint.  @xref{Auto Display,,
2368
Automatic display}.
2369
 
2370
@cindex catchpoints
2371
@cindex breakpoint on events
2372
A @dfn{catchpoint} is another special breakpoint that stops your program
2373
when a certain kind of event occurs, such as the throwing of a C@t{++}
2374
exception or the loading of a library.  As with watchpoints, you use a
2375
different command to set a catchpoint (@pxref{Set Catchpoints, ,Setting
2376
catchpoints}), but aside from that, you can manage a catchpoint like any
2377
other breakpoint.  (To stop when your program receives a signal, use the
2378
@code{handle} command; see @ref{Signals, ,Signals}.)
2379
 
2380
@cindex breakpoint numbers
2381
@cindex numbers for breakpoints
2382
@value{GDBN} assigns a number to each breakpoint, watchpoint, or
2383
catchpoint when you create it; these numbers are successive integers
2384
starting with one.  In many of the commands for controlling various
2385
features of breakpoints you use the breakpoint number to say which
2386
breakpoint you want to change.  Each breakpoint may be @dfn{enabled} or
2387
@dfn{disabled}; if disabled, it has no effect on your program until you
2388
enable it again.
2389
 
2390
@cindex breakpoint ranges
2391
@cindex ranges of breakpoints
2392
Some @value{GDBN} commands accept a range of breakpoints on which to
2393
operate.  A breakpoint range is either a single breakpoint number, like
2394
@samp{5}, or two such numbers, in increasing order, separated by a
2395
hyphen, like @samp{5-7}.  When a breakpoint range is given to a command,
2396
all breakpoint in that range are operated on.
2397
 
2398
@menu
2399
* Set Breaks::                  Setting breakpoints
2400
* Set Watchpoints::             Setting watchpoints
2401
* Set Catchpoints::             Setting catchpoints
2402
* Delete Breaks::               Deleting breakpoints
2403
* Disabling::                   Disabling breakpoints
2404
* Conditions::                  Break conditions
2405
* Break Commands::              Breakpoint command lists
2406
* Breakpoint Menus::            Breakpoint menus
2407
* Error in Breakpoints::        ``Cannot insert breakpoints''
2408
@end menu
2409
 
2410
@node Set Breaks
2411
@subsection Setting breakpoints
2412
 
2413
@c FIXME LMB what does GDB do if no code on line of breakpt?
2414
@c       consider in particular declaration with/without initialization.
2415
@c
2416
@c FIXME 2 is there stuff on this already? break at fun start, already init?
2417
 
2418
@kindex break
2419
@kindex b @r{(@code{break})}
2420
@vindex $bpnum@r{, convenience variable}
2421
@cindex latest breakpoint
2422
Breakpoints are set with the @code{break} command (abbreviated
2423
@code{b}).  The debugger convenience variable @samp{$bpnum} records the
2424
number of the breakpoint you've set most recently; see @ref{Convenience
2425
Vars,, Convenience variables}, for a discussion of what you can do with
2426
convenience variables.
2427
 
2428
You have several ways to say where the breakpoint should go.
2429
 
2430
@table @code
2431
@item break @var{function}
2432
Set a breakpoint at entry to function @var{function}.
2433
When using source languages that permit overloading of symbols, such as
2434
C@t{++}, @var{function} may refer to more than one possible place to break.
2435
@xref{Breakpoint Menus,,Breakpoint menus}, for a discussion of that situation.
2436
 
2437
@item break +@var{offset}
2438
@itemx break -@var{offset}
2439
Set a breakpoint some number of lines forward or back from the position
2440
at which execution stopped in the currently selected @dfn{stack frame}.
2441
(@xref{Frames, ,Frames}, for a description of stack frames.)
2442
 
2443
@item break @var{linenum}
2444
Set a breakpoint at line @var{linenum} in the current source file.
2445
The current source file is the last file whose source text was printed.
2446
The breakpoint will stop your program just before it executes any of the
2447
code on that line.
2448
 
2449
@item break @var{filename}:@var{linenum}
2450
Set a breakpoint at line @var{linenum} in source file @var{filename}.
2451
 
2452
@item break @var{filename}:@var{function}
2453
Set a breakpoint at entry to function @var{function} found in file
2454
@var{filename}.  Specifying a file name as well as a function name is
2455
superfluous except when multiple files contain similarly named
2456
functions.
2457
 
2458
@item break *@var{address}
2459
Set a breakpoint at address @var{address}.  You can use this to set
2460
breakpoints in parts of your program which do not have debugging
2461
information or source files.
2462
 
2463
@item break
2464
When called without any arguments, @code{break} sets a breakpoint at
2465
the next instruction to be executed in the selected stack frame
2466
(@pxref{Stack, ,Examining the Stack}).  In any selected frame but the
2467
innermost, this makes your program stop as soon as control
2468
returns to that frame.  This is similar to the effect of a
2469
@code{finish} command in the frame inside the selected frame---except
2470
that @code{finish} does not leave an active breakpoint.  If you use
2471
@code{break} without an argument in the innermost frame, @value{GDBN} stops
2472
the next time it reaches the current location; this may be useful
2473
inside loops.
2474
 
2475
@value{GDBN} normally ignores breakpoints when it resumes execution, until at
2476
least one instruction has been executed.  If it did not do this, you
2477
would be unable to proceed past a breakpoint without first disabling the
2478
breakpoint.  This rule applies whether or not the breakpoint already
2479
existed when your program stopped.
2480
 
2481
@item break @dots{} if @var{cond}
2482
Set a breakpoint with condition @var{cond}; evaluate the expression
2483
@var{cond} each time the breakpoint is reached, and stop only if the
2484
value is nonzero---that is, if @var{cond} evaluates as true.
2485
@samp{@dots{}} stands for one of the possible arguments described
2486
above (or no argument) specifying where to break.  @xref{Conditions,
2487
,Break conditions}, for more information on breakpoint conditions.
2488
 
2489
@kindex tbreak
2490
@item tbreak @var{args}
2491
Set a breakpoint enabled only for one stop.  @var{args} are the
2492
same as for the @code{break} command, and the breakpoint is set in the same
2493
way, but the breakpoint is automatically deleted after the first time your
2494
program stops there.  @xref{Disabling, ,Disabling breakpoints}.
2495
 
2496
@kindex hbreak
2497
@item hbreak @var{args}
2498
Set a hardware-assisted breakpoint.  @var{args} are the same as for the
2499
@code{break} command and the breakpoint is set in the same way, but the
2500
breakpoint requires hardware support and some target hardware may not
2501
have this support.  The main purpose of this is EPROM/ROM code
2502
debugging, so you can set a breakpoint at an instruction without
2503
changing the instruction.  This can be used with the new trap-generation
2504
provided by SPARClite DSU and some x86-based targets.  These targets
2505
will generate traps when a program accesses some data or instruction
2506
address that is assigned to the debug registers.  However the hardware
2507
breakpoint registers can take a limited number of breakpoints.  For
2508
example, on the DSU, only two data breakpoints can be set at a time, and
2509
@value{GDBN} will reject this command if more than two are used.  Delete
2510
or disable unused hardware breakpoints before setting new ones
2511
(@pxref{Disabling, ,Disabling}).  @xref{Conditions, ,Break conditions}.
2512
 
2513
@kindex thbreak
2514
@item thbreak @var{args}
2515
Set a hardware-assisted breakpoint enabled only for one stop.  @var{args}
2516
are the same as for the @code{hbreak} command and the breakpoint is set in
2517
the same way.  However, like the @code{tbreak} command,
2518
the breakpoint is automatically deleted after the
2519
first time your program stops there.  Also, like the @code{hbreak}
2520
command, the breakpoint requires hardware support and some target hardware
2521
may not have this support.  @xref{Disabling, ,Disabling breakpoints}.
2522
See also @ref{Conditions, ,Break conditions}.
2523
 
2524
@kindex rbreak
2525
@cindex regular expression
2526
@item rbreak @var{regex}
2527
Set breakpoints on all functions matching the regular expression
2528
@var{regex}.  This command sets an unconditional breakpoint on all
2529
matches, printing a list of all breakpoints it set.  Once these
2530
breakpoints are set, they are treated just like the breakpoints set with
2531
the @code{break} command.  You can delete them, disable them, or make
2532
them conditional the same way as any other breakpoint.
2533
 
2534
The syntax of the regular expression is the standard one used with tools
2535
like @file{grep}.  Note that this is different from the syntax used by
2536
shells, so for instance @code{foo*} matches all functions that include
2537
an @code{fo} followed by zero or more @code{o}s.  There is an implicit
2538
@code{.*} leading and trailing the regular expression you supply, so to
2539
match only functions that begin with @code{foo}, use @code{^foo}.
2540
 
2541
When debugging C@t{++} programs, @code{rbreak} is useful for setting
2542
breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any special
2543
classes.
2544
 
2545
@kindex info breakpoints
2546
@cindex @code{$_} and @code{info breakpoints}
2547
@item info breakpoints @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2548
@itemx info break @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2549
@itemx info watchpoints @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2550
Print a table of all breakpoints, watchpoints, and catchpoints set and
2551
not deleted, with the following columns for each breakpoint:
2552
 
2553
@table @emph
2554
@item Breakpoint Numbers
2555
@item Type
2556
Breakpoint, watchpoint, or catchpoint.
2557
@item Disposition
2558
Whether the breakpoint is marked to be disabled or deleted when hit.
2559
@item Enabled or Disabled
2560
Enabled breakpoints are marked with @samp{y}.  @samp{n} marks breakpoints
2561
that are not enabled.
2562
@item Address
2563
Where the breakpoint is in your program, as a memory address.
2564
@item What
2565
Where the breakpoint is in the source for your program, as a file and
2566
line number.
2567
@end table
2568
 
2569
@noindent
2570
If a breakpoint is conditional, @code{info break} shows the condition on
2571
the line following the affected breakpoint; breakpoint commands, if any,
2572
are listed after that.
2573
 
2574
@noindent
2575
@code{info break} with a breakpoint
2576
number @var{n} as argument lists only that breakpoint.  The
2577
convenience variable @code{$_} and the default examining-address for
2578
the @code{x} command are set to the address of the last breakpoint
2579
listed (@pxref{Memory, ,Examining memory}).
2580
 
2581
@noindent
2582
@code{info break} displays a count of the number of times the breakpoint
2583
has been hit.  This is especially useful in conjunction with the
2584
@code{ignore} command.  You can ignore a large number of breakpoint
2585
hits, look at the breakpoint info to see how many times the breakpoint
2586
was hit, and then run again, ignoring one less than that number.  This
2587
will get you quickly to the last hit of that breakpoint.
2588
@end table
2589
 
2590
@value{GDBN} allows you to set any number of breakpoints at the same place in
2591
your program.  There is nothing silly or meaningless about this.  When
2592
the breakpoints are conditional, this is even useful
2593
(@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions}).
2594
 
2595
@cindex negative breakpoint numbers
2596
@cindex internal @value{GDBN} breakpoints
2597
@value{GDBN} itself sometimes sets breakpoints in your program for
2598
special purposes, such as proper handling of @code{longjmp} (in C
2599
programs).  These internal breakpoints are assigned negative numbers,
2600
starting with @code{-1}; @samp{info breakpoints} does not display them.
2601
You can see these breakpoints with the @value{GDBN} maintenance command
2602
@samp{maint info breakpoints} (@pxref{maint info breakpoints}).
2603
 
2604
 
2605
@node Set Watchpoints
2606
@subsection Setting watchpoints
2607
 
2608
@cindex setting watchpoints
2609
@cindex software watchpoints
2610
@cindex hardware watchpoints
2611
You can use a watchpoint to stop execution whenever the value of an
2612
expression changes, without having to predict a particular place where
2613
this may happen.
2614
 
2615
Depending on your system, watchpoints may be implemented in software or
2616
hardware.  @value{GDBN} does software watchpointing by single-stepping your
2617
program and testing the variable's value each time, which is hundreds of
2618
times slower than normal execution.  (But this may still be worth it, to
2619
catch errors where you have no clue what part of your program is the
2620
culprit.)
2621
 
2622
On some systems, such as HP-UX, @sc{gnu}/Linux and some other x86-based targets,
2623
@value{GDBN} includes support for
2624
hardware watchpoints, which do not slow down the running of your
2625
program.
2626
 
2627
@table @code
2628
@kindex watch
2629
@item watch @var{expr}
2630
Set a watchpoint for an expression.  @value{GDBN} will break when @var{expr}
2631
is written into by the program and its value changes.
2632
 
2633
@kindex rwatch
2634
@item rwatch @var{expr}
2635
Set a watchpoint that will break when watch @var{expr} is read by the program.
2636
 
2637
@kindex awatch
2638
@item awatch @var{expr}
2639
Set a watchpoint that will break when @var{expr} is either read or written into
2640
by the program.
2641
 
2642
@kindex info watchpoints
2643
@item info watchpoints
2644
This command prints a list of watchpoints, breakpoints, and catchpoints;
2645
it is the same as @code{info break}.
2646
@end table
2647
 
2648
@value{GDBN} sets a @dfn{hardware watchpoint} if possible.  Hardware
2649
watchpoints execute very quickly, and the debugger reports a change in
2650
value at the exact instruction where the change occurs.  If @value{GDBN}
2651
cannot set a hardware watchpoint, it sets a software watchpoint, which
2652
executes more slowly and reports the change in value at the next
2653
statement, not the instruction, after the change occurs.
2654
 
2655
When you issue the @code{watch} command, @value{GDBN} reports
2656
 
2657
@smallexample
2658
Hardware watchpoint @var{num}: @var{expr}
2659
@end smallexample
2660
 
2661
@noindent
2662
if it was able to set a hardware watchpoint.
2663
 
2664
Currently, the @code{awatch} and @code{rwatch} commands can only set
2665
hardware watchpoints, because accesses to data that don't change the
2666
value of the watched expression cannot be detected without examining
2667
every instruction as it is being executed, and @value{GDBN} does not do
2668
that currently.  If @value{GDBN} finds that it is unable to set a
2669
hardware breakpoint with the @code{awatch} or @code{rwatch} command, it
2670
will print a message like this:
2671
 
2672
@smallexample
2673
Expression cannot be implemented with read/access watchpoint.
2674
@end smallexample
2675
 
2676
Sometimes, @value{GDBN} cannot set a hardware watchpoint because the
2677
data type of the watched expression is wider than what a hardware
2678
watchpoint on the target machine can handle.  For example, some systems
2679
can only watch regions that are up to 4 bytes wide; on such systems you
2680
cannot set hardware watchpoints for an expression that yields a
2681
double-precision floating-point number (which is typically 8 bytes
2682
wide).  As a work-around, it might be possible to break the large region
2683
into a series of smaller ones and watch them with separate watchpoints.
2684
 
2685
If you set too many hardware watchpoints, @value{GDBN} might be unable
2686
to insert all of them when you resume the execution of your program.
2687
Since the precise number of active watchpoints is unknown until such
2688
time as the program is about to be resumed, @value{GDBN} might not be
2689
able to warn you about this when you set the watchpoints, and the
2690
warning will be printed only when the program is resumed:
2691
 
2692
@smallexample
2693
Hardware watchpoint @var{num}: Could not insert watchpoint
2694
@end smallexample
2695
 
2696
@noindent
2697
If this happens, delete or disable some of the watchpoints.
2698
 
2699
The SPARClite DSU will generate traps when a program accesses some data
2700
or instruction address that is assigned to the debug registers.  For the
2701
data addresses, DSU facilitates the @code{watch} command.  However the
2702
hardware breakpoint registers can only take two data watchpoints, and
2703
both watchpoints must be the same kind.  For example, you can set two
2704
watchpoints with @code{watch} commands, two with @code{rwatch} commands,
2705
@strong{or} two with @code{awatch} commands, but you cannot set one
2706
watchpoint with one command and the other with a different command.
2707
@value{GDBN} will reject the command if you try to mix watchpoints.
2708
Delete or disable unused watchpoint commands before setting new ones.
2709
 
2710
If you call a function interactively using @code{print} or @code{call},
2711
any watchpoints you have set will be inactive until @value{GDBN} reaches another
2712
kind of breakpoint or the call completes.
2713
 
2714
@value{GDBN} automatically deletes watchpoints that watch local
2715
(automatic) variables, or expressions that involve such variables, when
2716
they go out of scope, that is, when the execution leaves the block in
2717
which these variables were defined.  In particular, when the program
2718
being debugged terminates, @emph{all} local variables go out of scope,
2719
and so only watchpoints that watch global variables remain set.  If you
2720
rerun the program, you will need to set all such watchpoints again.  One
2721
way of doing that would be to set a code breakpoint at the entry to the
2722
@code{main} function and when it breaks, set all the watchpoints.
2723
 
2724
@quotation
2725
@cindex watchpoints and threads
2726
@cindex threads and watchpoints
2727
@emph{Warning:} In multi-thread programs, watchpoints have only limited
2728
usefulness.  With the current watchpoint implementation, @value{GDBN}
2729
can only watch the value of an expression @emph{in a single thread}.  If
2730
you are confident that the expression can only change due to the current
2731
thread's activity (and if you are also confident that no other thread
2732
can become current), then you can use watchpoints as usual.  However,
2733
@value{GDBN} may not notice when a non-current thread's activity changes
2734
the expression.
2735
 
2736
@c FIXME: this is almost identical to the previous paragraph.
2737
@emph{HP-UX Warning:} In multi-thread programs, software watchpoints
2738
have only limited usefulness.  If @value{GDBN} creates a software
2739
watchpoint, it can only watch the value of an expression @emph{in a
2740
single thread}.  If you are confident that the expression can only
2741
change due to the current thread's activity (and if you are also
2742
confident that no other thread can become current), then you can use
2743
software watchpoints as usual.  However, @value{GDBN} may not notice
2744
when a non-current thread's activity changes the expression.  (Hardware
2745
watchpoints, in contrast, watch an expression in all threads.)
2746
@end quotation
2747
 
2748
@node Set Catchpoints
2749
@subsection Setting catchpoints
2750
@cindex catchpoints, setting
2751
@cindex exception handlers
2752
@cindex event handling
2753
 
2754
You can use @dfn{catchpoints} to cause the debugger to stop for certain
2755
kinds of program events, such as C@t{++} exceptions or the loading of a
2756
shared library.  Use the @code{catch} command to set a catchpoint.
2757
 
2758
@table @code
2759
@kindex catch
2760
@item catch @var{event}
2761
Stop when @var{event} occurs.  @var{event} can be any of the following:
2762
@table @code
2763
@item throw
2764
@kindex catch throw
2765
The throwing of a C@t{++} exception.
2766
 
2767
@item catch
2768
@kindex catch catch
2769
The catching of a C@t{++} exception.
2770
 
2771
@item exec
2772
@kindex catch exec
2773
A call to @code{exec}.  This is currently only available for HP-UX.
2774
 
2775
@item fork
2776
@kindex catch fork
2777
A call to @code{fork}.  This is currently only available for HP-UX.
2778
 
2779
@item vfork
2780
@kindex catch vfork
2781
A call to @code{vfork}.  This is currently only available for HP-UX.
2782
 
2783
@item load
2784
@itemx load @var{libname}
2785
@kindex catch load
2786
The dynamic loading of any shared library, or the loading of the library
2787
@var{libname}.  This is currently only available for HP-UX.
2788
 
2789
@item unload
2790
@itemx unload @var{libname}
2791
@kindex catch unload
2792
The unloading of any dynamically loaded shared library, or the unloading
2793
of the library @var{libname}.  This is currently only available for HP-UX.
2794
@end table
2795
 
2796
@item tcatch @var{event}
2797
Set a catchpoint that is enabled only for one stop.  The catchpoint is
2798
automatically deleted after the first time the event is caught.
2799
 
2800
@end table
2801
 
2802
Use the @code{info break} command to list the current catchpoints.
2803
 
2804
There are currently some limitations to C@t{++} exception handling
2805
(@code{catch throw} and @code{catch catch}) in @value{GDBN}:
2806
 
2807
@itemize @bullet
2808
@item
2809
If you call a function interactively, @value{GDBN} normally returns
2810
control to you when the function has finished executing.  If the call
2811
raises an exception, however, the call may bypass the mechanism that
2812
returns control to you and cause your program either to abort or to
2813
simply continue running until it hits a breakpoint, catches a signal
2814
that @value{GDBN} is listening for, or exits.  This is the case even if
2815
you set a catchpoint for the exception; catchpoints on exceptions are
2816
disabled within interactive calls.
2817
 
2818
@item
2819
You cannot raise an exception interactively.
2820
 
2821
@item
2822
You cannot install an exception handler interactively.
2823
@end itemize
2824
 
2825
@cindex raise exceptions
2826
Sometimes @code{catch} is not the best way to debug exception handling:
2827
if you need to know exactly where an exception is raised, it is better to
2828
stop @emph{before} the exception handler is called, since that way you
2829
can see the stack before any unwinding takes place.  If you set a
2830
breakpoint in an exception handler instead, it may not be easy to find
2831
out where the exception was raised.
2832
 
2833
To stop just before an exception handler is called, you need some
2834
knowledge of the implementation.  In the case of @sc{gnu} C@t{++}, exceptions are
2835
raised by calling a library function named @code{__raise_exception}
2836
which has the following ANSI C interface:
2837
 
2838
@smallexample
2839
    /* @var{addr} is where the exception identifier is stored.
2840
       @var{id} is the exception identifier.  */
2841
    void __raise_exception (void **addr, void *id);
2842
@end smallexample
2843
 
2844
@noindent
2845
To make the debugger catch all exceptions before any stack
2846
unwinding takes place, set a breakpoint on @code{__raise_exception}
2847
(@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints; watchpoints; and exceptions}).
2848
 
2849
With a conditional breakpoint (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions})
2850
that depends on the value of @var{id}, you can stop your program when
2851
a specific exception is raised.  You can use multiple conditional
2852
breakpoints to stop your program when any of a number of exceptions are
2853
raised.
2854
 
2855
 
2856
@node Delete Breaks
2857
@subsection Deleting breakpoints
2858
 
2859
@cindex clearing breakpoints, watchpoints, catchpoints
2860
@cindex deleting breakpoints, watchpoints, catchpoints
2861
It is often necessary to eliminate a breakpoint, watchpoint, or
2862
catchpoint once it has done its job and you no longer want your program
2863
to stop there.  This is called @dfn{deleting} the breakpoint.  A
2864
breakpoint that has been deleted no longer exists; it is forgotten.
2865
 
2866
With the @code{clear} command you can delete breakpoints according to
2867
where they are in your program.  With the @code{delete} command you can
2868
delete individual breakpoints, watchpoints, or catchpoints by specifying
2869
their breakpoint numbers.
2870
 
2871
It is not necessary to delete a breakpoint to proceed past it.  @value{GDBN}
2872
automatically ignores breakpoints on the first instruction to be executed
2873
when you continue execution without changing the execution address.
2874
 
2875
@table @code
2876
@kindex clear
2877
@item clear
2878
Delete any breakpoints at the next instruction to be executed in the
2879
selected stack frame (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}).  When
2880
the innermost frame is selected, this is a good way to delete a
2881
breakpoint where your program just stopped.
2882
 
2883
@item clear @var{function}
2884
@itemx clear @var{filename}:@var{function}
2885
Delete any breakpoints set at entry to the function @var{function}.
2886
 
2887
@item clear @var{linenum}
2888
@itemx clear @var{filename}:@var{linenum}
2889
Delete any breakpoints set at or within the code of the specified line.
2890
 
2891
@cindex delete breakpoints
2892
@kindex delete
2893
@kindex d @r{(@code{delete})}
2894
@item delete @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{range}@dots{}@r{]}
2895
Delete the breakpoints, watchpoints, or catchpoints of the breakpoint
2896
ranges specified as arguments.  If no argument is specified, delete all
2897
breakpoints (@value{GDBN} asks confirmation, unless you have @code{set
2898
confirm off}).  You can abbreviate this command as @code{d}.
2899
@end table
2900
 
2901
@node Disabling
2902
@subsection Disabling breakpoints
2903
 
2904
@kindex disable breakpoints
2905
@kindex enable breakpoints
2906
Rather than deleting a breakpoint, watchpoint, or catchpoint, you might
2907
prefer to @dfn{disable} it.  This makes the breakpoint inoperative as if
2908
it had been deleted, but remembers the information on the breakpoint so
2909
that you can @dfn{enable} it again later.
2910
 
2911
You disable and enable breakpoints, watchpoints, and catchpoints with
2912
the @code{enable} and @code{disable} commands, optionally specifying one
2913
or more breakpoint numbers as arguments.  Use @code{info break} or
2914
@code{info watch} to print a list of breakpoints, watchpoints, and
2915
catchpoints if you do not know which numbers to use.
2916
 
2917
A breakpoint, watchpoint, or catchpoint can have any of four different
2918
states of enablement:
2919
 
2920
@itemize @bullet
2921
@item
2922
Enabled.  The breakpoint stops your program.  A breakpoint set
2923
with the @code{break} command starts out in this state.
2924
@item
2925
Disabled.  The breakpoint has no effect on your program.
2926
@item
2927
Enabled once.  The breakpoint stops your program, but then becomes
2928
disabled.
2929
@item
2930
Enabled for deletion.  The breakpoint stops your program, but
2931
immediately after it does so it is deleted permanently.  A breakpoint
2932
set with the @code{tbreak} command starts out in this state.
2933
@end itemize
2934
 
2935
You can use the following commands to enable or disable breakpoints,
2936
watchpoints, and catchpoints:
2937
 
2938
@table @code
2939
@kindex disable breakpoints
2940
@kindex disable
2941
@kindex dis @r{(@code{disable})}
2942
@item disable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{range}@dots{}@r{]}
2943
Disable the specified breakpoints---or all breakpoints, if none are
2944
listed.  A disabled breakpoint has no effect but is not forgotten.  All
2945
options such as ignore-counts, conditions and commands are remembered in
2946
case the breakpoint is enabled again later.  You may abbreviate
2947
@code{disable} as @code{dis}.
2948
 
2949
@kindex enable breakpoints
2950
@kindex enable
2951
@item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{range}@dots{}@r{]}
2952
Enable the specified breakpoints (or all defined breakpoints).  They
2953
become effective once again in stopping your program.
2954
 
2955
@item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} once @var{range}@dots{}
2956
Enable the specified breakpoints temporarily.  @value{GDBN} disables any
2957
of these breakpoints immediately after stopping your program.
2958
 
2959
@item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} delete @var{range}@dots{}
2960
Enable the specified breakpoints to work once, then die.  @value{GDBN}
2961
deletes any of these breakpoints as soon as your program stops there.
2962
@end table
2963
 
2964
@c FIXME: I think the following ``Except for [...] @code{tbreak}'' is
2965
@c confusing: tbreak is also initially enabled.
2966
Except for a breakpoint set with @code{tbreak} (@pxref{Set Breaks,
2967
,Setting breakpoints}), breakpoints that you set are initially enabled;
2968
subsequently, they become disabled or enabled only when you use one of
2969
the commands above.  (The command @code{until} can set and delete a
2970
breakpoint of its own, but it does not change the state of your other
2971
breakpoints; see @ref{Continuing and Stepping, ,Continuing and
2972
stepping}.)
2973
 
2974
@node Conditions
2975
@subsection Break conditions
2976
@cindex conditional breakpoints
2977
@cindex breakpoint conditions
2978
 
2979
@c FIXME what is scope of break condition expr?  Context where wanted?
2980
@c      in particular for a watchpoint?
2981
The simplest sort of breakpoint breaks every time your program reaches a
2982
specified place.  You can also specify a @dfn{condition} for a
2983
breakpoint.  A condition is just a Boolean expression in your
2984
programming language (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).  A breakpoint with
2985
a condition evaluates the expression each time your program reaches it,
2986
and your program stops only if the condition is @emph{true}.
2987
 
2988
This is the converse of using assertions for program validation; in that
2989
situation, you want to stop when the assertion is violated---that is,
2990
when the condition is false.  In C, if you want to test an assertion expressed
2991
by the condition @var{assert}, you should set the condition
2992
@samp{! @var{assert}} on the appropriate breakpoint.
2993
 
2994
Conditions are also accepted for watchpoints; you may not need them,
2995
since a watchpoint is inspecting the value of an expression anyhow---but
2996
it might be simpler, say, to just set a watchpoint on a variable name,
2997
and specify a condition that tests whether the new value is an interesting
2998
one.
2999
 
3000
Break conditions can have side effects, and may even call functions in
3001
your program.  This can be useful, for example, to activate functions
3002
that log program progress, or to use your own print functions to
3003
format special data structures. The effects are completely predictable
3004
unless there is another enabled breakpoint at the same address.  (In
3005
that case, @value{GDBN} might see the other breakpoint first and stop your
3006
program without checking the condition of this one.)  Note that
3007
breakpoint commands are usually more convenient and flexible than break
3008
conditions for the
3009
purpose of performing side effects when a breakpoint is reached
3010
(@pxref{Break Commands, ,Breakpoint command lists}).
3011
 
3012
Break conditions can be specified when a breakpoint is set, by using
3013
@samp{if} in the arguments to the @code{break} command.  @xref{Set
3014
Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}.  They can also be changed at any time
3015
with the @code{condition} command.
3016
 
3017
You can also use the @code{if} keyword with the @code{watch} command.
3018
The @code{catch} command does not recognize the @code{if} keyword;
3019
@code{condition} is the only way to impose a further condition on a
3020
catchpoint.
3021
 
3022
@table @code
3023
@kindex condition
3024
@item condition @var{bnum} @var{expression}
3025
Specify @var{expression} as the break condition for breakpoint,
3026
watchpoint, or catchpoint number @var{bnum}.  After you set a condition,
3027
breakpoint @var{bnum} stops your program only if the value of
3028
@var{expression} is true (nonzero, in C).  When you use
3029
@code{condition}, @value{GDBN} checks @var{expression} immediately for
3030
syntactic correctness, and to determine whether symbols in it have
3031
referents in the context of your breakpoint.  If @var{expression} uses
3032
symbols not referenced in the context of the breakpoint, @value{GDBN}
3033
prints an error message:
3034
 
3035
@smallexample
3036
No symbol "foo" in current context.
3037
@end smallexample
3038
 
3039
@noindent
3040
@value{GDBN} does
3041
not actually evaluate @var{expression} at the time the @code{condition}
3042
command (or a command that sets a breakpoint with a condition, like
3043
@code{break if @dots{}}) is given, however.  @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
3044
 
3045
@item condition @var{bnum}
3046
Remove the condition from breakpoint number @var{bnum}.  It becomes
3047
an ordinary unconditional breakpoint.
3048
@end table
3049
 
3050
@cindex ignore count (of breakpoint)
3051
A special case of a breakpoint condition is to stop only when the
3052
breakpoint has been reached a certain number of times.  This is so
3053
useful that there is a special way to do it, using the @dfn{ignore
3054
count} of the breakpoint.  Every breakpoint has an ignore count, which
3055
is an integer.  Most of the time, the ignore count is zero, and
3056
therefore has no effect.  But if your program reaches a breakpoint whose
3057
ignore count is positive, then instead of stopping, it just decrements
3058
the ignore count by one and continues.  As a result, if the ignore count
3059
value is @var{n}, the breakpoint does not stop the next @var{n} times
3060
your program reaches it.
3061
 
3062
@table @code
3063
@kindex ignore
3064
@item ignore @var{bnum} @var{count}
3065
Set the ignore count of breakpoint number @var{bnum} to @var{count}.
3066
The next @var{count} times the breakpoint is reached, your program's
3067
execution does not stop; other than to decrement the ignore count, @value{GDBN}
3068
takes no action.
3069
 
3070
To make the breakpoint stop the next time it is reached, specify
3071
a count of zero.
3072
 
3073
When you use @code{continue} to resume execution of your program from a
3074
breakpoint, you can specify an ignore count directly as an argument to
3075
@code{continue}, rather than using @code{ignore}.  @xref{Continuing and
3076
Stepping,,Continuing and stepping}.
3077
 
3078
If a breakpoint has a positive ignore count and a condition, the
3079
condition is not checked.  Once the ignore count reaches zero,
3080
@value{GDBN} resumes checking the condition.
3081
 
3082
You could achieve the effect of the ignore count with a condition such
3083
as @w{@samp{$foo-- <= 0}} using a debugger convenience variable that
3084
is decremented each time.  @xref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
3085
variables}.
3086
@end table
3087
 
3088
Ignore counts apply to breakpoints, watchpoints, and catchpoints.
3089
 
3090
 
3091
@node Break Commands
3092
@subsection Breakpoint command lists
3093
 
3094
@cindex breakpoint commands
3095
You can give any breakpoint (or watchpoint or catchpoint) a series of
3096
commands to execute when your program stops due to that breakpoint.  For
3097
example, you might want to print the values of certain expressions, or
3098
enable other breakpoints.
3099
 
3100
@table @code
3101
@kindex commands
3102
@kindex end
3103
@item commands @r{[}@var{bnum}@r{]}
3104
@itemx @dots{} @var{command-list} @dots{}
3105
@itemx end
3106
Specify a list of commands for breakpoint number @var{bnum}.  The commands
3107
themselves appear on the following lines.  Type a line containing just
3108
@code{end} to terminate the commands.
3109
 
3110
To remove all commands from a breakpoint, type @code{commands} and
3111
follow it immediately with @code{end}; that is, give no commands.
3112
 
3113
With no @var{bnum} argument, @code{commands} refers to the last
3114
breakpoint, watchpoint, or catchpoint set (not to the breakpoint most
3115
recently encountered).
3116
@end table
3117
 
3118
Pressing @key{RET} as a means of repeating the last @value{GDBN} command is
3119
disabled within a @var{command-list}.
3120
 
3121
You can use breakpoint commands to start your program up again.  Simply
3122
use the @code{continue} command, or @code{step}, or any other command
3123
that resumes execution.
3124
 
3125
Any other commands in the command list, after a command that resumes
3126
execution, are ignored.  This is because any time you resume execution
3127
(even with a simple @code{next} or @code{step}), you may encounter
3128
another breakpoint---which could have its own command list, leading to
3129
ambiguities about which list to execute.
3130
 
3131
@kindex silent
3132
If the first command you specify in a command list is @code{silent}, the
3133
usual message about stopping at a breakpoint is not printed.  This may
3134
be desirable for breakpoints that are to print a specific message and
3135
then continue.  If none of the remaining commands print anything, you
3136
see no sign that the breakpoint was reached.  @code{silent} is
3137
meaningful only at the beginning of a breakpoint command list.
3138
 
3139
The commands @code{echo}, @code{output}, and @code{printf} allow you to
3140
print precisely controlled output, and are often useful in silent
3141
breakpoints.  @xref{Output, ,Commands for controlled output}.
3142
 
3143
For example, here is how you could use breakpoint commands to print the
3144
value of @code{x} at entry to @code{foo} whenever @code{x} is positive.
3145
 
3146
@smallexample
3147
break foo if x>0
3148
commands
3149
silent
3150
printf "x is %d\n",x
3151
cont
3152
end
3153
@end smallexample
3154
 
3155
One application for breakpoint commands is to compensate for one bug so
3156
you can test for another.  Put a breakpoint just after the erroneous line
3157
of code, give it a condition to detect the case in which something
3158
erroneous has been done, and give it commands to assign correct values
3159
to any variables that need them.  End with the @code{continue} command
3160
so that your program does not stop, and start with the @code{silent}
3161
command so that no output is produced.  Here is an example:
3162
 
3163
@smallexample
3164
break 403
3165
commands
3166
silent
3167
set x = y + 4
3168
cont
3169
end
3170
@end smallexample
3171
 
3172
@node Breakpoint Menus
3173
@subsection Breakpoint menus
3174
@cindex overloading
3175
@cindex symbol overloading
3176
 
3177
Some programming languages (notably C@t{++}) permit a single function name
3178
to be defined several times, for application in different contexts.
3179
This is called @dfn{overloading}.  When a function name is overloaded,
3180
@samp{break @var{function}} is not enough to tell @value{GDBN} where you want
3181
a breakpoint.  If you realize this is a problem, you can use
3182
something like @samp{break @var{function}(@var{types})} to specify which
3183
particular version of the function you want.  Otherwise, @value{GDBN} offers
3184
you a menu of numbered choices for different possible breakpoints, and
3185
waits for your selection with the prompt @samp{>}.  The first two
3186
options are always @samp{[0] cancel} and @samp{[1] all}.  Typing @kbd{1}
3187
sets a breakpoint at each definition of @var{function}, and typing
3188
@kbd{0} aborts the @code{break} command without setting any new
3189
breakpoints.
3190
 
3191
For example, the following session excerpt shows an attempt to set a
3192
breakpoint at the overloaded symbol @code{String::after}.
3193
We choose three particular definitions of that function name:
3194
 
3195
@c FIXME! This is likely to change to show arg type lists, at least
3196
@smallexample
3197
@group
3198
(@value{GDBP}) b String::after
3199
[0] cancel
3200
[1] all
3201
[2] file:String.cc; line number:867
3202
[3] file:String.cc; line number:860
3203
[4] file:String.cc; line number:875
3204
[5] file:String.cc; line number:853
3205
[6] file:String.cc; line number:846
3206
[7] file:String.cc; line number:735
3207
> 2 4 6
3208
Breakpoint 1 at 0xb26c: file String.cc, line 867.
3209
Breakpoint 2 at 0xb344: file String.cc, line 875.
3210
Breakpoint 3 at 0xafcc: file String.cc, line 846.
3211
Multiple breakpoints were set.
3212
Use the "delete" command to delete unwanted
3213
 breakpoints.
3214
(@value{GDBP})
3215
@end group
3216
@end smallexample
3217
 
3218
@c  @ifclear BARETARGET
3219
@node Error in Breakpoints
3220
@subsection ``Cannot insert breakpoints''
3221
@c
3222
@c  FIXME!! 14/6/95  Is there a real example of this?  Let's use it.
3223
@c
3224
Under some operating systems, breakpoints cannot be used in a program if
3225
any other process is running that program.  In this situation,
3226
attempting to run or continue a program with a breakpoint causes
3227
@value{GDBN} to print an error message:
3228
 
3229
@smallexample
3230
Cannot insert breakpoints.
3231
The same program may be running in another process.
3232
@end smallexample
3233
 
3234
When this happens, you have three ways to proceed:
3235
 
3236
@enumerate
3237
@item
3238
Remove or disable the breakpoints, then continue.
3239
 
3240
@item
3241
Suspend @value{GDBN}, and copy the file containing your program to a new
3242
name.  Resume @value{GDBN} and use the @code{exec-file} command to specify
3243
that @value{GDBN} should run your program under that name.
3244
Then start your program again.
3245
 
3246
@item
3247
Relink your program so that the text segment is nonsharable, using the
3248
linker option @samp{-N}.  The operating system limitation may not apply
3249
to nonsharable executables.
3250
@end enumerate
3251
@c  @end ifclear
3252
 
3253
A similar message can be printed if you request too many active
3254
hardware-assisted breakpoints and watchpoints:
3255
 
3256
@c FIXME: the precise wording of this message may change; the relevant
3257
@c source change is not committed yet (Sep 3, 1999).
3258
@smallexample
3259
Stopped; cannot insert breakpoints.
3260
You may have requested too many hardware breakpoints and watchpoints.
3261
@end smallexample
3262
 
3263
@noindent
3264
This message is printed when you attempt to resume the program, since
3265
only then @value{GDBN} knows exactly how many hardware breakpoints and
3266
watchpoints it needs to insert.
3267
 
3268
When this message is printed, you need to disable or remove some of the
3269
hardware-assisted breakpoints and watchpoints, and then continue.
3270
 
3271
 
3272
@node Continuing and Stepping
3273
@section Continuing and stepping
3274
 
3275
@cindex stepping
3276
@cindex continuing
3277
@cindex resuming execution
3278
@dfn{Continuing} means resuming program execution until your program
3279
completes normally.  In contrast, @dfn{stepping} means executing just
3280
one more ``step'' of your program, where ``step'' may mean either one
3281
line of source code, or one machine instruction (depending on what
3282
particular command you use).  Either when continuing or when stepping,
3283
your program may stop even sooner, due to a breakpoint or a signal.  (If
3284
it stops due to a signal, you may want to use @code{handle}, or use
3285
@samp{signal 0} to resume execution.  @xref{Signals, ,Signals}.)
3286
 
3287
@table @code
3288
@kindex continue
3289
@kindex c @r{(@code{continue})}
3290
@kindex fg @r{(resume foreground execution)}
3291
@item continue @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
3292
@itemx c @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
3293
@itemx fg @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
3294
Resume program execution, at the address where your program last stopped;
3295
any breakpoints set at that address are bypassed.  The optional argument
3296
@var{ignore-count} allows you to specify a further number of times to
3297
ignore a breakpoint at this location; its effect is like that of
3298
@code{ignore} (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions}).
3299
 
3300
The argument @var{ignore-count} is meaningful only when your program
3301
stopped due to a breakpoint.  At other times, the argument to
3302
@code{continue} is ignored.
3303
 
3304
The synonyms @code{c} and @code{fg} (for @dfn{foreground}, as the
3305
debugged program is deemed to be the foreground program) are provided
3306
purely for convenience, and have exactly the same behavior as
3307
@code{continue}.
3308
@end table
3309
 
3310
To resume execution at a different place, you can use @code{return}
3311
(@pxref{Returning, ,Returning from a function}) to go back to the
3312
calling function; or @code{jump} (@pxref{Jumping, ,Continuing at a
3313
different address}) to go to an arbitrary location in your program.
3314
 
3315
A typical technique for using stepping is to set a breakpoint
3316
(@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints; watchpoints; and catchpoints}) at the
3317
beginning of the function or the section of your program where a problem
3318
is believed to lie, run your program until it stops at that breakpoint,
3319
and then step through the suspect area, examining the variables that are
3320
interesting, until you see the problem happen.
3321
 
3322
@table @code
3323
@kindex step
3324
@kindex s @r{(@code{step})}
3325
@item step
3326
Continue running your program until control reaches a different source
3327
line, then stop it and return control to @value{GDBN}.  This command is
3328
abbreviated @code{s}.
3329
 
3330
@quotation
3331
@c "without debugging information" is imprecise; actually "without line
3332
@c numbers in the debugging information".  (gcc -g1 has debugging info but
3333
@c not line numbers).  But it seems complex to try to make that
3334
@c distinction here.
3335
@emph{Warning:} If you use the @code{step} command while control is
3336
within a function that was compiled without debugging information,
3337
execution proceeds until control reaches a function that does have
3338
debugging information.  Likewise, it will not step into a function which
3339
is compiled without debugging information.  To step through functions
3340
without debugging information, use the @code{stepi} command, described
3341
below.
3342
@end quotation
3343
 
3344
The @code{step} command only stops at the first instruction of a source
3345
line.  This prevents the multiple stops that could otherwise occur in
3346
@code{switch} statements, @code{for} loops, etc.  @code{step} continues
3347
to stop if a function that has debugging information is called within
3348
the line.  In other words, @code{step} @emph{steps inside} any functions
3349
called within the line.
3350
 
3351
Also, the @code{step} command only enters a function if there is line
3352
number information for the function.  Otherwise it acts like the
3353
@code{next} command.  This avoids problems when using @code{cc -gl}
3354
on MIPS machines.  Previously, @code{step} entered subroutines if there
3355
was any debugging information about the routine.
3356
 
3357
@item step @var{count}
3358
Continue running as in @code{step}, but do so @var{count} times.  If a
3359
breakpoint is reached, or a signal not related to stepping occurs before
3360
@var{count} steps, stepping stops right away.
3361
 
3362
@kindex next
3363
@kindex n @r{(@code{next})}
3364
@item next @r{[}@var{count}@r{]}
3365
Continue to the next source line in the current (innermost) stack frame.
3366
This is similar to @code{step}, but function calls that appear within
3367
the line of code are executed without stopping.  Execution stops when
3368
control reaches a different line of code at the original stack level
3369
that was executing when you gave the @code{next} command.  This command
3370
is abbreviated @code{n}.
3371
 
3372
An argument @var{count} is a repeat count, as for @code{step}.
3373
 
3374
 
3375
@c  FIX ME!!  Do we delete this, or is there a way it fits in with
3376
@c  the following paragraph?   ---  Vctoria
3377
@c
3378
@c  @code{next} within a function that lacks debugging information acts like
3379
@c  @code{step}, but any function calls appearing within the code of the
3380
@c  function are executed without stopping.
3381
 
3382
The @code{next} command only stops at the first instruction of a
3383
source line.  This prevents multiple stops that could otherwise occur in
3384
@code{switch} statements, @code{for} loops, etc.
3385
 
3386
@kindex set step-mode
3387
@item set step-mode
3388
@cindex functions without line info, and stepping
3389
@cindex stepping into functions with no line info
3390
@itemx set step-mode on
3391
The @code{set step-mode on} command causes the @code{step} command to
3392
stop at the first instruction of a function which contains no debug line
3393
information rather than stepping over it.
3394
 
3395
This is useful in cases where you may be interested in inspecting the
3396
machine instructions of a function which has no symbolic info and do not
3397
want @value{GDBN} to automatically skip over this function.
3398
 
3399
@item set step-mode off
3400
Causes the @code{step} command to step over any functions which contains no
3401
debug information.  This is the default.
3402
 
3403
@kindex finish
3404
@item finish
3405
Continue running until just after function in the selected stack frame
3406
returns.  Print the returned value (if any).
3407
 
3408
Contrast this with the @code{return} command (@pxref{Returning,
3409
,Returning from a function}).
3410
 
3411
@kindex until
3412
@kindex u @r{(@code{until})}
3413
@item until
3414
@itemx u
3415
Continue running until a source line past the current line, in the
3416
current stack frame, is reached.  This command is used to avoid single
3417
stepping through a loop more than once.  It is like the @code{next}
3418
command, except that when @code{until} encounters a jump, it
3419
automatically continues execution until the program counter is greater
3420
than the address of the jump.
3421
 
3422
This means that when you reach the end of a loop after single stepping
3423
though it, @code{until} makes your program continue execution until it
3424
exits the loop.  In contrast, a @code{next} command at the end of a loop
3425
simply steps back to the beginning of the loop, which forces you to step
3426
through the next iteration.
3427
 
3428
@code{until} always stops your program if it attempts to exit the current
3429
stack frame.
3430
 
3431
@code{until} may produce somewhat counterintuitive results if the order
3432
of machine code does not match the order of the source lines.  For
3433
example, in the following excerpt from a debugging session, the @code{f}
3434
(@code{frame}) command shows that execution is stopped at line
3435
@code{206}; yet when we use @code{until}, we get to line @code{195}:
3436
 
3437
@smallexample
3438
(@value{GDBP}) f
3439
#0  main (argc=4, argv=0xf7fffae8) at m4.c:206
3440
206                 expand_input();
3441
(@value{GDBP}) until
3442
195             for ( ; argc > 0; NEXTARG) @{
3443
@end smallexample
3444
 
3445
This happened because, for execution efficiency, the compiler had
3446
generated code for the loop closure test at the end, rather than the
3447
start, of the loop---even though the test in a C @code{for}-loop is
3448
written before the body of the loop.  The @code{until} command appeared
3449
to step back to the beginning of the loop when it advanced to this
3450
expression; however, it has not really gone to an earlier
3451
statement---not in terms of the actual machine code.
3452
 
3453
@code{until} with no argument works by means of single
3454
instruction stepping, and hence is slower than @code{until} with an
3455
argument.
3456
 
3457
@item until @var{location}
3458
@itemx u @var{location}
3459
Continue running your program until either the specified location is
3460
reached, or the current stack frame returns.  @var{location} is any of
3461
the forms of argument acceptable to @code{break} (@pxref{Set Breaks,
3462
,Setting breakpoints}).  This form of the command uses breakpoints,
3463
and hence is quicker than @code{until} without an argument.
3464
 
3465
@kindex stepi
3466
@kindex si @r{(@code{stepi})}
3467
@item stepi
3468
@itemx stepi @var{arg}
3469
@itemx si
3470
Execute one machine instruction, then stop and return to the debugger.
3471
 
3472
It is often useful to do @samp{display/i $pc} when stepping by machine
3473
instructions.  This makes @value{GDBN} automatically display the next
3474
instruction to be executed, each time your program stops.  @xref{Auto
3475
Display,, Automatic display}.
3476
 
3477
An argument is a repeat count, as in @code{step}.
3478
 
3479
@need 750
3480
@kindex nexti
3481
@kindex ni @r{(@code{nexti})}
3482
@item nexti
3483
@itemx nexti @var{arg}
3484
@itemx ni
3485
Execute one machine instruction, but if it is a function call,
3486
proceed until the function returns.
3487
 
3488
An argument is a repeat count, as in @code{next}.
3489
@end table
3490
 
3491
@node Signals
3492
@section Signals
3493
@cindex signals
3494
 
3495
A signal is an asynchronous event that can happen in a program.  The
3496
operating system defines the possible kinds of signals, and gives each
3497
kind a name and a number.  For example, in Unix @code{SIGINT} is the
3498
signal a program gets when you type an interrupt character (often @kbd{C-c});
3499
@code{SIGSEGV} is the signal a program gets from referencing a place in
3500
memory far away from all the areas in use; @code{SIGALRM} occurs when
3501
the alarm clock timer goes off (which happens only if your program has
3502
requested an alarm).
3503
 
3504
@cindex fatal signals
3505
Some signals, including @code{SIGALRM}, are a normal part of the
3506
functioning of your program.  Others, such as @code{SIGSEGV}, indicate
3507
errors; these signals are @dfn{fatal} (they kill your program immediately) if the
3508
program has not specified in advance some other way to handle the signal.
3509
@code{SIGINT} does not indicate an error in your program, but it is normally
3510
fatal so it can carry out the purpose of the interrupt: to kill the program.
3511
 
3512
@value{GDBN} has the ability to detect any occurrence of a signal in your
3513
program.  You can tell @value{GDBN} in advance what to do for each kind of
3514
signal.
3515
 
3516
@cindex handling signals
3517
Normally, @value{GDBN} is set up to let the non-erroneous signals like
3518
@code{SIGALRM} be silently passed to your program
3519
(so as not to interfere with their role in the program's functioning)
3520
but to stop your program immediately whenever an error signal happens.
3521
You can change these settings with the @code{handle} command.
3522
 
3523
@table @code
3524
@kindex info signals
3525
@item info signals
3526
@itemx info handle
3527
Print a table of all the kinds of signals and how @value{GDBN} has been told to
3528
handle each one.  You can use this to see the signal numbers of all
3529
the defined types of signals.
3530
 
3531
@code{info handle} is an alias for @code{info signals}.
3532
 
3533
@kindex handle
3534
@item handle @var{signal} @var{keywords}@dots{}
3535
Change the way @value{GDBN} handles signal @var{signal}.  @var{signal}
3536
can be the number of a signal or its name (with or without the
3537
@samp{SIG} at the beginning); a list of signal numbers of the form
3538
@samp{@var{low}-@var{high}}; or the word @samp{all}, meaning all the
3539
known signals.  The @var{keywords} say what change to make.
3540
@end table
3541
 
3542
@c @group
3543
The keywords allowed by the @code{handle} command can be abbreviated.
3544
Their full names are:
3545
 
3546
@table @code
3547
@item nostop
3548
@value{GDBN} should not stop your program when this signal happens.  It may
3549
still print a message telling you that the signal has come in.
3550
 
3551
@item stop
3552
@value{GDBN} should stop your program when this signal happens.  This implies
3553
the @code{print} keyword as well.
3554
 
3555
@item print
3556
@value{GDBN} should print a message when this signal happens.
3557
 
3558
@item noprint
3559
@value{GDBN} should not mention the occurrence of the signal at all.  This
3560
implies the @code{nostop} keyword as well.
3561
 
3562
@item pass
3563
@itemx noignore
3564
@value{GDBN} should allow your program to see this signal; your program
3565
can handle the signal, or else it may terminate if the signal is fatal
3566
and not handled.  @code{pass} and @code{noignore} are synonyms.
3567
 
3568
@item nopass
3569
@itemx ignore
3570
@value{GDBN} should not allow your program to see this signal.
3571
@code{nopass} and @code{ignore} are synonyms.
3572
@end table
3573
@c @end group
3574
 
3575
When a signal stops your program, the signal is not visible to the
3576
program until you
3577
continue.  Your program sees the signal then, if @code{pass} is in
3578
effect for the signal in question @emph{at that time}.  In other words,
3579
after @value{GDBN} reports a signal, you can use the @code{handle}
3580
command with @code{pass} or @code{nopass} to control whether your
3581
program sees that signal when you continue.
3582
 
3583
The default is set to @code{nostop}, @code{noprint}, @code{pass} for
3584
non-erroneous signals such as @code{SIGALRM}, @code{SIGWINCH} and
3585
@code{SIGCHLD}, and to @code{stop}, @code{print}, @code{pass} for the
3586
erroneous signals.
3587
 
3588
You can also use the @code{signal} command to prevent your program from
3589
seeing a signal, or cause it to see a signal it normally would not see,
3590
or to give it any signal at any time.  For example, if your program stopped
3591
due to some sort of memory reference error, you might store correct
3592
values into the erroneous variables and continue, hoping to see more
3593
execution; but your program would probably terminate immediately as
3594
a result of the fatal signal once it saw the signal.  To prevent this,
3595
you can continue with @samp{signal 0}.  @xref{Signaling, ,Giving your
3596
program a signal}.
3597
 
3598
@node Thread Stops
3599
@section Stopping and starting multi-thread programs
3600
 
3601
When your program has multiple threads (@pxref{Threads,, Debugging
3602
programs with multiple threads}), you can choose whether to set
3603
breakpoints on all threads, or on a particular thread.
3604
 
3605
@table @code
3606
@cindex breakpoints and threads
3607
@cindex thread breakpoints
3608
@kindex break @dots{} thread @var{threadno}
3609
@item break @var{linespec} thread @var{threadno}
3610
@itemx break @var{linespec} thread @var{threadno} if @dots{}
3611
@var{linespec} specifies source lines; there are several ways of
3612
writing them, but the effect is always to specify some source line.
3613
 
3614
Use the qualifier @samp{thread @var{threadno}} with a breakpoint command
3615
to specify that you only want @value{GDBN} to stop the program when a
3616
particular thread reaches this breakpoint.  @var{threadno} is one of the
3617
numeric thread identifiers assigned by @value{GDBN}, shown in the first
3618
column of the @samp{info threads} display.
3619
 
3620
If you do not specify @samp{thread @var{threadno}} when you set a
3621
breakpoint, the breakpoint applies to @emph{all} threads of your
3622
program.
3623
 
3624
You can use the @code{thread} qualifier on conditional breakpoints as
3625
well; in this case, place @samp{thread @var{threadno}} before the
3626
breakpoint condition, like this:
3627
 
3628
@smallexample
3629
(@value{GDBP}) break frik.c:13 thread 28 if bartab > lim
3630
@end smallexample
3631
 
3632
@end table
3633
 
3634
@cindex stopped threads
3635
@cindex threads, stopped
3636
Whenever your program stops under @value{GDBN} for any reason,
3637
@emph{all} threads of execution stop, not just the current thread.  This
3638
allows you to examine the overall state of the program, including
3639
switching between threads, without worrying that things may change
3640
underfoot.
3641
 
3642
@cindex continuing threads
3643
@cindex threads, continuing
3644
Conversely, whenever you restart the program, @emph{all} threads start
3645
executing.  @emph{This is true even when single-stepping} with commands
3646
like @code{step} or @code{next}.
3647
 
3648
In particular, @value{GDBN} cannot single-step all threads in lockstep.
3649
Since thread scheduling is up to your debugging target's operating
3650
system (not controlled by @value{GDBN}), other threads may
3651
execute more than one statement while the current thread completes a
3652
single step.  Moreover, in general other threads stop in the middle of a
3653
statement, rather than at a clean statement boundary, when the program
3654
stops.
3655
 
3656
You might even find your program stopped in another thread after
3657
continuing or even single-stepping.  This happens whenever some other
3658
thread runs into a breakpoint, a signal, or an exception before the
3659
first thread completes whatever you requested.
3660
 
3661
On some OSes, you can lock the OS scheduler and thus allow only a single
3662
thread to run.
3663
 
3664
@table @code
3665
@item set scheduler-locking @var{mode}
3666
Set the scheduler locking mode.  If it is @code{off}, then there is no
3667
locking and any thread may run at any time.  If @code{on}, then only the
3668
current thread may run when the inferior is resumed.  The @code{step}
3669
mode optimizes for single-stepping.  It stops other threads from
3670
``seizing the prompt'' by preempting the current thread while you are
3671
stepping.  Other threads will only rarely (or never) get a chance to run
3672
when you step.  They are more likely to run when you @samp{next} over a
3673
function call, and they are completely free to run when you use commands
3674
like @samp{continue}, @samp{until}, or @samp{finish}.  However, unless another
3675
thread hits a breakpoint during its timeslice, they will never steal the
3676
@value{GDBN} prompt away from the thread that you are debugging.
3677
 
3678
@item show scheduler-locking
3679
Display the current scheduler locking mode.
3680
@end table
3681
 
3682
 
3683
@node Stack
3684
@chapter Examining the Stack
3685
 
3686
When your program has stopped, the first thing you need to know is where it
3687
stopped and how it got there.
3688
 
3689
@cindex call stack
3690
Each time your program performs a function call, information about the call
3691
is generated.
3692
That information includes the location of the call in your program,
3693
the arguments of the call,
3694
and the local variables of the function being called.
3695
The information is saved in a block of data called a @dfn{stack frame}.
3696
The stack frames are allocated in a region of memory called the @dfn{call
3697
stack}.
3698
 
3699
When your program stops, the @value{GDBN} commands for examining the
3700
stack allow you to see all of this information.
3701
 
3702
@cindex selected frame
3703
One of the stack frames is @dfn{selected} by @value{GDBN} and many
3704
@value{GDBN} commands refer implicitly to the selected frame.  In
3705
particular, whenever you ask @value{GDBN} for the value of a variable in
3706
your program, the value is found in the selected frame.  There are
3707
special @value{GDBN} commands to select whichever frame you are
3708
interested in. @xref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}.
3709
 
3710
When your program stops, @value{GDBN} automatically selects the
3711
currently executing frame and describes it briefly, similar to the
3712
@code{frame} command (@pxref{Frame Info, ,Information about a frame}).
3713
 
3714
@menu
3715
* Frames::                      Stack frames
3716
* Backtrace::                   Backtraces
3717
* Selection::                   Selecting a frame
3718
* Frame Info::                  Information on a frame
3719
 
3720
@end menu
3721
 
3722
@node Frames
3723
@section Stack frames
3724
 
3725
@cindex frame, definition
3726
@cindex stack frame
3727
The call stack is divided up into contiguous pieces called @dfn{stack
3728
frames}, or @dfn{frames} for short; each frame is the data associated
3729
with one call to one function.  The frame contains the arguments given
3730
to the function, the function's local variables, and the address at
3731
which the function is executing.
3732
 
3733
@cindex initial frame
3734
@cindex outermost frame
3735
@cindex innermost frame
3736
When your program is started, the stack has only one frame, that of the
3737
function @code{main}.  This is called the @dfn{initial} frame or the
3738
@dfn{outermost} frame.  Each time a function is called, a new frame is
3739
made.  Each time a function returns, the frame for that function invocation
3740
is eliminated.  If a function is recursive, there can be many frames for
3741
the same function.  The frame for the function in which execution is
3742
actually occurring is called the @dfn{innermost} frame.  This is the most
3743
recently created of all the stack frames that still exist.
3744
 
3745
@cindex frame pointer
3746
Inside your program, stack frames are identified by their addresses.  A
3747
stack frame consists of many bytes, each of which has its own address; each
3748
kind of computer has a convention for choosing one byte whose
3749
address serves as the address of the frame.  Usually this address is kept
3750
in a register called the @dfn{frame pointer register} while execution is
3751
going on in that frame.
3752
 
3753
@cindex frame number
3754
@value{GDBN} assigns numbers to all existing stack frames, starting with
3755
zero for the innermost frame, one for the frame that called it,
3756
and so on upward.  These numbers do not really exist in your program;
3757
they are assigned by @value{GDBN} to give you a way of designating stack
3758
frames in @value{GDBN} commands.
3759
 
3760
@c The -fomit-frame-pointer below perennially causes hbox overflow
3761
@c underflow problems.
3762
@cindex frameless execution
3763
Some compilers provide a way to compile functions so that they operate
3764
without stack frames.  (For example, the @value{GCC} option
3765
@smallexample
3766
@samp{-fomit-frame-pointer}
3767
@end smallexample
3768
generates functions without a frame.)
3769
This is occasionally done with heavily used library functions to save
3770
the frame setup time.  @value{GDBN} has limited facilities for dealing
3771
with these function invocations.  If the innermost function invocation
3772
has no stack frame, @value{GDBN} nevertheless regards it as though
3773
it had a separate frame, which is numbered zero as usual, allowing
3774
correct tracing of the function call chain.  However, @value{GDBN} has
3775
no provision for frameless functions elsewhere in the stack.
3776
 
3777
@table @code
3778
@kindex frame@r{, command}
3779
@cindex current stack frame
3780
@item frame @var{args}
3781
The @code{frame} command allows you to move from one stack frame to another,
3782
and to print the stack frame you select.  @var{args} may be either the
3783
address of the frame or the stack frame number.  Without an argument,
3784
@code{frame} prints the current stack frame.
3785
 
3786
@kindex select-frame
3787
@cindex selecting frame silently
3788
@item select-frame
3789
The @code{select-frame} command allows you to move from one stack frame
3790
to another without printing the frame.  This is the silent version of
3791
@code{frame}.
3792
@end table
3793
 
3794
@node Backtrace
3795
@section Backtraces
3796
 
3797
@cindex backtraces
3798
@cindex tracebacks
3799
@cindex stack traces
3800
A backtrace is a summary of how your program got where it is.  It shows one
3801
line per frame, for many frames, starting with the currently executing
3802
frame (frame zero), followed by its caller (frame one), and on up the
3803
stack.
3804
 
3805
@table @code
3806
@kindex backtrace
3807
@kindex bt @r{(@code{backtrace})}
3808
@item backtrace
3809
@itemx bt
3810
Print a backtrace of the entire stack: one line per frame for all
3811
frames in the stack.
3812
 
3813
You can stop the backtrace at any time by typing the system interrupt
3814
character, normally @kbd{C-c}.
3815
 
3816
@item backtrace @var{n}
3817
@itemx bt @var{n}
3818
Similar, but print only the innermost @var{n} frames.
3819
 
3820
@item backtrace -@var{n}
3821
@itemx bt -@var{n}
3822
Similar, but print only the outermost @var{n} frames.
3823
@end table
3824
 
3825
@kindex where
3826
@kindex info stack
3827
@kindex info s @r{(@code{info stack})}
3828
The names @code{where} and @code{info stack} (abbreviated @code{info s})
3829
are additional aliases for @code{backtrace}.
3830
 
3831
Each line in the backtrace shows the frame number and the function name.
3832
The program counter value is also shown---unless you use @code{set
3833
print address off}.  The backtrace also shows the source file name and
3834
line number, as well as the arguments to the function.  The program
3835
counter value is omitted if it is at the beginning of the code for that
3836
line number.
3837
 
3838
Here is an example of a backtrace.  It was made with the command
3839
@samp{bt 3}, so it shows the innermost three frames.
3840
 
3841
@smallexample
3842
@group
3843
#0  m4_traceon (obs=0x24eb0, argc=1, argv=0x2b8c8)
3844
    at builtin.c:993
3845
#1  0x6e38 in expand_macro (sym=0x2b600) at macro.c:242
3846
#2  0x6840 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=177664, td=0xf7fffb08)
3847
    at macro.c:71
3848
(More stack frames follow...)
3849
@end group
3850
@end smallexample
3851
 
3852
@noindent
3853
The display for frame zero does not begin with a program counter
3854
value, indicating that your program has stopped at the beginning of the
3855
code for line @code{993} of @code{builtin.c}.
3856
 
3857
@node Selection
3858
@section Selecting a frame
3859
 
3860
Most commands for examining the stack and other data in your program work on
3861
whichever stack frame is selected at the moment.  Here are the commands for
3862
selecting a stack frame; all of them finish by printing a brief description
3863
of the stack frame just selected.
3864
 
3865
@table @code
3866
@kindex frame@r{, selecting}
3867
@kindex f @r{(@code{frame})}
3868
@item frame @var{n}
3869
@itemx f @var{n}
3870
Select frame number @var{n}.  Recall that frame zero is the innermost
3871
(currently executing) frame, frame one is the frame that called the
3872
innermost one, and so on.  The highest-numbered frame is the one for
3873
@code{main}.
3874
 
3875
@item frame @var{addr}
3876
@itemx f @var{addr}
3877
Select the frame at address @var{addr}.  This is useful mainly if the
3878
chaining of stack frames has been damaged by a bug, making it
3879
impossible for @value{GDBN} to assign numbers properly to all frames.  In
3880
addition, this can be useful when your program has multiple stacks and
3881
switches between them.
3882
 
3883
On the SPARC architecture, @code{frame} needs two addresses to
3884
select an arbitrary frame: a frame pointer and a stack pointer.
3885
 
3886
On the MIPS and Alpha architecture, it needs two addresses: a stack
3887
pointer and a program counter.
3888
 
3889
On the 29k architecture, it needs three addresses: a register stack
3890
pointer, a program counter, and a memory stack pointer.
3891
@c note to future updaters: this is conditioned on a flag
3892
@c SETUP_ARBITRARY_FRAME in the tm-*.h files.  The above is up to date
3893
@c as of 27 Jan 1994.
3894
 
3895
@kindex up
3896
@item up @var{n}
3897
Move @var{n} frames up the stack.  For positive numbers @var{n}, this
3898
advances toward the outermost frame, to higher frame numbers, to frames
3899
that have existed longer.  @var{n} defaults to one.
3900
 
3901
@kindex down
3902
@kindex do @r{(@code{down})}
3903
@item down @var{n}
3904
Move @var{n} frames down the stack.  For positive numbers @var{n}, this
3905
advances toward the innermost frame, to lower frame numbers, to frames
3906
that were created more recently.  @var{n} defaults to one.  You may
3907
abbreviate @code{down} as @code{do}.
3908
@end table
3909
 
3910
All of these commands end by printing two lines of output describing the
3911
frame.  The first line shows the frame number, the function name, the
3912
arguments, and the source file and line number of execution in that
3913
frame.  The second line shows the text of that source line.
3914
 
3915
@need 1000
3916
For example:
3917
 
3918
@smallexample
3919
@group
3920
(@value{GDBP}) up
3921
#1  0x22f0 in main (argc=1, argv=0xf7fffbf4, env=0xf7fffbfc)
3922
    at env.c:10
3923
10              read_input_file (argv[i]);
3924
@end group
3925
@end smallexample
3926
 
3927
After such a printout, the @code{list} command with no arguments
3928
prints ten lines centered on the point of execution in the frame.
3929
@xref{List, ,Printing source lines}.
3930
 
3931
@table @code
3932
@kindex down-silently
3933
@kindex up-silently
3934
@item up-silently @var{n}
3935
@itemx down-silently @var{n}
3936
These two commands are variants of @code{up} and @code{down},
3937
respectively; they differ in that they do their work silently, without
3938
causing display of the new frame.  They are intended primarily for use
3939
in @value{GDBN} command scripts, where the output might be unnecessary and
3940
distracting.
3941
@end table
3942
 
3943
@node Frame Info
3944
@section Information about a frame
3945
 
3946
There are several other commands to print information about the selected
3947
stack frame.
3948
 
3949
@table @code
3950
@item frame
3951
@itemx f
3952
When used without any argument, this command does not change which
3953
frame is selected, but prints a brief description of the currently
3954
selected stack frame.  It can be abbreviated @code{f}.  With an
3955
argument, this command is used to select a stack frame.
3956
@xref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}.
3957
 
3958
@kindex info frame
3959
@kindex info f @r{(@code{info frame})}
3960
@item info frame
3961
@itemx info f
3962
This command prints a verbose description of the selected stack frame,
3963
including:
3964
 
3965
@itemize @bullet
3966
@item
3967
the address of the frame
3968
@item
3969
the address of the next frame down (called by this frame)
3970
@item
3971
the address of the next frame up (caller of this frame)
3972
@item
3973
the language in which the source code corresponding to this frame is written
3974
@item
3975
the address of the frame's arguments
3976
@item
3977
the address of the frame's local variables
3978
@item
3979
the program counter saved in it (the address of execution in the caller frame)
3980
@item
3981
which registers were saved in the frame
3982
@end itemize
3983
 
3984
@noindent The verbose description is useful when
3985
something has gone wrong that has made the stack format fail to fit
3986
the usual conventions.
3987
 
3988
@item info frame @var{addr}
3989
@itemx info f @var{addr}
3990
Print a verbose description of the frame at address @var{addr}, without
3991
selecting that frame.  The selected frame remains unchanged by this
3992
command.  This requires the same kind of address (more than one for some
3993
architectures) that you specify in the @code{frame} command.
3994
@xref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}.
3995
 
3996
@kindex info args
3997
@item info args
3998
Print the arguments of the selected frame, each on a separate line.
3999
 
4000
@item info locals
4001
@kindex info locals
4002
Print the local variables of the selected frame, each on a separate
4003
line.  These are all variables (declared either static or automatic)
4004
accessible at the point of execution of the selected frame.
4005
 
4006
@kindex info catch
4007
@cindex catch exceptions, list active handlers
4008
@cindex exception handlers, how to list
4009
@item info catch
4010
Print a list of all the exception handlers that are active in the
4011
current stack frame at the current point of execution.  To see other
4012
exception handlers, visit the associated frame (using the @code{up},
4013
@code{down}, or @code{frame} commands); then type @code{info catch}.
4014
@xref{Set Catchpoints, , Setting catchpoints}.
4015
 
4016
@end table
4017
 
4018
 
4019
@node Source
4020
@chapter Examining Source Files
4021
 
4022
@value{GDBN} can print parts of your program's source, since the debugging
4023
information recorded in the program tells @value{GDBN} what source files were
4024
used to build it.  When your program stops, @value{GDBN} spontaneously prints
4025
the line where it stopped.  Likewise, when you select a stack frame
4026
(@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}), @value{GDBN} prints the line where
4027
execution in that frame has stopped.  You can print other portions of
4028
source files by explicit command.
4029
 
4030
If you use @value{GDBN} through its @sc{gnu} Emacs interface, you may
4031
prefer to use Emacs facilities to view source; see @ref{Emacs, ,Using
4032
@value{GDBN} under @sc{gnu} Emacs}.
4033
 
4034
@menu
4035
* List::                        Printing source lines
4036
* Search::                      Searching source files
4037
* Source Path::                 Specifying source directories
4038
* Machine Code::                Source and machine code
4039
@end menu
4040
 
4041
@node List
4042
@section Printing source lines
4043
 
4044
@kindex list
4045
@kindex l @r{(@code{list})}
4046
To print lines from a source file, use the @code{list} command
4047
(abbreviated @code{l}).  By default, ten lines are printed.
4048
There are several ways to specify what part of the file you want to print.
4049
 
4050
Here are the forms of the @code{list} command most commonly used:
4051
 
4052
@table @code
4053
@item list @var{linenum}
4054
Print lines centered around line number @var{linenum} in the
4055
current source file.
4056
 
4057
@item list @var{function}
4058
Print lines centered around the beginning of function
4059
@var{function}.
4060
 
4061
@item list
4062
Print more lines.  If the last lines printed were printed with a
4063
@code{list} command, this prints lines following the last lines
4064
printed; however, if the last line printed was a solitary line printed
4065
as part of displaying a stack frame (@pxref{Stack, ,Examining the
4066
Stack}), this prints lines centered around that line.
4067
 
4068
@item list -
4069
Print lines just before the lines last printed.
4070
@end table
4071
 
4072
By default, @value{GDBN} prints ten source lines with any of these forms of
4073
the @code{list} command.  You can change this using @code{set listsize}:
4074
 
4075
@table @code
4076
@kindex set listsize
4077
@item set listsize @var{count}
4078
Make the @code{list} command display @var{count} source lines (unless
4079
the @code{list} argument explicitly specifies some other number).
4080
 
4081
@kindex show listsize
4082
@item show listsize
4083
Display the number of lines that @code{list} prints.
4084
@end table
4085
 
4086
Repeating a @code{list} command with @key{RET} discards the argument,
4087
so it is equivalent to typing just @code{list}.  This is more useful
4088
than listing the same lines again.  An exception is made for an
4089
argument of @samp{-}; that argument is preserved in repetition so that
4090
each repetition moves up in the source file.
4091
 
4092
@cindex linespec
4093
In general, the @code{list} command expects you to supply zero, one or two
4094
@dfn{linespecs}.  Linespecs specify source lines; there are several ways
4095
of writing them, but the effect is always to specify some source line.
4096
Here is a complete description of the possible arguments for @code{list}:
4097
 
4098
@table @code
4099
@item list @var{linespec}
4100
Print lines centered around the line specified by @var{linespec}.
4101
 
4102
@item list @var{first},@var{last}
4103
Print lines from @var{first} to @var{last}.  Both arguments are
4104
linespecs.
4105
 
4106
@item list ,@var{last}
4107
Print lines ending with @var{last}.
4108
 
4109
@item list @var{first},
4110
Print lines starting with @var{first}.
4111
 
4112
@item list +
4113
Print lines just after the lines last printed.
4114
 
4115
@item list -
4116
Print lines just before the lines last printed.
4117
 
4118
@item list
4119
As described in the preceding table.
4120
@end table
4121
 
4122
Here are the ways of specifying a single source line---all the
4123
kinds of linespec.
4124
 
4125
@table @code
4126
@item @var{number}
4127
Specifies line @var{number} of the current source file.
4128
When a @code{list} command has two linespecs, this refers to
4129
the same source file as the first linespec.
4130
 
4131
@item +@var{offset}
4132
Specifies the line @var{offset} lines after the last line printed.
4133
When used as the second linespec in a @code{list} command that has
4134
two, this specifies the line @var{offset} lines down from the
4135
first linespec.
4136
 
4137
@item -@var{offset}
4138
Specifies the line @var{offset} lines before the last line printed.
4139
 
4140
@item @var{filename}:@var{number}
4141
Specifies line @var{number} in the source file @var{filename}.
4142
 
4143
@item @var{function}
4144
Specifies the line that begins the body of the function @var{function}.
4145
For example: in C, this is the line with the open brace.
4146
 
4147
@item @var{filename}:@var{function}
4148
Specifies the line of the open-brace that begins the body of the
4149
function @var{function} in the file @var{filename}.  You only need the
4150
file name with a function name to avoid ambiguity when there are
4151
identically named functions in different source files.
4152
 
4153
@item *@var{address}
4154
Specifies the line containing the program address @var{address}.
4155
@var{address} may be any expression.
4156
@end table
4157
 
4158
@node Search
4159
@section Searching source files
4160
@cindex searching
4161
@kindex reverse-search
4162
 
4163
There are two commands for searching through the current source file for a
4164
regular expression.
4165
 
4166
@table @code
4167
@kindex search
4168
@kindex forward-search
4169
@item forward-search @var{regexp}
4170
@itemx search @var{regexp}
4171
The command @samp{forward-search @var{regexp}} checks each line,
4172
starting with the one following the last line listed, for a match for
4173
@var{regexp}.  It lists the line that is found.  You can use the
4174
synonym @samp{search @var{regexp}} or abbreviate the command name as
4175
@code{fo}.
4176
 
4177
@item reverse-search @var{regexp}
4178
The command @samp{reverse-search @var{regexp}} checks each line, starting
4179
with the one before the last line listed and going backward, for a match
4180
for @var{regexp}.  It lists the line that is found.  You can abbreviate
4181
this command as @code{rev}.
4182
@end table
4183
 
4184
@node Source Path
4185
@section Specifying source directories
4186
 
4187
@cindex source path
4188
@cindex directories for source files
4189
Executable programs sometimes do not record the directories of the source
4190
files from which they were compiled, just the names.  Even when they do,
4191
the directories could be moved between the compilation and your debugging
4192
session.  @value{GDBN} has a list of directories to search for source files;
4193
this is called the @dfn{source path}.  Each time @value{GDBN} wants a source file,
4194
it tries all the directories in the list, in the order they are present
4195
in the list, until it finds a file with the desired name.  Note that
4196
the executable search path is @emph{not} used for this purpose.  Neither is
4197
the current working directory, unless it happens to be in the source
4198
path.
4199
 
4200
If @value{GDBN} cannot find a source file in the source path, and the
4201
object program records a directory, @value{GDBN} tries that directory
4202
too.  If the source path is empty, and there is no record of the
4203
compilation directory, @value{GDBN} looks in the current directory as a
4204
last resort.
4205
 
4206
Whenever you reset or rearrange the source path, @value{GDBN} clears out
4207
any information it has cached about where source files are found and where
4208
each line is in the file.
4209
 
4210
@kindex directory
4211
@kindex dir
4212
When you start @value{GDBN}, its source path includes only @samp{cdir}
4213
and @samp{cwd}, in that order.
4214
To add other directories, use the @code{directory} command.
4215
 
4216
@table @code
4217
@item directory @var{dirname} @dots{}
4218
@item dir @var{dirname} @dots{}
4219
Add directory @var{dirname} to the front of the source path.  Several
4220
directory names may be given to this command, separated by @samp{:}
4221
(@samp{;} on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, where @samp{:} usually appears as
4222
part of absolute file names) or
4223
whitespace.  You may specify a directory that is already in the source
4224
path; this moves it forward, so @value{GDBN} searches it sooner.
4225
 
4226
@kindex cdir
4227
@kindex cwd
4228
@vindex $cdir@r{, convenience variable}
4229
@vindex $cwdr@r{, convenience variable}
4230
@cindex compilation directory
4231
@cindex current directory
4232
@cindex working directory
4233
@cindex directory, current
4234
@cindex directory, compilation
4235
You can use the string @samp{$cdir} to refer to the compilation
4236
directory (if one is recorded), and @samp{$cwd} to refer to the current
4237
working directory.  @samp{$cwd} is not the same as @samp{.}---the former
4238
tracks the current working directory as it changes during your @value{GDBN}
4239
session, while the latter is immediately expanded to the current
4240
directory at the time you add an entry to the source path.
4241
 
4242
@item directory
4243
Reset the source path to empty again.  This requires confirmation.
4244
 
4245
@c RET-repeat for @code{directory} is explicitly disabled, but since
4246
@c repeating it would be a no-op we do not say that.  (thanks to RMS)
4247
 
4248
@item show directories
4249
@kindex show directories
4250
Print the source path: show which directories it contains.
4251
@end table
4252
 
4253
If your source path is cluttered with directories that are no longer of
4254
interest, @value{GDBN} may sometimes cause confusion by finding the wrong
4255
versions of source.  You can correct the situation as follows:
4256
 
4257
@enumerate
4258
@item
4259
Use @code{directory} with no argument to reset the source path to empty.
4260
 
4261
@item
4262
Use @code{directory} with suitable arguments to reinstall the
4263
directories you want in the source path.  You can add all the
4264
directories in one command.
4265
@end enumerate
4266
 
4267
@node Machine Code
4268
@section Source and machine code
4269
 
4270
You can use the command @code{info line} to map source lines to program
4271
addresses (and vice versa), and the command @code{disassemble} to display
4272
a range of addresses as machine instructions.  When run under @sc{gnu} Emacs
4273
mode, the @code{info line} command causes the arrow to point to the
4274
line specified.  Also, @code{info line} prints addresses in symbolic form as
4275
well as hex.
4276
 
4277
@table @code
4278
@kindex info line
4279
@item info line @var{linespec}
4280
Print the starting and ending addresses of the compiled code for
4281
source line @var{linespec}.  You can specify source lines in any of
4282
the ways understood by the @code{list} command (@pxref{List, ,Printing
4283
source lines}).
4284
@end table
4285
 
4286
For example, we can use @code{info line} to discover the location of
4287
the object code for the first line of function
4288
@code{m4_changequote}:
4289
 
4290
@c FIXME: I think this example should also show the addresses in
4291
@c symbolic form, as they usually would be displayed.
4292
@smallexample
4293
(@value{GDBP}) info line m4_changequote
4294
Line 895 of "builtin.c" starts at pc 0x634c and ends at 0x6350.
4295
@end smallexample
4296
 
4297
@noindent
4298
We can also inquire (using @code{*@var{addr}} as the form for
4299
@var{linespec}) what source line covers a particular address:
4300
@smallexample
4301
(@value{GDBP}) info line *0x63ff
4302
Line 926 of "builtin.c" starts at pc 0x63e4 and ends at 0x6404.
4303
@end smallexample
4304
 
4305
@cindex @code{$_} and @code{info line}
4306
@kindex x@r{(examine), and} info line
4307
After @code{info line}, the default address for the @code{x} command
4308
is changed to the starting address of the line, so that @samp{x/i} is
4309
sufficient to begin examining the machine code (@pxref{Memory,
4310
,Examining memory}).  Also, this address is saved as the value of the
4311
convenience variable @code{$_} (@pxref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
4312
variables}).
4313
 
4314
@table @code
4315
@kindex disassemble
4316
@cindex assembly instructions
4317
@cindex instructions, assembly
4318
@cindex machine instructions
4319
@cindex listing machine instructions
4320
@item disassemble
4321
This specialized command dumps a range of memory as machine
4322
instructions.  The default memory range is the function surrounding the
4323
program counter of the selected frame.  A single argument to this
4324
command is a program counter value; @value{GDBN} dumps the function
4325
surrounding this value.  Two arguments specify a range of addresses
4326
(first inclusive, second exclusive) to dump.
4327
@end table
4328
 
4329
The following example shows the disassembly of a range of addresses of
4330
HP PA-RISC 2.0 code:
4331
 
4332
@smallexample
4333
(@value{GDBP}) disas 0x32c4 0x32e4
4334
Dump of assembler code from 0x32c4 to 0x32e4:
4335
0x32c4 <main+204>:      addil 0,dp
4336
0x32c8 <main+208>:      ldw 0x22c(sr0,r1),r26
4337
0x32cc <main+212>:      ldil 0x3000,r31
4338
0x32d0 <main+216>:      ble 0x3f8(sr4,r31)
4339
0x32d4 <main+220>:      ldo 0(r31),rp
4340
0x32d8 <main+224>:      addil -0x800,dp
4341
0x32dc <main+228>:      ldo 0x588(r1),r26
4342
0x32e0 <main+232>:      ldil 0x3000,r31
4343
End of assembler dump.
4344
@end smallexample
4345
 
4346
Some architectures have more than one commonly-used set of instruction
4347
mnemonics or other syntax.
4348
 
4349
@table @code
4350
@kindex set disassembly-flavor
4351
@cindex assembly instructions
4352
@cindex instructions, assembly
4353
@cindex machine instructions
4354
@cindex listing machine instructions
4355
@cindex Intel disassembly flavor
4356
@cindex AT&T disassembly flavor
4357
@item set disassembly-flavor @var{instruction-set}
4358
Select the instruction set to use when disassembling the
4359
program via the @code{disassemble} or @code{x/i} commands.
4360
 
4361
Currently this command is only defined for the Intel x86 family.  You
4362
can set @var{instruction-set} to either @code{intel} or @code{att}.
4363
The default is @code{att}, the AT&T flavor used by default by Unix
4364
assemblers for x86-based targets.
4365
@end table
4366
 
4367
 
4368
@node Data
4369
@chapter Examining Data
4370
 
4371
@cindex printing data
4372
@cindex examining data
4373
@kindex print
4374
@kindex inspect
4375
@c "inspect" is not quite a synonym if you are using Epoch, which we do not
4376
@c document because it is nonstandard...  Under Epoch it displays in a
4377
@c different window or something like that.
4378
The usual way to examine data in your program is with the @code{print}
4379
command (abbreviated @code{p}), or its synonym @code{inspect}.  It
4380
evaluates and prints the value of an expression of the language your
4381
program is written in (@pxref{Languages, ,Using @value{GDBN} with
4382
Different Languages}).
4383
 
4384
@table @code
4385
@item print @var{expr}
4386
@itemx print /@var{f} @var{expr}
4387
@var{expr} is an expression (in the source language).  By default the
4388
value of @var{expr} is printed in a format appropriate to its data type;
4389
you can choose a different format by specifying @samp{/@var{f}}, where
4390
@var{f} is a letter specifying the format; see @ref{Output Formats,,Output
4391
formats}.
4392
 
4393
@item print
4394
@itemx print /@var{f}
4395
If you omit @var{expr}, @value{GDBN} displays the last value again (from the
4396
@dfn{value history}; @pxref{Value History, ,Value history}).  This allows you to
4397
conveniently inspect the same value in an alternative format.
4398
@end table
4399
 
4400
A more low-level way of examining data is with the @code{x} command.
4401
It examines data in memory at a specified address and prints it in a
4402
specified format.  @xref{Memory, ,Examining memory}.
4403
 
4404
If you are interested in information about types, or about how the
4405
fields of a struct or a class are declared, use the @code{ptype @var{exp}}
4406
command rather than @code{print}.  @xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol
4407
Table}.
4408
 
4409
@menu
4410
* Expressions::                 Expressions
4411
* Variables::                   Program variables
4412
* Arrays::                      Artificial arrays
4413
* Output Formats::              Output formats
4414
* Memory::                      Examining memory
4415
* Auto Display::                Automatic display
4416
* Print Settings::              Print settings
4417
* Value History::               Value history
4418
* Convenience Vars::            Convenience variables
4419
* Registers::                   Registers
4420
* Floating Point Hardware::     Floating point hardware
4421
* Vector Unit::                 Vector Unit
4422
* Memory Region Attributes::    Memory region attributes
4423
* Dump/Restore Files::          Copy between memory and a file
4424
@end menu
4425
 
4426
@node Expressions
4427
@section Expressions
4428
 
4429
@cindex expressions
4430
@code{print} and many other @value{GDBN} commands accept an expression and
4431
compute its value.  Any kind of constant, variable or operator defined
4432
by the programming language you are using is valid in an expression in
4433
@value{GDBN}.  This includes conditional expressions, function calls,
4434
casts, and string constants.  It also includes preprocessor macros, if
4435
you compiled your program to include this information; see
4436
@ref{Compilation}.
4437
 
4438
@value{GDBN} supports array constants in expressions input by
4439
the user.  The syntax is @{@var{element}, @var{element}@dots{}@}.  For example,
4440
you can use the command @code{print @{1, 2, 3@}} to build up an array in
4441
memory that is @code{malloc}ed in the target program.
4442
 
4443
Because C is so widespread, most of the expressions shown in examples in
4444
this manual are in C.  @xref{Languages, , Using @value{GDBN} with Different
4445
Languages}, for information on how to use expressions in other
4446
languages.
4447
 
4448
In this section, we discuss operators that you can use in @value{GDBN}
4449
expressions regardless of your programming language.
4450
 
4451
Casts are supported in all languages, not just in C, because it is so
4452
useful to cast a number into a pointer in order to examine a structure
4453
at that address in memory.
4454
@c FIXME: casts supported---Mod2 true?
4455
 
4456
@value{GDBN} supports these operators, in addition to those common
4457
to programming languages:
4458
 
4459
@table @code
4460
@item @@
4461
@samp{@@} is a binary operator for treating parts of memory as arrays.
4462
@xref{Arrays, ,Artificial arrays}, for more information.
4463
 
4464
@item ::
4465
@samp{::} allows you to specify a variable in terms of the file or
4466
function where it is defined.  @xref{Variables, ,Program variables}.
4467
 
4468
@cindex @{@var{type}@}
4469
@cindex type casting memory
4470
@cindex memory, viewing as typed object
4471
@cindex casts, to view memory
4472
@item @{@var{type}@} @var{addr}
4473
Refers to an object of type @var{type} stored at address @var{addr} in
4474
memory.  @var{addr} may be any expression whose value is an integer or
4475
pointer (but parentheses are required around binary operators, just as in
4476
a cast).  This construct is allowed regardless of what kind of data is
4477
normally supposed to reside at @var{addr}.
4478
@end table
4479
 
4480
@node Variables
4481
@section Program variables
4482
 
4483
The most common kind of expression to use is the name of a variable
4484
in your program.
4485
 
4486
Variables in expressions are understood in the selected stack frame
4487
(@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}); they must be either:
4488
 
4489
@itemize @bullet
4490
@item
4491
global (or file-static)
4492
@end itemize
4493
 
4494
@noindent or
4495
 
4496
@itemize @bullet
4497
@item
4498
visible according to the scope rules of the
4499
programming language from the point of execution in that frame
4500
@end itemize
4501
 
4502
@noindent This means that in the function
4503
 
4504
@smallexample
4505
foo (a)
4506
     int a;
4507
@{
4508
  bar (a);
4509
  @{
4510
    int b = test ();
4511
    bar (b);
4512
  @}
4513
@}
4514
@end smallexample
4515
 
4516
@noindent
4517
you can examine and use the variable @code{a} whenever your program is
4518
executing within the function @code{foo}, but you can only use or
4519
examine the variable @code{b} while your program is executing inside
4520
the block where @code{b} is declared.
4521
 
4522
@cindex variable name conflict
4523
There is an exception: you can refer to a variable or function whose
4524
scope is a single source file even if the current execution point is not
4525
in this file.  But it is possible to have more than one such variable or
4526
function with the same name (in different source files).  If that
4527
happens, referring to that name has unpredictable effects.  If you wish,
4528
you can specify a static variable in a particular function or file,
4529
using the colon-colon notation:
4530
 
4531
@cindex colon-colon, context for variables/functions
4532
@iftex
4533
@c info cannot cope with a :: index entry, but why deprive hard copy readers?
4534
@cindex @code{::}, context for variables/functions
4535
@end iftex
4536
@smallexample
4537
@var{file}::@var{variable}
4538
@var{function}::@var{variable}
4539
@end smallexample
4540
 
4541
@noindent
4542
Here @var{file} or @var{function} is the name of the context for the
4543
static @var{variable}.  In the case of file names, you can use quotes to
4544
make sure @value{GDBN} parses the file name as a single word---for example,
4545
to print a global value of @code{x} defined in @file{f2.c}:
4546
 
4547
@smallexample
4548
(@value{GDBP}) p 'f2.c'::x
4549
@end smallexample
4550
 
4551
@cindex C@t{++} scope resolution
4552
This use of @samp{::} is very rarely in conflict with the very similar
4553
use of the same notation in C@t{++}.  @value{GDBN} also supports use of the C@t{++}
4554
scope resolution operator in @value{GDBN} expressions.
4555
@c FIXME: Um, so what happens in one of those rare cases where it's in
4556
@c conflict??  --mew
4557
 
4558
@cindex wrong values
4559
@cindex variable values, wrong
4560
@quotation
4561
@emph{Warning:} Occasionally, a local variable may appear to have the
4562
wrong value at certain points in a function---just after entry to a new
4563
scope, and just before exit.
4564
@end quotation
4565
You may see this problem when you are stepping by machine instructions.
4566
This is because, on most machines, it takes more than one instruction to
4567
set up a stack frame (including local variable definitions); if you are
4568
stepping by machine instructions, variables may appear to have the wrong
4569
values until the stack frame is completely built.  On exit, it usually
4570
also takes more than one machine instruction to destroy a stack frame;
4571
after you begin stepping through that group of instructions, local
4572
variable definitions may be gone.
4573
 
4574
This may also happen when the compiler does significant optimizations.
4575
To be sure of always seeing accurate values, turn off all optimization
4576
when compiling.
4577
 
4578
@cindex ``No symbol "foo" in current context''
4579
Another possible effect of compiler optimizations is to optimize
4580
unused variables out of existence, or assign variables to registers (as
4581
opposed to memory addresses).  Depending on the support for such cases
4582
offered by the debug info format used by the compiler, @value{GDBN}
4583
might not be able to display values for such local variables.  If that
4584
happens, @value{GDBN} will print a message like this:
4585
 
4586
@smallexample
4587
No symbol "foo" in current context.
4588
@end smallexample
4589
 
4590
To solve such problems, either recompile without optimizations, or use a
4591
different debug info format, if the compiler supports several such
4592
formats.  For example, @value{NGCC}, the @sc{gnu} C/C@t{++} compiler usually
4593
supports the @samp{-gstabs} option.  @samp{-gstabs} produces debug info
4594
in a format that is superior to formats such as COFF.  You may be able
4595
to use DWARF2 (@samp{-gdwarf-2}), which is also an effective form for
4596
debug info.  See @ref{Debugging Options,,Options for Debugging Your
4597
Program or @sc{gnu} CC, gcc.info, Using @sc{gnu} CC}, for more
4598
information.
4599
 
4600
 
4601
@node Arrays
4602
@section Artificial arrays
4603
 
4604
@cindex artificial array
4605
@kindex @@@r{, referencing memory as an array}
4606
It is often useful to print out several successive objects of the
4607
same type in memory; a section of an array, or an array of
4608
dynamically determined size for which only a pointer exists in the
4609
program.
4610
 
4611
You can do this by referring to a contiguous span of memory as an
4612
@dfn{artificial array}, using the binary operator @samp{@@}.  The left
4613
operand of @samp{@@} should be the first element of the desired array
4614
and be an individual object.  The right operand should be the desired length
4615
of the array.  The result is an array value whose elements are all of
4616
the type of the left argument.  The first element is actually the left
4617
argument; the second element comes from bytes of memory immediately
4618
following those that hold the first element, and so on.  Here is an
4619
example.  If a program says
4620
 
4621
@smallexample
4622
int *array = (int *) malloc (len * sizeof (int));
4623
@end smallexample
4624
 
4625
@noindent
4626
you can print the contents of @code{array} with
4627
 
4628
@smallexample
4629
p *array@@len
4630
@end smallexample
4631
 
4632
The left operand of @samp{@@} must reside in memory.  Array values made
4633
with @samp{@@} in this way behave just like other arrays in terms of
4634
subscripting, and are coerced to pointers when used in expressions.
4635
Artificial arrays most often appear in expressions via the value history
4636
(@pxref{Value History, ,Value history}), after printing one out.
4637
 
4638
Another way to create an artificial array is to use a cast.
4639
This re-interprets a value as if it were an array.
4640
The value need not be in memory:
4641
@smallexample
4642
(@value{GDBP}) p/x (short[2])0x12345678
4643
$1 = @{0x1234, 0x5678@}
4644
@end smallexample
4645
 
4646
As a convenience, if you leave the array length out (as in
4647
@samp{(@var{type}[])@var{value}}) @value{GDBN} calculates the size to fill
4648
the value (as @samp{sizeof(@var{value})/sizeof(@var{type})}:
4649
@smallexample
4650
(@value{GDBP}) p/x (short[])0x12345678
4651
$2 = @{0x1234, 0x5678@}
4652
@end smallexample
4653
 
4654
Sometimes the artificial array mechanism is not quite enough; in
4655
moderately complex data structures, the elements of interest may not
4656
actually be adjacent---for example, if you are interested in the values
4657
of pointers in an array.  One useful work-around in this situation is
4658
to use a convenience variable (@pxref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
4659
variables}) as a counter in an expression that prints the first
4660
interesting value, and then repeat that expression via @key{RET}.  For
4661
instance, suppose you have an array @code{dtab} of pointers to
4662
structures, and you are interested in the values of a field @code{fv}
4663
in each structure.  Here is an example of what you might type:
4664
 
4665
@smallexample
4666
set $i = 0
4667
p dtab[$i++]->fv
4668
@key{RET}
4669
@key{RET}
4670
@dots{}
4671
@end smallexample
4672
 
4673
@node Output Formats
4674
@section Output formats
4675
 
4676
@cindex formatted output
4677
@cindex output formats
4678
By default, @value{GDBN} prints a value according to its data type.  Sometimes
4679
this is not what you want.  For example, you might want to print a number
4680
in hex, or a pointer in decimal.  Or you might want to view data in memory
4681
at a certain address as a character string or as an instruction.  To do
4682
these things, specify an @dfn{output format} when you print a value.
4683
 
4684
The simplest use of output formats is to say how to print a value
4685
already computed.  This is done by starting the arguments of the
4686
@code{print} command with a slash and a format letter.  The format
4687
letters supported are:
4688
 
4689
@table @code
4690
@item x
4691
Regard the bits of the value as an integer, and print the integer in
4692
hexadecimal.
4693
 
4694
@item d
4695
Print as integer in signed decimal.
4696
 
4697
@item u
4698
Print as integer in unsigned decimal.
4699
 
4700
@item o
4701
Print as integer in octal.
4702
 
4703
@item t
4704
Print as integer in binary.  The letter @samp{t} stands for ``two''.
4705
@footnote{@samp{b} cannot be used because these format letters are also
4706
used with the @code{x} command, where @samp{b} stands for ``byte'';
4707
see @ref{Memory,,Examining memory}.}
4708
 
4709
@item a
4710
@cindex unknown address, locating
4711
@cindex locate address
4712
Print as an address, both absolute in hexadecimal and as an offset from
4713
the nearest preceding symbol.  You can use this format used to discover
4714
where (in what function) an unknown address is located:
4715
 
4716
@smallexample
4717
(@value{GDBP}) p/a 0x54320
4718
$3 = 0x54320 <_initialize_vx+396>
4719
@end smallexample
4720
 
4721
@noindent
4722
The command @code{info symbol 0x54320} yields similar results.
4723
@xref{Symbols, info symbol}.
4724
 
4725
@item c
4726
Regard as an integer and print it as a character constant.
4727
 
4728
@item f
4729
Regard the bits of the value as a floating point number and print
4730
using typical floating point syntax.
4731
@end table
4732
 
4733
For example, to print the program counter in hex (@pxref{Registers}), type
4734
 
4735
@smallexample
4736
p/x $pc
4737
@end smallexample
4738
 
4739
@noindent
4740
Note that no space is required before the slash; this is because command
4741
names in @value{GDBN} cannot contain a slash.
4742
 
4743
To reprint the last value in the value history with a different format,
4744
you can use the @code{print} command with just a format and no
4745
expression.  For example, @samp{p/x} reprints the last value in hex.
4746
 
4747
@node Memory
4748
@section Examining memory
4749
 
4750
You can use the command @code{x} (for ``examine'') to examine memory in
4751
any of several formats, independently of your program's data types.
4752
 
4753
@cindex examining memory
4754
@table @code
4755
@kindex x @r{(examine memory)}
4756
@item x/@var{nfu} @var{addr}
4757
@itemx x @var{addr}
4758
@itemx x
4759
Use the @code{x} command to examine memory.
4760
@end table
4761
 
4762
@var{n}, @var{f}, and @var{u} are all optional parameters that specify how
4763
much memory to display and how to format it; @var{addr} is an
4764
expression giving the address where you want to start displaying memory.
4765
If you use defaults for @var{nfu}, you need not type the slash @samp{/}.
4766
Several commands set convenient defaults for @var{addr}.
4767
 
4768
@table @r
4769
@item @var{n}, the repeat count
4770
The repeat count is a decimal integer; the default is 1.  It specifies
4771
how much memory (counting by units @var{u}) to display.
4772
@c This really is **decimal**; unaffected by 'set radix' as of GDB
4773
@c 4.1.2.
4774
 
4775
@item @var{f}, the display format
4776
The display format is one of the formats used by @code{print},
4777
@samp{s} (null-terminated string), or @samp{i} (machine instruction).
4778
The default is @samp{x} (hexadecimal) initially.
4779
The default changes each time you use either @code{x} or @code{print}.
4780
 
4781
@item @var{u}, the unit size
4782
The unit size is any of
4783
 
4784
@table @code
4785
@item b
4786
Bytes.
4787
@item h
4788
Halfwords (two bytes).
4789
@item w
4790
Words (four bytes).  This is the initial default.
4791
@item g
4792
Giant words (eight bytes).
4793
@end table
4794
 
4795
Each time you specify a unit size with @code{x}, that size becomes the
4796
default unit the next time you use @code{x}.  (For the @samp{s} and
4797
@samp{i} formats, the unit size is ignored and is normally not written.)
4798
 
4799
@item @var{addr}, starting display address
4800
@var{addr} is the address where you want @value{GDBN} to begin displaying
4801
memory.  The expression need not have a pointer value (though it may);
4802
it is always interpreted as an integer address of a byte of memory.
4803
@xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}, for more information on expressions.  The default for
4804
@var{addr} is usually just after the last address examined---but several
4805
other commands also set the default address: @code{info breakpoints} (to
4806
the address of the last breakpoint listed), @code{info line} (to the
4807
starting address of a line), and @code{print} (if you use it to display
4808
a value from memory).
4809
@end table
4810
 
4811
For example, @samp{x/3uh 0x54320} is a request to display three halfwords
4812
(@code{h}) of memory, formatted as unsigned decimal integers (@samp{u}),
4813
starting at address @code{0x54320}.  @samp{x/4xw $sp} prints the four
4814
words (@samp{w}) of memory above the stack pointer (here, @samp{$sp};
4815
@pxref{Registers, ,Registers}) in hexadecimal (@samp{x}).
4816
 
4817
Since the letters indicating unit sizes are all distinct from the
4818
letters specifying output formats, you do not have to remember whether
4819
unit size or format comes first; either order works.  The output
4820
specifications @samp{4xw} and @samp{4wx} mean exactly the same thing.
4821
(However, the count @var{n} must come first; @samp{wx4} does not work.)
4822
 
4823
Even though the unit size @var{u} is ignored for the formats @samp{s}
4824
and @samp{i}, you might still want to use a count @var{n}; for example,
4825
@samp{3i} specifies that you want to see three machine instructions,
4826
including any operands.  The command @code{disassemble} gives an
4827
alternative way of inspecting machine instructions; see @ref{Machine
4828
Code,,Source and machine code}.
4829
 
4830
All the defaults for the arguments to @code{x} are designed to make it
4831
easy to continue scanning memory with minimal specifications each time
4832
you use @code{x}.  For example, after you have inspected three machine
4833
instructions with @samp{x/3i @var{addr}}, you can inspect the next seven
4834
with just @samp{x/7}.  If you use @key{RET} to repeat the @code{x} command,
4835
the repeat count @var{n} is used again; the other arguments default as
4836
for successive uses of @code{x}.
4837
 
4838
@cindex @code{$_}, @code{$__}, and value history
4839
The addresses and contents printed by the @code{x} command are not saved
4840
in the value history because there is often too much of them and they
4841
would get in the way.  Instead, @value{GDBN} makes these values available for
4842
subsequent use in expressions as values of the convenience variables
4843
@code{$_} and @code{$__}.  After an @code{x} command, the last address
4844
examined is available for use in expressions in the convenience variable
4845
@code{$_}.  The contents of that address, as examined, are available in
4846
the convenience variable @code{$__}.
4847
 
4848
If the @code{x} command has a repeat count, the address and contents saved
4849
are from the last memory unit printed; this is not the same as the last
4850
address printed if several units were printed on the last line of output.
4851
 
4852
@node Auto Display
4853
@section Automatic display
4854
@cindex automatic display
4855
@cindex display of expressions
4856
 
4857
If you find that you want to print the value of an expression frequently
4858
(to see how it changes), you might want to add it to the @dfn{automatic
4859
display list} so that @value{GDBN} prints its value each time your program stops.
4860
Each expression added to the list is given a number to identify it;
4861
to remove an expression from the list, you specify that number.
4862
The automatic display looks like this:
4863
 
4864
@smallexample
4865
2: foo = 38
4866
3: bar[5] = (struct hack *) 0x3804
4867
@end smallexample
4868
 
4869
@noindent
4870
This display shows item numbers, expressions and their current values.  As with
4871
displays you request manually using @code{x} or @code{print}, you can
4872
specify the output format you prefer; in fact, @code{display} decides
4873
whether to use @code{print} or @code{x} depending on how elaborate your
4874
format specification is---it uses @code{x} if you specify a unit size,
4875
or one of the two formats (@samp{i} and @samp{s}) that are only
4876
supported by @code{x}; otherwise it uses @code{print}.
4877
 
4878
@table @code
4879
@kindex display
4880
@item display @var{expr}
4881
Add the expression @var{expr} to the list of expressions to display
4882
each time your program stops.  @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
4883
 
4884
@code{display} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after using it.
4885
 
4886
@item display/@var{fmt} @var{expr}
4887
For @var{fmt} specifying only a display format and not a size or
4888
count, add the expression @var{expr} to the auto-display list but
4889
arrange to display it each time in the specified format @var{fmt}.
4890
@xref{Output Formats,,Output formats}.
4891
 
4892
@item display/@var{fmt} @var{addr}
4893
For @var{fmt} @samp{i} or @samp{s}, or including a unit-size or a
4894
number of units, add the expression @var{addr} as a memory address to
4895
be examined each time your program stops.  Examining means in effect
4896
doing @samp{x/@var{fmt} @var{addr}}.  @xref{Memory, ,Examining memory}.
4897
@end table
4898
 
4899
For example, @samp{display/i $pc} can be helpful, to see the machine
4900
instruction about to be executed each time execution stops (@samp{$pc}
4901
is a common name for the program counter; @pxref{Registers, ,Registers}).
4902
 
4903
@table @code
4904
@kindex delete display
4905
@kindex undisplay
4906
@item undisplay @var{dnums}@dots{}
4907
@itemx delete display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4908
Remove item numbers @var{dnums} from the list of expressions to display.
4909
 
4910
@code{undisplay} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} after using it.
4911
(Otherwise you would just get the error @samp{No display number @dots{}}.)
4912
 
4913
@kindex disable display
4914
@item disable display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4915
Disable the display of item numbers @var{dnums}.  A disabled display
4916
item is not printed automatically, but is not forgotten.  It may be
4917
enabled again later.
4918
 
4919
@kindex enable display
4920
@item enable display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4921
Enable display of item numbers @var{dnums}.  It becomes effective once
4922
again in auto display of its expression, until you specify otherwise.
4923
 
4924
@item display
4925
Display the current values of the expressions on the list, just as is
4926
done when your program stops.
4927
 
4928
@kindex info display
4929
@item info display
4930
Print the list of expressions previously set up to display
4931
automatically, each one with its item number, but without showing the
4932
values.  This includes disabled expressions, which are marked as such.
4933
It also includes expressions which would not be displayed right now
4934
because they refer to automatic variables not currently available.
4935
@end table
4936
 
4937
If a display expression refers to local variables, then it does not make
4938
sense outside the lexical context for which it was set up.  Such an
4939
expression is disabled when execution enters a context where one of its
4940
variables is not defined.  For example, if you give the command
4941
@code{display last_char} while inside a function with an argument
4942
@code{last_char}, @value{GDBN} displays this argument while your program
4943
continues to stop inside that function.  When it stops elsewhere---where
4944
there is no variable @code{last_char}---the display is disabled
4945
automatically.  The next time your program stops where @code{last_char}
4946
is meaningful, you can enable the display expression once again.
4947
 
4948
@node Print Settings
4949
@section Print settings
4950
 
4951
@cindex format options
4952
@cindex print settings
4953
@value{GDBN} provides the following ways to control how arrays, structures,
4954
and symbols are printed.
4955
 
4956
@noindent
4957
These settings are useful for debugging programs in any language:
4958
 
4959
@table @code
4960
@kindex set print address
4961
@item set print address
4962
@itemx set print address on
4963
@value{GDBN} prints memory addresses showing the location of stack
4964
traces, structure values, pointer values, breakpoints, and so forth,
4965
even when it also displays the contents of those addresses.  The default
4966
is @code{on}.  For example, this is what a stack frame display looks like with
4967
@code{set print address on}:
4968
 
4969
@smallexample
4970
@group
4971
(@value{GDBP}) f
4972
#0  set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<<", rq=0x34c88 ">>")
4973
    at input.c:530
4974
530         if (lquote != def_lquote)
4975
@end group
4976
@end smallexample
4977
 
4978
@item set print address off
4979
Do not print addresses when displaying their contents.  For example,
4980
this is the same stack frame displayed with @code{set print address off}:
4981
 
4982
@smallexample
4983
@group
4984
(@value{GDBP}) set print addr off
4985
(@value{GDBP}) f
4986
#0  set_quotes (lq="<<", rq=">>") at input.c:530
4987
530         if (lquote != def_lquote)
4988
@end group
4989
@end smallexample
4990
 
4991
You can use @samp{set print address off} to eliminate all machine
4992
dependent displays from the @value{GDBN} interface.  For example, with
4993
@code{print address off}, you should get the same text for backtraces on
4994
all machines---whether or not they involve pointer arguments.
4995
 
4996
@kindex show print address
4997
@item show print address
4998
Show whether or not addresses are to be printed.
4999
@end table
5000
 
5001
When @value{GDBN} prints a symbolic address, it normally prints the
5002
closest earlier symbol plus an offset.  If that symbol does not uniquely
5003
identify the address (for example, it is a name whose scope is a single
5004
source file), you may need to clarify.  One way to do this is with
5005
@code{info line}, for example @samp{info line *0x4537}.  Alternately,
5006
you can set @value{GDBN} to print the source file and line number when
5007
it prints a symbolic address:
5008
 
5009
@table @code
5010
@kindex set print symbol-filename
5011
@item set print symbol-filename on
5012
Tell @value{GDBN} to print the source file name and line number of a
5013
symbol in the symbolic form of an address.
5014
 
5015
@item set print symbol-filename off
5016
Do not print source file name and line number of a symbol.  This is the
5017
default.
5018
 
5019
@kindex show print symbol-filename
5020
@item show print symbol-filename
5021
Show whether or not @value{GDBN} will print the source file name and
5022
line number of a symbol in the symbolic form of an address.
5023
@end table
5024
 
5025
Another situation where it is helpful to show symbol filenames and line
5026
numbers is when disassembling code; @value{GDBN} shows you the line
5027
number and source file that corresponds to each instruction.
5028
 
5029
Also, you may wish to see the symbolic form only if the address being
5030
printed is reasonably close to the closest earlier symbol:
5031
 
5032
@table @code
5033
@kindex set print max-symbolic-offset
5034
@item set print max-symbolic-offset @var{max-offset}
5035
Tell @value{GDBN} to only display the symbolic form of an address if the
5036
offset between the closest earlier symbol and the address is less than
5037
@var{max-offset}.  The default is 0, which tells @value{GDBN}
5038
to always print the symbolic form of an address if any symbol precedes it.
5039
 
5040
@kindex show print max-symbolic-offset
5041
@item show print max-symbolic-offset
5042
Ask how large the maximum offset is that @value{GDBN} prints in a
5043
symbolic address.
5044
@end table
5045
 
5046
@cindex wild pointer, interpreting
5047
@cindex pointer, finding referent
5048
If you have a pointer and you are not sure where it points, try
5049
@samp{set print symbol-filename on}.  Then you can determine the name
5050
and source file location of the variable where it points, using
5051
@samp{p/a @var{pointer}}.  This interprets the address in symbolic form.
5052
For example, here @value{GDBN} shows that a variable @code{ptt} points
5053
at another variable @code{t}, defined in @file{hi2.c}:
5054
 
5055
@smallexample
5056
(@value{GDBP}) set print symbol-filename on
5057
(@value{GDBP}) p/a ptt
5058
$4 = 0xe008 <t in hi2.c>
5059
@end smallexample
5060
 
5061
@quotation
5062
@emph{Warning:} For pointers that point to a local variable, @samp{p/a}
5063
does not show the symbol name and filename of the referent, even with
5064
the appropriate @code{set print} options turned on.
5065
@end quotation
5066
 
5067
Other settings control how different kinds of objects are printed:
5068
 
5069
@table @code
5070
@kindex set print array
5071
@item set print array
5072
@itemx set print array on
5073
Pretty print arrays.  This format is more convenient to read,
5074
but uses more space.  The default is off.
5075
 
5076
@item set print array off
5077
Return to compressed format for arrays.
5078
 
5079
@kindex show print array
5080
@item show print array
5081
Show whether compressed or pretty format is selected for displaying
5082
arrays.
5083
 
5084
@kindex set print elements
5085
@item set print elements @var{number-of-elements}
5086
Set a limit on how many elements of an array @value{GDBN} will print.
5087
If @value{GDBN} is printing a large array, it stops printing after it has
5088
printed the number of elements set by the @code{set print elements} command.
5089
This limit also applies to the display of strings.
5090
When @value{GDBN} starts, this limit is set to 200.
5091
Setting  @var{number-of-elements} to zero means that the printing is unlimited.
5092
 
5093
@kindex show print elements
5094
@item show print elements
5095
Display the number of elements of a large array that @value{GDBN} will print.
5096
If the number is 0, then the printing is unlimited.
5097
 
5098
@kindex set print null-stop
5099
@item set print null-stop
5100
Cause @value{GDBN} to stop printing the characters of an array when the first
5101
@sc{null} is encountered.  This is useful when large arrays actually
5102
contain only short strings.
5103
The default is off.
5104
 
5105
@kindex set print pretty
5106
@item set print pretty on
5107
Cause @value{GDBN} to print structures in an indented format with one member
5108
per line, like this:
5109
 
5110
@smallexample
5111
@group
5112
$1 = @{
5113
  next = 0x0,
5114
  flags = @{
5115
    sweet = 1,
5116
    sour = 1
5117
  @},
5118
  meat = 0x54 "Pork"
5119
@}
5120
@end group
5121
@end smallexample
5122
 
5123
@item set print pretty off
5124
Cause @value{GDBN} to print structures in a compact format, like this:
5125
 
5126
@smallexample
5127
@group
5128
$1 = @{next = 0x0, flags = @{sweet = 1, sour = 1@}, \
5129
meat = 0x54 "Pork"@}
5130
@end group
5131
@end smallexample
5132
 
5133
@noindent
5134
This is the default format.
5135
 
5136
@kindex show print pretty
5137
@item show print pretty
5138
Show which format @value{GDBN} is using to print structures.
5139
 
5140
@kindex set print sevenbit-strings
5141
@item set print sevenbit-strings on
5142
Print using only seven-bit characters; if this option is set,
5143
@value{GDBN} displays any eight-bit characters (in strings or
5144
character values) using the notation @code{\}@var{nnn}.  This setting is
5145
best if you are working in English (@sc{ascii}) and you use the
5146
high-order bit of characters as a marker or ``meta'' bit.
5147
 
5148
@item set print sevenbit-strings off
5149
Print full eight-bit characters.  This allows the use of more
5150
international character sets, and is the default.
5151
 
5152
@kindex show print sevenbit-strings
5153
@item show print sevenbit-strings
5154
Show whether or not @value{GDBN} is printing only seven-bit characters.
5155
 
5156
@kindex set print union
5157
@item set print union on
5158
Tell @value{GDBN} to print unions which are contained in structures.  This
5159
is the default setting.
5160
 
5161
@item set print union off
5162
Tell @value{GDBN} not to print unions which are contained in structures.
5163
 
5164
@kindex show print union
5165
@item show print union
5166
Ask @value{GDBN} whether or not it will print unions which are contained in
5167
structures.
5168
 
5169
For example, given the declarations
5170
 
5171
@smallexample
5172
typedef enum @{Tree, Bug@} Species;
5173
typedef enum @{Big_tree, Acorn, Seedling@} Tree_forms;
5174
typedef enum @{Caterpillar, Cocoon, Butterfly@}
5175
              Bug_forms;
5176
 
5177
struct thing @{
5178
  Species it;
5179
  union @{
5180
    Tree_forms tree;
5181
    Bug_forms bug;
5182
  @} form;
5183
@};
5184
 
5185
struct thing foo = @{Tree, @{Acorn@}@};
5186
@end smallexample
5187
 
5188
@noindent
5189
with @code{set print union on} in effect @samp{p foo} would print
5190
 
5191
@smallexample
5192
$1 = @{it = Tree, form = @{tree = Acorn, bug = Cocoon@}@}
5193
@end smallexample
5194
 
5195
@noindent
5196
and with @code{set print union off} in effect it would print
5197
 
5198
@smallexample
5199
$1 = @{it = Tree, form = @{...@}@}
5200
@end smallexample
5201
@end table
5202
 
5203
@need 1000
5204
@noindent
5205
These settings are of interest when debugging C@t{++} programs:
5206
 
5207
@table @code
5208
@cindex demangling
5209
@kindex set print demangle
5210
@item set print demangle
5211
@itemx set print demangle on
5212
Print C@t{++} names in their source form rather than in the encoded
5213
(``mangled'') form passed to the assembler and linker for type-safe
5214
linkage.  The default is on.
5215
 
5216
@kindex show print demangle
5217
@item show print demangle
5218
Show whether C@t{++} names are printed in mangled or demangled form.
5219
 
5220
@kindex set print asm-demangle
5221
@item set print asm-demangle
5222
@itemx set print asm-demangle on
5223
Print C@t{++} names in their source form rather than their mangled form, even
5224
in assembler code printouts such as instruction disassemblies.
5225
The default is off.
5226
 
5227
@kindex show print asm-demangle
5228
@item show print asm-demangle
5229
Show whether C@t{++} names in assembly listings are printed in mangled
5230
or demangled form.
5231
 
5232
@kindex set demangle-style
5233
@cindex C@t{++} symbol decoding style
5234
@cindex symbol decoding style, C@t{++}
5235
@item set demangle-style @var{style}
5236
Choose among several encoding schemes used by different compilers to
5237
represent C@t{++} names.  The choices for @var{style} are currently:
5238
 
5239
@table @code
5240
@item auto
5241
Allow @value{GDBN} to choose a decoding style by inspecting your program.
5242
 
5243
@item gnu
5244
Decode based on the @sc{gnu} C@t{++} compiler (@code{g++}) encoding algorithm.
5245
This is the default.
5246
 
5247
@item hp
5248
Decode based on the HP ANSI C@t{++} (@code{aCC}) encoding algorithm.
5249
 
5250
@item lucid
5251
Decode based on the Lucid C@t{++} compiler (@code{lcc}) encoding algorithm.
5252
 
5253
@item arm
5254
Decode using the algorithm in the @cite{C@t{++} Annotated Reference Manual}.
5255
@strong{Warning:} this setting alone is not sufficient to allow
5256
debugging @code{cfront}-generated executables.  @value{GDBN} would
5257
require further enhancement to permit that.
5258
 
5259
@end table
5260
If you omit @var{style}, you will see a list of possible formats.
5261
 
5262
@kindex show demangle-style
5263
@item show demangle-style
5264
Display the encoding style currently in use for decoding C@t{++} symbols.
5265
 
5266
@kindex set print object
5267
@item set print object
5268
@itemx set print object on
5269
When displaying a pointer to an object, identify the @emph{actual}
5270
(derived) type of the object rather than the @emph{declared} type, using
5271
the virtual function table.
5272
 
5273
@item set print object off
5274
Display only the declared type of objects, without reference to the
5275
virtual function table.  This is the default setting.
5276
 
5277
@kindex show print object
5278
@item show print object
5279
Show whether actual, or declared, object types are displayed.
5280
 
5281
@kindex set print static-members
5282
@item set print static-members
5283
@itemx set print static-members on
5284
Print static members when displaying a C@t{++} object.  The default is on.
5285
 
5286
@item set print static-members off
5287
Do not print static members when displaying a C@t{++} object.
5288
 
5289
@kindex show print static-members
5290
@item show print static-members
5291
Show whether C@t{++} static members are printed, or not.
5292
 
5293
@c These don't work with HP ANSI C++ yet.
5294
@kindex set print vtbl
5295
@item set print vtbl
5296
@itemx set print vtbl on
5297
Pretty print C@t{++} virtual function tables.  The default is off.
5298
(The @code{vtbl} commands do not work on programs compiled with the HP
5299
ANSI C@t{++} compiler (@code{aCC}).)
5300
 
5301
@item set print vtbl off
5302
Do not pretty print C@t{++} virtual function tables.
5303
 
5304
@kindex show print vtbl
5305
@item show print vtbl
5306
Show whether C@t{++} virtual function tables are pretty printed, or not.
5307
@end table
5308
 
5309
@node Value History
5310
@section Value history
5311
 
5312
@cindex value history
5313
Values printed by the @code{print} command are saved in the @value{GDBN}
5314
@dfn{value history}.  This allows you to refer to them in other expressions.
5315
Values are kept until the symbol table is re-read or discarded
5316
(for example with the @code{file} or @code{symbol-file} commands).
5317
When the symbol table changes, the value history is discarded,
5318
since the values may contain pointers back to the types defined in the
5319
symbol table.
5320
 
5321
@cindex @code{$}
5322
@cindex @code{$$}
5323
@cindex history number
5324
The values printed are given @dfn{history numbers} by which you can
5325
refer to them.  These are successive integers starting with one.
5326
@code{print} shows you the history number assigned to a value by
5327
printing @samp{$@var{num} = } before the value; here @var{num} is the
5328
history number.
5329
 
5330
To refer to any previous value, use @samp{$} followed by the value's
5331
history number.  The way @code{print} labels its output is designed to
5332
remind you of this.  Just @code{$} refers to the most recent value in
5333
the history, and @code{$$} refers to the value before that.
5334
@code{$$@var{n}} refers to the @var{n}th value from the end; @code{$$2}
5335
is the value just prior to @code{$$}, @code{$$1} is equivalent to
5336
@code{$$}, and @code{$$0} is equivalent to @code{$}.
5337
 
5338
For example, suppose you have just printed a pointer to a structure and
5339
want to see the contents of the structure.  It suffices to type
5340
 
5341
@smallexample
5342
p *$
5343
@end smallexample
5344
 
5345
If you have a chain of structures where the component @code{next} points
5346
to the next one, you can print the contents of the next one with this:
5347
 
5348
@smallexample
5349
p *$.next
5350
@end smallexample
5351
 
5352
@noindent
5353
You can print successive links in the chain by repeating this
5354
command---which you can do by just typing @key{RET}.
5355
 
5356
Note that the history records values, not expressions.  If the value of
5357
@code{x} is 4 and you type these commands:
5358
 
5359
@smallexample
5360
print x
5361
set x=5
5362
@end smallexample
5363
 
5364
@noindent
5365
then the value recorded in the value history by the @code{print} command
5366
remains 4 even though the value of @code{x} has changed.
5367
 
5368
@table @code
5369
@kindex show values
5370
@item show values
5371
Print the last ten values in the value history, with their item numbers.
5372
This is like @samp{p@ $$9} repeated ten times, except that @code{show
5373
values} does not change the history.
5374
 
5375
@item show values @var{n}
5376
Print ten history values centered on history item number @var{n}.
5377
 
5378
@item show values +
5379
Print ten history values just after the values last printed.  If no more
5380
values are available, @code{show values +} produces no display.
5381
@end table
5382
 
5383
Pressing @key{RET} to repeat @code{show values @var{n}} has exactly the
5384
same effect as @samp{show values +}.
5385
 
5386
@node Convenience Vars
5387
@section Convenience variables
5388
 
5389
@cindex convenience variables
5390
@value{GDBN} provides @dfn{convenience variables} that you can use within
5391
@value{GDBN} to hold on to a value and refer to it later.  These variables
5392
exist entirely within @value{GDBN}; they are not part of your program, and
5393
setting a convenience variable has no direct effect on further execution
5394
of your program.  That is why you can use them freely.
5395
 
5396
Convenience variables are prefixed with @samp{$}.  Any name preceded by
5397
@samp{$} can be used for a convenience variable, unless it is one of
5398
the predefined machine-specific register names (@pxref{Registers, ,Registers}).
5399
(Value history references, in contrast, are @emph{numbers} preceded
5400
by @samp{$}.  @xref{Value History, ,Value history}.)
5401
 
5402
You can save a value in a convenience variable with an assignment
5403
expression, just as you would set a variable in your program.
5404
For example:
5405
 
5406
@smallexample
5407
set $foo = *object_ptr
5408
@end smallexample
5409
 
5410
@noindent
5411
would save in @code{$foo} the value contained in the object pointed to by
5412
@code{object_ptr}.
5413
 
5414
Using a convenience variable for the first time creates it, but its
5415
value is @code{void} until you assign a new value.  You can alter the
5416
value with another assignment at any time.
5417
 
5418
Convenience variables have no fixed types.  You can assign a convenience
5419
variable any type of value, including structures and arrays, even if
5420
that variable already has a value of a different type.  The convenience
5421
variable, when used as an expression, has the type of its current value.
5422
 
5423
@table @code
5424
@kindex show convenience
5425
@item show convenience
5426
Print a list of convenience variables used so far, and their values.
5427
Abbreviated @code{show conv}.
5428
@end table
5429
 
5430
One of the ways to use a convenience variable is as a counter to be
5431
incremented or a pointer to be advanced.  For example, to print
5432
a field from successive elements of an array of structures:
5433
 
5434
@smallexample
5435
set $i = 0
5436
print bar[$i++]->contents
5437
@end smallexample
5438
 
5439
@noindent
5440
Repeat that command by typing @key{RET}.
5441
 
5442
Some convenience variables are created automatically by @value{GDBN} and given
5443
values likely to be useful.
5444
 
5445
@table @code
5446
@vindex $_@r{, convenience variable}
5447
@item $_
5448
The variable @code{$_} is automatically set by the @code{x} command to
5449
the last address examined (@pxref{Memory, ,Examining memory}).  Other
5450
commands which provide a default address for @code{x} to examine also
5451
set @code{$_} to that address; these commands include @code{info line}
5452
and @code{info breakpoint}.  The type of @code{$_} is @code{void *}
5453
except when set by the @code{x} command, in which case it is a pointer
5454
to the type of @code{$__}.
5455
 
5456
@vindex $__@r{, convenience variable}
5457
@item $__
5458
The variable @code{$__} is automatically set by the @code{x} command
5459
to the value found in the last address examined.  Its type is chosen
5460
to match the format in which the data was printed.
5461
 
5462
@item $_exitcode
5463
@vindex $_exitcode@r{, convenience variable}
5464
The variable @code{$_exitcode} is automatically set to the exit code when
5465
the program being debugged terminates.
5466
@end table
5467
 
5468
On HP-UX systems, if you refer to a function or variable name that
5469
begins with a dollar sign, @value{GDBN} searches for a user or system
5470
name first, before it searches for a convenience variable.
5471
 
5472
@node Registers
5473
@section Registers
5474
 
5475
@cindex registers
5476
You can refer to machine register contents, in expressions, as variables
5477
with names starting with @samp{$}.  The names of registers are different
5478
for each machine; use @code{info registers} to see the names used on
5479
your machine.
5480
 
5481
@table @code
5482
@kindex info registers
5483
@item info registers
5484
Print the names and values of all registers except floating-point
5485
registers (in the selected stack frame).
5486
 
5487
@kindex info all-registers
5488
@cindex floating point registers
5489
@item info all-registers
5490
Print the names and values of all registers, including floating-point
5491
registers.
5492
 
5493
@item info registers @var{regname} @dots{}
5494
Print the @dfn{relativized} value of each specified register @var{regname}.
5495
As discussed in detail below, register values are normally relative to
5496
the selected stack frame.  @var{regname} may be any register name valid on
5497
the machine you are using, with or without the initial @samp{$}.
5498
@end table
5499
 
5500
@value{GDBN} has four ``standard'' register names that are available (in
5501
expressions) on most machines---whenever they do not conflict with an
5502
architecture's canonical mnemonics for registers.  The register names
5503
@code{$pc} and @code{$sp} are used for the program counter register and
5504
the stack pointer.  @code{$fp} is used for a register that contains a
5505
pointer to the current stack frame, and @code{$ps} is used for a
5506
register that contains the processor status.  For example,
5507
you could print the program counter in hex with
5508
 
5509
@smallexample
5510
p/x $pc
5511
@end smallexample
5512
 
5513
@noindent
5514
or print the instruction to be executed next with
5515
 
5516
@smallexample
5517
x/i $pc
5518
@end smallexample
5519
 
5520
@noindent
5521
or add four to the stack pointer@footnote{This is a way of removing
5522
one word from the stack, on machines where stacks grow downward in
5523
memory (most machines, nowadays).  This assumes that the innermost
5524
stack frame is selected; setting @code{$sp} is not allowed when other
5525
stack frames are selected.  To pop entire frames off the stack,
5526
regardless of machine architecture, use @code{return};
5527
see @ref{Returning, ,Returning from a function}.} with
5528
 
5529
@smallexample
5530
set $sp += 4
5531
@end smallexample
5532
 
5533
Whenever possible, these four standard register names are available on
5534
your machine even though the machine has different canonical mnemonics,
5535
so long as there is no conflict.  The @code{info registers} command
5536
shows the canonical names.  For example, on the SPARC, @code{info
5537
registers} displays the processor status register as @code{$psr} but you
5538
can also refer to it as @code{$ps}; and on x86-based machines @code{$ps}
5539
is an alias for the @sc{eflags} register.
5540
 
5541
@value{GDBN} always considers the contents of an ordinary register as an
5542
integer when the register is examined in this way.  Some machines have
5543
special registers which can hold nothing but floating point; these
5544
registers are considered to have floating point values.  There is no way
5545
to refer to the contents of an ordinary register as floating point value
5546
(although you can @emph{print} it as a floating point value with
5547
@samp{print/f $@var{regname}}).
5548
 
5549
Some registers have distinct ``raw'' and ``virtual'' data formats.  This
5550
means that the data format in which the register contents are saved by
5551
the operating system is not the same one that your program normally
5552
sees.  For example, the registers of the 68881 floating point
5553
coprocessor are always saved in ``extended'' (raw) format, but all C
5554
programs expect to work with ``double'' (virtual) format.  In such
5555
cases, @value{GDBN} normally works with the virtual format only (the format
5556
that makes sense for your program), but the @code{info registers} command
5557
prints the data in both formats.
5558
 
5559
Normally, register values are relative to the selected stack frame
5560
(@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}).  This means that you get the
5561
value that the register would contain if all stack frames farther in
5562
were exited and their saved registers restored.  In order to see the
5563
true contents of hardware registers, you must select the innermost
5564
frame (with @samp{frame 0}).
5565
 
5566
However, @value{GDBN} must deduce where registers are saved, from the machine
5567
code generated by your compiler.  If some registers are not saved, or if
5568
@value{GDBN} is unable to locate the saved registers, the selected stack
5569
frame makes no difference.
5570
 
5571
@node Floating Point Hardware
5572
@section Floating point hardware
5573
@cindex floating point
5574
 
5575
Depending on the configuration, @value{GDBN} may be able to give
5576
you more information about the status of the floating point hardware.
5577
 
5578
@table @code
5579
@kindex info float
5580
@item info float
5581
Display hardware-dependent information about the floating
5582
point unit.  The exact contents and layout vary depending on the
5583
floating point chip.  Currently, @samp{info float} is supported on
5584
the ARM and x86 machines.
5585
@end table
5586
 
5587
@node Vector Unit
5588
@section Vector Unit
5589
@cindex vector unit
5590
 
5591
Depending on the configuration, @value{GDBN} may be able to give you
5592
more information about the status of the vector unit.
5593
 
5594
@table @code
5595
@kindex info vector
5596
@item info vector
5597
Display information about the vector unit.  The exact contents and
5598
layout vary depending on the hardware.
5599
@end table
5600
 
5601
@node Memory Region Attributes
5602
@section Memory region attributes
5603
@cindex memory region attributes
5604
 
5605
@dfn{Memory region attributes} allow you to describe special handling
5606
required by regions of your target's memory.  @value{GDBN} uses attributes
5607
to determine whether to allow certain types of memory accesses; whether to
5608
use specific width accesses; and whether to cache target memory.
5609
 
5610
Defined memory regions can be individually enabled and disabled.  When a
5611
memory region is disabled, @value{GDBN} uses the default attributes when
5612
accessing memory in that region.  Similarly, if no memory regions have
5613
been defined, @value{GDBN} uses the default attributes when accessing
5614
all memory.
5615
 
5616
When a memory region is defined, it is given a number to identify it;
5617
to enable, disable, or remove a memory region, you specify that number.
5618
 
5619
@table @code
5620
@kindex mem
5621
@item mem @var{lower} @var{upper} @var{attributes}@dots{}
5622
Define memory region bounded by @var{lower} and @var{upper} with
5623
attributes @var{attributes}@dots{}.  Note that @var{upper} == 0 is a
5624
special case: it is treated as the the target's maximum memory address.
5625
(0xffff on 16 bit targets, 0xffffffff on 32 bit targets, etc.)
5626
 
5627
@kindex delete mem
5628
@item delete mem @var{nums}@dots{}
5629
Remove memory regions @var{nums}@dots{}.
5630
 
5631
@kindex disable mem
5632
@item disable mem @var{nums}@dots{}
5633
Disable memory regions @var{nums}@dots{}.
5634
A disabled memory region is not forgotten.
5635
It may be enabled again later.
5636
 
5637
@kindex enable mem
5638
@item enable mem @var{nums}@dots{}
5639
Enable memory regions @var{nums}@dots{}.
5640
 
5641
@kindex info mem
5642
@item info mem
5643
Print a table of all defined memory regions, with the following columns
5644
for each region.
5645
 
5646
@table @emph
5647
@item Memory Region Number
5648
@item Enabled or Disabled.
5649
Enabled memory regions are marked with @samp{y}.
5650
Disabled memory regions are marked with @samp{n}.
5651
 
5652
@item Lo Address
5653
The address defining the inclusive lower bound of the memory region.
5654
 
5655
@item Hi Address
5656
The address defining the exclusive upper bound of the memory region.
5657
 
5658
@item Attributes
5659
The list of attributes set for this memory region.
5660
@end table
5661
@end table
5662
 
5663
 
5664
@subsection Attributes
5665
 
5666
@subsubsection Memory Access Mode
5667
The access mode attributes set whether @value{GDBN} may make read or
5668
write accesses to a memory region.
5669
 
5670
While these attributes prevent @value{GDBN} from performing invalid
5671
memory accesses, they do nothing to prevent the target system, I/O DMA,
5672
etc. from accessing memory.
5673
 
5674
@table @code
5675
@item ro
5676
Memory is read only.
5677
@item wo
5678
Memory is write only.
5679
@item rw
5680
Memory is read/write.  This is the default.
5681
@end table
5682
 
5683
@subsubsection Memory Access Size
5684
The acccess size attributes tells @value{GDBN} to use specific sized
5685
accesses in the memory region.  Often memory mapped device registers
5686
require specific sized accesses.  If no access size attribute is
5687
specified, @value{GDBN} may use accesses of any size.
5688
 
5689
@table @code
5690
@item 8
5691
Use 8 bit memory accesses.
5692
@item 16
5693
Use 16 bit memory accesses.
5694
@item 32
5695
Use 32 bit memory accesses.
5696
@item 64
5697
Use 64 bit memory accesses.
5698
@end table
5699
 
5700
@c @subsubsection Hardware/Software Breakpoints
5701
@c The hardware/software breakpoint attributes set whether @value{GDBN}
5702
@c will use hardware or software breakpoints for the internal breakpoints
5703
@c used by the step, next, finish, until, etc. commands.
5704
@c
5705
@c @table @code
5706
@c @item hwbreak
5707
@c Always use hardware breakpoints
5708
@c @item swbreak (default)
5709
@c @end table
5710
 
5711
@subsubsection Data Cache
5712
The data cache attributes set whether @value{GDBN} will cache target
5713
memory.  While this generally improves performance by reducing debug
5714
protocol overhead, it can lead to incorrect results because @value{GDBN}
5715
does not know about volatile variables or memory mapped device
5716
registers.
5717
 
5718
@table @code
5719
@item cache
5720
Enable @value{GDBN} to cache target memory.
5721
@item nocache
5722
Disable @value{GDBN} from caching target memory.  This is the default.
5723
@end table
5724
 
5725
@c @subsubsection Memory Write Verification
5726
@c The memory write verification attributes set whether @value{GDBN}
5727
@c will re-reads data after each write to verify the write was successful.
5728
@c
5729
@c @table @code
5730
@c @item verify
5731
@c @item noverify (default)
5732
@c @end table
5733
 
5734
@node Dump/Restore Files
5735
@section Copy between memory and a file
5736
@cindex dump/restore files
5737
@cindex append data to a file
5738
@cindex dump data to a file
5739
@cindex restore data from a file
5740
@kindex dump
5741
@kindex append
5742
@kindex restore
5743
 
5744
The commands @code{dump}, @code{append}, and @code{restore} are used
5745
for copying data between target memory and a file.  Data is written
5746
into a file using @code{dump} or @code{append}, and restored from a
5747
file into memory by using @code{restore}.  Files may be binary, srec,
5748
intel hex, or tekhex (but only binary files can be appended).
5749
 
5750
@table @code
5751
@kindex dump binary
5752
@kindex append binary
5753
@item dump binary memory @var{filename} @var{start_addr} @var{end_addr}
5754
Dump contents of memory from @var{start_addr} to @var{end_addr} into
5755
raw binary format file @var{filename}.
5756
 
5757
@item append binary memory @var{filename} @var{start_addr} @var{end_addr}
5758
Append contents of memory from @var{start_addr} to @var{end_addr} to
5759
raw binary format file @var{filename}.
5760
 
5761
@item dump binary value @var{filename} @var{expression}
5762
Dump value of @var{expression} into raw binary format file @var{filename}.
5763
 
5764
@item append binary memory @var{filename} @var{expression}
5765
Append value of @var{expression} to raw binary format file @var{filename}.
5766
 
5767
@kindex dump ihex
5768
@item dump ihex memory @var{filename} @var{start_addr} @var{end_addr}
5769
Dump contents of memory from @var{start_addr} to @var{end_addr} into
5770
intel hex format file @var{filename}.
5771
 
5772
@item dump ihex value @var{filename} @var{expression}
5773
Dump value of @var{expression} into intel hex format file @var{filename}.
5774
 
5775
@kindex dump srec
5776
@item dump srec memory @var{filename} @var{start_addr} @var{end_addr}
5777
Dump contents of memory from @var{start_addr} to @var{end_addr} into
5778
srec format file @var{filename}.
5779
 
5780
@item dump srec value @var{filename} @var{expression}
5781
Dump value of @var{expression} into srec format file @var{filename}.
5782
 
5783
@kindex dump tekhex
5784
@item dump tekhex memory @var{filename} @var{start_addr} @var{end_addr}
5785
Dump contents of memory from @var{start_addr} to @var{end_addr} into
5786
tekhex format file @var{filename}.
5787
 
5788
@item dump tekhex value @var{filename} @var{expression}
5789
Dump value of @var{expression} into tekhex format file @var{filename}.
5790
 
5791
@item restore @var{filename} [@var{binary}] @var{bias} @var{start} @var{end}
5792
Restore the contents of file @var{filename} into memory.  The @code{restore}
5793
command can automatically recognize any known bfd file format, except for
5794
raw binary.  To restore a raw binary file you must use the optional argument
5795
@var{binary} after the filename.
5796
 
5797
If @var{bias} is non-zero, its value will be added to the addresses
5798
contained in the file.  Binary files always start at address zero, so
5799
they will be restored at address @var{bias}.  Other bfd files have
5800
a built-in location; they will be restored at offset @var{bias}
5801
from that location.
5802
 
5803
If @var{start} and/or @var{end} are non-zero, then only data between
5804
file offset @var{start} and file offset @var{end} will be restored.
5805
These offsets are relative to the addresses in the file, before
5806
the @var{bias} argument is applied.
5807
 
5808
@end table
5809
 
5810
@node Macros
5811
@chapter C Preprocessor Macros
5812
 
5813
Some languages, such as C and C++, provide a way to define and invoke
5814
``preprocessor macros'' which expand into strings of tokens.
5815
@value{GDBN} can evaluate expressions containing macro invocations, show
5816
the result of macro expansion, and show a macro's definition, including
5817
where it was defined.
5818
 
5819
You may need to compile your program specially to provide @value{GDBN}
5820
with information about preprocessor macros.  Most compilers do not
5821
include macros in their debugging information, even when you compile
5822
with the @option{-g} flag.  @xref{Compilation}.
5823
 
5824
A program may define a macro at one point, remove that definition later,
5825
and then provide a different definition after that.  Thus, at different
5826
points in the program, a macro may have different definitions, or have
5827
no definition at all.  If there is a current stack frame, @value{GDBN}
5828
uses the macros in scope at that frame's source code line.  Otherwise,
5829
@value{GDBN} uses the macros in scope at the current listing location;
5830
see @ref{List}.
5831
 
5832
At the moment, @value{GDBN} does not support the @code{##}
5833
token-splicing operator, the @code{#} stringification operator, or
5834
variable-arity macros.
5835
 
5836
Whenever @value{GDBN} evaluates an expression, it always expands any
5837
macro invocations present in the expression.  @value{GDBN} also provides
5838
the following commands for working with macros explicitly.
5839
 
5840
@table @code
5841
 
5842
@kindex macro expand
5843
@cindex macro expansion, showing the results of preprocessor
5844
@cindex preprocessor macro expansion, showing the results of
5845
@cindex expanding preprocessor macros
5846
@item macro expand @var{expression}
5847
@itemx macro exp @var{expression}
5848
Show the results of expanding all preprocessor macro invocations in
5849
@var{expression}.  Since @value{GDBN} simply expands macros, but does
5850
not parse the result, @var{expression} need not be a valid expression;
5851
it can be any string of tokens.
5852
 
5853
@kindex macro expand-once
5854
@item macro expand-once @var{expression}
5855
@itemx macro exp1 @var{expression}
5856
@i{(This command is not yet implemented.)}  Show the results of
5857
expanding those preprocessor macro invocations that appear explicitly in
5858
@var{expression}.  Macro invocations appearing in that expansion are
5859
left unchanged.  This command allows you to see the effect of a
5860
particular macro more clearly, without being confused by further
5861
expansions.  Since @value{GDBN} simply expands macros, but does not
5862
parse the result, @var{expression} need not be a valid expression; it
5863
can be any string of tokens.
5864
 
5865
@kindex info macro
5866
@cindex macro definition, showing
5867
@cindex definition, showing a macro's
5868
@item info macro @var{macro}
5869
Show the definition of the macro named @var{macro}, and describe the
5870
source location where that definition was established.
5871
 
5872
@kindex macro define
5873
@cindex user-defined macros
5874
@cindex defining macros interactively
5875
@cindex macros, user-defined
5876
@item macro define @var{macro} @var{replacement-list}
5877
@itemx macro define @var{macro}(@var{arglist}) @var{replacement-list}
5878
@i{(This command is not yet implemented.)}  Introduce a definition for a
5879
preprocessor macro named @var{macro}, invocations of which are replaced
5880
by the tokens given in @var{replacement-list}.  The first form of this
5881
command defines an ``object-like'' macro, which takes no arguments; the
5882
second form defines a ``function-like'' macro, which takes the arguments
5883
given in @var{arglist}.
5884
 
5885
A definition introduced by this command is in scope in every expression
5886
evaluated in @value{GDBN}, until it is removed with the @command{macro
5887
undef} command, described below.  The definition overrides all
5888
definitions for @var{macro} present in the program being debugged, as
5889
well as any previous user-supplied definition.
5890
 
5891
@kindex macro undef
5892
@item macro undef @var{macro}
5893
@i{(This command is not yet implemented.)}  Remove any user-supplied
5894
definition for the macro named @var{macro}.  This command only affects
5895
definitions provided with the @command{macro define} command, described
5896
above; it cannot remove definitions present in the program being
5897
debugged.
5898
 
5899
@end table
5900
 
5901
@cindex macros, example of debugging with
5902
Here is a transcript showing the above commands in action.  First, we
5903
show our source files:
5904
 
5905
@smallexample
5906
$ cat sample.c
5907
#include <stdio.h>
5908
#include "sample.h"
5909
 
5910
#define M 42
5911
#define ADD(x) (M + x)
5912
 
5913
main ()
5914
@{
5915
#define N 28
5916
  printf ("Hello, world!\n");
5917
#undef N
5918
  printf ("We're so creative.\n");
5919
#define N 1729
5920
  printf ("Goodbye, world!\n");
5921
@}
5922
$ cat sample.h
5923
#define Q <
5924
$
5925
@end smallexample
5926
 
5927
Now, we compile the program using the @sc{gnu} C compiler, @value{NGCC}.
5928
We pass the @option{-gdwarf-2} and @option{-g3} flags to ensure the
5929
compiler includes information about preprocessor macros in the debugging
5930
information.
5931
 
5932
@smallexample
5933
$ gcc -gdwarf-2 -g3 sample.c -o sample
5934
$
5935
@end smallexample
5936
 
5937
Now, we start @value{GDBN} on our sample program:
5938
 
5939
@smallexample
5940
$ gdb -nw sample
5941
GNU gdb 2002-05-06-cvs
5942
Copyright 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
5943
GDB is free software, @dots{}
5944
(gdb)
5945
@end smallexample
5946
 
5947
We can expand macros and examine their definitions, even when the
5948
program is not running.  @value{GDBN} uses the current listing position
5949
to decide which macro definitions are in scope:
5950
 
5951
@smallexample
5952
(gdb) list main
5953
3
5954
4       #define M 42
5955
5       #define ADD(x) (M + x)
5956
6
5957
7       main ()
5958
8       @{
5959
9       #define N 28
5960
10        printf ("Hello, world!\n");
5961
11      #undef N
5962
12        printf ("We're so creative.\n");
5963
(gdb) info macro ADD
5964
Defined at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.c:5
5965
#define ADD(x) (M + x)
5966
(gdb) info macro Q
5967
Defined at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.h:1
5968
  included at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.c:2
5969
#define Q <
5970
(gdb) macro expand ADD(1)
5971
expands to: (42 + 1)
5972
(gdb) macro expand-once ADD(1)
5973
expands to: once (M + 1)
5974
(gdb)
5975
@end smallexample
5976
 
5977
In the example above, note that @command{macro expand-once} expands only
5978
the macro invocation explicit in the original text --- the invocation of
5979
@code{ADD} --- but does not expand the invocation of the macro @code{M},
5980
which was introduced by @code{ADD}.
5981
 
5982
Once the program is running, GDB uses the macro definitions in force at
5983
the source line of the current stack frame:
5984
 
5985
@smallexample
5986
(gdb) break main
5987
Breakpoint 1 at 0x8048370: file sample.c, line 10.
5988
(gdb) run
5989
Starting program: /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample
5990
 
5991
Breakpoint 1, main () at sample.c:10
5992
10        printf ("Hello, world!\n");
5993
(gdb)
5994
@end smallexample
5995
 
5996
At line 10, the definition of the macro @code{N} at line 9 is in force:
5997
 
5998
@smallexample
5999
(gdb) info macro N
6000
Defined at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.c:9
6001
#define N 28
6002
(gdb) macro expand N Q M
6003
expands to: 28 < 42
6004
(gdb) print N Q M
6005
$1 = 1
6006
(gdb)
6007
@end smallexample
6008
 
6009
As we step over directives that remove @code{N}'s definition, and then
6010
give it a new definition, @value{GDBN} finds the definition (or lack
6011
thereof) in force at each point:
6012
 
6013
@smallexample
6014
(gdb) next
6015
Hello, world!
6016
12        printf ("We're so creative.\n");
6017
(gdb) info macro N
6018
The symbol `N' has no definition as a C/C++ preprocessor macro
6019
at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.c:12
6020
(gdb) next
6021
We're so creative.
6022
14        printf ("Goodbye, world!\n");
6023
(gdb) info macro N
6024
Defined at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.c:13
6025
#define N 1729
6026
(gdb) macro expand N Q M
6027
expands to: 1729 < 42
6028
(gdb) print N Q M
6029
$2 = 0
6030
(gdb)
6031
@end smallexample
6032
 
6033
 
6034
@node Tracepoints
6035
@chapter Tracepoints
6036
@c This chapter is based on the documentation written by Michael
6037
@c Snyder, David Taylor, Jim Blandy, and Elena Zannoni.
6038
 
6039
@cindex tracepoints
6040
In some applications, it is not feasible for the debugger to interrupt
6041
the program's execution long enough for the developer to learn
6042
anything helpful about its behavior.  If the program's correctness
6043
depends on its real-time behavior, delays introduced by a debugger
6044
might cause the program to change its behavior drastically, or perhaps
6045
fail, even when the code itself is correct.  It is useful to be able
6046
to observe the program's behavior without interrupting it.
6047
 
6048
Using @value{GDBN}'s @code{trace} and @code{collect} commands, you can
6049
specify locations in the program, called @dfn{tracepoints}, and
6050
arbitrary expressions to evaluate when those tracepoints are reached.
6051
Later, using the @code{tfind} command, you can examine the values
6052
those expressions had when the program hit the tracepoints.  The
6053
expressions may also denote objects in memory---structures or arrays,
6054
for example---whose values @value{GDBN} should record; while visiting
6055
a particular tracepoint, you may inspect those objects as if they were
6056
in memory at that moment.  However, because @value{GDBN} records these
6057
values without interacting with you, it can do so quickly and
6058
unobtrusively, hopefully not disturbing the program's behavior.
6059
 
6060
The tracepoint facility is currently available only for remote
6061
targets.  @xref{Targets}.  In addition, your remote target must know how
6062
to collect trace data.  This functionality is implemented in the remote
6063
stub; however, none of the stubs distributed with @value{GDBN} support
6064
tracepoints as of this writing.
6065
 
6066
This chapter describes the tracepoint commands and features.
6067
 
6068
@menu
6069
* Set Tracepoints::
6070
* Analyze Collected Data::
6071
* Tracepoint Variables::
6072
@end menu
6073
 
6074
@node Set Tracepoints
6075
@section Commands to Set Tracepoints
6076
 
6077
Before running such a @dfn{trace experiment}, an arbitrary number of
6078
tracepoints can be set.  Like a breakpoint (@pxref{Set Breaks}), a
6079
tracepoint has a number assigned to it by @value{GDBN}.  Like with
6080
breakpoints, tracepoint numbers are successive integers starting from
6081
one.  Many of the commands associated with tracepoints take the
6082
tracepoint number as their argument, to identify which tracepoint to
6083
work on.
6084
 
6085
For each tracepoint, you can specify, in advance, some arbitrary set
6086
of data that you want the target to collect in the trace buffer when
6087
it hits that tracepoint.  The collected data can include registers,
6088
local variables, or global data.  Later, you can use @value{GDBN}
6089
commands to examine the values these data had at the time the
6090
tracepoint was hit.
6091
 
6092
This section describes commands to set tracepoints and associated
6093
conditions and actions.
6094
 
6095
@menu
6096
* Create and Delete Tracepoints::
6097
* Enable and Disable Tracepoints::
6098
* Tracepoint Passcounts::
6099
* Tracepoint Actions::
6100
* Listing Tracepoints::
6101
* Starting and Stopping Trace Experiment::
6102
@end menu
6103
 
6104
@node Create and Delete Tracepoints
6105
@subsection Create and Delete Tracepoints
6106
 
6107
@table @code
6108
@cindex set tracepoint
6109
@kindex trace
6110
@item trace
6111
The @code{trace} command is very similar to the @code{break} command.
6112
Its argument can be a source line, a function name, or an address in
6113
the target program.  @xref{Set Breaks}.  The @code{trace} command
6114
defines a tracepoint, which is a point in the target program where the
6115
debugger will briefly stop, collect some data, and then allow the
6116
program to continue.  Setting a tracepoint or changing its commands
6117
doesn't take effect until the next @code{tstart} command; thus, you
6118
cannot change the tracepoint attributes once a trace experiment is
6119
running.
6120
 
6121
Here are some examples of using the @code{trace} command:
6122
 
6123
@smallexample
6124
(@value{GDBP}) @b{trace foo.c:121}    // a source file and line number
6125
 
6126
(@value{GDBP}) @b{trace +2}           // 2 lines forward
6127
 
6128
(@value{GDBP}) @b{trace my_function}  // first source line of function
6129
 
6130
(@value{GDBP}) @b{trace *my_function} // EXACT start address of function
6131
 
6132
(@value{GDBP}) @b{trace *0x2117c4}    // an address
6133
@end smallexample
6134
 
6135
@noindent
6136
You can abbreviate @code{trace} as @code{tr}.
6137
 
6138
@vindex $tpnum
6139
@cindex last tracepoint number
6140
@cindex recent tracepoint number
6141
@cindex tracepoint number
6142
The convenience variable @code{$tpnum} records the tracepoint number
6143
of the most recently set tracepoint.
6144
 
6145
@kindex delete tracepoint
6146
@cindex tracepoint deletion
6147
@item delete tracepoint @r{[}@var{num}@r{]}
6148
Permanently delete one or more tracepoints.  With no argument, the
6149
default is to delete all tracepoints.
6150
 
6151
Examples:
6152
 
6153
@smallexample
6154
(@value{GDBP}) @b{delete trace 1 2 3} // remove three tracepoints
6155
 
6156
(@value{GDBP}) @b{delete trace}       // remove all tracepoints
6157
@end smallexample
6158
 
6159
@noindent
6160
You can abbreviate this command as @code{del tr}.
6161
@end table
6162
 
6163
@node Enable and Disable Tracepoints
6164
@subsection Enable and Disable Tracepoints
6165
 
6166
@table @code
6167
@kindex disable tracepoint
6168
@item disable tracepoint @r{[}@var{num}@r{]}
6169
Disable tracepoint @var{num}, or all tracepoints if no argument
6170
@var{num} is given.  A disabled tracepoint will have no effect during
6171
the next trace experiment, but it is not forgotten.  You can re-enable
6172
a disabled tracepoint using the @code{enable tracepoint} command.
6173
 
6174
@kindex enable tracepoint
6175
@item enable tracepoint @r{[}@var{num}@r{]}
6176
Enable tracepoint @var{num}, or all tracepoints.  The enabled
6177
tracepoints will become effective the next time a trace experiment is
6178
run.
6179
@end table
6180
 
6181
@node Tracepoint Passcounts
6182
@subsection Tracepoint Passcounts
6183
 
6184
@table @code
6185
@kindex passcount
6186
@cindex tracepoint pass count
6187
@item passcount @r{[}@var{n} @r{[}@var{num}@r{]]}
6188
Set the @dfn{passcount} of a tracepoint.  The passcount is a way to
6189
automatically stop a trace experiment.  If a tracepoint's passcount is
6190
@var{n}, then the trace experiment will be automatically stopped on
6191
the @var{n}'th time that tracepoint is hit.  If the tracepoint number
6192
@var{num} is not specified, the @code{passcount} command sets the
6193
passcount of the most recently defined tracepoint.  If no passcount is
6194
given, the trace experiment will run until stopped explicitly by the
6195
user.
6196
 
6197
Examples:
6198
 
6199
@smallexample
6200
(@value{GDBP}) @b{passcount 5 2} // Stop on the 5th execution of
6201
@exdent @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @code{// tracepoint 2}
6202
 
6203
(@value{GDBP}) @b{passcount 12}  // Stop on the 12th execution of the
6204
@exdent @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @code{// most recently defined tracepoint.}
6205
(@value{GDBP}) @b{trace foo}
6206
(@value{GDBP}) @b{pass 3}
6207
(@value{GDBP}) @b{trace bar}
6208
(@value{GDBP}) @b{pass 2}
6209
(@value{GDBP}) @b{trace baz}
6210
(@value{GDBP}) @b{pass 1}        // Stop tracing when foo has been
6211
@exdent @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @code{// executed 3 times OR when bar has}
6212
@exdent @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @code{// been executed 2 times}
6213
@exdent @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @code{// OR when baz has been executed 1 time.}
6214
@end smallexample
6215
@end table
6216
 
6217
@node Tracepoint Actions
6218
@subsection Tracepoint Action Lists
6219
 
6220
@table @code
6221
@kindex actions
6222
@cindex tracepoint actions
6223
@item actions @r{[}@var{num}@r{]}
6224
This command will prompt for a list of actions to be taken when the
6225
tracepoint is hit.  If the tracepoint number @var{num} is not
6226
specified, this command sets the actions for the one that was most
6227
recently defined (so that you can define a tracepoint and then say
6228
@code{actions} without bothering about its number).  You specify the
6229
actions themselves on the following lines, one action at a time, and
6230
terminate the actions list with a line containing just @code{end}.  So
6231
far, the only defined actions are @code{collect} and
6232
@code{while-stepping}.
6233
 
6234
@cindex remove actions from a tracepoint
6235
To remove all actions from a tracepoint, type @samp{actions @var{num}}
6236
and follow it immediately with @samp{end}.
6237
 
6238
@smallexample
6239
(@value{GDBP}) @b{collect @var{data}} // collect some data
6240
 
6241
(@value{GDBP}) @b{while-stepping 5} // single-step 5 times, collect data
6242
 
6243
(@value{GDBP}) @b{end}              // signals the end of actions.
6244
@end smallexample
6245
 
6246
In the following example, the action list begins with @code{collect}
6247
commands indicating the things to be collected when the tracepoint is
6248
hit.  Then, in order to single-step and collect additional data
6249
following the tracepoint, a @code{while-stepping} command is used,
6250
followed by the list of things to be collected while stepping.  The
6251
@code{while-stepping} command is terminated by its own separate
6252
@code{end} command.  Lastly, the action list is terminated by an
6253
@code{end} command.
6254
 
6255
@smallexample
6256
(@value{GDBP}) @b{trace foo}
6257
(@value{GDBP}) @b{actions}
6258
Enter actions for tracepoint 1, one per line:
6259
> collect bar,baz
6260
> collect $regs
6261
> while-stepping 12
6262
  > collect $fp, $sp
6263
  > end
6264
end
6265
@end smallexample
6266
 
6267
@kindex collect @r{(tracepoints)}
6268
@item collect @var{expr1}, @var{expr2}, @dots{}
6269
Collect values of the given expressions when the tracepoint is hit.
6270
This command accepts a comma-separated list of any valid expressions.
6271
In addition to global, static, or local variables, the following
6272
special arguments are supported:
6273
 
6274
@table @code
6275
@item $regs
6276
collect all registers
6277
 
6278
@item $args
6279
collect all function arguments
6280
 
6281
@item $locals
6282
collect all local variables.
6283
@end table
6284
 
6285
You can give several consecutive @code{collect} commands, each one
6286
with a single argument, or one @code{collect} command with several
6287
arguments separated by commas: the effect is the same.
6288
 
6289
The command @code{info scope} (@pxref{Symbols, info scope}) is
6290
particularly useful for figuring out what data to collect.
6291
 
6292
@kindex while-stepping @r{(tracepoints)}
6293
@item while-stepping @var{n}
6294
Perform @var{n} single-step traces after the tracepoint, collecting
6295
new data at each step.  The @code{while-stepping} command is
6296
followed by the list of what to collect while stepping (followed by
6297
its own @code{end} command):
6298
 
6299
@smallexample
6300
> while-stepping 12
6301
  > collect $regs, myglobal
6302
  > end
6303
>
6304
@end smallexample
6305
 
6306
@noindent
6307
You may abbreviate @code{while-stepping} as @code{ws} or
6308
@code{stepping}.
6309
@end table
6310
 
6311
@node Listing Tracepoints
6312
@subsection Listing Tracepoints
6313
 
6314
@table @code
6315
@kindex info tracepoints
6316
@cindex information about tracepoints
6317
@item info tracepoints @r{[}@var{num}@r{]}
6318
Display information about the tracepoint @var{num}.  If you don't specify
6319
a tracepoint number, displays information about all the tracepoints
6320
defined so far.  For each tracepoint, the following information is
6321
shown:
6322
 
6323
@itemize @bullet
6324
@item
6325
its number
6326
@item
6327
whether it is enabled or disabled
6328
@item
6329
its address
6330
@item
6331
its passcount as given by the @code{passcount @var{n}} command
6332
@item
6333
its step count as given by the @code{while-stepping @var{n}} command
6334
@item
6335
where in the source files is the tracepoint set
6336
@item
6337
its action list as given by the @code{actions} command
6338
@end itemize
6339
 
6340
@smallexample
6341
(@value{GDBP}) @b{info trace}
6342
Num Enb Address    PassC StepC What
6343
1   y   0x002117c4 0     0     <gdb_asm>
6344
2   y   0x0020dc64 0     0     in g_test at g_test.c:1375
6345
3   y   0x0020b1f4 0     0     in get_data at ../foo.c:41
6346
(@value{GDBP})
6347
@end smallexample
6348
 
6349
@noindent
6350
This command can be abbreviated @code{info tp}.
6351
@end table
6352
 
6353
@node Starting and Stopping Trace Experiment
6354
@subsection Starting and Stopping Trace Experiment
6355
 
6356
@table @code
6357
@kindex tstart
6358
@cindex start a new trace experiment
6359
@cindex collected data discarded
6360
@item tstart
6361
This command takes no arguments.  It starts the trace experiment, and
6362
begins collecting data.  This has the side effect of discarding all
6363
the data collected in the trace buffer during the previous trace
6364
experiment.
6365
 
6366
@kindex tstop
6367
@cindex stop a running trace experiment
6368
@item tstop
6369
This command takes no arguments.  It ends the trace experiment, and
6370
stops collecting data.
6371
 
6372
@strong{Note:} a trace experiment and data collection may stop
6373
automatically if any tracepoint's passcount is reached
6374
(@pxref{Tracepoint Passcounts}), or if the trace buffer becomes full.
6375
 
6376
@kindex tstatus
6377
@cindex status of trace data collection
6378
@cindex trace experiment, status of
6379
@item tstatus
6380
This command displays the status of the current trace data
6381
collection.
6382
@end table
6383
 
6384
Here is an example of the commands we described so far:
6385
 
6386
@smallexample
6387
(@value{GDBP}) @b{trace gdb_c_test}
6388
(@value{GDBP}) @b{actions}
6389
Enter actions for tracepoint #1, one per line.
6390
> collect $regs,$locals,$args
6391
> while-stepping 11
6392
  > collect $regs
6393
  > end
6394
> end
6395
(@value{GDBP}) @b{tstart}
6396
        [time passes @dots{}]
6397
(@value{GDBP}) @b{tstop}
6398
@end smallexample
6399
 
6400
 
6401
@node Analyze Collected Data
6402
@section Using the collected data
6403
 
6404
After the tracepoint experiment ends, you use @value{GDBN} commands
6405
for examining the trace data.  The basic idea is that each tracepoint
6406
collects a trace @dfn{snapshot} every time it is hit and another
6407
snapshot every time it single-steps.  All these snapshots are
6408
consecutively numbered from zero and go into a buffer, and you can
6409
examine them later.  The way you examine them is to @dfn{focus} on a
6410
specific trace snapshot.  When the remote stub is focused on a trace
6411
snapshot, it will respond to all @value{GDBN} requests for memory and
6412
registers by reading from the buffer which belongs to that snapshot,
6413
rather than from @emph{real} memory or registers of the program being
6414
debugged.  This means that @strong{all} @value{GDBN} commands
6415
(@code{print}, @code{info registers}, @code{backtrace}, etc.) will
6416
behave as if we were currently debugging the program state as it was
6417
when the tracepoint occurred.  Any requests for data that are not in
6418
the buffer will fail.
6419
 
6420
@menu
6421
* tfind::                       How to select a trace snapshot
6422
* tdump::                       How to display all data for a snapshot
6423
* save-tracepoints::            How to save tracepoints for a future run
6424
@end menu
6425
 
6426
@node tfind
6427
@subsection @code{tfind @var{n}}
6428
 
6429
@kindex tfind
6430
@cindex select trace snapshot
6431
@cindex find trace snapshot
6432
The basic command for selecting a trace snapshot from the buffer is
6433
@code{tfind @var{n}}, which finds trace snapshot number @var{n},
6434
counting from zero.  If no argument @var{n} is given, the next
6435
snapshot is selected.
6436
 
6437
Here are the various forms of using the @code{tfind} command.
6438
 
6439
@table @code
6440
@item tfind start
6441
Find the first snapshot in the buffer.  This is a synonym for
6442
@code{tfind 0} (since 0 is the number of the first snapshot).
6443
 
6444
@item tfind none
6445
Stop debugging trace snapshots, resume @emph{live} debugging.
6446
 
6447
@item tfind end
6448
Same as @samp{tfind none}.
6449
 
6450
@item tfind
6451
No argument means find the next trace snapshot.
6452
 
6453
@item tfind -
6454
Find the previous trace snapshot before the current one.  This permits
6455
retracing earlier steps.
6456
 
6457
@item tfind tracepoint @var{num}
6458
Find the next snapshot associated with tracepoint @var{num}.  Search
6459
proceeds forward from the last examined trace snapshot.  If no
6460
argument @var{num} is given, it means find the next snapshot collected
6461
for the same tracepoint as the current snapshot.
6462
 
6463
@item tfind pc @var{addr}
6464
Find the next snapshot associated with the value @var{addr} of the
6465
program counter.  Search proceeds forward from the last examined trace
6466
snapshot.  If no argument @var{addr} is given, it means find the next
6467
snapshot with the same value of PC as the current snapshot.
6468
 
6469
@item tfind outside @var{addr1}, @var{addr2}
6470
Find the next snapshot whose PC is outside the given range of
6471
addresses.
6472
 
6473
@item tfind range @var{addr1}, @var{addr2}
6474
Find the next snapshot whose PC is between @var{addr1} and
6475
@var{addr2}.  @c FIXME: Is the range inclusive or exclusive?
6476
 
6477
@item tfind line @r{[}@var{file}:@r{]}@var{n}
6478
Find the next snapshot associated with the source line @var{n}.  If
6479
the optional argument @var{file} is given, refer to line @var{n} in
6480
that source file.  Search proceeds forward from the last examined
6481
trace snapshot.  If no argument @var{n} is given, it means find the
6482
next line other than the one currently being examined; thus saying
6483
@code{tfind line} repeatedly can appear to have the same effect as
6484
stepping from line to line in a @emph{live} debugging session.
6485
@end table
6486
 
6487
The default arguments for the @code{tfind} commands are specifically
6488
designed to make it easy to scan through the trace buffer.  For
6489
instance, @code{tfind} with no argument selects the next trace
6490
snapshot, and @code{tfind -} with no argument selects the previous
6491
trace snapshot.  So, by giving one @code{tfind} command, and then
6492
simply hitting @key{RET} repeatedly you can examine all the trace
6493
snapshots in order.  Or, by saying @code{tfind -} and then hitting
6494
@key{RET} repeatedly you can examine the snapshots in reverse order.
6495
The @code{tfind line} command with no argument selects the snapshot
6496
for the next source line executed.  The @code{tfind pc} command with
6497
no argument selects the next snapshot with the same program counter
6498
(PC) as the current frame.  The @code{tfind tracepoint} command with
6499
no argument selects the next trace snapshot collected by the same
6500
tracepoint as the current one.
6501
 
6502
In addition to letting you scan through the trace buffer manually,
6503
these commands make it easy to construct @value{GDBN} scripts that
6504
scan through the trace buffer and print out whatever collected data
6505
you are interested in.  Thus, if we want to examine the PC, FP, and SP
6506
registers from each trace frame in the buffer, we can say this:
6507
 
6508
@smallexample
6509
(@value{GDBP}) @b{tfind start}
6510
(@value{GDBP}) @b{while ($trace_frame != -1)}
6511
> printf "Frame %d, PC = %08X, SP = %08X, FP = %08X\n", \
6512
          $trace_frame, $pc, $sp, $fp
6513
> tfind
6514
> end
6515
 
6516
Frame 0, PC = 0020DC64, SP = 0030BF3C, FP = 0030BF44
6517
Frame 1, PC = 0020DC6C, SP = 0030BF38, FP = 0030BF44
6518
Frame 2, PC = 0020DC70, SP = 0030BF34, FP = 0030BF44
6519
Frame 3, PC = 0020DC74, SP = 0030BF30, FP = 0030BF44
6520
Frame 4, PC = 0020DC78, SP = 0030BF2C, FP = 0030BF44
6521
Frame 5, PC = 0020DC7C, SP = 0030BF28, FP = 0030BF44
6522
Frame 6, PC = 0020DC80, SP = 0030BF24, FP = 0030BF44
6523
Frame 7, PC = 0020DC84, SP = 0030BF20, FP = 0030BF44
6524
Frame 8, PC = 0020DC88, SP = 0030BF1C, FP = 0030BF44
6525
Frame 9, PC = 0020DC8E, SP = 0030BF18, FP = 0030BF44
6526
Frame 10, PC = 00203F6C, SP = 0030BE3C, FP = 0030BF14
6527
@end smallexample
6528
 
6529
Or, if we want to examine the variable @code{X} at each source line in
6530
the buffer:
6531
 
6532
@smallexample
6533
(@value{GDBP}) @b{tfind start}
6534
(@value{GDBP}) @b{while ($trace_frame != -1)}
6535
> printf "Frame %d, X == %d\n", $trace_frame, X
6536
> tfind line
6537
> end
6538
 
6539
Frame 0, X = 1
6540
Frame 7, X = 2
6541
Frame 13, X = 255
6542
@end smallexample
6543
 
6544
@node tdump
6545
@subsection @code{tdump}
6546
@kindex tdump
6547
@cindex dump all data collected at tracepoint
6548
@cindex tracepoint data, display
6549
 
6550
This command takes no arguments.  It prints all the data collected at
6551
the current trace snapshot.
6552
 
6553
@smallexample
6554
(@value{GDBP}) @b{trace 444}
6555
(@value{GDBP}) @b{actions}
6556
Enter actions for tracepoint #2, one per line:
6557
> collect $regs, $locals, $args, gdb_long_test
6558
> end
6559
 
6560
(@value{GDBP}) @b{tstart}
6561
 
6562
(@value{GDBP}) @b{tfind line 444}
6563
#0  gdb_test (p1=0x11, p2=0x22, p3=0x33, p4=0x44, p5=0x55, p6=0x66)
6564
at gdb_test.c:444
6565
444        printp( "%s: arguments = 0x%X 0x%X 0x%X 0x%X 0x%X 0x%X\n", )
6566
 
6567
(@value{GDBP}) @b{tdump}
6568
Data collected at tracepoint 2, trace frame 1:
6569
d0             0xc4aa0085       -995491707
6570
d1             0x18     24
6571
d2             0x80     128
6572
d3             0x33     51
6573
d4             0x71aea3d        119204413
6574
d5             0x22     34
6575
d6             0xe0     224
6576
d7             0x380035 3670069
6577
a0             0x19e24a 1696330
6578
a1             0x3000668        50333288
6579
a2             0x100    256
6580
a3             0x322000 3284992
6581
a4             0x3000698        50333336
6582
a5             0x1ad3cc 1758156
6583
fp             0x30bf3c 0x30bf3c
6584
sp             0x30bf34 0x30bf34
6585
ps             0x0      0
6586
pc             0x20b2c8 0x20b2c8
6587
fpcontrol      0x0      0
6588
fpstatus       0x0      0
6589
fpiaddr        0x0      0
6590
p = 0x20e5b4 "gdb-test"
6591
p1 = (void *) 0x11
6592
p2 = (void *) 0x22
6593
p3 = (void *) 0x33
6594
p4 = (void *) 0x44
6595
p5 = (void *) 0x55
6596
p6 = (void *) 0x66
6597
gdb_long_test = 17 '\021'
6598
 
6599
(@value{GDBP})
6600
@end smallexample
6601
 
6602
@node save-tracepoints
6603
@subsection @code{save-tracepoints @var{filename}}
6604
@kindex save-tracepoints
6605
@cindex save tracepoints for future sessions
6606
 
6607
This command saves all current tracepoint definitions together with
6608
their actions and passcounts, into a file @file{@var{filename}}
6609
suitable for use in a later debugging session.  To read the saved
6610
tracepoint definitions, use the @code{source} command (@pxref{Command
6611
Files}).
6612
 
6613
@node Tracepoint Variables
6614
@section Convenience Variables for Tracepoints
6615
@cindex tracepoint variables
6616
@cindex convenience variables for tracepoints
6617
 
6618
@table @code
6619
@vindex $trace_frame
6620
@item (int) $trace_frame
6621
The current trace snapshot (a.k.a.@: @dfn{frame}) number, or -1 if no
6622
snapshot is selected.
6623
 
6624
@vindex $tracepoint
6625
@item (int) $tracepoint
6626
The tracepoint for the current trace snapshot.
6627
 
6628
@vindex $trace_line
6629
@item (int) $trace_line
6630
The line number for the current trace snapshot.
6631
 
6632
@vindex $trace_file
6633
@item (char []) $trace_file
6634
The source file for the current trace snapshot.
6635
 
6636
@vindex $trace_func
6637
@item (char []) $trace_func
6638
The name of the function containing @code{$tracepoint}.
6639
@end table
6640
 
6641
Note: @code{$trace_file} is not suitable for use in @code{printf},
6642
use @code{output} instead.
6643
 
6644
Here's a simple example of using these convenience variables for
6645
stepping through all the trace snapshots and printing some of their
6646
data.
6647
 
6648
@smallexample
6649
(@value{GDBP}) @b{tfind start}
6650
 
6651
(@value{GDBP}) @b{while $trace_frame != -1}
6652
> output $trace_file
6653
> printf ", line %d (tracepoint #%d)\n", $trace_line, $tracepoint
6654
> tfind
6655
> end
6656
@end smallexample
6657
 
6658
@node Overlays
6659
@chapter Debugging Programs That Use Overlays
6660
@cindex overlays
6661
 
6662
If your program is too large to fit completely in your target system's
6663
memory, you can sometimes use @dfn{overlays} to work around this
6664
problem.  @value{GDBN} provides some support for debugging programs that
6665
use overlays.
6666
 
6667
@menu
6668
* How Overlays Work::              A general explanation of overlays.
6669
* Overlay Commands::               Managing overlays in @value{GDBN}.
6670
* Automatic Overlay Debugging::    @value{GDBN} can find out which overlays are
6671
                                   mapped by asking the inferior.
6672
* Overlay Sample Program::         A sample program using overlays.
6673
@end menu
6674
 
6675
@node How Overlays Work
6676
@section How Overlays Work
6677
@cindex mapped overlays
6678
@cindex unmapped overlays
6679
@cindex load address, overlay's
6680
@cindex mapped address
6681
@cindex overlay area
6682
 
6683
Suppose you have a computer whose instruction address space is only 64
6684
kilobytes long, but which has much more memory which can be accessed by
6685
other means: special instructions, segment registers, or memory
6686
management hardware, for example.  Suppose further that you want to
6687
adapt a program which is larger than 64 kilobytes to run on this system.
6688
 
6689
One solution is to identify modules of your program which are relatively
6690
independent, and need not call each other directly; call these modules
6691
@dfn{overlays}.  Separate the overlays from the main program, and place
6692
their machine code in the larger memory.  Place your main program in
6693
instruction memory, but leave at least enough space there to hold the
6694
largest overlay as well.
6695
 
6696
Now, to call a function located in an overlay, you must first copy that
6697
overlay's machine code from the large memory into the space set aside
6698
for it in the instruction memory, and then jump to its entry point
6699
there.
6700
 
6701
@c NB:  In the below the mapped area's size is greater or equal to the
6702
@c size of all overlays.  This is intentional to remind the developer
6703
@c that overlays don't necessarily need to be the same size.
6704
 
6705
@smallexample
6706
@group
6707
    Data             Instruction            Larger
6708
Address Space       Address Space        Address Space
6709
+-----------+       +-----------+        +-----------+
6710
|           |       |           |        |           |
6711
+-----------+       +-----------+        +-----------+<-- overlay 1
6712
| program   |       |   main    |   .----| overlay 1 | load address
6713
| variables |       |  program  |   |    +-----------+
6714
| and heap  |       |           |   |    |           |
6715
+-----------+       |           |   |    +-----------+<-- overlay 2
6716
|           |       +-----------+   |    |           | load address
6717
+-----------+       |           |   |  .-| overlay 2 |
6718
                    |           |   |  | |           |
6719
         mapped --->+-----------+   |  | +-----------+
6720
         address    |           |   |  | |           |
6721
                    |  overlay  | <-'  | |           |
6722
                    |   area    |  <---' +-----------+<-- overlay 3
6723
                    |           | <---.  |           | load address
6724
                    +-----------+     `--| overlay 3 |
6725
                    |           |        |           |
6726
                    +-----------+        |           |
6727
                                         +-----------+
6728
                                         |           |
6729
                                         +-----------+
6730
 
6731
                    @anchor{A code overlay}A code overlay
6732
@end group
6733
@end smallexample
6734
 
6735
The diagram (@pxref{A code overlay}) shows a system with separate data
6736
and instruction address spaces.  To map an overlay, the program copies
6737
its code from the larger address space to the instruction address space.
6738
Since the overlays shown here all use the same mapped address, only one
6739
may be mapped at a time.  For a system with a single address space for
6740
data and instructions, the diagram would be similar, except that the
6741
program variables and heap would share an address space with the main
6742
program and the overlay area.
6743
 
6744
An overlay loaded into instruction memory and ready for use is called a
6745
@dfn{mapped} overlay; its @dfn{mapped address} is its address in the
6746
instruction memory.  An overlay not present (or only partially present)
6747
in instruction memory is called @dfn{unmapped}; its @dfn{load address}
6748
is its address in the larger memory.  The mapped address is also called
6749
the @dfn{virtual memory address}, or @dfn{VMA}; the load address is also
6750
called the @dfn{load memory address}, or @dfn{LMA}.
6751
 
6752
Unfortunately, overlays are not a completely transparent way to adapt a
6753
program to limited instruction memory.  They introduce a new set of
6754
global constraints you must keep in mind as you design your program:
6755
 
6756
@itemize @bullet
6757
 
6758
@item
6759
Before calling or returning to a function in an overlay, your program
6760
must make sure that overlay is actually mapped.  Otherwise, the call or
6761
return will transfer control to the right address, but in the wrong
6762
overlay, and your program will probably crash.
6763
 
6764
@item
6765
If the process of mapping an overlay is expensive on your system, you
6766
will need to choose your overlays carefully to minimize their effect on
6767
your program's performance.
6768
 
6769
@item
6770
The executable file you load onto your system must contain each
6771
overlay's instructions, appearing at the overlay's load address, not its
6772
mapped address.  However, each overlay's instructions must be relocated
6773
and its symbols defined as if the overlay were at its mapped address.
6774
You can use GNU linker scripts to specify different load and relocation
6775
addresses for pieces of your program; see @ref{Overlay Description,,,
6776
ld.info, Using ld: the GNU linker}.
6777
 
6778
@item
6779
The procedure for loading executable files onto your system must be able
6780
to load their contents into the larger address space as well as the
6781
instruction and data spaces.
6782
 
6783
@end itemize
6784
 
6785
The overlay system described above is rather simple, and could be
6786
improved in many ways:
6787
 
6788
@itemize @bullet
6789
 
6790
@item
6791
If your system has suitable bank switch registers or memory management
6792
hardware, you could use those facilities to make an overlay's load area
6793
contents simply appear at their mapped address in instruction space.
6794
This would probably be faster than copying the overlay to its mapped
6795
area in the usual way.
6796
 
6797
@item
6798
If your overlays are small enough, you could set aside more than one
6799
overlay area, and have more than one overlay mapped at a time.
6800
 
6801
@item
6802
You can use overlays to manage data, as well as instructions.  In
6803
general, data overlays are even less transparent to your design than
6804
code overlays: whereas code overlays only require care when you call or
6805
return to functions, data overlays require care every time you access
6806
the data.  Also, if you change the contents of a data overlay, you
6807
must copy its contents back out to its load address before you can copy a
6808
different data overlay into the same mapped area.
6809
 
6810
@end itemize
6811
 
6812
 
6813
@node Overlay Commands
6814
@section Overlay Commands
6815
 
6816
To use @value{GDBN}'s overlay support, each overlay in your program must
6817
correspond to a separate section of the executable file.  The section's
6818
virtual memory address and load memory address must be the overlay's
6819
mapped and load addresses.  Identifying overlays with sections allows
6820
@value{GDBN} to determine the appropriate address of a function or
6821
variable, depending on whether the overlay is mapped or not.
6822
 
6823
@value{GDBN}'s overlay commands all start with the word @code{overlay};
6824
you can abbreviate this as @code{ov} or @code{ovly}.  The commands are:
6825
 
6826
@table @code
6827
@item overlay off
6828
@kindex overlay off
6829
Disable @value{GDBN}'s overlay support.  When overlay support is
6830
disabled, @value{GDBN} assumes that all functions and variables are
6831
always present at their mapped addresses.  By default, @value{GDBN}'s
6832
overlay support is disabled.
6833
 
6834
@item overlay manual
6835
@kindex overlay manual
6836
@cindex manual overlay debugging
6837
Enable @dfn{manual} overlay debugging.  In this mode, @value{GDBN}
6838
relies on you to tell it which overlays are mapped, and which are not,
6839
using the @code{overlay map-overlay} and @code{overlay unmap-overlay}
6840
commands described below.
6841
 
6842
@item overlay map-overlay @var{overlay}
6843
@itemx overlay map @var{overlay}
6844
@kindex overlay map-overlay
6845
@cindex map an overlay
6846
Tell @value{GDBN} that @var{overlay} is now mapped; @var{overlay} must
6847
be the name of the object file section containing the overlay.  When an
6848
overlay is mapped, @value{GDBN} assumes it can find the overlay's
6849
functions and variables at their mapped addresses.  @value{GDBN} assumes
6850
that any other overlays whose mapped ranges overlap that of
6851
@var{overlay} are now unmapped.
6852
 
6853
@item overlay unmap-overlay @var{overlay}
6854
@itemx overlay unmap @var{overlay}
6855
@kindex overlay unmap-overlay
6856
@cindex unmap an overlay
6857
Tell @value{GDBN} that @var{overlay} is no longer mapped; @var{overlay}
6858
must be the name of the object file section containing the overlay.
6859
When an overlay is unmapped, @value{GDBN} assumes it can find the
6860
overlay's functions and variables at their load addresses.
6861
 
6862
@item overlay auto
6863
@kindex overlay auto
6864
Enable @dfn{automatic} overlay debugging.  In this mode, @value{GDBN}
6865
consults a data structure the overlay manager maintains in the inferior
6866
to see which overlays are mapped.  For details, see @ref{Automatic
6867
Overlay Debugging}.
6868
 
6869
@item overlay load-target
6870
@itemx overlay load
6871
@kindex overlay load-target
6872
@cindex reloading the overlay table
6873
Re-read the overlay table from the inferior.  Normally, @value{GDBN}
6874
re-reads the table @value{GDBN} automatically each time the inferior
6875
stops, so this command should only be necessary if you have changed the
6876
overlay mapping yourself using @value{GDBN}.  This command is only
6877
useful when using automatic overlay debugging.
6878
 
6879
@item overlay list-overlays
6880
@itemx overlay list
6881
@cindex listing mapped overlays
6882
Display a list of the overlays currently mapped, along with their mapped
6883
addresses, load addresses, and sizes.
6884
 
6885
@end table
6886
 
6887
Normally, when @value{GDBN} prints a code address, it includes the name
6888
of the function the address falls in:
6889
 
6890
@smallexample
6891
(gdb) print main
6892
$3 = @{int ()@} 0x11a0 <main>
6893
@end smallexample
6894
@noindent
6895
When overlay debugging is enabled, @value{GDBN} recognizes code in
6896
unmapped overlays, and prints the names of unmapped functions with
6897
asterisks around them.  For example, if @code{foo} is a function in an
6898
unmapped overlay, @value{GDBN} prints it this way:
6899
 
6900
@smallexample
6901
(gdb) overlay list
6902
No sections are mapped.
6903
(gdb) print foo
6904
$5 = @{int (int)@} 0x100000 <*foo*>
6905
@end smallexample
6906
@noindent
6907
When @code{foo}'s overlay is mapped, @value{GDBN} prints the function's
6908
name normally:
6909
 
6910
@smallexample
6911
(gdb) overlay list
6912
Section .ov.foo.text, loaded at 0x100000 - 0x100034,
6913
        mapped at 0x1016 - 0x104a
6914
(gdb) print foo
6915
$6 = @{int (int)@} 0x1016 <foo>
6916
@end smallexample
6917
 
6918
When overlay debugging is enabled, @value{GDBN} can find the correct
6919
address for functions and variables in an overlay, whether or not the
6920
overlay is mapped.  This allows most @value{GDBN} commands, like
6921
@code{break} and @code{disassemble}, to work normally, even on unmapped
6922
code.  However, @value{GDBN}'s breakpoint support has some limitations:
6923
 
6924
@itemize @bullet
6925
@item
6926
@cindex breakpoints in overlays
6927
@cindex overlays, setting breakpoints in
6928
You can set breakpoints in functions in unmapped overlays, as long as
6929
@value{GDBN} can write to the overlay at its load address.
6930
@item
6931
@value{GDBN} can not set hardware or simulator-based breakpoints in
6932
unmapped overlays.  However, if you set a breakpoint at the end of your
6933
overlay manager (and tell @value{GDBN} which overlays are now mapped, if
6934
you are using manual overlay management), @value{GDBN} will re-set its
6935
breakpoints properly.
6936
@end itemize
6937
 
6938
 
6939
@node Automatic Overlay Debugging
6940
@section Automatic Overlay Debugging
6941
@cindex automatic overlay debugging
6942
 
6943
@value{GDBN} can automatically track which overlays are mapped and which
6944
are not, given some simple co-operation from the overlay manager in the
6945
inferior.  If you enable automatic overlay debugging with the
6946
@code{overlay auto} command (@pxref{Overlay Commands}), @value{GDBN}
6947
looks in the inferior's memory for certain variables describing the
6948
current state of the overlays.
6949
 
6950
Here are the variables your overlay manager must define to support
6951
@value{GDBN}'s automatic overlay debugging:
6952
 
6953
@table @asis
6954
 
6955
@item @code{_ovly_table}:
6956
This variable must be an array of the following structures:
6957
 
6958
@smallexample
6959
struct
6960
@{
6961
  /* The overlay's mapped address.  */
6962
  unsigned long vma;
6963
 
6964
  /* The size of the overlay, in bytes.  */
6965
  unsigned long size;
6966
 
6967
  /* The overlay's load address.  */
6968
  unsigned long lma;
6969
 
6970
  /* Non-zero if the overlay is currently mapped;
6971
     zero otherwise.  */
6972
  unsigned long mapped;
6973
@}
6974
@end smallexample
6975
 
6976
@item @code{_novlys}:
6977
This variable must be a four-byte signed integer, holding the total
6978
number of elements in @code{_ovly_table}.
6979
 
6980
@end table
6981
 
6982
To decide whether a particular overlay is mapped or not, @value{GDBN}
6983
looks for an entry in @w{@code{_ovly_table}} whose @code{vma} and
6984
@code{lma} members equal the VMA and LMA of the overlay's section in the
6985
executable file.  When @value{GDBN} finds a matching entry, it consults
6986
the entry's @code{mapped} member to determine whether the overlay is
6987
currently mapped.
6988
 
6989
In addition, your overlay manager may define a function called
6990
@code{_ovly_debug_event}.  If this function is defined, @value{GDBN}
6991
will silently set a breakpoint there.  If the overlay manager then
6992
calls this function whenever it has changed the overlay table, this
6993
will enable @value{GDBN} to accurately keep track of which overlays
6994
are in program memory, and update any breakpoints that may be set
6995
in overlays.  This will allow breakpoints to work even if the
6996
overlays are kept in ROM or other non-writable memory while they
6997
are not being executed.
6998
 
6999
@node Overlay Sample Program
7000
@section Overlay Sample Program
7001
@cindex overlay example program
7002
 
7003
When linking a program which uses overlays, you must place the overlays
7004
at their load addresses, while relocating them to run at their mapped
7005
addresses.  To do this, you must write a linker script (@pxref{Overlay
7006
Description,,, ld.info, Using ld: the GNU linker}).  Unfortunately,
7007
since linker scripts are specific to a particular host system, target
7008
architecture, and target memory layout, this manual cannot provide
7009
portable sample code demonstrating @value{GDBN}'s overlay support.
7010
 
7011
However, the @value{GDBN} source distribution does contain an overlaid
7012
program, with linker scripts for a few systems, as part of its test
7013
suite.  The program consists of the following files from
7014
@file{gdb/testsuite/gdb.base}:
7015
 
7016
@table @file
7017
@item overlays.c
7018
The main program file.
7019
@item ovlymgr.c
7020
A simple overlay manager, used by @file{overlays.c}.
7021
@item foo.c
7022
@itemx bar.c
7023
@itemx baz.c
7024
@itemx grbx.c
7025
Overlay modules, loaded and used by @file{overlays.c}.
7026
@item d10v.ld
7027
@itemx m32r.ld
7028
Linker scripts for linking the test program on the @code{d10v-elf}
7029
and @code{m32r-elf} targets.
7030
@end table
7031
 
7032
You can build the test program using the @code{d10v-elf} GCC
7033
cross-compiler like this:
7034
 
7035
@smallexample
7036
$ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c overlays.c
7037
$ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c ovlymgr.c
7038
$ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c foo.c
7039
$ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c bar.c
7040
$ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c baz.c
7041
$ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c grbx.c
7042
$ d10v-elf-gcc -g overlays.o ovlymgr.o foo.o bar.o \
7043
                  baz.o grbx.o -Wl,-Td10v.ld -o overlays
7044
@end smallexample
7045
 
7046
The build process is identical for any other architecture, except that
7047
you must substitute the appropriate compiler and linker script for the
7048
target system for @code{d10v-elf-gcc} and @code{d10v.ld}.
7049
 
7050
 
7051
@node Languages
7052
@chapter Using @value{GDBN} with Different Languages
7053
@cindex languages
7054
 
7055
Although programming languages generally have common aspects, they are
7056
rarely expressed in the same manner.  For instance, in ANSI C,
7057
dereferencing a pointer @code{p} is accomplished by @code{*p}, but in
7058
Modula-2, it is accomplished by @code{p^}.  Values can also be
7059
represented (and displayed) differently.  Hex numbers in C appear as
7060
@samp{0x1ae}, while in Modula-2 they appear as @samp{1AEH}.
7061
 
7062
@cindex working language
7063
Language-specific information is built into @value{GDBN} for some languages,
7064
allowing you to express operations like the above in your program's
7065
native language, and allowing @value{GDBN} to output values in a manner
7066
consistent with the syntax of your program's native language.  The
7067
language you use to build expressions is called the @dfn{working
7068
language}.
7069
 
7070
@menu
7071
* Setting::                     Switching between source languages
7072
* Show::                        Displaying the language
7073
* Checks::                      Type and range checks
7074
* Support::                     Supported languages
7075
@end menu
7076
 
7077
@node Setting
7078
@section Switching between source languages
7079
 
7080
There are two ways to control the working language---either have @value{GDBN}
7081
set it automatically, or select it manually yourself.  You can use the
7082
@code{set language} command for either purpose.  On startup, @value{GDBN}
7083
defaults to setting the language automatically.  The working language is
7084
used to determine how expressions you type are interpreted, how values
7085
are printed, etc.
7086
 
7087
In addition to the working language, every source file that
7088
@value{GDBN} knows about has its own working language.  For some object
7089
file formats, the compiler might indicate which language a particular
7090
source file is in.  However, most of the time @value{GDBN} infers the
7091
language from the name of the file.  The language of a source file
7092
controls whether C@t{++} names are demangled---this way @code{backtrace} can
7093
show each frame appropriately for its own language.  There is no way to
7094
set the language of a source file from within @value{GDBN}, but you can
7095
set the language associated with a filename extension.  @xref{Show, ,
7096
Displaying the language}.
7097
 
7098
This is most commonly a problem when you use a program, such
7099
as @code{cfront} or @code{f2c}, that generates C but is written in
7100
another language.  In that case, make the
7101
program use @code{#line} directives in its C output; that way
7102
@value{GDBN} will know the correct language of the source code of the original
7103
program, and will display that source code, not the generated C code.
7104
 
7105
@menu
7106
* Filenames::                   Filename extensions and languages.
7107
* Manually::                    Setting the working language manually
7108
* Automatically::               Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language
7109
@end menu
7110
 
7111
@node Filenames
7112
@subsection List of filename extensions and languages
7113
 
7114
If a source file name ends in one of the following extensions, then
7115
@value{GDBN} infers that its language is the one indicated.
7116
 
7117
@table @file
7118
 
7119
@item .c
7120
C source file
7121
 
7122
@item .C
7123
@itemx .cc
7124
@itemx .cp
7125
@itemx .cpp
7126
@itemx .cxx
7127
@itemx .c++
7128
C@t{++} source file
7129
 
7130
@item .f
7131
@itemx .F
7132
Fortran source file
7133
 
7134
@c OBSOLETE @item .ch
7135
@c OBSOLETE @itemx .c186
7136
@c OBSOLETE @itemx .c286
7137
@c OBSOLETE CHILL source file
7138
 
7139
@item .mod
7140
Modula-2 source file
7141
 
7142
@item .s
7143
@itemx .S
7144
Assembler source file.  This actually behaves almost like C, but
7145
@value{GDBN} does not skip over function prologues when stepping.
7146
@end table
7147
 
7148
In addition, you may set the language associated with a filename
7149
extension.  @xref{Show, , Displaying the language}.
7150
 
7151
@node Manually
7152
@subsection Setting the working language
7153
 
7154
If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically,
7155
expressions are interpreted the same way in your debugging session and
7156
your program.
7157
 
7158
@kindex set language
7159
If you wish, you may set the language manually.  To do this, issue the
7160
command @samp{set language @var{lang}}, where @var{lang} is the name of
7161
a language, such as
7162
@code{c} or @code{modula-2}.
7163
For a list of the supported languages, type @samp{set language}.
7164
 
7165
Setting the language manually prevents @value{GDBN} from updating the working
7166
language automatically.  This can lead to confusion if you try
7167
to debug a program when the working language is not the same as the
7168
source language, when an expression is acceptable to both
7169
languages---but means different things.  For instance, if the current
7170
source file were written in C, and @value{GDBN} was parsing Modula-2, a
7171
command such as:
7172
 
7173
@smallexample
7174
print a = b + c
7175
@end smallexample
7176
 
7177
@noindent
7178
might not have the effect you intended.  In C, this means to add
7179
@code{b} and @code{c} and place the result in @code{a}.  The result
7180
printed would be the value of @code{a}.  In Modula-2, this means to compare
7181
@code{a} to the result of @code{b+c}, yielding a @code{BOOLEAN} value.
7182
 
7183
@node Automatically
7184
@subsection Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language
7185
 
7186
To have @value{GDBN} set the working language automatically, use
7187
@samp{set language local} or @samp{set language auto}.  @value{GDBN}
7188
then infers the working language.  That is, when your program stops in a
7189
frame (usually by encountering a breakpoint), @value{GDBN} sets the
7190
working language to the language recorded for the function in that
7191
frame.  If the language for a frame is unknown (that is, if the function
7192
or block corresponding to the frame was defined in a source file that
7193
does not have a recognized extension), the current working language is
7194
not changed, and @value{GDBN} issues a warning.
7195
 
7196
This may not seem necessary for most programs, which are written
7197
entirely in one source language.  However, program modules and libraries
7198
written in one source language can be used by a main program written in
7199
a different source language.  Using @samp{set language auto} in this
7200
case frees you from having to set the working language manually.
7201
 
7202
@node Show
7203
@section Displaying the language
7204
 
7205
The following commands help you find out which language is the
7206
working language, and also what language source files were written in.
7207
 
7208
@kindex show language
7209
@kindex info frame@r{, show the source language}
7210
@kindex info source@r{, show the source language}
7211
@table @code
7212
@item show language
7213
Display the current working language.  This is the
7214
language you can use with commands such as @code{print} to
7215
build and compute expressions that may involve variables in your program.
7216
 
7217
@item info frame
7218
Display the source language for this frame.  This language becomes the
7219
working language if you use an identifier from this frame.
7220
@xref{Frame Info, ,Information about a frame}, to identify the other
7221
information listed here.
7222
 
7223
@item info source
7224
Display the source language of this source file.
7225
@xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}, to identify the other
7226
information listed here.
7227
@end table
7228
 
7229
In unusual circumstances, you may have source files with extensions
7230
not in the standard list.  You can then set the extension associated
7231
with a language explicitly:
7232
 
7233
@kindex set extension-language
7234
@kindex info extensions
7235
@table @code
7236
@item set extension-language @var{.ext} @var{language}
7237
Set source files with extension @var{.ext} to be assumed to be in
7238
the source language @var{language}.
7239
 
7240
@item info extensions
7241
List all the filename extensions and the associated languages.
7242
@end table
7243
 
7244
@node Checks
7245
@section Type and range checking
7246
 
7247
@quotation
7248
@emph{Warning:} In this release, the @value{GDBN} commands for type and range
7249
checking are included, but they do not yet have any effect.  This
7250
section documents the intended facilities.
7251
@end quotation
7252
@c FIXME remove warning when type/range code added
7253
 
7254
Some languages are designed to guard you against making seemingly common
7255
errors through a series of compile- and run-time checks.  These include
7256
checking the type of arguments to functions and operators, and making
7257
sure mathematical overflows are caught at run time.  Checks such as
7258
these help to ensure a program's correctness once it has been compiled
7259
by eliminating type mismatches, and providing active checks for range
7260
errors when your program is running.
7261
 
7262
@value{GDBN} can check for conditions like the above if you wish.
7263
Although @value{GDBN} does not check the statements in your program, it
7264
can check expressions entered directly into @value{GDBN} for evaluation via
7265
the @code{print} command, for example.  As with the working language,
7266
@value{GDBN} can also decide whether or not to check automatically based on
7267
your program's source language.  @xref{Support, ,Supported languages},
7268
for the default settings of supported languages.
7269
 
7270
@menu
7271
* Type Checking::               An overview of type checking
7272
* Range Checking::              An overview of range checking
7273
@end menu
7274
 
7275
@cindex type checking
7276
@cindex checks, type
7277
@node Type Checking
7278
@subsection An overview of type checking
7279
 
7280
Some languages, such as Modula-2, are strongly typed, meaning that the
7281
arguments to operators and functions have to be of the correct type,
7282
otherwise an error occurs.  These checks prevent type mismatch
7283
errors from ever causing any run-time problems.  For example,
7284
 
7285
@smallexample
7286
1 + 2 @result{} 3
7287
@exdent but
7288
@error{} 1 + 2.3
7289
@end smallexample
7290
 
7291
The second example fails because the @code{CARDINAL} 1 is not
7292
type-compatible with the @code{REAL} 2.3.
7293
 
7294
For the expressions you use in @value{GDBN} commands, you can tell the
7295
@value{GDBN} type checker to skip checking;
7296
to treat any mismatches as errors and abandon the expression;
7297
or to only issue warnings when type mismatches occur,
7298
but evaluate the expression anyway.  When you choose the last of
7299
these, @value{GDBN} evaluates expressions like the second example above, but
7300
also issues a warning.
7301
 
7302
Even if you turn type checking off, there may be other reasons
7303
related to type that prevent @value{GDBN} from evaluating an expression.
7304
For instance, @value{GDBN} does not know how to add an @code{int} and
7305
a @code{struct foo}.  These particular type errors have nothing to do
7306
with the language in use, and usually arise from expressions, such as
7307
the one described above, which make little sense to evaluate anyway.
7308
 
7309
Each language defines to what degree it is strict about type.  For
7310
instance, both Modula-2 and C require the arguments to arithmetical
7311
operators to be numbers.  In C, enumerated types and pointers can be
7312
represented as numbers, so that they are valid arguments to mathematical
7313
operators.  @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for further
7314
details on specific languages.
7315
 
7316
@value{GDBN} provides some additional commands for controlling the type checker:
7317
 
7318
@kindex set check@r{, type}
7319
@kindex set check type
7320
@kindex show check type
7321
@table @code
7322
@item set check type auto
7323
Set type checking on or off based on the current working language.
7324
@xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for the default settings for
7325
each language.
7326
 
7327
@item set check type on
7328
@itemx set check type off
7329
Set type checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
7330
current working language.  Issue a warning if the setting does not
7331
match the language default.  If any type mismatches occur in
7332
evaluating an expression while type checking is on, @value{GDBN} prints a
7333
message and aborts evaluation of the expression.
7334
 
7335
@item set check type warn
7336
Cause the type checker to issue warnings, but to always attempt to
7337
evaluate the expression.  Evaluating the expression may still
7338
be impossible for other reasons.  For example, @value{GDBN} cannot add
7339
numbers and structures.
7340
 
7341
@item show type
7342
Show the current setting of the type checker, and whether or not @value{GDBN}
7343
is setting it automatically.
7344
@end table
7345
 
7346
@cindex range checking
7347
@cindex checks, range
7348
@node Range Checking
7349
@subsection An overview of range checking
7350
 
7351
In some languages (such as Modula-2), it is an error to exceed the
7352
bounds of a type; this is enforced with run-time checks.  Such range
7353
checking is meant to ensure program correctness by making sure
7354
computations do not overflow, or indices on an array element access do
7355
not exceed the bounds of the array.
7356
 
7357
For expressions you use in @value{GDBN} commands, you can tell
7358
@value{GDBN} to treat range errors in one of three ways: ignore them,
7359
always treat them as errors and abandon the expression, or issue
7360
warnings but evaluate the expression anyway.
7361
 
7362
A range error can result from numerical overflow, from exceeding an
7363
array index bound, or when you type a constant that is not a member
7364
of any type.  Some languages, however, do not treat overflows as an
7365
error.  In many implementations of C, mathematical overflow causes the
7366
result to ``wrap around'' to lower values---for example, if @var{m} is
7367
the largest integer value, and @var{s} is the smallest, then
7368
 
7369
@smallexample
7370
@var{m} + 1 @result{} @var{s}
7371
@end smallexample
7372
 
7373
This, too, is specific to individual languages, and in some cases
7374
specific to individual compilers or machines.  @xref{Support, ,
7375
Supported languages}, for further details on specific languages.
7376
 
7377
@value{GDBN} provides some additional commands for controlling the range checker:
7378
 
7379
@kindex set check@r{, range}
7380
@kindex set check range
7381
@kindex show check range
7382
@table @code
7383
@item set check range auto
7384
Set range checking on or off based on the current working language.
7385
@xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for the default settings for
7386
each language.
7387
 
7388
@item set check range on
7389
@itemx set check range off
7390
Set range checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
7391
current working language.  A warning is issued if the setting does not
7392
match the language default.  If a range error occurs and range checking is on,
7393
then a message is printed and evaluation of the expression is aborted.
7394
 
7395
@item set check range warn
7396
Output messages when the @value{GDBN} range checker detects a range error,
7397
but attempt to evaluate the expression anyway.  Evaluating the
7398
expression may still be impossible for other reasons, such as accessing
7399
memory that the process does not own (a typical example from many Unix
7400
systems).
7401
 
7402
@item show range
7403
Show the current setting of the range checker, and whether or not it is
7404
being set automatically by @value{GDBN}.
7405
@end table
7406
 
7407
@node Support
7408
@section Supported languages
7409
 
7410
@value{GDBN} supports C, C@t{++}, Fortran, Java,
7411
@c OBSOLETE Chill,
7412
assembly, and Modula-2.
7413
@c This is false ...
7414
Some @value{GDBN} features may be used in expressions regardless of the
7415
language you use: the @value{GDBN} @code{@@} and @code{::} operators,
7416
and the @samp{@{type@}addr} construct (@pxref{Expressions,
7417
,Expressions}) can be used with the constructs of any supported
7418
language.
7419
 
7420
The following sections detail to what degree each source language is
7421
supported by @value{GDBN}.  These sections are not meant to be language
7422
tutorials or references, but serve only as a reference guide to what the
7423
@value{GDBN} expression parser accepts, and what input and output
7424
formats should look like for different languages.  There are many good
7425
books written on each of these languages; please look to these for a
7426
language reference or tutorial.
7427
 
7428
@menu
7429
* C::           C and C@t{++}
7430
* Modula-2::    Modula-2
7431
@c OBSOLETE * Chill::        Chill
7432
@end menu
7433
 
7434
@node C
7435
@subsection C and C@t{++}
7436
 
7437
@cindex C and C@t{++}
7438
@cindex expressions in C or C@t{++}
7439
 
7440
Since C and C@t{++} are so closely related, many features of @value{GDBN} apply
7441
to both languages.  Whenever this is the case, we discuss those languages
7442
together.
7443
 
7444
@cindex C@t{++}
7445
@cindex @code{g++}, @sc{gnu} C@t{++} compiler
7446
@cindex @sc{gnu} C@t{++}
7447
The C@t{++} debugging facilities are jointly implemented by the C@t{++}
7448
compiler and @value{GDBN}.  Therefore, to debug your C@t{++} code
7449
effectively, you must compile your C@t{++} programs with a supported
7450
C@t{++} compiler, such as @sc{gnu} @code{g++}, or the HP ANSI C@t{++}
7451
compiler (@code{aCC}).
7452
 
7453
For best results when using @sc{gnu} C@t{++}, use the stabs debugging
7454
format.  You can select that format explicitly with the @code{g++}
7455
command-line options @samp{-gstabs} or @samp{-gstabs+}.  See
7456
@ref{Debugging Options,,Options for Debugging Your Program or @sc{gnu}
7457
CC, gcc.info, Using @sc{gnu} CC}, for more information.
7458
 
7459
@menu
7460
* C Operators::                 C and C@t{++} operators
7461
* C Constants::                 C and C@t{++} constants
7462
* C plus plus expressions::     C@t{++} expressions
7463
* C Defaults::                  Default settings for C and C@t{++}
7464
* C Checks::                    C and C@t{++} type and range checks
7465
* Debugging C::                 @value{GDBN} and C
7466
* Debugging C plus plus::       @value{GDBN} features for C@t{++}
7467
@end menu
7468
 
7469
@node C Operators
7470
@subsubsection C and C@t{++} operators
7471
 
7472
@cindex C and C@t{++} operators
7473
 
7474
Operators must be defined on values of specific types.  For instance,
7475
@code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures.  Operators are
7476
often defined on groups of types.
7477
 
7478
For the purposes of C and C@t{++}, the following definitions hold:
7479
 
7480
@itemize @bullet
7481
 
7482
@item
7483
@emph{Integral types} include @code{int} with any of its storage-class
7484
specifiers; @code{char}; @code{enum}; and, for C@t{++}, @code{bool}.
7485
 
7486
@item
7487
@emph{Floating-point types} include @code{float}, @code{double}, and
7488
@code{long double} (if supported by the target platform).
7489
 
7490
@item
7491
@emph{Pointer types} include all types defined as @code{(@var{type} *)}.
7492
 
7493
@item
7494
@emph{Scalar types} include all of the above.
7495
 
7496
@end itemize
7497
 
7498
@noindent
7499
The following operators are supported.  They are listed here
7500
in order of increasing precedence:
7501
 
7502
@table @code
7503
@item ,
7504
The comma or sequencing operator.  Expressions in a comma-separated list
7505
are evaluated from left to right, with the result of the entire
7506
expression being the last expression evaluated.
7507
 
7508
@item =
7509
Assignment.  The value of an assignment expression is the value
7510
assigned.  Defined on scalar types.
7511
 
7512
@item @var{op}=
7513
Used in an expression of the form @w{@code{@var{a} @var{op}= @var{b}}},
7514
and translated to @w{@code{@var{a} = @var{a op b}}}.
7515
@w{@code{@var{op}=}} and @code{=} have the same precedence.
7516
@var{op} is any one of the operators @code{|}, @code{^}, @code{&},
7517
@code{<<}, @code{>>}, @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{%}.
7518
 
7519
@item ?:
7520
The ternary operator.  @code{@var{a} ? @var{b} : @var{c}} can be thought
7521
of as:  if @var{a} then @var{b} else @var{c}.  @var{a} should be of an
7522
integral type.
7523
 
7524
@item ||
7525
Logical @sc{or}.  Defined on integral types.
7526
 
7527
@item &&
7528
Logical @sc{and}.  Defined on integral types.
7529
 
7530
@item |
7531
Bitwise @sc{or}.  Defined on integral types.
7532
 
7533
@item ^
7534
Bitwise exclusive-@sc{or}.  Defined on integral types.
7535
 
7536
@item &
7537
Bitwise @sc{and}.  Defined on integral types.
7538
 
7539
@item ==@r{, }!=
7540
Equality and inequality.  Defined on scalar types.  The value of these
7541
expressions is 0 for false and non-zero for true.
7542
 
7543
@item <@r{, }>@r{, }<=@r{, }>=
7544
Less than, greater than, less than or equal, greater than or equal.
7545
Defined on scalar types.  The value of these expressions is 0 for false
7546
and non-zero for true.
7547
 
7548
@item <<@r{, }>>
7549
left shift, and right shift.  Defined on integral types.
7550
 
7551
@item @@
7552
The @value{GDBN} ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
7553
 
7554
@item +@r{, }-
7555
Addition and subtraction.  Defined on integral types, floating-point types and
7556
pointer types.
7557
 
7558
@item *@r{, }/@r{, }%
7559
Multiplication, division, and modulus.  Multiplication and division are
7560
defined on integral and floating-point types.  Modulus is defined on
7561
integral types.
7562
 
7563
@item ++@r{, }--
7564
Increment and decrement.  When appearing before a variable, the
7565
operation is performed before the variable is used in an expression;
7566
when appearing after it, the variable's value is used before the
7567
operation takes place.
7568
 
7569
@item *
7570
Pointer dereferencing.  Defined on pointer types.  Same precedence as
7571
@code{++}.
7572
 
7573
@item &
7574
Address operator.  Defined on variables.  Same precedence as @code{++}.
7575
 
7576
For debugging C@t{++}, @value{GDBN} implements a use of @samp{&} beyond what is
7577
allowed in the C@t{++} language itself: you can use @samp{&(&@var{ref})}
7578
(or, if you prefer, simply @samp{&&@var{ref}}) to examine the address
7579
where a C@t{++} reference variable (declared with @samp{&@var{ref}}) is
7580
stored.
7581
 
7582
@item -
7583
Negative.  Defined on integral and floating-point types.  Same
7584
precedence as @code{++}.
7585
 
7586
@item !
7587
Logical negation.  Defined on integral types.  Same precedence as
7588
@code{++}.
7589
 
7590
@item ~
7591
Bitwise complement operator.  Defined on integral types.  Same precedence as
7592
@code{++}.
7593
 
7594
 
7595
@item .@r{, }->
7596
Structure member, and pointer-to-structure member.  For convenience,
7597
@value{GDBN} regards the two as equivalent, choosing whether to dereference a
7598
pointer based on the stored type information.
7599
Defined on @code{struct} and @code{union} data.
7600
 
7601
@item .*@r{, }->*
7602
Dereferences of pointers to members.
7603
 
7604
@item []
7605
Array indexing.  @code{@var{a}[@var{i}]} is defined as
7606
@code{*(@var{a}+@var{i})}.  Same precedence as @code{->}.
7607
 
7608
@item ()
7609
Function parameter list.  Same precedence as @code{->}.
7610
 
7611
@item ::
7612
C@t{++} scope resolution operator.  Defined on @code{struct}, @code{union},
7613
and @code{class} types.
7614
 
7615
@item ::
7616
Doubled colons also represent the @value{GDBN} scope operator
7617
(@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).  Same precedence as @code{::},
7618
above.
7619
@end table
7620
 
7621
If an operator is redefined in the user code, @value{GDBN} usually
7622
attempts to invoke the redefined version instead of using the operator's
7623
predefined meaning.
7624
 
7625
@menu
7626
* C Constants::
7627
@end menu
7628
 
7629
@node C Constants
7630
@subsubsection C and C@t{++} constants
7631
 
7632
@cindex C and C@t{++} constants
7633
 
7634
@value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of C and C@t{++} in the
7635
following ways:
7636
 
7637
@itemize @bullet
7638
@item
7639
Integer constants are a sequence of digits.  Octal constants are
7640
specified by a leading @samp{0} (i.e.@: zero), and hexadecimal constants
7641
by a leading @samp{0x} or @samp{0X}.  Constants may also end with a letter
7642
@samp{l}, specifying that the constant should be treated as a
7643
@code{long} value.
7644
 
7645
@item
7646
Floating point constants are a sequence of digits, followed by a decimal
7647
point, followed by a sequence of digits, and optionally followed by an
7648
exponent.  An exponent is of the form:
7649
@samp{@w{e@r{[[}+@r{]|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}}, where @var{nnn} is another
7650
sequence of digits.  The @samp{+} is optional for positive exponents.
7651
A floating-point constant may also end with a letter @samp{f} or
7652
@samp{F}, specifying that the constant should be treated as being of
7653
the @code{float} (as opposed to the default @code{double}) type; or with
7654
a letter @samp{l} or @samp{L}, which specifies a @code{long double}
7655
constant.
7656
 
7657
@item
7658
Enumerated constants consist of enumerated identifiers, or their
7659
integral equivalents.
7660
 
7661
@item
7662
Character constants are a single character surrounded by single quotes
7663
(@code{'}), or a number---the ordinal value of the corresponding character
7664
(usually its @sc{ascii} value).  Within quotes, the single character may
7665
be represented by a letter or by @dfn{escape sequences}, which are of
7666
the form @samp{\@var{nnn}}, where @var{nnn} is the octal representation
7667
of the character's ordinal value; or of the form @samp{\@var{x}}, where
7668
@samp{@var{x}} is a predefined special character---for example,
7669
@samp{\n} for newline.
7670
 
7671
@item
7672
String constants are a sequence of character constants surrounded by
7673
double quotes (@code{"}).  Any valid character constant (as described
7674
above) may appear.  Double quotes within the string must be preceded by
7675
a backslash, so for instance @samp{"a\"b'c"} is a string of five
7676
characters.
7677
 
7678
@item
7679
Pointer constants are an integral value.  You can also write pointers
7680
to constants using the C operator @samp{&}.
7681
 
7682
@item
7683
Array constants are comma-separated lists surrounded by braces @samp{@{}
7684
and @samp{@}}; for example, @samp{@{1,2,3@}} is a three-element array of
7685
integers, @samp{@{@{1,2@}, @{3,4@}, @{5,6@}@}} is a three-by-two array,
7686
and @samp{@{&"hi", &"there", &"fred"@}} is a three-element array of pointers.
7687
@end itemize
7688
 
7689
@menu
7690
* C plus plus expressions::
7691
* C Defaults::
7692
* C Checks::
7693
 
7694
* Debugging C::
7695
@end menu
7696
 
7697
@node C plus plus expressions
7698
@subsubsection C@t{++} expressions
7699
 
7700
@cindex expressions in C@t{++}
7701
@value{GDBN} expression handling can interpret most C@t{++} expressions.
7702
 
7703
@cindex C@t{++} support, not in @sc{coff}
7704
@cindex @sc{coff} versus C@t{++}
7705
@cindex C@t{++} and object formats
7706
@cindex object formats and C@t{++}
7707
@cindex a.out and C@t{++}
7708
@cindex @sc{ecoff} and C@t{++}
7709
@cindex @sc{xcoff} and C@t{++}
7710
@cindex @sc{elf}/stabs and C@t{++}
7711
@cindex @sc{elf}/@sc{dwarf} and C@t{++}
7712
@c FIXME!! GDB may eventually be able to debug C++ using DWARF; check
7713
@c periodically whether this has happened...
7714
@quotation
7715
@emph{Warning:} @value{GDBN} can only debug C@t{++} code if you use the
7716
proper compiler.  Typically, C@t{++} debugging depends on the use of
7717
additional debugging information in the symbol table, and thus requires
7718
special support.  In particular, if your compiler generates a.out, MIPS
7719
@sc{ecoff}, RS/6000 @sc{xcoff}, or @sc{elf} with stabs extensions to the
7720
symbol table, these facilities are all available.  (With @sc{gnu} CC,
7721
you can use the @samp{-gstabs} option to request stabs debugging
7722
extensions explicitly.)  Where the object code format is standard
7723
@sc{coff} or @sc{dwarf} in @sc{elf}, on the other hand, most of the C@t{++}
7724
support in @value{GDBN} does @emph{not} work.
7725
@end quotation
7726
 
7727
@enumerate
7728
 
7729
@cindex member functions
7730
@item
7731
Member function calls are allowed; you can use expressions like
7732
 
7733
@smallexample
7734
count = aml->GetOriginal(x, y)
7735
@end smallexample
7736
 
7737
@vindex this@r{, inside C@t{++} member functions}
7738
@cindex namespace in C@t{++}
7739
@item
7740
While a member function is active (in the selected stack frame), your
7741
expressions have the same namespace available as the member function;
7742
that is, @value{GDBN} allows implicit references to the class instance
7743
pointer @code{this} following the same rules as C@t{++}.
7744
 
7745
@cindex call overloaded functions
7746
@cindex overloaded functions, calling
7747
@cindex type conversions in C@t{++}
7748
@item
7749
You can call overloaded functions; @value{GDBN} resolves the function
7750
call to the right definition, with some restrictions.  @value{GDBN} does not
7751
perform overload resolution involving user-defined type conversions,
7752
calls to constructors, or instantiations of templates that do not exist
7753
in the program.  It also cannot handle ellipsis argument lists or
7754
default arguments.
7755
 
7756
It does perform integral conversions and promotions, floating-point
7757
promotions, arithmetic conversions, pointer conversions, conversions of
7758
class objects to base classes, and standard conversions such as those of
7759
functions or arrays to pointers; it requires an exact match on the
7760
number of function arguments.
7761
 
7762
Overload resolution is always performed, unless you have specified
7763
@code{set overload-resolution off}.  @xref{Debugging C plus plus,
7764
,@value{GDBN} features for C@t{++}}.
7765
 
7766
You must specify @code{set overload-resolution off} in order to use an
7767
explicit function signature to call an overloaded function, as in
7768
@smallexample
7769
p 'foo(char,int)'('x', 13)
7770
@end smallexample
7771
 
7772
The @value{GDBN} command-completion facility can simplify this;
7773
see @ref{Completion, ,Command completion}.
7774
 
7775
@cindex reference declarations
7776
@item
7777
@value{GDBN} understands variables declared as C@t{++} references; you can use
7778
them in expressions just as you do in C@t{++} source---they are automatically
7779
dereferenced.
7780
 
7781
In the parameter list shown when @value{GDBN} displays a frame, the values of
7782
reference variables are not displayed (unlike other variables); this
7783
avoids clutter, since references are often used for large structures.
7784
The @emph{address} of a reference variable is always shown, unless
7785
you have specified @samp{set print address off}.
7786
 
7787
@item
7788
@value{GDBN} supports the C@t{++} name resolution operator @code{::}---your
7789
expressions can use it just as expressions in your program do.  Since
7790
one scope may be defined in another, you can use @code{::} repeatedly if
7791
necessary, for example in an expression like
7792
@samp{@var{scope1}::@var{scope2}::@var{name}}.  @value{GDBN} also allows
7793
resolving name scope by reference to source files, in both C and C@t{++}
7794
debugging (@pxref{Variables, ,Program variables}).
7795
@end enumerate
7796
 
7797
In addition, when used with HP's C@t{++} compiler, @value{GDBN} supports
7798
calling virtual functions correctly, printing out virtual bases of
7799
objects, calling functions in a base subobject, casting objects, and
7800
invoking user-defined operators.
7801
 
7802
@node C Defaults
7803
@subsubsection C and C@t{++} defaults
7804
 
7805
@cindex C and C@t{++} defaults
7806
 
7807
If you allow @value{GDBN} to set type and range checking automatically, they
7808
both default to @code{off} whenever the working language changes to
7809
C or C@t{++}.  This happens regardless of whether you or @value{GDBN}
7810
selects the working language.
7811
 
7812
If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, it
7813
recognizes source files whose names end with @file{.c}, @file{.C}, or
7814
@file{.cc}, etc, and when @value{GDBN} enters code compiled from one of
7815
these files, it sets the working language to C or C@t{++}.
7816
@xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language},
7817
for further details.
7818
 
7819
@c Type checking is (a) primarily motivated by Modula-2, and (b)
7820
@c unimplemented.  If (b) changes, it might make sense to let this node
7821
@c appear even if Mod-2 does not, but meanwhile ignore it. roland 16jul93.
7822
 
7823
@node C Checks
7824
@subsubsection C and C@t{++} type and range checks
7825
 
7826
@cindex C and C@t{++} checks
7827
 
7828
By default, when @value{GDBN} parses C or C@t{++} expressions, type checking
7829
is not used.  However, if you turn type checking on, @value{GDBN}
7830
considers two variables type equivalent if:
7831
 
7832
@itemize @bullet
7833
@item
7834
The two variables are structured and have the same structure, union, or
7835
enumerated tag.
7836
 
7837
@item
7838
The two variables have the same type name, or types that have been
7839
declared equivalent through @code{typedef}.
7840
 
7841
@ignore
7842
@c leaving this out because neither J Gilmore nor R Pesch understand it.
7843
@c FIXME--beers?
7844
@item
7845
The two @code{struct}, @code{union}, or @code{enum} variables are
7846
declared in the same declaration.  (Note: this may not be true for all C
7847
compilers.)
7848
@end ignore
7849
@end itemize
7850
 
7851
Range checking, if turned on, is done on mathematical operations.  Array
7852
indices are not checked, since they are often used to index a pointer
7853
that is not itself an array.
7854
 
7855
@node Debugging C
7856
@subsubsection @value{GDBN} and C
7857
 
7858
The @code{set print union} and @code{show print union} commands apply to
7859
the @code{union} type.  When set to @samp{on}, any @code{union} that is
7860
inside a @code{struct} or @code{class} is also printed.  Otherwise, it
7861
appears as @samp{@{...@}}.
7862
 
7863
The @code{@@} operator aids in the debugging of dynamic arrays, formed
7864
with pointers and a memory allocation function.  @xref{Expressions,
7865
,Expressions}.
7866
 
7867
@menu
7868
* Debugging C plus plus::
7869
@end menu
7870
 
7871
@node Debugging C plus plus
7872
@subsubsection @value{GDBN} features for C@t{++}
7873
 
7874
@cindex commands for C@t{++}
7875
 
7876
Some @value{GDBN} commands are particularly useful with C@t{++}, and some are
7877
designed specifically for use with C@t{++}.  Here is a summary:
7878
 
7879
@table @code
7880
@cindex break in overloaded functions
7881
@item @r{breakpoint menus}
7882
When you want a breakpoint in a function whose name is overloaded,
7883
@value{GDBN} breakpoint menus help you specify which function definition
7884
you want.  @xref{Breakpoint Menus,,Breakpoint menus}.
7885
 
7886
@cindex overloading in C@t{++}
7887
@item rbreak @var{regex}
7888
Setting breakpoints using regular expressions is helpful for setting
7889
breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any special
7890
classes.
7891
@xref{Set Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}.
7892
 
7893
@cindex C@t{++} exception handling
7894
@item catch throw
7895
@itemx catch catch
7896
Debug C@t{++} exception handling using these commands.  @xref{Set
7897
Catchpoints, , Setting catchpoints}.
7898
 
7899
@cindex inheritance
7900
@item ptype @var{typename}
7901
Print inheritance relationships as well as other information for type
7902
@var{typename}.
7903
@xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}.
7904
 
7905
@cindex C@t{++} symbol display
7906
@item set print demangle
7907
@itemx show print demangle
7908
@itemx set print asm-demangle
7909
@itemx show print asm-demangle
7910
Control whether C@t{++} symbols display in their source form, both when
7911
displaying code as C@t{++} source and when displaying disassemblies.
7912
@xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
7913
 
7914
@item set print object
7915
@itemx show print object
7916
Choose whether to print derived (actual) or declared types of objects.
7917
@xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
7918
 
7919
@item set print vtbl
7920
@itemx show print vtbl
7921
Control the format for printing virtual function tables.
7922
@xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
7923
(The @code{vtbl} commands do not work on programs compiled with the HP
7924
ANSI C@t{++} compiler (@code{aCC}).)
7925
 
7926
@kindex set overload-resolution
7927
@cindex overloaded functions, overload resolution
7928
@item set overload-resolution on
7929
Enable overload resolution for C@t{++} expression evaluation.  The default
7930
is on.  For overloaded functions, @value{GDBN} evaluates the arguments
7931
and searches for a function whose signature matches the argument types,
7932
using the standard C@t{++} conversion rules (see @ref{C plus plus expressions, ,C@t{++}
7933
expressions}, for details).  If it cannot find a match, it emits a
7934
message.
7935
 
7936
@item set overload-resolution off
7937
Disable overload resolution for C@t{++} expression evaluation.  For
7938
overloaded functions that are not class member functions, @value{GDBN}
7939
chooses the first function of the specified name that it finds in the
7940
symbol table, whether or not its arguments are of the correct type.  For
7941
overloaded functions that are class member functions, @value{GDBN}
7942
searches for a function whose signature @emph{exactly} matches the
7943
argument types.
7944
 
7945
@item @r{Overloaded symbol names}
7946
You can specify a particular definition of an overloaded symbol, using
7947
the same notation that is used to declare such symbols in C@t{++}: type
7948
@code{@var{symbol}(@var{types})} rather than just @var{symbol}.  You can
7949
also use the @value{GDBN} command-line word completion facilities to list the
7950
available choices, or to finish the type list for you.
7951
@xref{Completion,, Command completion}, for details on how to do this.
7952
@end table
7953
 
7954
@node Modula-2
7955
@subsection Modula-2
7956
 
7957
@cindex Modula-2, @value{GDBN} support
7958
 
7959
The extensions made to @value{GDBN} to support Modula-2 only support
7960
output from the @sc{gnu} Modula-2 compiler (which is currently being
7961
developed).  Other Modula-2 compilers are not currently supported, and
7962
attempting to debug executables produced by them is most likely
7963
to give an error as @value{GDBN} reads in the executable's symbol
7964
table.
7965
 
7966
@cindex expressions in Modula-2
7967
@menu
7968
* M2 Operators::                Built-in operators
7969
* Built-In Func/Proc::          Built-in functions and procedures
7970
* M2 Constants::                Modula-2 constants
7971
* M2 Defaults::                 Default settings for Modula-2
7972
* Deviations::                  Deviations from standard Modula-2
7973
* M2 Checks::                   Modula-2 type and range checks
7974
* M2 Scope::                    The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
7975
* GDB/M2::                      @value{GDBN} and Modula-2
7976
@end menu
7977
 
7978
@node M2 Operators
7979
@subsubsection Operators
7980
@cindex Modula-2 operators
7981
 
7982
Operators must be defined on values of specific types.  For instance,
7983
@code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures.  Operators are
7984
often defined on groups of types.  For the purposes of Modula-2, the
7985
following definitions hold:
7986
 
7987
@itemize @bullet
7988
 
7989
@item
7990
@emph{Integral types} consist of @code{INTEGER}, @code{CARDINAL}, and
7991
their subranges.
7992
 
7993
@item
7994
@emph{Character types} consist of @code{CHAR} and its subranges.
7995
 
7996
@item
7997
@emph{Floating-point types} consist of @code{REAL}.
7998
 
7999
@item
8000
@emph{Pointer types} consist of anything declared as @code{POINTER TO
8001
@var{type}}.
8002
 
8003
@item
8004
@emph{Scalar types} consist of all of the above.
8005
 
8006
@item
8007
@emph{Set types} consist of @code{SET} and @code{BITSET} types.
8008
 
8009
@item
8010
@emph{Boolean types} consist of @code{BOOLEAN}.
8011
@end itemize
8012
 
8013
@noindent
8014
The following operators are supported, and appear in order of
8015
increasing precedence:
8016
 
8017
@table @code
8018
@item ,
8019
Function argument or array index separator.
8020
 
8021
@item :=
8022
Assignment.  The value of @var{var} @code{:=} @var{value} is
8023
@var{value}.
8024
 
8025
@item <@r{, }>
8026
Less than, greater than on integral, floating-point, or enumerated
8027
types.
8028
 
8029
@item <=@r{, }>=
8030
Less than or equal to, greater than or equal to
8031
on integral, floating-point and enumerated types, or set inclusion on
8032
set types.  Same precedence as @code{<}.
8033
 
8034
@item =@r{, }<>@r{, }#
8035
Equality and two ways of expressing inequality, valid on scalar types.
8036
Same precedence as @code{<}.  In @value{GDBN} scripts, only @code{<>} is
8037
available for inequality, since @code{#} conflicts with the script
8038
comment character.
8039
 
8040
@item IN
8041
Set membership.  Defined on set types and the types of their members.
8042
Same precedence as @code{<}.
8043
 
8044
@item OR
8045
Boolean disjunction.  Defined on boolean types.
8046
 
8047
@item AND@r{, }&
8048
Boolean conjunction.  Defined on boolean types.
8049
 
8050
@item @@
8051
The @value{GDBN} ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
8052
 
8053
@item +@r{, }-
8054
Addition and subtraction on integral and floating-point types, or union
8055
and difference on set types.
8056
 
8057
@item *
8058
Multiplication on integral and floating-point types, or set intersection
8059
on set types.
8060
 
8061
@item /
8062
Division on floating-point types, or symmetric set difference on set
8063
types.  Same precedence as @code{*}.
8064
 
8065
@item DIV@r{, }MOD
8066
Integer division and remainder.  Defined on integral types.  Same
8067
precedence as @code{*}.
8068
 
8069
@item -
8070
Negative. Defined on @code{INTEGER} and @code{REAL} data.
8071
 
8072
@item ^
8073
Pointer dereferencing.  Defined on pointer types.
8074
 
8075
@item NOT
8076
Boolean negation.  Defined on boolean types.  Same precedence as
8077
@code{^}.
8078
 
8079
@item .
8080
@code{RECORD} field selector.  Defined on @code{RECORD} data.  Same
8081
precedence as @code{^}.
8082
 
8083
@item []
8084
Array indexing.  Defined on @code{ARRAY} data.  Same precedence as @code{^}.
8085
 
8086
@item ()
8087
Procedure argument list.  Defined on @code{PROCEDURE} objects.  Same precedence
8088
as @code{^}.
8089
 
8090
@item ::@r{, }.
8091
@value{GDBN} and Modula-2 scope operators.
8092
@end table
8093
 
8094
@quotation
8095
@emph{Warning:} Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so @value{GDBN}
8096
treats the use of the operator @code{IN}, or the use of operators
8097
@code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{=}, , @code{<>}, @code{#},
8098
@code{<=}, and @code{>=} on sets as an error.
8099
@end quotation
8100
 
8101
 
8102
@node Built-In Func/Proc
8103
@subsubsection Built-in functions and procedures
8104
@cindex Modula-2 built-ins
8105
 
8106
Modula-2 also makes available several built-in procedures and functions.
8107
In describing these, the following metavariables are used:
8108
 
8109
@table @var
8110
 
8111
@item a
8112
represents an @code{ARRAY} variable.
8113
 
8114
@item c
8115
represents a @code{CHAR} constant or variable.
8116
 
8117
@item i
8118
represents a variable or constant of integral type.
8119
 
8120
@item m
8121
represents an identifier that belongs to a set.  Generally used in the
8122
same function with the metavariable @var{s}.  The type of @var{s} should
8123
be @code{SET OF @var{mtype}} (where @var{mtype} is the type of @var{m}).
8124
 
8125
@item n
8126
represents a variable or constant of integral or floating-point type.
8127
 
8128
@item r
8129
represents a variable or constant of floating-point type.
8130
 
8131
@item t
8132
represents a type.
8133
 
8134
@item v
8135
represents a variable.
8136
 
8137
@item x
8138
represents a variable or constant of one of many types.  See the
8139
explanation of the function for details.
8140
@end table
8141
 
8142
All Modula-2 built-in procedures also return a result, described below.
8143
 
8144
@table @code
8145
@item ABS(@var{n})
8146
Returns the absolute value of @var{n}.
8147
 
8148
@item CAP(@var{c})
8149
If @var{c} is a lower case letter, it returns its upper case
8150
equivalent, otherwise it returns its argument.
8151
 
8152
@item CHR(@var{i})
8153
Returns the character whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
8154
 
8155
@item DEC(@var{v})
8156
Decrements the value in the variable @var{v} by one.  Returns the new value.
8157
 
8158
@item DEC(@var{v},@var{i})
8159
Decrements the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}.  Returns the
8160
new value.
8161
 
8162
@item EXCL(@var{m},@var{s})
8163
Removes the element @var{m} from the set @var{s}.  Returns the new
8164
set.
8165
 
8166
@item FLOAT(@var{i})
8167
Returns the floating point equivalent of the integer @var{i}.
8168
 
8169
@item HIGH(@var{a})
8170
Returns the index of the last member of @var{a}.
8171
 
8172
@item INC(@var{v})
8173
Increments the value in the variable @var{v} by one.  Returns the new value.
8174
 
8175
@item INC(@var{v},@var{i})
8176
Increments the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}.  Returns the
8177
new value.
8178
 
8179
@item INCL(@var{m},@var{s})
8180
Adds the element @var{m} to the set @var{s} if it is not already
8181
there.  Returns the new set.
8182
 
8183
@item MAX(@var{t})
8184
Returns the maximum value of the type @var{t}.
8185
 
8186
@item MIN(@var{t})
8187
Returns the minimum value of the type @var{t}.
8188
 
8189
@item ODD(@var{i})
8190
Returns boolean TRUE if @var{i} is an odd number.
8191
 
8192
@item ORD(@var{x})
8193
Returns the ordinal value of its argument.  For example, the ordinal
8194
value of a character is its @sc{ascii} value (on machines supporting the
8195
@sc{ascii} character set).  @var{x} must be of an ordered type, which include
8196
integral, character and enumerated types.
8197
 
8198
@item SIZE(@var{x})
8199
Returns the size of its argument.  @var{x} can be a variable or a type.
8200
 
8201
@item TRUNC(@var{r})
8202
Returns the integral part of @var{r}.
8203
 
8204
@item VAL(@var{t},@var{i})
8205
Returns the member of the type @var{t} whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
8206
@end table
8207
 
8208
@quotation
8209
@emph{Warning:}  Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so
8210
@value{GDBN} treats the use of procedures @code{INCL} and @code{EXCL} as
8211
an error.
8212
@end quotation
8213
 
8214
@cindex Modula-2 constants
8215
@node M2 Constants
8216
@subsubsection Constants
8217
 
8218
@value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of Modula-2 in the following
8219
ways:
8220
 
8221
@itemize @bullet
8222
 
8223
@item
8224
Integer constants are simply a sequence of digits.  When used in an
8225
expression, a constant is interpreted to be type-compatible with the
8226
rest of the expression.  Hexadecimal integers are specified by a
8227
trailing @samp{H}, and octal integers by a trailing @samp{B}.
8228
 
8229
@item
8230
Floating point constants appear as a sequence of digits, followed by a
8231
decimal point and another sequence of digits.  An optional exponent can
8232
then be specified, in the form @samp{E@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}, where
8233
@samp{@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}} is the desired exponent.  All of the
8234
digits of the floating point constant must be valid decimal (base 10)
8235
digits.
8236
 
8237
@item
8238
Character constants consist of a single character enclosed by a pair of
8239
like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}).  They may
8240
also be expressed by their ordinal value (their @sc{ascii} value, usually)
8241
followed by a @samp{C}.
8242
 
8243
@item
8244
String constants consist of a sequence of characters enclosed by a
8245
pair of like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}).
8246
Escape sequences in the style of C are also allowed.  @xref{C
8247
Constants, ,C and C@t{++} constants}, for a brief explanation of escape
8248
sequences.
8249
 
8250
@item
8251
Enumerated constants consist of an enumerated identifier.
8252
 
8253
@item
8254
Boolean constants consist of the identifiers @code{TRUE} and
8255
@code{FALSE}.
8256
 
8257
@item
8258
Pointer constants consist of integral values only.
8259
 
8260
@item
8261
Set constants are not yet supported.
8262
@end itemize
8263
 
8264
@node M2 Defaults
8265
@subsubsection Modula-2 defaults
8266
@cindex Modula-2 defaults
8267
 
8268
If type and range checking are set automatically by @value{GDBN}, they
8269
both default to @code{on} whenever the working language changes to
8270
Modula-2.  This happens regardless of whether you or @value{GDBN}
8271
selected the working language.
8272
 
8273
If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, then entering
8274
code compiled from a file whose name ends with @file{.mod} sets the
8275
working language to Modula-2.  @xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} set
8276
the language automatically}, for further details.
8277
 
8278
@node Deviations
8279
@subsubsection Deviations from standard Modula-2
8280
@cindex Modula-2, deviations from
8281
 
8282
A few changes have been made to make Modula-2 programs easier to debug.
8283
This is done primarily via loosening its type strictness:
8284
 
8285
@itemize @bullet
8286
@item
8287
Unlike in standard Modula-2, pointer constants can be formed by
8288
integers.  This allows you to modify pointer variables during
8289
debugging.  (In standard Modula-2, the actual address contained in a
8290
pointer variable is hidden from you; it can only be modified
8291
through direct assignment to another pointer variable or expression that
8292
returned a pointer.)
8293
 
8294
@item
8295
C escape sequences can be used in strings and characters to represent
8296
non-printable characters.  @value{GDBN} prints out strings with these
8297
escape sequences embedded.  Single non-printable characters are
8298
printed using the @samp{CHR(@var{nnn})} format.
8299
 
8300
@item
8301
The assignment operator (@code{:=}) returns the value of its right-hand
8302
argument.
8303
 
8304
@item
8305
All built-in procedures both modify @emph{and} return their argument.
8306
@end itemize
8307
 
8308
@node M2 Checks
8309
@subsubsection Modula-2 type and range checks
8310
@cindex Modula-2 checks
8311
 
8312
@quotation
8313
@emph{Warning:} in this release, @value{GDBN} does not yet perform type or
8314
range checking.
8315
@end quotation
8316
@c FIXME remove warning when type/range checks added
8317
 
8318
@value{GDBN} considers two Modula-2 variables type equivalent if:
8319
 
8320
@itemize @bullet
8321
@item
8322
They are of types that have been declared equivalent via a @code{TYPE
8323
@var{t1} = @var{t2}} statement
8324
 
8325
@item
8326
They have been declared on the same line.  (Note:  This is true of the
8327
@sc{gnu} Modula-2 compiler, but it may not be true of other compilers.)
8328
@end itemize
8329
 
8330
As long as type checking is enabled, any attempt to combine variables
8331
whose types are not equivalent is an error.
8332
 
8333
Range checking is done on all mathematical operations, assignment, array
8334
index bounds, and all built-in functions and procedures.
8335
 
8336
@node M2 Scope
8337
@subsubsection The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
8338
@cindex scope
8339
@cindex @code{.}, Modula-2 scope operator
8340
@cindex colon, doubled as scope operator
8341
@ifinfo
8342
@vindex colon-colon@r{, in Modula-2}
8343
@c Info cannot handle :: but TeX can.
8344
@end ifinfo
8345
@iftex
8346
@vindex ::@r{, in Modula-2}
8347
@end iftex
8348
 
8349
There are a few subtle differences between the Modula-2 scope operator
8350
(@code{.}) and the @value{GDBN} scope operator (@code{::}).  The two have
8351
similar syntax:
8352
 
8353
@smallexample
8354
 
8355
@var{module} . @var{id}
8356
@var{scope} :: @var{id}
8357
@end smallexample
8358
 
8359
@noindent
8360
where @var{scope} is the name of a module or a procedure,
8361
@var{module} the name of a module, and @var{id} is any declared
8362
identifier within your program, except another module.
8363
 
8364
Using the @code{::} operator makes @value{GDBN} search the scope
8365
specified by @var{scope} for the identifier @var{id}.  If it is not
8366
found in the specified scope, then @value{GDBN} searches all scopes
8367
enclosing the one specified by @var{scope}.
8368
 
8369
Using the @code{.} operator makes @value{GDBN} search the current scope for
8370
the identifier specified by @var{id} that was imported from the
8371
definition module specified by @var{module}.  With this operator, it is
8372
an error if the identifier @var{id} was not imported from definition
8373
module @var{module}, or if @var{id} is not an identifier in
8374
@var{module}.
8375
 
8376
@node GDB/M2
8377
@subsubsection @value{GDBN} and Modula-2
8378
 
8379
Some @value{GDBN} commands have little use when debugging Modula-2 programs.
8380
Five subcommands of @code{set print} and @code{show print} apply
8381
specifically to C and C@t{++}: @samp{vtbl}, @samp{demangle},
8382
@samp{asm-demangle}, @samp{object}, and @samp{union}.  The first four
8383
apply to C@t{++}, and the last to the C @code{union} type, which has no direct
8384
analogue in Modula-2.
8385
 
8386
The @code{@@} operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}), while available
8387
with any language, is not useful with Modula-2.  Its
8388
intent is to aid the debugging of @dfn{dynamic arrays}, which cannot be
8389
created in Modula-2 as they can in C or C@t{++}.  However, because an
8390
address can be specified by an integral constant, the construct
8391
@samp{@{@var{type}@}@var{adrexp}} is still useful.
8392
 
8393
@cindex @code{#} in Modula-2
8394
In @value{GDBN} scripts, the Modula-2 inequality operator @code{#} is
8395
interpreted as the beginning of a comment.  Use @code{<>} instead.
8396
 
8397
@c OBSOLETE @node Chill
8398
@c OBSOLETE @subsection Chill
8399
@c OBSOLETE
8400
@c OBSOLETE The extensions made to @value{GDBN} to support Chill only support output
8401
@c OBSOLETE from the @sc{gnu} Chill compiler.  Other Chill compilers are not currently
8402
@c OBSOLETE supported, and attempting to debug executables produced by them is most
8403
@c OBSOLETE likely to give an error as @value{GDBN} reads in the executable's symbol
8404
@c OBSOLETE table.
8405
@c OBSOLETE
8406
@c OBSOLETE @c This used to say "... following Chill related topics ...", but since
8407
@c OBSOLETE @c menus are not shown in the printed manual, it would look awkward.
8408
@c OBSOLETE This section covers the Chill related topics and the features
8409
@c OBSOLETE of @value{GDBN} which support these topics.
8410
@c OBSOLETE
8411
@c OBSOLETE @menu
8412
@c OBSOLETE * How modes are displayed::        How modes are displayed
8413
@c OBSOLETE * Locations::                        Locations and their accesses
8414
@c OBSOLETE * Values and their Operations:: Values and their Operations
8415
@c OBSOLETE * Chill type and range checks::
8416
@c OBSOLETE * Chill defaults::
8417
@c OBSOLETE @end menu
8418
@c OBSOLETE
8419
@c OBSOLETE @node How modes are displayed
8420
@c OBSOLETE @subsubsection How modes are displayed
8421
@c OBSOLETE
8422
@c OBSOLETE The Chill Datatype- (Mode) support of @value{GDBN} is directly related
8423
@c OBSOLETE with the functionality of the @sc{gnu} Chill compiler, and therefore deviates
8424
@c OBSOLETE slightly from the standard specification of the Chill language. The
8425
@c OBSOLETE provided modes are:
8426
@c OBSOLETE
8427
@c OBSOLETE @c FIXME: this @table's contents effectively disable @code by using @r
8428
@c OBSOLETE @c on every @item.  So why does it need @code?
8429
@c OBSOLETE @table @code
8430
@c OBSOLETE @item @r{@emph{Discrete modes:}}
8431
@c OBSOLETE @itemize @bullet
8432
@c OBSOLETE @item
8433
@c OBSOLETE @emph{Integer Modes} which are predefined by @code{BYTE, UBYTE, INT,
8434
@c OBSOLETE UINT, LONG, ULONG},
8435
@c OBSOLETE @item
8436
@c OBSOLETE @emph{Boolean Mode} which is predefined by @code{BOOL},
8437
@c OBSOLETE @item
8438
@c OBSOLETE @emph{Character Mode} which is predefined by @code{CHAR},
8439
@c OBSOLETE @item
8440
@c OBSOLETE @emph{Set Mode} which is displayed by the keyword @code{SET}.
8441
@c OBSOLETE @smallexample
8442
@c OBSOLETE (@value{GDBP}) ptype x
8443
@c OBSOLETE type = SET (karli = 10, susi = 20, fritzi = 100)
8444
@c OBSOLETE @end smallexample
8445
@c OBSOLETE If the type is an unnumbered set the set element values are omitted.
8446
@c OBSOLETE @item
8447
@c OBSOLETE @emph{Range Mode} which is displayed by
8448
@c OBSOLETE @smallexample
8449
@c OBSOLETE @code{type = <basemode>(<lower bound> : <upper bound>)}
8450
@c OBSOLETE @end smallexample
8451
@c OBSOLETE where @code{<lower bound>, <upper bound>} can be of any discrete literal
8452
@c OBSOLETE expression (e.g. set element names).
8453
@c OBSOLETE @end itemize
8454
@c OBSOLETE
8455
@c OBSOLETE @item @r{@emph{Powerset Mode:}}
8456
@c OBSOLETE A Powerset Mode is displayed by the keyword @code{POWERSET} followed by
8457
@c OBSOLETE the member mode of the powerset.  The member mode can be any discrete mode.
8458
@c OBSOLETE @smallexample
8459
@c OBSOLETE (@value{GDBP}) ptype x
8460
@c OBSOLETE type = POWERSET SET (egon, hugo, otto)
8461
@c OBSOLETE @end smallexample
8462
@c OBSOLETE
8463
@c OBSOLETE @item @r{@emph{Reference Modes:}}
8464
@c OBSOLETE @itemize @bullet
8465
@c OBSOLETE @item
8466
@c OBSOLETE @emph{Bound Reference Mode} which is displayed by the keyword @code{REF}
8467
@c OBSOLETE followed by the mode name to which the reference is bound.
8468
@c OBSOLETE @item
8469
@c OBSOLETE @emph{Free Reference Mode} which is displayed by the keyword @code{PTR}.
8470
@c OBSOLETE @end itemize
8471
@c OBSOLETE
8472
@c OBSOLETE @item @r{@emph{Procedure mode}}
8473
@c OBSOLETE The procedure mode is displayed by @code{type = PROC(<parameter list>)
8474
@c OBSOLETE <return mode> EXCEPTIONS (<exception list>)}. The @code{<parameter
8475
@c OBSOLETE list>} is a list of the parameter modes.  @code{<return mode>} indicates
8476
@c OBSOLETE the mode of the result of the procedure if any.  The exceptionlist lists
8477
@c OBSOLETE all possible exceptions which can be raised by the procedure.
8478
@c OBSOLETE
8479
@c OBSOLETE @ignore
8480
@c OBSOLETE @item @r{@emph{Instance mode}}
8481
@c OBSOLETE The instance mode is represented by a structure, which has a static
8482
@c OBSOLETE type, and is therefore not really of interest.
8483
@c OBSOLETE @end ignore
8484
@c OBSOLETE
8485
@c OBSOLETE @item @r{@emph{Synchronization Modes:}}
8486
@c OBSOLETE @itemize @bullet
8487
@c OBSOLETE @item
8488
@c OBSOLETE @emph{Event Mode} which is displayed by
8489
@c OBSOLETE @smallexample
8490
@c OBSOLETE @code{EVENT (<event length>)}
8491
@c OBSOLETE @end smallexample
8492
@c OBSOLETE where @code{(<event length>)} is optional.
8493
@c OBSOLETE @item
8494
@c OBSOLETE @emph{Buffer Mode} which is displayed by
8495
@c OBSOLETE @smallexample
8496
@c OBSOLETE @code{BUFFER (<buffer length>)<buffer element mode>}
8497
@c OBSOLETE @end smallexample
8498
@c OBSOLETE where @code{(<buffer length>)} is optional.
8499
@c OBSOLETE @end itemize
8500
@c OBSOLETE
8501
@c OBSOLETE @item @r{@emph{Timing Modes:}}
8502
@c OBSOLETE @itemize @bullet
8503
@c OBSOLETE @item
8504
@c OBSOLETE @emph{Duration Mode} which is predefined by @code{DURATION}
8505
@c OBSOLETE @item
8506
@c OBSOLETE @emph{Absolute Time Mode} which is predefined by @code{TIME}
8507
@c OBSOLETE @end itemize
8508
@c OBSOLETE
8509
@c OBSOLETE @item @r{@emph{Real Modes:}}
8510
@c OBSOLETE Real Modes are predefined with @code{REAL} and @code{LONG_REAL}.
8511
@c OBSOLETE
8512
@c OBSOLETE @item @r{@emph{String Modes:}}
8513
@c OBSOLETE @itemize @bullet
8514
@c OBSOLETE @item
8515
@c OBSOLETE @emph{Character String Mode} which is displayed by
8516
@c OBSOLETE @smallexample
8517
@c OBSOLETE @code{CHARS(<string length>)}
8518
@c OBSOLETE @end smallexample
8519
@c OBSOLETE followed by the keyword @code{VARYING} if the String Mode is a varying
8520
@c OBSOLETE mode
8521
@c OBSOLETE @item
8522
@c OBSOLETE @emph{Bit String Mode} which is displayed by
8523
@c OBSOLETE @smallexample
8524
@c OBSOLETE @code{BOOLS(<string
8525
@c OBSOLETE length>)}
8526
@c OBSOLETE @end smallexample
8527
@c OBSOLETE @end itemize
8528
@c OBSOLETE
8529
@c OBSOLETE @item @r{@emph{Array Mode:}}
8530
@c OBSOLETE The Array Mode is displayed by the keyword @code{ARRAY(<range>)}
8531
@c OBSOLETE followed by the element mode (which may in turn be an array mode).
8532
@c OBSOLETE @smallexample
8533
@c OBSOLETE (@value{GDBP}) ptype x
8534
@c OBSOLETE type = ARRAY (1:42)
8535
@c OBSOLETE           ARRAY (1:20)
8536
@c OBSOLETE              SET (karli = 10, susi = 20, fritzi = 100)
8537
@c OBSOLETE @end smallexample
8538
@c OBSOLETE
8539
@c OBSOLETE @item @r{@emph{Structure Mode}}
8540
@c OBSOLETE The Structure mode is displayed by the keyword @code{STRUCT(<field
8541
@c OBSOLETE list>)}.  The @code{<field list>} consists of names and modes of fields
8542
@c OBSOLETE of the structure.  Variant structures have the keyword @code{CASE <field>
8543
@c OBSOLETE OF <variant fields> ESAC} in their field list.  Since the current version
8544
@c OBSOLETE of the GNU Chill compiler doesn't implement tag processing (no runtime
8545
@c OBSOLETE checks of variant fields, and therefore no debugging info), the output
8546
@c OBSOLETE always displays all variant fields.
8547
@c OBSOLETE @smallexample
8548
@c OBSOLETE (@value{GDBP}) ptype str
8549
@c OBSOLETE type = STRUCT (
8550
@c OBSOLETE     as x,
8551
@c OBSOLETE     bs x,
8552
@c OBSOLETE     CASE bs OF
8553
@c OBSOLETE     (karli):
8554
@c OBSOLETE         cs a
8555
@c OBSOLETE     (ott):
8556
@c OBSOLETE         ds x
8557
@c OBSOLETE     ESAC
8558
@c OBSOLETE )
8559
@c OBSOLETE @end smallexample
8560
@c OBSOLETE @end table
8561
@c OBSOLETE
8562
@c OBSOLETE @node Locations
8563
@c OBSOLETE @subsubsection Locations and their accesses
8564
@c OBSOLETE
8565
@c OBSOLETE A location in Chill is an object which can contain values.
8566
@c OBSOLETE
8567
@c OBSOLETE A value of a location is generally accessed by the (declared) name of
8568
@c OBSOLETE the location.  The output conforms to the specification of values in
8569
@c OBSOLETE Chill programs.  How values are specified
8570
@c OBSOLETE is the topic of the next section, @ref{Values and their Operations}.
8571
@c OBSOLETE
8572
@c OBSOLETE The pseudo-location @code{RESULT} (or @code{result}) can be used to
8573
@c OBSOLETE display or change the result of a currently-active procedure:
8574
@c OBSOLETE
8575
@c OBSOLETE @smallexample
8576
@c OBSOLETE set result := EXPR
8577
@c OBSOLETE @end smallexample
8578
@c OBSOLETE
8579
@c OBSOLETE @noindent
8580
@c OBSOLETE This does the same as the Chill action @code{RESULT EXPR} (which
8581
@c OBSOLETE is not available in @value{GDBN}).
8582
@c OBSOLETE
8583
@c OBSOLETE Values of reference mode locations are printed by @code{PTR(<hex
8584
@c OBSOLETE value>)} in case of a free reference mode, and by @code{(REF <reference
8585
@c OBSOLETE mode>) (<hex-value>)} in case of a bound reference.  @code{<hex value>}
8586
@c OBSOLETE represents the address where the reference points to.  To access the
8587
@c OBSOLETE value of the location referenced by the pointer, use the dereference
8588
@c OBSOLETE operator @samp{->}.
8589
@c OBSOLETE
8590
@c OBSOLETE Values of procedure mode locations are displayed by
8591
@c OBSOLETE @smallexample
8592
@c OBSOLETE @code{@{ PROC
8593
@c OBSOLETE (<argument modes> ) <return mode> @} <address> <name of procedure
8594
@c OBSOLETE location>}
8595
@c OBSOLETE @end smallexample
8596
@c OBSOLETE @code{<argument modes>} is a list of modes according to the parameter
8597
@c OBSOLETE specification of the procedure and @code{<address>} shows the address of
8598
@c OBSOLETE the entry point.
8599
@c OBSOLETE
8600
@c OBSOLETE @ignore
8601
@c OBSOLETE Locations of instance modes are displayed just like a structure with two
8602
@c OBSOLETE fields specifying the @emph{process type} and the @emph{copy number} of
8603
@c OBSOLETE the investigated instance location@footnote{This comes from the current
8604
@c OBSOLETE implementation of instances.  They are implemented as a structure (no
8605
@c OBSOLETE na).  The output should be something like @code{[<name of the process>;
8606
@c OBSOLETE <instance number>]}.}.  The field names are @code{__proc_type} and
8607
@c OBSOLETE @code{__proc_copy}.
8608
@c OBSOLETE
8609
@c OBSOLETE Locations of synchronization modes are displayed like a structure with
8610
@c OBSOLETE the field name @code{__event_data} in case of a event mode location, and
8611
@c OBSOLETE like a structure with the field @code{__buffer_data} in case of a buffer
8612
@c OBSOLETE mode location (refer to previous paragraph).
8613
@c OBSOLETE
8614
@c OBSOLETE Structure Mode locations are printed by @code{[.<field name>: <value>,
8615
@c OBSOLETE ...]}.  The @code{<field name>} corresponds to the structure mode
8616
@c OBSOLETE definition and the layout of @code{<value>} varies depending of the mode
8617
@c OBSOLETE of the field.  If the investigated structure mode location is of variant
8618
@c OBSOLETE structure mode, the variant parts of the structure are enclosed in curled
8619
@c OBSOLETE braces (@samp{@{@}}).  Fields enclosed by @samp{@{,@}} are residing
8620
@c OBSOLETE on the same memory location and represent the current values of the
8621
@c OBSOLETE memory location in their specific modes.  Since no tag processing is done
8622
@c OBSOLETE all variants are displayed. A variant field is printed by
8623
@c OBSOLETE @code{(<variant name>) = .<field name>: <value>}.  (who implements the
8624
@c OBSOLETE stuff ???)
8625
@c OBSOLETE @smallexample
8626
@c OBSOLETE (@value{GDBP}) print str1 $4 = [.as: 0, .bs: karli, .<TAG>: { (karli) =
8627
@c OBSOLETE [.cs: []], (susi) = [.ds: susi]}]
8628
@c OBSOLETE @end smallexample
8629
@c OBSOLETE @end ignore
8630
@c OBSOLETE
8631
@c OBSOLETE Substructures of string mode-, array mode- or structure mode-values
8632
@c OBSOLETE (e.g. array slices, fields of structure locations) are accessed using
8633
@c OBSOLETE certain operations which are described in the next section, @ref{Values
8634
@c OBSOLETE and their Operations}.
8635
@c OBSOLETE
8636
@c OBSOLETE A location value may be interpreted as having a different mode using the
8637
@c OBSOLETE location conversion.  This mode conversion is written as @code{<mode
8638
@c OBSOLETE name>(<location>)}.  The user has to consider that the sizes of the modes
8639
@c OBSOLETE have to be equal otherwise an error occurs.  Furthermore, no range
8640
@c OBSOLETE checking of the location against the destination mode is performed, and
8641
@c OBSOLETE therefore the result can be quite confusing.
8642
@c OBSOLETE
8643
@c OBSOLETE @smallexample
8644
@c OBSOLETE (@value{GDBP}) print int (s(3 up 4)) XXX TO be filled in !! XXX
8645
@c OBSOLETE @end smallexample
8646
@c OBSOLETE
8647
@c OBSOLETE @node Values and their Operations
8648
@c OBSOLETE @subsubsection Values and their Operations
8649
@c OBSOLETE
8650
@c OBSOLETE Values are used to alter locations, to investigate complex structures in
8651
@c OBSOLETE more detail or to filter relevant information out of a large amount of
8652
@c OBSOLETE data.  There are several (mode dependent) operations defined which enable
8653
@c OBSOLETE such investigations.  These operations are not only applicable to
8654
@c OBSOLETE constant values but also to locations, which can become quite useful
8655
@c OBSOLETE when debugging complex structures.  During parsing the command line
8656
@c OBSOLETE (e.g. evaluating an expression) @value{GDBN} treats location names as
8657
@c OBSOLETE the values behind these locations.
8658
@c OBSOLETE
8659
@c OBSOLETE This section describes how values have to be specified and which
8660
@c OBSOLETE operations are legal to be used with such values.
8661
@c OBSOLETE
8662
@c OBSOLETE @table @code
8663
@c OBSOLETE @item Literal Values
8664
@c OBSOLETE Literal values are specified in the same manner as in @sc{gnu} Chill programs.
8665
@c OBSOLETE For detailed specification refer to the @sc{gnu} Chill implementation Manual
8666
@c OBSOLETE chapter 1.5.
8667
@c OBSOLETE @c FIXME: if the Chill Manual is a Texinfo documents, the above should
8668
@c OBSOLETE @c be converted to a @ref.
8669
@c OBSOLETE
8670
@c OBSOLETE @ignore
8671
@c OBSOLETE @itemize @bullet
8672
@c OBSOLETE @item
8673
@c OBSOLETE @emph{Integer Literals} are specified in the same manner as in Chill
8674
@c OBSOLETE programs (refer to the Chill Standard z200/88 chpt 5.2.4.2)
8675
@c OBSOLETE @item
8676
@c OBSOLETE @emph{Boolean Literals} are defined by @code{TRUE} and @code{FALSE}.
8677
@c OBSOLETE @item
8678
@c OBSOLETE @emph{Character Literals} are defined by @code{'<character>'}. (e.g.
8679
@c OBSOLETE @code{'M'})
8680
@c OBSOLETE @item
8681
@c OBSOLETE @emph{Set Literals} are defined by a name which was specified in a set
8682
@c OBSOLETE mode.  The value delivered by a Set Literal is the set value.  This is
8683
@c OBSOLETE comparable to an enumeration in C/C@t{++} language.
8684
@c OBSOLETE @item
8685
@c OBSOLETE @emph{Emptiness Literal} is predefined by @code{NULL}.  The value of the
8686
@c OBSOLETE emptiness literal delivers either the empty reference value, the empty
8687
@c OBSOLETE procedure value or the empty instance value.
8688
@c OBSOLETE
8689
@c OBSOLETE @item
8690
@c OBSOLETE @emph{Character String Literals} are defined by a sequence of characters
8691
@c OBSOLETE enclosed in single- or double quotes.  If a single- or double quote has
8692
@c OBSOLETE to be part of the string literal it has to be stuffed (specified twice).
8693
@c OBSOLETE @item
8694
@c OBSOLETE @emph{Bitstring Literals} are specified in the same manner as in Chill
8695
@c OBSOLETE programs (refer z200/88 chpt 5.2.4.8).
8696
@c OBSOLETE @item
8697
@c OBSOLETE @emph{Floating point literals} are specified in the same manner as in
8698
@c OBSOLETE (gnu-)Chill programs (refer @sc{gnu} Chill implementation Manual chapter 1.5).
8699
@c OBSOLETE @end itemize
8700
@c OBSOLETE @end ignore
8701
@c OBSOLETE
8702
@c OBSOLETE @item Tuple Values
8703
@c OBSOLETE A tuple is specified by @code{<mode name>[<tuple>]}, where @code{<mode
8704
@c OBSOLETE name>} can be omitted if the mode of the tuple is unambiguous.  This
8705
@c OBSOLETE unambiguity is derived from the context of a evaluated expression.
8706
@c OBSOLETE @code{<tuple>} can be one of the following:
8707
@c OBSOLETE
8708
@c OBSOLETE @itemize @bullet
8709
@c OBSOLETE @item @emph{Powerset Tuple}
8710
@c OBSOLETE @item @emph{Array Tuple}
8711
@c OBSOLETE @item @emph{Structure Tuple}
8712
@c OBSOLETE Powerset tuples, array tuples and structure tuples are specified in the
8713
@c OBSOLETE same manner as in Chill programs refer to z200/88 chpt 5.2.5.
8714
@c OBSOLETE @end itemize
8715
@c OBSOLETE
8716
@c OBSOLETE @item String Element Value
8717
@c OBSOLETE A string element value is specified by
8718
@c OBSOLETE @smallexample
8719
@c OBSOLETE @code{<string value>(<index>)}
8720
@c OBSOLETE @end smallexample
8721
@c OBSOLETE where @code{<index>} is a integer expression.  It delivers a character
8722
@c OBSOLETE value which is equivalent to the character indexed by @code{<index>} in
8723
@c OBSOLETE the string.
8724
@c OBSOLETE
8725
@c OBSOLETE @item String Slice Value
8726
@c OBSOLETE A string slice value is specified by @code{<string value>(<slice
8727
@c OBSOLETE spec>)}, where @code{<slice spec>} can be either a range of integer
8728
@c OBSOLETE expressions or specified by @code{<start expr> up <size>}.
8729
@c OBSOLETE @code{<size>} denotes the number of elements which the slice contains.
8730
@c OBSOLETE The delivered value is a string value, which is part of the specified
8731
@c OBSOLETE string.
8732
@c OBSOLETE
8733
@c OBSOLETE @item Array Element Values
8734
@c OBSOLETE An array element value is specified by @code{<array value>(<expr>)} and
8735
@c OBSOLETE delivers a array element value of the mode of the specified array.
8736
@c OBSOLETE
8737
@c OBSOLETE @item Array Slice Values
8738
@c OBSOLETE An array slice is specified by @code{<array value>(<slice spec>)}, where
8739
@c OBSOLETE @code{<slice spec>} can be either a range specified by expressions or by
8740
@c OBSOLETE @code{<start expr> up <size>}.  @code{<size>} denotes the number of
8741
@c OBSOLETE arrayelements the slice contains.  The delivered value is an array value
8742
@c OBSOLETE which is part of the specified array.
8743
@c OBSOLETE
8744
@c OBSOLETE @item Structure Field Values
8745
@c OBSOLETE A structure field value is derived by @code{<structure value>.<field
8746
@c OBSOLETE name>}, where @code{<field name>} indicates the name of a field specified
8747
@c OBSOLETE in the mode definition of the structure.  The mode of the delivered value
8748
@c OBSOLETE corresponds to this mode definition in the structure definition.
8749
@c OBSOLETE
8750
@c OBSOLETE @item Procedure Call Value
8751
@c OBSOLETE The procedure call value is derived from the return value of the
8752
@c OBSOLETE procedure@footnote{If a procedure call is used for instance in an
8753
@c OBSOLETE expression, then this procedure is called with all its side
8754
@c OBSOLETE effects.  This can lead to confusing results if used carelessly.}.
8755
@c OBSOLETE
8756
@c OBSOLETE Values of duration mode locations are represented by @code{ULONG} literals.
8757
@c OBSOLETE
8758
@c OBSOLETE Values of time mode locations appear as
8759
@c OBSOLETE @smallexample
8760
@c OBSOLETE @code{TIME(<secs>:<nsecs>)}
8761
@c OBSOLETE @end smallexample
8762
@c OBSOLETE
8763
@c OBSOLETE
8764
@c OBSOLETE @ignore
8765
@c OBSOLETE This is not implemented yet:
8766
@c OBSOLETE @item Built-in Value
8767
@c OBSOLETE @noindent
8768
@c OBSOLETE The following built in functions are provided:
8769
@c OBSOLETE
8770
@c OBSOLETE @table @code
8771
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{ADDR()}
8772
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{NUM()}
8773
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{PRED()}
8774
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{SUCC()}
8775
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{ABS()}
8776
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{CARD()}
8777
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{MAX()}
8778
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{MIN()}
8779
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{SIZE()}
8780
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{UPPER()}
8781
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{LOWER()}
8782
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{LENGTH()}
8783
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{SIN()}
8784
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{COS()}
8785
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{TAN()}
8786
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{ARCSIN()}
8787
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{ARCCOS()}
8788
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{ARCTAN()}
8789
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{EXP()}
8790
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{LN()}
8791
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{LOG()}
8792
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{SQRT()}
8793
@c OBSOLETE @end table
8794
@c OBSOLETE
8795
@c OBSOLETE For a detailed description refer to the GNU Chill implementation manual
8796
@c OBSOLETE chapter 1.6.
8797
@c OBSOLETE @end ignore
8798
@c OBSOLETE
8799
@c OBSOLETE @item Zero-adic Operator Value
8800
@c OBSOLETE The zero-adic operator value is derived from the instance value for the
8801
@c OBSOLETE current active process.
8802
@c OBSOLETE
8803
@c OBSOLETE @item Expression Values
8804
@c OBSOLETE The value delivered by an expression is the result of the evaluation of
8805
@c OBSOLETE the specified expression.  If there are error conditions (mode
8806
@c OBSOLETE incompatibility, etc.) the evaluation of expressions is aborted with a
8807
@c OBSOLETE corresponding error message.  Expressions may be parenthesised which
8808
@c OBSOLETE causes the evaluation of this expression before any other expression
8809
@c OBSOLETE which uses the result of the parenthesised expression.  The following
8810
@c OBSOLETE operators are supported by @value{GDBN}:
8811
@c OBSOLETE
8812
@c OBSOLETE @table @code
8813
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{OR, ORIF, XOR}
8814
@c OBSOLETE @itemx @code{AND, ANDIF}
8815
@c OBSOLETE @itemx @code{NOT}
8816
@c OBSOLETE Logical operators defined over operands of boolean mode.
8817
@c OBSOLETE
8818
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{=, /=}
8819
@c OBSOLETE Equality and inequality operators defined over all modes.
8820
@c OBSOLETE
8821
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{>, >=}
8822
@c OBSOLETE @itemx @code{<, <=}
8823
@c OBSOLETE Relational operators defined over predefined modes.
8824
@c OBSOLETE
8825
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{+, -}
8826
@c OBSOLETE @itemx @code{*, /, MOD, REM}
8827
@c OBSOLETE Arithmetic operators defined over predefined modes.
8828
@c OBSOLETE
8829
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{-}
8830
@c OBSOLETE Change sign operator.
8831
@c OBSOLETE
8832
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{//}
8833
@c OBSOLETE String concatenation operator.
8834
@c OBSOLETE
8835
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{()}
8836
@c OBSOLETE String repetition operator.
8837
@c OBSOLETE
8838
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{->}
8839
@c OBSOLETE Referenced location operator which can be used either to take the
8840
@c OBSOLETE address of a location (@code{->loc}), or to dereference a reference
8841
@c OBSOLETE location (@code{loc->}).
8842
@c OBSOLETE
8843
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{OR, XOR}
8844
@c OBSOLETE @itemx @code{AND}
8845
@c OBSOLETE @itemx @code{NOT}
8846
@c OBSOLETE Powerset and bitstring operators.
8847
@c OBSOLETE
8848
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{>, >=}
8849
@c OBSOLETE @itemx @code{<, <=}
8850
@c OBSOLETE Powerset inclusion operators.
8851
@c OBSOLETE
8852
@c OBSOLETE @item @code{IN}
8853
@c OBSOLETE Membership operator.
8854
@c OBSOLETE @end table
8855
@c OBSOLETE @end table
8856
@c OBSOLETE
8857
@c OBSOLETE @node Chill type and range checks
8858
@c OBSOLETE @subsubsection Chill type and range checks
8859
@c OBSOLETE
8860
@c OBSOLETE @value{GDBN} considers two Chill variables mode equivalent if the sizes
8861
@c OBSOLETE of the two modes are equal.  This rule applies recursively to more
8862
@c OBSOLETE complex datatypes which means that complex modes are treated
8863
@c OBSOLETE equivalent if all element modes (which also can be complex modes like
8864
@c OBSOLETE structures, arrays, etc.) have the same size.
8865
@c OBSOLETE
8866
@c OBSOLETE Range checking is done on all mathematical operations, assignment, array
8867
@c OBSOLETE index bounds and all built in procedures.
8868
@c OBSOLETE
8869
@c OBSOLETE Strong type checks are forced using the @value{GDBN} command @code{set
8870
@c OBSOLETE check strong}.  This enforces strong type and range checks on all
8871
@c OBSOLETE operations where Chill constructs are used (expressions, built in
8872
@c OBSOLETE functions, etc.) in respect to the semantics as defined in the z.200
8873
@c OBSOLETE language specification.
8874
@c OBSOLETE
8875
@c OBSOLETE All checks can be disabled by the @value{GDBN} command @code{set check
8876
@c OBSOLETE off}.
8877
@c OBSOLETE
8878
@c OBSOLETE @ignore
8879
@c OBSOLETE @c Deviations from the Chill Standard Z200/88
8880
@c OBSOLETE see last paragraph ?
8881
@c OBSOLETE @end ignore
8882
@c OBSOLETE
8883
@c OBSOLETE @node Chill defaults
8884
@c OBSOLETE @subsubsection Chill defaults
8885
@c OBSOLETE
8886
@c OBSOLETE If type and range checking are set automatically by @value{GDBN}, they
8887
@c OBSOLETE both default to @code{on} whenever the working language changes to
8888
@c OBSOLETE Chill.  This happens regardless of whether you or @value{GDBN}
8889
@c OBSOLETE selected the working language.
8890
@c OBSOLETE
8891
@c OBSOLETE If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, then entering
8892
@c OBSOLETE code compiled from a file whose name ends with @file{.ch} sets the
8893
@c OBSOLETE working language to Chill.  @xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} set
8894
@c OBSOLETE the language automatically}, for further details.
8895
 
8896
@node Symbols
8897
@chapter Examining the Symbol Table
8898
 
8899
The commands described in this chapter allow you to inquire about the
8900
symbols (names of variables, functions and types) defined in your
8901
program.  This information is inherent in the text of your program and
8902
does not change as your program executes.  @value{GDBN} finds it in your
8903
program's symbol table, in the file indicated when you started @value{GDBN}
8904
(@pxref{File Options, ,Choosing files}), or by one of the
8905
file-management commands (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
8906
 
8907
@cindex symbol names
8908
@cindex names of symbols
8909
@cindex quoting names
8910
Occasionally, you may need to refer to symbols that contain unusual
8911
characters, which @value{GDBN} ordinarily treats as word delimiters.  The
8912
most frequent case is in referring to static variables in other
8913
source files (@pxref{Variables,,Program variables}).  File names
8914
are recorded in object files as debugging symbols, but @value{GDBN} would
8915
ordinarily parse a typical file name, like @file{foo.c}, as the three words
8916
@samp{foo} @samp{.} @samp{c}.  To allow @value{GDBN} to recognize
8917
@samp{foo.c} as a single symbol, enclose it in single quotes; for example,
8918
 
8919
@smallexample
8920
p 'foo.c'::x
8921
@end smallexample
8922
 
8923
@noindent
8924
looks up the value of @code{x} in the scope of the file @file{foo.c}.
8925
 
8926
@table @code
8927
@kindex info address
8928
@cindex address of a symbol
8929
@item info address @var{symbol}
8930
Describe where the data for @var{symbol} is stored.  For a register
8931
variable, this says which register it is kept in.  For a non-register
8932
local variable, this prints the stack-frame offset at which the variable
8933
is always stored.
8934
 
8935
Note the contrast with @samp{print &@var{symbol}}, which does not work
8936
at all for a register variable, and for a stack local variable prints
8937
the exact address of the current instantiation of the variable.
8938
 
8939
@kindex info symbol
8940
@cindex symbol from address
8941
@item info symbol @var{addr}
8942
Print the name of a symbol which is stored at the address @var{addr}.
8943
If no symbol is stored exactly at @var{addr}, @value{GDBN} prints the
8944
nearest symbol and an offset from it:
8945
 
8946
@smallexample
8947
(@value{GDBP}) info symbol 0x54320
8948
_initialize_vx + 396 in section .text
8949
@end smallexample
8950
 
8951
@noindent
8952
This is the opposite of the @code{info address} command.  You can use
8953
it to find out the name of a variable or a function given its address.
8954
 
8955
@kindex whatis
8956
@item whatis @var{expr}
8957
Print the data type of expression @var{expr}.  @var{expr} is not
8958
actually evaluated, and any side-effecting operations (such as
8959
assignments or function calls) inside it do not take place.
8960
@xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
8961
 
8962
@item whatis
8963
Print the data type of @code{$}, the last value in the value history.
8964
 
8965
@kindex ptype
8966
@item ptype @var{typename}
8967
Print a description of data type @var{typename}.  @var{typename} may be
8968
the name of a type, or for C code it may have the form @samp{class
8969
@var{class-name}}, @samp{struct @var{struct-tag}}, @samp{union
8970
@var{union-tag}} or @samp{enum @var{enum-tag}}.
8971
 
8972
@item ptype @var{expr}
8973
@itemx ptype
8974
Print a description of the type of expression @var{expr}.  @code{ptype}
8975
differs from @code{whatis} by printing a detailed description, instead
8976
of just the name of the type.
8977
 
8978
For example, for this variable declaration:
8979
 
8980
@smallexample
8981
struct complex @{double real; double imag;@} v;
8982
@end smallexample
8983
 
8984
@noindent
8985
the two commands give this output:
8986
 
8987
@smallexample
8988
@group
8989
(@value{GDBP}) whatis v
8990
type = struct complex
8991
(@value{GDBP}) ptype v
8992
type = struct complex @{
8993
    double real;
8994
    double imag;
8995
@}
8996
@end group
8997
@end smallexample
8998
 
8999
@noindent
9000
As with @code{whatis}, using @code{ptype} without an argument refers to
9001
the type of @code{$}, the last value in the value history.
9002
 
9003
@kindex info types
9004
@item info types @var{regexp}
9005
@itemx info types
9006
Print a brief description of all types whose names match @var{regexp}
9007
(or all types in your program, if you supply no argument).  Each
9008
complete typename is matched as though it were a complete line; thus,
9009
@samp{i type value} gives information on all types in your program whose
9010
names include the string @code{value}, but @samp{i type ^value$} gives
9011
information only on types whose complete name is @code{value}.
9012
 
9013
This command differs from @code{ptype} in two ways: first, like
9014
@code{whatis}, it does not print a detailed description; second, it
9015
lists all source files where a type is defined.
9016
 
9017
@kindex info scope
9018
@cindex local variables
9019
@item info scope @var{addr}
9020
List all the variables local to a particular scope.  This command
9021
accepts a location---a function name, a source line, or an address
9022
preceded by a @samp{*}, and prints all the variables local to the
9023
scope defined by that location.  For example:
9024
 
9025
@smallexample
9026
(@value{GDBP}) @b{info scope command_line_handler}
9027
Scope for command_line_handler:
9028
Symbol rl is an argument at stack/frame offset 8, length 4.
9029
Symbol linebuffer is in static storage at address 0x150a18, length 4.
9030
Symbol linelength is in static storage at address 0x150a1c, length 4.
9031
Symbol p is a local variable in register $esi, length 4.
9032
Symbol p1 is a local variable in register $ebx, length 4.
9033
Symbol nline is a local variable in register $edx, length 4.
9034
Symbol repeat is a local variable at frame offset -8, length 4.
9035
@end smallexample
9036
 
9037
@noindent
9038
This command is especially useful for determining what data to collect
9039
during a @dfn{trace experiment}, see @ref{Tracepoint Actions,
9040
collect}.
9041
 
9042
@kindex info source
9043
@item info source
9044
Show information about the current source file---that is, the source file for
9045
the function containing the current point of execution:
9046
@itemize @bullet
9047
@item
9048
the name of the source file, and the directory containing it,
9049
@item
9050
the directory it was compiled in,
9051
@item
9052
its length, in lines,
9053
@item
9054
which programming language it is written in,
9055
@item
9056
whether the executable includes debugging information for that file, and
9057
if so, what format the information is in (e.g., STABS, Dwarf 2, etc.), and
9058
@item
9059
whether the debugging information includes information about
9060
preprocessor macros.
9061
@end itemize
9062
 
9063
 
9064
@kindex info sources
9065
@item info sources
9066
Print the names of all source files in your program for which there is
9067
debugging information, organized into two lists: files whose symbols
9068
have already been read, and files whose symbols will be read when needed.
9069
 
9070
@kindex info functions
9071
@item info functions
9072
Print the names and data types of all defined functions.
9073
 
9074
@item info functions @var{regexp}
9075
Print the names and data types of all defined functions
9076
whose names contain a match for regular expression @var{regexp}.
9077
Thus, @samp{info fun step} finds all functions whose names
9078
include @code{step}; @samp{info fun ^step} finds those whose names
9079
start with @code{step}.  If a function name contains characters
9080
that conflict with the regular expression language (eg.
9081
@samp{operator*()}), they may be quoted with a backslash.
9082
 
9083
@kindex info variables
9084
@item info variables
9085
Print the names and data types of all variables that are declared
9086
outside of functions (i.e.@: excluding local variables).
9087
 
9088
@item info variables @var{regexp}
9089
Print the names and data types of all variables (except for local
9090
variables) whose names contain a match for regular expression
9091
@var{regexp}.
9092
 
9093
@ignore
9094
This was never implemented.
9095
@kindex info methods
9096
@item info methods
9097
@itemx info methods @var{regexp}
9098
The @code{info methods} command permits the user to examine all defined
9099
methods within C@t{++} program, or (with the @var{regexp} argument) a
9100
specific set of methods found in the various C@t{++} classes.  Many
9101
C@t{++} classes provide a large number of methods.  Thus, the output
9102
from the @code{ptype} command can be overwhelming and hard to use.  The
9103
@code{info-methods} command filters the methods, printing only those
9104
which match the regular-expression @var{regexp}.
9105
@end ignore
9106
 
9107
@cindex reloading symbols
9108
Some systems allow individual object files that make up your program to
9109
be replaced without stopping and restarting your program.  For example,
9110
in VxWorks you can simply recompile a defective object file and keep on
9111
running.  If you are running on one of these systems, you can allow
9112
@value{GDBN} to reload the symbols for automatically relinked modules:
9113
 
9114
@table @code
9115
@kindex set symbol-reloading
9116
@item set symbol-reloading on
9117
Replace symbol definitions for the corresponding source file when an
9118
object file with a particular name is seen again.
9119
 
9120
@item set symbol-reloading off
9121
Do not replace symbol definitions when encountering object files of the
9122
same name more than once.  This is the default state; if you are not
9123
running on a system that permits automatic relinking of modules, you
9124
should leave @code{symbol-reloading} off, since otherwise @value{GDBN}
9125
may discard symbols when linking large programs, that may contain
9126
several modules (from different directories or libraries) with the same
9127
name.
9128
 
9129
@kindex show symbol-reloading
9130
@item show symbol-reloading
9131
Show the current @code{on} or @code{off} setting.
9132
@end table
9133
 
9134
@kindex set opaque-type-resolution
9135
@item set opaque-type-resolution on
9136
Tell @value{GDBN} to resolve opaque types.  An opaque type is a type
9137
declared as a pointer to a @code{struct}, @code{class}, or
9138
@code{union}---for example, @code{struct MyType *}---that is used in one
9139
source file although the full declaration of @code{struct MyType} is in
9140
another source file.  The default is on.
9141
 
9142
A change in the setting of this subcommand will not take effect until
9143
the next time symbols for a file are loaded.
9144
 
9145
@item set opaque-type-resolution off
9146
Tell @value{GDBN} not to resolve opaque types.  In this case, the type
9147
is printed as follows:
9148
@smallexample
9149
@{<no data fields>@}
9150
@end smallexample
9151
 
9152
@kindex show opaque-type-resolution
9153
@item show opaque-type-resolution
9154
Show whether opaque types are resolved or not.
9155
 
9156
@kindex maint print symbols
9157
@cindex symbol dump
9158
@kindex maint print psymbols
9159
@cindex partial symbol dump
9160
@item maint print symbols @var{filename}
9161
@itemx maint print psymbols @var{filename}
9162
@itemx maint print msymbols @var{filename}
9163
Write a dump of debugging symbol data into the file @var{filename}.
9164
These commands are used to debug the @value{GDBN} symbol-reading code.  Only
9165
symbols with debugging data are included.  If you use @samp{maint print
9166
symbols}, @value{GDBN} includes all the symbols for which it has already
9167
collected full details: that is, @var{filename} reflects symbols for
9168
only those files whose symbols @value{GDBN} has read.  You can use the
9169
command @code{info sources} to find out which files these are.  If you
9170
use @samp{maint print psymbols} instead, the dump shows information about
9171
symbols that @value{GDBN} only knows partially---that is, symbols defined in
9172
files that @value{GDBN} has skimmed, but not yet read completely.  Finally,
9173
@samp{maint print msymbols} dumps just the minimal symbol information
9174
required for each object file from which @value{GDBN} has read some symbols.
9175
@xref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}, for a discussion of how
9176
@value{GDBN} reads symbols (in the description of @code{symbol-file}).
9177
@end table
9178
 
9179
@node Altering
9180
@chapter Altering Execution
9181
 
9182
Once you think you have found an error in your program, you might want to
9183
find out for certain whether correcting the apparent error would lead to
9184
correct results in the rest of the run.  You can find the answer by
9185
experiment, using the @value{GDBN} features for altering execution of the
9186
program.
9187
 
9188
For example, you can store new values into variables or memory
9189
locations, give your program a signal, restart it at a different
9190
address, or even return prematurely from a function.
9191
 
9192
@menu
9193
* Assignment::                  Assignment to variables
9194
* Jumping::                     Continuing at a different address
9195
* Signaling::                   Giving your program a signal
9196
* Returning::                   Returning from a function
9197
* Calling::                     Calling your program's functions
9198
* Patching::                    Patching your program
9199
@end menu
9200
 
9201
@node Assignment
9202
@section Assignment to variables
9203
 
9204
@cindex assignment
9205
@cindex setting variables
9206
To alter the value of a variable, evaluate an assignment expression.
9207
@xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.  For example,
9208
 
9209
@smallexample
9210
print x=4
9211
@end smallexample
9212
 
9213
@noindent
9214
stores the value 4 into the variable @code{x}, and then prints the
9215
value of the assignment expression (which is 4).
9216
@xref{Languages, ,Using @value{GDBN} with Different Languages}, for more
9217
information on operators in supported languages.
9218
 
9219
@kindex set variable
9220
@cindex variables, setting
9221
If you are not interested in seeing the value of the assignment, use the
9222
@code{set} command instead of the @code{print} command.  @code{set} is
9223
really the same as @code{print} except that the expression's value is
9224
not printed and is not put in the value history (@pxref{Value History,
9225
,Value history}).  The expression is evaluated only for its effects.
9226
 
9227
If the beginning of the argument string of the @code{set} command
9228
appears identical to a @code{set} subcommand, use the @code{set
9229
variable} command instead of just @code{set}.  This command is identical
9230
to @code{set} except for its lack of subcommands.  For example, if your
9231
program has a variable @code{width}, you get an error if you try to set
9232
a new value with just @samp{set width=13}, because @value{GDBN} has the
9233
command @code{set width}:
9234
 
9235
@smallexample
9236
(@value{GDBP}) whatis width
9237
type = double
9238
(@value{GDBP}) p width
9239
$4 = 13
9240
(@value{GDBP}) set width=47
9241
Invalid syntax in expression.
9242
@end smallexample
9243
 
9244
@noindent
9245
The invalid expression, of course, is @samp{=47}.  In
9246
order to actually set the program's variable @code{width}, use
9247
 
9248
@smallexample
9249
(@value{GDBP}) set var width=47
9250
@end smallexample
9251
 
9252
Because the @code{set} command has many subcommands that can conflict
9253
with the names of program variables, it is a good idea to use the
9254
@code{set variable} command instead of just @code{set}.  For example, if
9255
your program has a variable @code{g}, you run into problems if you try
9256
to set a new value with just @samp{set g=4}, because @value{GDBN} has
9257
the command @code{set gnutarget}, abbreviated @code{set g}:
9258
 
9259
@smallexample
9260
@group
9261
(@value{GDBP}) whatis g
9262
type = double
9263
(@value{GDBP}) p g
9264
$1 = 1
9265
(@value{GDBP}) set g=4
9266
(@value{GDBP}) p g
9267
$2 = 1
9268
(@value{GDBP}) r
9269
The program being debugged has been started already.
9270
Start it from the beginning? (y or n) y
9271
Starting program: /home/smith/cc_progs/a.out
9272
"/home/smith/cc_progs/a.out": can't open to read symbols:
9273
                                 Invalid bfd target.
9274
(@value{GDBP}) show g
9275
The current BFD target is "=4".
9276
@end group
9277
@end smallexample
9278
 
9279
@noindent
9280
The program variable @code{g} did not change, and you silently set the
9281
@code{gnutarget} to an invalid value.  In order to set the variable
9282
@code{g}, use
9283
 
9284
@smallexample
9285
(@value{GDBP}) set var g=4
9286
@end smallexample
9287
 
9288
@value{GDBN} allows more implicit conversions in assignments than C; you can
9289
freely store an integer value into a pointer variable or vice versa,
9290
and you can convert any structure to any other structure that is the
9291
same length or shorter.
9292
@comment FIXME: how do structs align/pad in these conversions?
9293
@comment        /doc@cygnus.com 18dec1990
9294
 
9295
To store values into arbitrary places in memory, use the @samp{@{@dots{}@}}
9296
construct to generate a value of specified type at a specified address
9297
(@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).  For example, @code{@{int@}0x83040} refers
9298
to memory location @code{0x83040} as an integer (which implies a certain size
9299
and representation in memory), and
9300
 
9301
@smallexample
9302
set @{int@}0x83040 = 4
9303
@end smallexample
9304
 
9305
@noindent
9306
stores the value 4 into that memory location.
9307
 
9308
@node Jumping
9309
@section Continuing at a different address
9310
 
9311
Ordinarily, when you continue your program, you do so at the place where
9312
it stopped, with the @code{continue} command.  You can instead continue at
9313
an address of your own choosing, with the following commands:
9314
 
9315
@table @code
9316
@kindex jump
9317
@item jump @var{linespec}
9318
Resume execution at line @var{linespec}.  Execution stops again
9319
immediately if there is a breakpoint there.  @xref{List, ,Printing
9320
source lines}, for a description of the different forms of
9321
@var{linespec}.  It is common practice to use the @code{tbreak} command
9322
in conjunction with @code{jump}.  @xref{Set Breaks, ,Setting
9323
breakpoints}.
9324
 
9325
The @code{jump} command does not change the current stack frame, or
9326
the stack pointer, or the contents of any memory location or any
9327
register other than the program counter.  If line @var{linespec} is in
9328
a different function from the one currently executing, the results may
9329
be bizarre if the two functions expect different patterns of arguments or
9330
of local variables.  For this reason, the @code{jump} command requests
9331
confirmation if the specified line is not in the function currently
9332
executing.  However, even bizarre results are predictable if you are
9333
well acquainted with the machine-language code of your program.
9334
 
9335
@item jump *@var{address}
9336
Resume execution at the instruction at address @var{address}.
9337
@end table
9338
 
9339
@c Doesn't work on HP-UX; have to set $pcoqh and $pcoqt.
9340
On many systems, you can get much the same effect as the @code{jump}
9341
command by storing a new value into the register @code{$pc}.  The
9342
difference is that this does not start your program running; it only
9343
changes the address of where it @emph{will} run when you continue.  For
9344
example,
9345
 
9346
@smallexample
9347
set $pc = 0x485
9348
@end smallexample
9349
 
9350
@noindent
9351
makes the next @code{continue} command or stepping command execute at
9352
address @code{0x485}, rather than at the address where your program stopped.
9353
@xref{Continuing and Stepping, ,Continuing and stepping}.
9354
 
9355
The most common occasion to use the @code{jump} command is to back
9356
up---perhaps with more breakpoints set---over a portion of a program
9357
that has already executed, in order to examine its execution in more
9358
detail.
9359
 
9360
@c @group
9361
@node Signaling
9362
@section Giving your program a signal
9363
 
9364
@table @code
9365
@kindex signal
9366
@item signal @var{signal}
9367
Resume execution where your program stopped, but immediately give it the
9368
signal @var{signal}.  @var{signal} can be the name or the number of a
9369
signal.  For example, on many systems @code{signal 2} and @code{signal
9370
SIGINT} are both ways of sending an interrupt signal.
9371
 
9372
Alternatively, if @var{signal} is zero, continue execution without
9373
giving a signal.  This is useful when your program stopped on account of
9374
a signal and would ordinary see the signal when resumed with the
9375
@code{continue} command; @samp{signal 0} causes it to resume without a
9376
signal.
9377
 
9378
@code{signal} does not repeat when you press @key{RET} a second time
9379
after executing the command.
9380
@end table
9381
@c @end group
9382
 
9383
Invoking the @code{signal} command is not the same as invoking the
9384
@code{kill} utility from the shell.  Sending a signal with @code{kill}
9385
causes @value{GDBN} to decide what to do with the signal depending on
9386
the signal handling tables (@pxref{Signals}).  The @code{signal} command
9387
passes the signal directly to your program.
9388
 
9389
 
9390
@node Returning
9391
@section Returning from a function
9392
 
9393
@table @code
9394
@cindex returning from a function
9395
@kindex return
9396
@item return
9397
@itemx return @var{expression}
9398
You can cancel execution of a function call with the @code{return}
9399
command.  If you give an
9400
@var{expression} argument, its value is used as the function's return
9401
value.
9402
@end table
9403
 
9404
When you use @code{return}, @value{GDBN} discards the selected stack frame
9405
(and all frames within it).  You can think of this as making the
9406
discarded frame return prematurely.  If you wish to specify a value to
9407
be returned, give that value as the argument to @code{return}.
9408
 
9409
This pops the selected stack frame (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a
9410
frame}), and any other frames inside of it, leaving its caller as the
9411
innermost remaining frame.  That frame becomes selected.  The
9412
specified value is stored in the registers used for returning values
9413
of functions.
9414
 
9415
The @code{return} command does not resume execution; it leaves the
9416
program stopped in the state that would exist if the function had just
9417
returned.  In contrast, the @code{finish} command (@pxref{Continuing
9418
and Stepping, ,Continuing and stepping}) resumes execution until the
9419
selected stack frame returns naturally.
9420
 
9421
@node Calling
9422
@section Calling program functions
9423
 
9424
@cindex calling functions
9425
@kindex call
9426
@table @code
9427
@item call @var{expr}
9428
Evaluate the expression @var{expr} without displaying @code{void}
9429
returned values.
9430
@end table
9431
 
9432
You can use this variant of the @code{print} command if you want to
9433
execute a function from your program, but without cluttering the output
9434
with @code{void} returned values.  If the result is not void, it
9435
is printed and saved in the value history.
9436
 
9437
@node Patching
9438
@section Patching programs
9439
 
9440
@cindex patching binaries
9441
@cindex writing into executables
9442
@cindex writing into corefiles
9443
 
9444
By default, @value{GDBN} opens the file containing your program's
9445
executable code (or the corefile) read-only.  This prevents accidental
9446
alterations to machine code; but it also prevents you from intentionally
9447
patching your program's binary.
9448
 
9449
If you'd like to be able to patch the binary, you can specify that
9450
explicitly with the @code{set write} command.  For example, you might
9451
want to turn on internal debugging flags, or even to make emergency
9452
repairs.
9453
 
9454
@table @code
9455
@kindex set write
9456
@item set write on
9457
@itemx set write off
9458
If you specify @samp{set write on}, @value{GDBN} opens executable and
9459
core files for both reading and writing; if you specify @samp{set write
9460
off} (the default), @value{GDBN} opens them read-only.
9461
 
9462
If you have already loaded a file, you must load it again (using the
9463
@code{exec-file} or @code{core-file} command) after changing @code{set
9464
write}, for your new setting to take effect.
9465
 
9466
@item show write
9467
@kindex show write
9468
Display whether executable files and core files are opened for writing
9469
as well as reading.
9470
@end table
9471
 
9472
@node GDB Files
9473
@chapter @value{GDBN} Files
9474
 
9475
@value{GDBN} needs to know the file name of the program to be debugged,
9476
both in order to read its symbol table and in order to start your
9477
program.  To debug a core dump of a previous run, you must also tell
9478
@value{GDBN} the name of the core dump file.
9479
 
9480
@menu
9481
* Files::                       Commands to specify files
9482
* Symbol Errors::               Errors reading symbol files
9483
@end menu
9484
 
9485
@node Files
9486
@section Commands to specify files
9487
 
9488
@cindex symbol table
9489
@cindex core dump file
9490
 
9491
You may want to specify executable and core dump file names.  The usual
9492
way to do this is at start-up time, using the arguments to
9493
@value{GDBN}'s start-up commands (@pxref{Invocation, , Getting In and
9494
Out of @value{GDBN}}).
9495
 
9496
Occasionally it is necessary to change to a different file during a
9497
@value{GDBN} session.  Or you may run @value{GDBN} and forget to specify
9498
a file you want to use.  In these situations the @value{GDBN} commands
9499
to specify new files are useful.
9500
 
9501
@table @code
9502
@cindex executable file
9503
@kindex file
9504
@item file @var{filename}
9505
Use @var{filename} as the program to be debugged.  It is read for its
9506
symbols and for the contents of pure memory.  It is also the program
9507
executed when you use the @code{run} command.  If you do not specify a
9508
directory and the file is not found in the @value{GDBN} working directory,
9509
@value{GDBN} uses the environment variable @code{PATH} as a list of
9510
directories to search, just as the shell does when looking for a program
9511
to run.  You can change the value of this variable, for both @value{GDBN}
9512
and your program, using the @code{path} command.
9513
 
9514
On systems with memory-mapped files, an auxiliary file named
9515
@file{@var{filename}.syms} may hold symbol table information for
9516
@var{filename}.  If so, @value{GDBN} maps in the symbol table from
9517
@file{@var{filename}.syms}, starting up more quickly.  See the
9518
descriptions of the file options @samp{-mapped} and @samp{-readnow}
9519
(available on the command line, and with the commands @code{file},
9520
@code{symbol-file}, or @code{add-symbol-file}, described below),
9521
for more information.
9522
 
9523
@item file
9524
@code{file} with no argument makes @value{GDBN} discard any information it
9525
has on both executable file and the symbol table.
9526
 
9527
@kindex exec-file
9528
@item exec-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
9529
Specify that the program to be run (but not the symbol table) is found
9530
in @var{filename}.  @value{GDBN} searches the environment variable @code{PATH}
9531
if necessary to locate your program.  Omitting @var{filename} means to
9532
discard information on the executable file.
9533
 
9534
@kindex symbol-file
9535
@item symbol-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
9536
Read symbol table information from file @var{filename}.  @code{PATH} is
9537
searched when necessary.  Use the @code{file} command to get both symbol
9538
table and program to run from the same file.
9539
 
9540
@code{symbol-file} with no argument clears out @value{GDBN} information on your
9541
program's symbol table.
9542
 
9543
The @code{symbol-file} command causes @value{GDBN} to forget the contents
9544
of its convenience variables, the value history, and all breakpoints and
9545
auto-display expressions.  This is because they may contain pointers to
9546
the internal data recording symbols and data types, which are part of
9547
the old symbol table data being discarded inside @value{GDBN}.
9548
 
9549
@code{symbol-file} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after
9550
executing it once.
9551
 
9552
When @value{GDBN} is configured for a particular environment, it
9553
understands debugging information in whatever format is the standard
9554
generated for that environment; you may use either a @sc{gnu} compiler, or
9555
other compilers that adhere to the local conventions.
9556
Best results are usually obtained from @sc{gnu} compilers; for example,
9557
using @code{@value{GCC}} you can generate debugging information for
9558
optimized code.
9559
 
9560
For most kinds of object files, with the exception of old SVR3 systems
9561
using COFF, the @code{symbol-file} command does not normally read the
9562
symbol table in full right away.  Instead, it scans the symbol table
9563
quickly to find which source files and which symbols are present.  The
9564
details are read later, one source file at a time, as they are needed.
9565
 
9566
The purpose of this two-stage reading strategy is to make @value{GDBN}
9567
start up faster.  For the most part, it is invisible except for
9568
occasional pauses while the symbol table details for a particular source
9569
file are being read.  (The @code{set verbose} command can turn these
9570
pauses into messages if desired.  @xref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional
9571
warnings and messages}.)
9572
 
9573
We have not implemented the two-stage strategy for COFF yet.  When the
9574
symbol table is stored in COFF format, @code{symbol-file} reads the
9575
symbol table data in full right away.  Note that ``stabs-in-COFF''
9576
still does the two-stage strategy, since the debug info is actually
9577
in stabs format.
9578
 
9579
@kindex readnow
9580
@cindex reading symbols immediately
9581
@cindex symbols, reading immediately
9582
@kindex mapped
9583
@cindex memory-mapped symbol file
9584
@cindex saving symbol table
9585
@item symbol-file @var{filename} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
9586
@itemx file @var{filename} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
9587
You can override the @value{GDBN} two-stage strategy for reading symbol
9588
tables by using the @samp{-readnow} option with any of the commands that
9589
load symbol table information, if you want to be sure @value{GDBN} has the
9590
entire symbol table available.
9591
 
9592
If memory-mapped files are available on your system through the
9593
@code{mmap} system call, you can use another option, @samp{-mapped}, to
9594
cause @value{GDBN} to write the symbols for your program into a reusable
9595
file.  Future @value{GDBN} debugging sessions map in symbol information
9596
from this auxiliary symbol file (if the program has not changed), rather
9597
than spending time reading the symbol table from the executable
9598
program.  Using the @samp{-mapped} option has the same effect as
9599
starting @value{GDBN} with the @samp{-mapped} command-line option.
9600
 
9601
You can use both options together, to make sure the auxiliary symbol
9602
file has all the symbol information for your program.
9603
 
9604
The auxiliary symbol file for a program called @var{myprog} is called
9605
@samp{@var{myprog}.syms}.  Once this file exists (so long as it is newer
9606
than the corresponding executable), @value{GDBN} always attempts to use
9607
it when you debug @var{myprog}; no special options or commands are
9608
needed.
9609
 
9610
The @file{.syms} file is specific to the host machine where you run
9611
@value{GDBN}.  It holds an exact image of the internal @value{GDBN}
9612
symbol table.  It cannot be shared across multiple host platforms.
9613
 
9614
@c FIXME: for now no mention of directories, since this seems to be in
9615
@c flux.  13mar1992 status is that in theory GDB would look either in
9616
@c current dir or in same dir as myprog; but issues like competing
9617
@c GDB's, or clutter in system dirs, mean that in practice right now
9618
@c only current dir is used.  FFish says maybe a special GDB hierarchy
9619
@c (eg rooted in val of env var GDBSYMS) could exist for mappable symbol
9620
@c files.
9621
 
9622
@kindex core
9623
@kindex core-file
9624
@item core-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
9625
Specify the whereabouts of a core dump file to be used as the ``contents
9626
of memory''.  Traditionally, core files contain only some parts of the
9627
address space of the process that generated them; @value{GDBN} can access the
9628
executable file itself for other parts.
9629
 
9630
@code{core-file} with no argument specifies that no core file is
9631
to be used.
9632
 
9633
Note that the core file is ignored when your program is actually running
9634
under @value{GDBN}.  So, if you have been running your program and you
9635
wish to debug a core file instead, you must kill the subprocess in which
9636
the program is running.  To do this, use the @code{kill} command
9637
(@pxref{Kill Process, ,Killing the child process}).
9638
 
9639
@kindex add-symbol-file
9640
@cindex dynamic linking
9641
@item add-symbol-file @var{filename} @var{address}
9642
@itemx add-symbol-file @var{filename} @var{address} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
9643
@itemx add-symbol-file @var{filename} @r{-s}@var{section} @var{address} @dots{}
9644
The @code{add-symbol-file} command reads additional symbol table
9645
information from the file @var{filename}.  You would use this command
9646
when @var{filename} has been dynamically loaded (by some other means)
9647
into the program that is running.  @var{address} should be the memory
9648
address at which the file has been loaded; @value{GDBN} cannot figure
9649
this out for itself.  You can additionally specify an arbitrary number
9650
of @samp{@r{-s}@var{section} @var{address}} pairs, to give an explicit
9651
section name and base address for that section.  You can specify any
9652
@var{address} as an expression.
9653
 
9654
The symbol table of the file @var{filename} is added to the symbol table
9655
originally read with the @code{symbol-file} command.  You can use the
9656
@code{add-symbol-file} command any number of times; the new symbol data
9657
thus read keeps adding to the old.  To discard all old symbol data
9658
instead, use the @code{symbol-file} command without any arguments.
9659
 
9660
@cindex relocatable object files, reading symbols from
9661
@cindex object files, relocatable, reading symbols from
9662
@cindex reading symbols from relocatable object files
9663
@cindex symbols, reading from relocatable object files
9664
@cindex @file{.o} files, reading symbols from
9665
Although @var{filename} is typically a shared library file, an
9666
executable file, or some other object file which has been fully
9667
relocated for loading into a process, you can also load symbolic
9668
information from relocatable @file{.o} files, as long as:
9669
 
9670
@itemize @bullet
9671
@item
9672
the file's symbolic information refers only to linker symbols defined in
9673
that file, not to symbols defined by other object files,
9674
@item
9675
every section the file's symbolic information refers to has actually
9676
been loaded into the inferior, as it appears in the file, and
9677
@item
9678
you can determine the address at which every section was loaded, and
9679
provide these to the @code{add-symbol-file} command.
9680
@end itemize
9681
 
9682
@noindent
9683
Some embedded operating systems, like Sun Chorus and VxWorks, can load
9684
relocatable files into an already running program; such systems
9685
typically make the requirements above easy to meet.  However, it's
9686
important to recognize that many native systems use complex link
9687
procedures (@code{.linkonce} section factoring and C++ constructor table
9688
assembly, for example) that make the requirements difficult to meet.  In
9689
general, one cannot assume that using @code{add-symbol-file} to read a
9690
relocatable object file's symbolic information will have the same effect
9691
as linking the relocatable object file into the program in the normal
9692
way.
9693
 
9694
@code{add-symbol-file} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} after using it.
9695
 
9696
You can use the @samp{-mapped} and @samp{-readnow} options just as with
9697
the @code{symbol-file} command, to change how @value{GDBN} manages the symbol
9698
table information for @var{filename}.
9699
 
9700
@kindex add-shared-symbol-file
9701
@item add-shared-symbol-file
9702
The @code{add-shared-symbol-file} command can be used only under Harris' CXUX
9703
operating system for the Motorola 88k.  @value{GDBN} automatically looks for
9704
shared libraries, however if @value{GDBN} does not find yours, you can run
9705
@code{add-shared-symbol-file}.  It takes no arguments.
9706
 
9707
@kindex section
9708
@item section
9709
The @code{section} command changes the base address of section SECTION of
9710
the exec file to ADDR.  This can be used if the exec file does not contain
9711
section addresses, (such as in the a.out format), or when the addresses
9712
specified in the file itself are wrong.  Each section must be changed
9713
separately.  The @code{info files} command, described below, lists all
9714
the sections and their addresses.
9715
 
9716
@kindex info files
9717
@kindex info target
9718
@item info files
9719
@itemx info target
9720
@code{info files} and @code{info target} are synonymous; both print the
9721
current target (@pxref{Targets, ,Specifying a Debugging Target}),
9722
including the names of the executable and core dump files currently in
9723
use by @value{GDBN}, and the files from which symbols were loaded.  The
9724
command @code{help target} lists all possible targets rather than
9725
current ones.
9726
 
9727
@kindex maint info sections
9728
@item maint info sections
9729
Another command that can give you extra information about program sections
9730
is @code{maint info sections}.  In addition to the section information
9731
displayed by @code{info files}, this command displays the flags and file
9732
offset of each section in the executable and core dump files.  In addition,
9733
@code{maint info sections} provides the following command options (which
9734
may be arbitrarily combined):
9735
 
9736
@table @code
9737
@item ALLOBJ
9738
Display sections for all loaded object files, including shared libraries.
9739
@item @var{sections}
9740
Display info only for named @var{sections}.
9741
@item @var{section-flags}
9742
Display info only for sections for which @var{section-flags} are true.
9743
The section flags that @value{GDBN} currently knows about are:
9744
@table @code
9745
@item ALLOC
9746
Section will have space allocated in the process when loaded.
9747
Set for all sections except those containing debug information.
9748
@item LOAD
9749
Section will be loaded from the file into the child process memory.
9750
Set for pre-initialized code and data, clear for @code{.bss} sections.
9751
@item RELOC
9752
Section needs to be relocated before loading.
9753
@item READONLY
9754
Section cannot be modified by the child process.
9755
@item CODE
9756
Section contains executable code only.
9757
@item DATA
9758
Section contains data only (no executable code).
9759
@item ROM
9760
Section will reside in ROM.
9761
@item CONSTRUCTOR
9762
Section contains data for constructor/destructor lists.
9763
@item HAS_CONTENTS
9764
Section is not empty.
9765
@item NEVER_LOAD
9766
An instruction to the linker to not output the section.
9767
@item COFF_SHARED_LIBRARY
9768
A notification to the linker that the section contains
9769
COFF shared library information.
9770
@item IS_COMMON
9771
Section contains common symbols.
9772
@end table
9773
@end table
9774
@kindex set trust-readonly-sections
9775
@item set trust-readonly-sections on
9776
Tell @value{GDBN} that readonly sections in your object file
9777
really are read-only (i.e.@: that their contents will not change).
9778
In that case, @value{GDBN} can fetch values from these sections
9779
out of the object file, rather than from the target program.
9780
For some targets (notably embedded ones), this can be a significant
9781
enhancement to debugging performance.
9782
 
9783
The default is off.
9784
 
9785
@item set trust-readonly-sections off
9786
Tell @value{GDBN} not to trust readonly sections.  This means that
9787
the contents of the section might change while the program is running,
9788
and must therefore be fetched from the target when needed.
9789
@end table
9790
 
9791
All file-specifying commands allow both absolute and relative file names
9792
as arguments.  @value{GDBN} always converts the file name to an absolute file
9793
name and remembers it that way.
9794
 
9795
@cindex shared libraries
9796
@value{GDBN} supports HP-UX, SunOS, SVr4, Irix 5, and IBM RS/6000 shared
9797
libraries.
9798
 
9799
@value{GDBN} automatically loads symbol definitions from shared libraries
9800
when you use the @code{run} command, or when you examine a core file.
9801
(Before you issue the @code{run} command, @value{GDBN} does not understand
9802
references to a function in a shared library, however---unless you are
9803
debugging a core file).
9804
 
9805
On HP-UX, if the program loads a library explicitly, @value{GDBN}
9806
automatically loads the symbols at the time of the @code{shl_load} call.
9807
 
9808
@c FIXME: some @value{GDBN} release may permit some refs to undef
9809
@c FIXME...symbols---eg in a break cmd---assuming they are from a shared
9810
@c FIXME...lib; check this from time to time when updating manual
9811
 
9812
There are times, however, when you may wish to not automatically load
9813
symbol definitions from shared libraries, such as when they are
9814
particularly large or there are many of them.
9815
 
9816
To control the automatic loading of shared library symbols, use the
9817
commands:
9818
 
9819
@table @code
9820
@kindex set auto-solib-add
9821
@item set auto-solib-add @var{mode}
9822
If @var{mode} is @code{on}, symbols from all shared object libraries
9823
will be loaded automatically when the inferior begins execution, you
9824
attach to an independently started inferior, or when the dynamic linker
9825
informs @value{GDBN} that a new library has been loaded.  If @var{mode}
9826
is @code{off}, symbols must be loaded manually, using the
9827
@code{sharedlibrary} command.  The default value is @code{on}.
9828
 
9829
@kindex show auto-solib-add
9830
@item show auto-solib-add
9831
Display the current autoloading mode.
9832
@end table
9833
 
9834
To explicitly load shared library symbols, use the @code{sharedlibrary}
9835
command:
9836
 
9837
@table @code
9838
@kindex info sharedlibrary
9839
@kindex info share
9840
@item info share
9841
@itemx info sharedlibrary
9842
Print the names of the shared libraries which are currently loaded.
9843
 
9844
@kindex sharedlibrary
9845
@kindex share
9846
@item sharedlibrary @var{regex}
9847
@itemx share @var{regex}
9848
Load shared object library symbols for files matching a
9849
Unix regular expression.
9850
As with files loaded automatically, it only loads shared libraries
9851
required by your program for a core file or after typing @code{run}.  If
9852
@var{regex} is omitted all shared libraries required by your program are
9853
loaded.
9854
@end table
9855
 
9856
On some systems, such as HP-UX systems, @value{GDBN} supports
9857
autoloading shared library symbols until a limiting threshold size is
9858
reached.  This provides the benefit of allowing autoloading to remain on
9859
by default, but avoids autoloading excessively large shared libraries,
9860
up to a threshold that is initially set, but which you can modify if you
9861
wish.
9862
 
9863
Beyond that threshold, symbols from shared libraries must be explicitly
9864
loaded.  To load these symbols, use the command @code{sharedlibrary
9865
@var{filename}}.  The base address of the shared library is determined
9866
automatically by @value{GDBN} and need not be specified.
9867
 
9868
To display or set the threshold, use the commands:
9869
 
9870
@table @code
9871
@kindex set auto-solib-limit
9872
@item set auto-solib-limit @var{threshold}
9873
Set the autoloading size threshold, in an integral number of megabytes.
9874
If @var{threshold} is nonzero and shared library autoloading is enabled,
9875
symbols from all shared object libraries will be loaded until the total
9876
size of the loaded shared library symbols exceeds this threshold.
9877
Otherwise, symbols must be loaded manually, using the
9878
@code{sharedlibrary} command.  The default threshold is 100 (i.e.@: 100
9879
Mb).
9880
 
9881
@kindex show auto-solib-limit
9882
@item show auto-solib-limit
9883
Display the current autoloading size threshold, in megabytes.
9884
@end table
9885
 
9886
@node Symbol Errors
9887
@section Errors reading symbol files
9888
 
9889
While reading a symbol file, @value{GDBN} occasionally encounters problems,
9890
such as symbol types it does not recognize, or known bugs in compiler
9891
output.  By default, @value{GDBN} does not notify you of such problems, since
9892
they are relatively common and primarily of interest to people
9893
debugging compilers.  If you are interested in seeing information
9894
about ill-constructed symbol tables, you can either ask @value{GDBN} to print
9895
only one message about each such type of problem, no matter how many
9896
times the problem occurs; or you can ask @value{GDBN} to print more messages,
9897
to see how many times the problems occur, with the @code{set
9898
complaints} command (@pxref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and
9899
messages}).
9900
 
9901
The messages currently printed, and their meanings, include:
9902
 
9903
@table @code
9904
@item inner block not inside outer block in @var{symbol}
9905
 
9906
The symbol information shows where symbol scopes begin and end
9907
(such as at the start of a function or a block of statements).  This
9908
error indicates that an inner scope block is not fully contained
9909
in its outer scope blocks.
9910
 
9911
@value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by treating the inner block as if it had
9912
the same scope as the outer block.  In the error message, @var{symbol}
9913
may be shown as ``@code{(don't know)}'' if the outer block is not a
9914
function.
9915
 
9916
@item block at @var{address} out of order
9917
 
9918
The symbol information for symbol scope blocks should occur in
9919
order of increasing addresses.  This error indicates that it does not
9920
do so.
9921
 
9922
@value{GDBN} does not circumvent this problem, and has trouble
9923
locating symbols in the source file whose symbols it is reading.  (You
9924
can often determine what source file is affected by specifying
9925
@code{set verbose on}.  @xref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and
9926
messages}.)
9927
 
9928
@item bad block start address patched
9929
 
9930
The symbol information for a symbol scope block has a start address
9931
smaller than the address of the preceding source line.  This is known
9932
to occur in the SunOS 4.1.1 (and earlier) C compiler.
9933
 
9934
@value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by treating the symbol scope block as
9935
starting on the previous source line.
9936
 
9937
@item bad string table offset in symbol @var{n}
9938
 
9939
@cindex foo
9940
Symbol number @var{n} contains a pointer into the string table which is
9941
larger than the size of the string table.
9942
 
9943
@value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by considering the symbol to have the
9944
name @code{foo}, which may cause other problems if many symbols end up
9945
with this name.
9946
 
9947
@item unknown symbol type @code{0x@var{nn}}
9948
 
9949
The symbol information contains new data types that @value{GDBN} does
9950
not yet know how to read.  @code{0x@var{nn}} is the symbol type of the
9951
uncomprehended information, in hexadecimal.
9952
 
9953
@value{GDBN} circumvents the error by ignoring this symbol information.
9954
This usually allows you to debug your program, though certain symbols
9955
are not accessible.  If you encounter such a problem and feel like
9956
debugging it, you can debug @code{@value{GDBP}} with itself, breakpoint
9957
on @code{complain}, then go up to the function @code{read_dbx_symtab}
9958
and examine @code{*bufp} to see the symbol.
9959
 
9960
@item stub type has NULL name
9961
 
9962
@value{GDBN} could not find the full definition for a struct or class.
9963
 
9964
@item const/volatile indicator missing (ok if using g++ v1.x), got@dots{}
9965
The symbol information for a C@t{++} member function is missing some
9966
information that recent versions of the compiler should have output for
9967
it.
9968
 
9969
@item info mismatch between compiler and debugger
9970
 
9971
@value{GDBN} could not parse a type specification output by the compiler.
9972
 
9973
@end table
9974
 
9975
@node Targets
9976
@chapter Specifying a Debugging Target
9977
 
9978
@cindex debugging target
9979
@kindex target
9980
 
9981
A @dfn{target} is the execution environment occupied by your program.
9982
 
9983
Often, @value{GDBN} runs in the same host environment as your program;
9984
in that case, the debugging target is specified as a side effect when
9985
you use the @code{file} or @code{core} commands.  When you need more
9986
flexibility---for example, running @value{GDBN} on a physically separate
9987
host, or controlling a standalone system over a serial port or a
9988
realtime system over a TCP/IP connection---you can use the @code{target}
9989
command to specify one of the target types configured for @value{GDBN}
9990
(@pxref{Target Commands, ,Commands for managing targets}).
9991
 
9992
@menu
9993
* Active Targets::              Active targets
9994
* Target Commands::             Commands for managing targets
9995
* Byte Order::                  Choosing target byte order
9996
* Remote::                      Remote debugging
9997
* KOD::                         Kernel Object Display
9998
 
9999
@end menu
10000
 
10001
@node Active Targets
10002
@section Active targets
10003
 
10004
@cindex stacking targets
10005
@cindex active targets
10006
@cindex multiple targets
10007
 
10008
There are three classes of targets: processes, core files, and
10009
executable files.  @value{GDBN} can work concurrently on up to three
10010
active targets, one in each class.  This allows you to (for example)
10011
start a process and inspect its activity without abandoning your work on
10012
a core file.
10013
 
10014
For example, if you execute @samp{gdb a.out}, then the executable file
10015
@code{a.out} is the only active target.  If you designate a core file as
10016
well---presumably from a prior run that crashed and coredumped---then
10017
@value{GDBN} has two active targets and uses them in tandem, looking
10018
first in the corefile target, then in the executable file, to satisfy
10019
requests for memory addresses.  (Typically, these two classes of target
10020
are complementary, since core files contain only a program's
10021
read-write memory---variables and so on---plus machine status, while
10022
executable files contain only the program text and initialized data.)
10023
 
10024
When you type @code{run}, your executable file becomes an active process
10025
target as well.  When a process target is active, all @value{GDBN}
10026
commands requesting memory addresses refer to that target; addresses in
10027
an active core file or executable file target are obscured while the
10028
process target is active.
10029
 
10030
Use the @code{core-file} and @code{exec-file} commands to select a new
10031
core file or executable target (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify
10032
files}).  To specify as a target a process that is already running, use
10033
the @code{attach} command (@pxref{Attach, ,Debugging an already-running
10034
process}).
10035
 
10036
@node Target Commands
10037
@section Commands for managing targets
10038
 
10039
@table @code
10040
@item target @var{type} @var{parameters}
10041
Connects the @value{GDBN} host environment to a target machine or
10042
process.  A target is typically a protocol for talking to debugging
10043
facilities.  You use the argument @var{type} to specify the type or
10044
protocol of the target machine.
10045
 
10046
Further @var{parameters} are interpreted by the target protocol, but
10047
typically include things like device names or host names to connect
10048
with, process numbers, and baud rates.
10049
 
10050
The @code{target} command does not repeat if you press @key{RET} again
10051
after executing the command.
10052
 
10053
@kindex help target
10054
@item help target
10055
Displays the names of all targets available.  To display targets
10056
currently selected, use either @code{info target} or @code{info files}
10057
(@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
10058
 
10059
@item help target @var{name}
10060
Describe a particular target, including any parameters necessary to
10061
select it.
10062
 
10063
@kindex set gnutarget
10064
@item set gnutarget @var{args}
10065
@value{GDBN} uses its own library BFD to read your files.  @value{GDBN}
10066
knows whether it is reading an @dfn{executable},
10067
a @dfn{core}, or a @dfn{.o} file; however, you can specify the file format
10068
with the @code{set gnutarget} command.  Unlike most @code{target} commands,
10069
with @code{gnutarget} the @code{target} refers to a program, not a machine.
10070
 
10071
@quotation
10072
@emph{Warning:} To specify a file format with @code{set gnutarget},
10073
you must know the actual BFD name.
10074
@end quotation
10075
 
10076
@noindent
10077
@xref{Files, , Commands to specify files}.
10078
 
10079
@kindex show gnutarget
10080
@item show gnutarget
10081
Use the @code{show gnutarget} command to display what file format
10082
@code{gnutarget} is set to read.  If you have not set @code{gnutarget},
10083
@value{GDBN} will determine the file format for each file automatically,
10084
and @code{show gnutarget} displays @samp{The current BDF target is "auto"}.
10085
@end table
10086
 
10087
Here are some common targets (available, or not, depending on the GDB
10088
configuration):
10089
 
10090
@table @code
10091
@kindex target exec
10092
@item target exec @var{program}
10093
An executable file.  @samp{target exec @var{program}} is the same as
10094
@samp{exec-file @var{program}}.
10095
 
10096
@kindex target core
10097
@item target core @var{filename}
10098
A core dump file.  @samp{target core @var{filename}} is the same as
10099
@samp{core-file @var{filename}}.
10100
 
10101
@kindex target remote
10102
@item target remote @var{dev}
10103
Remote serial target in GDB-specific protocol.  The argument @var{dev}
10104
specifies what serial device to use for the connection (e.g.
10105
@file{/dev/ttya}). @xref{Remote, ,Remote debugging}.  @code{target remote}
10106
supports the @code{load} command.  This is only useful if you have
10107
some other way of getting the stub to the target system, and you can put
10108
it somewhere in memory where it won't get clobbered by the download.
10109
 
10110
@kindex target sim
10111
@item target sim
10112
Builtin CPU simulator.  @value{GDBN} includes simulators for most architectures.
10113
In general,
10114
@smallexample
10115
        target sim
10116
        load
10117
        run
10118
@end smallexample
10119
@noindent
10120
works; however, you cannot assume that a specific memory map, device
10121
drivers, or even basic I/O is available, although some simulators do
10122
provide these.  For info about any processor-specific simulator details,
10123
see the appropriate section in @ref{Embedded Processors, ,Embedded
10124
Processors}.
10125
 
10126
@end table
10127
 
10128
Some configurations may include these targets as well:
10129
 
10130
@table @code
10131
 
10132
@kindex target nrom
10133
@item target nrom @var{dev}
10134
NetROM ROM emulator.  This target only supports downloading.
10135
 
10136
@end table
10137
 
10138
Different targets are available on different configurations of @value{GDBN};
10139
your configuration may have more or fewer targets.
10140
 
10141
Many remote targets require you to download the executable's code
10142
once you've successfully established a connection.
10143
 
10144
@table @code
10145
 
10146
@kindex load @var{filename}
10147
@item load @var{filename}
10148
Depending on what remote debugging facilities are configured into
10149
@value{GDBN}, the @code{load} command may be available.  Where it exists, it
10150
is meant to make @var{filename} (an executable) available for debugging
10151
on the remote system---by downloading, or dynamic linking, for example.
10152
@code{load} also records the @var{filename} symbol table in @value{GDBN}, like
10153
the @code{add-symbol-file} command.
10154
 
10155
If your @value{GDBN} does not have a @code{load} command, attempting to
10156
execute it gets the error message ``@code{You can't do that when your
10157
target is @dots{}}''
10158
 
10159
The file is loaded at whatever address is specified in the executable.
10160
For some object file formats, you can specify the load address when you
10161
link the program; for other formats, like a.out, the object file format
10162
specifies a fixed address.
10163
@c FIXME! This would be a good place for an xref to the GNU linker doc.
10164
 
10165
@code{load} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after using it.
10166
@end table
10167
 
10168
@node Byte Order
10169
@section Choosing target byte order
10170
 
10171
@cindex choosing target byte order
10172
@cindex target byte order
10173
 
10174
Some types of processors, such as the MIPS, PowerPC, and Hitachi SH,
10175
offer the ability to run either big-endian or little-endian byte
10176
orders.  Usually the executable or symbol will include a bit to
10177
designate the endian-ness, and you will not need to worry about
10178
which to use.  However, you may still find it useful to adjust
10179
@value{GDBN}'s idea of processor endian-ness manually.
10180
 
10181
@table @code
10182
@kindex set endian big
10183
@item set endian big
10184
Instruct @value{GDBN} to assume the target is big-endian.
10185
 
10186
@kindex set endian little
10187
@item set endian little
10188
Instruct @value{GDBN} to assume the target is little-endian.
10189
 
10190
@kindex set endian auto
10191
@item set endian auto
10192
Instruct @value{GDBN} to use the byte order associated with the
10193
executable.
10194
 
10195
@item show endian
10196
Display @value{GDBN}'s current idea of the target byte order.
10197
 
10198
@end table
10199
 
10200
Note that these commands merely adjust interpretation of symbolic
10201
data on the host, and that they have absolutely no effect on the
10202
target system.
10203
 
10204
@node Remote
10205
@section Remote debugging
10206
@cindex remote debugging
10207
 
10208
If you are trying to debug a program running on a machine that cannot run
10209
@value{GDBN} in the usual way, it is often useful to use remote debugging.
10210
For example, you might use remote debugging on an operating system kernel,
10211
or on a small system which does not have a general purpose operating system
10212
powerful enough to run a full-featured debugger.
10213
 
10214
Some configurations of @value{GDBN} have special serial or TCP/IP interfaces
10215
to make this work with particular debugging targets.  In addition,
10216
@value{GDBN} comes with a generic serial protocol (specific to @value{GDBN},
10217
but not specific to any particular target system) which you can use if you
10218
write the remote stubs---the code that runs on the remote system to
10219
communicate with @value{GDBN}.
10220
 
10221
Other remote targets may be available in your
10222
configuration of @value{GDBN}; use @code{help target} to list them.
10223
 
10224
@node KOD
10225
@section Kernel Object Display
10226
 
10227
@cindex kernel object display
10228
@cindex kernel object
10229
@cindex KOD
10230
 
10231
Some targets support kernel object display.  Using this facility,
10232
@value{GDBN} communicates specially with the underlying operating system
10233
and can display information about operating system-level objects such as
10234
mutexes and other synchronization objects.  Exactly which objects can be
10235
displayed is determined on a per-OS basis.
10236
 
10237
Use the @code{set os} command to set the operating system.  This tells
10238
@value{GDBN} which kernel object display module to initialize:
10239
 
10240
@smallexample
10241
(@value{GDBP}) set os cisco
10242
@end smallexample
10243
 
10244
If @code{set os} succeeds, @value{GDBN} will display some information
10245
about the operating system, and will create a new @code{info} command
10246
which can be used to query the target.  The @code{info} command is named
10247
after the operating system:
10248
 
10249
@smallexample
10250
(@value{GDBP}) info cisco
10251
List of Cisco Kernel Objects
10252
Object     Description
10253
any        Any and all objects
10254
@end smallexample
10255
 
10256
Further subcommands can be used to query about particular objects known
10257
by the kernel.
10258
 
10259
There is currently no way to determine whether a given operating system
10260
is supported other than to try it.
10261
 
10262
 
10263
@node Remote Debugging
10264
@chapter Debugging remote programs
10265
 
10266
@menu
10267
* Server::                      Using the gdbserver program
10268
* NetWare::                     Using the gdbserve.nlm program
10269
* remote stub::                 Implementing a remote stub
10270
@end menu
10271
 
10272
@node Server
10273
@section Using the @code{gdbserver} program
10274
 
10275
@kindex gdbserver
10276
@cindex remote connection without stubs
10277
@code{gdbserver} is a control program for Unix-like systems, which
10278
allows you to connect your program with a remote @value{GDBN} via
10279
@code{target remote}---but without linking in the usual debugging stub.
10280
 
10281
@code{gdbserver} is not a complete replacement for the debugging stubs,
10282
because it requires essentially the same operating-system facilities
10283
that @value{GDBN} itself does.  In fact, a system that can run
10284
@code{gdbserver} to connect to a remote @value{GDBN} could also run
10285
@value{GDBN} locally!  @code{gdbserver} is sometimes useful nevertheless,
10286
because it is a much smaller program than @value{GDBN} itself.  It is
10287
also easier to port than all of @value{GDBN}, so you may be able to get
10288
started more quickly on a new system by using @code{gdbserver}.
10289
Finally, if you develop code for real-time systems, you may find that
10290
the tradeoffs involved in real-time operation make it more convenient to
10291
do as much development work as possible on another system, for example
10292
by cross-compiling.  You can use @code{gdbserver} to make a similar
10293
choice for debugging.
10294
 
10295
@value{GDBN} and @code{gdbserver} communicate via either a serial line
10296
or a TCP connection, using the standard @value{GDBN} remote serial
10297
protocol.
10298
 
10299
@table @emph
10300
@item On the target machine,
10301
you need to have a copy of the program you want to debug.
10302
@code{gdbserver} does not need your program's symbol table, so you can
10303
strip the program if necessary to save space.  @value{GDBN} on the host
10304
system does all the symbol handling.
10305
 
10306
To use the server, you must tell it how to communicate with @value{GDBN};
10307
the name of your program; and the arguments for your program.  The usual
10308
syntax is:
10309
 
10310
@smallexample
10311
target> gdbserver @var{comm} @var{program} [ @var{args} @dots{} ]
10312
@end smallexample
10313
 
10314
@var{comm} is either a device name (to use a serial line) or a TCP
10315
hostname and portnumber.  For example, to debug Emacs with the argument
10316
@samp{foo.txt} and communicate with @value{GDBN} over the serial port
10317
@file{/dev/com1}:
10318
 
10319
@smallexample
10320
target> gdbserver /dev/com1 emacs foo.txt
10321
@end smallexample
10322
 
10323
@code{gdbserver} waits passively for the host @value{GDBN} to communicate
10324
with it.
10325
 
10326
To use a TCP connection instead of a serial line:
10327
 
10328
@smallexample
10329
target> gdbserver host:2345 emacs foo.txt
10330
@end smallexample
10331
 
10332
The only difference from the previous example is the first argument,
10333
specifying that you are communicating with the host @value{GDBN} via
10334
TCP.  The @samp{host:2345} argument means that @code{gdbserver} is to
10335
expect a TCP connection from machine @samp{host} to local TCP port 2345.
10336
(Currently, the @samp{host} part is ignored.)  You can choose any number
10337
you want for the port number as long as it does not conflict with any
10338
TCP ports already in use on the target system (for example, @code{23} is
10339
reserved for @code{telnet}).@footnote{If you choose a port number that
10340
conflicts with another service, @code{gdbserver} prints an error message
10341
and exits.}  You must use the same port number with the host @value{GDBN}
10342
@code{target remote} command.
10343
 
10344
On some targets, @code{gdbserver} can also attach to running programs.
10345
This is accomplished via the @code{--attach} argument.  The syntax is:
10346
 
10347
@smallexample
10348
target> gdbserver @var{comm} --attach @var{pid}
10349
@end smallexample
10350
 
10351
@var{pid} is the process ID of a currently running process.  It isn't necessary
10352
to point @code{gdbserver} at a binary for the running process.
10353
 
10354
@item On the @value{GDBN} host machine,
10355
you need an unstripped copy of your program, since @value{GDBN} needs
10356
symbols and debugging information.  Start up @value{GDBN} as usual,
10357
using the name of the local copy of your program as the first argument.
10358
(You may also need the @w{@samp{--baud}} option if the serial line is
10359
running at anything other than 9600@dmn{bps}.)  After that, use @code{target
10360
remote} to establish communications with @code{gdbserver}.  Its argument
10361
is either a device name (usually a serial device, like
10362
@file{/dev/ttyb}), or a TCP port descriptor in the form
10363
@code{@var{host}:@var{PORT}}.  For example:
10364
 
10365
@smallexample
10366
(@value{GDBP}) target remote /dev/ttyb
10367
@end smallexample
10368
 
10369
@noindent
10370
communicates with the server via serial line @file{/dev/ttyb}, and
10371
 
10372
@smallexample
10373
(@value{GDBP}) target remote the-target:2345
10374
@end smallexample
10375
 
10376
@noindent
10377
communicates via a TCP connection to port 2345 on host @w{@file{the-target}}.
10378
For TCP connections, you must start up @code{gdbserver} prior to using
10379
the @code{target remote} command.  Otherwise you may get an error whose
10380
text depends on the host system, but which usually looks something like
10381
@samp{Connection refused}.
10382
@end table
10383
 
10384
@node NetWare
10385
@section Using the @code{gdbserve.nlm} program
10386
 
10387
@kindex gdbserve.nlm
10388
@code{gdbserve.nlm} is a control program for NetWare systems, which
10389
allows you to connect your program with a remote @value{GDBN} via
10390
@code{target remote}.
10391
 
10392
@value{GDBN} and @code{gdbserve.nlm} communicate via a serial line,
10393
using the standard @value{GDBN} remote serial protocol.
10394
 
10395
@table @emph
10396
@item On the target machine,
10397
you need to have a copy of the program you want to debug.
10398
@code{gdbserve.nlm} does not need your program's symbol table, so you
10399
can strip the program if necessary to save space.  @value{GDBN} on the
10400
host system does all the symbol handling.
10401
 
10402
To use the server, you must tell it how to communicate with
10403
@value{GDBN}; the name of your program; and the arguments for your
10404
program.  The syntax is:
10405
 
10406
@smallexample
10407
load gdbserve [ BOARD=@var{board} ] [ PORT=@var{port} ]
10408
              [ BAUD=@var{baud} ] @var{program} [ @var{args} @dots{} ]
10409
@end smallexample
10410
 
10411
@var{board} and @var{port} specify the serial line; @var{baud} specifies
10412
the baud rate used by the connection.  @var{port} and @var{node} default
10413
to 0, @var{baud} defaults to 9600@dmn{bps}.
10414
 
10415
For example, to debug Emacs with the argument @samp{foo.txt}and
10416
communicate with @value{GDBN} over serial port number 2 or board 1
10417
using a 19200@dmn{bps} connection:
10418
 
10419
@smallexample
10420
load gdbserve BOARD=1 PORT=2 BAUD=19200 emacs foo.txt
10421
@end smallexample
10422
 
10423
@item On the @value{GDBN} host machine,
10424
you need an unstripped copy of your program, since @value{GDBN} needs
10425
symbols and debugging information.  Start up @value{GDBN} as usual,
10426
using the name of the local copy of your program as the first argument.
10427
(You may also need the @w{@samp{--baud}} option if the serial line is
10428
running at anything other than 9600@dmn{bps}.  After that, use @code{target
10429
remote} to establish communications with @code{gdbserve.nlm}.  Its
10430
argument is a device name (usually a serial device, like
10431
@file{/dev/ttyb}).  For example:
10432
 
10433
@smallexample
10434
(@value{GDBP}) target remote /dev/ttyb
10435
@end smallexample
10436
 
10437
@noindent
10438
communications with the server via serial line @file{/dev/ttyb}.
10439
@end table
10440
 
10441
@node remote stub
10442
@section Implementing a remote stub
10443
 
10444
@cindex debugging stub, example
10445
@cindex remote stub, example
10446
@cindex stub example, remote debugging
10447
The stub files provided with @value{GDBN} implement the target side of the
10448
communication protocol, and the @value{GDBN} side is implemented in the
10449
@value{GDBN} source file @file{remote.c}.  Normally, you can simply allow
10450
these subroutines to communicate, and ignore the details.  (If you're
10451
implementing your own stub file, you can still ignore the details: start
10452
with one of the existing stub files.  @file{sparc-stub.c} is the best
10453
organized, and therefore the easiest to read.)
10454
 
10455
@cindex remote serial debugging, overview
10456
To debug a program running on another machine (the debugging
10457
@dfn{target} machine), you must first arrange for all the usual
10458
prerequisites for the program to run by itself.  For example, for a C
10459
program, you need:
10460
 
10461
@enumerate
10462
@item
10463
A startup routine to set up the C runtime environment; these usually
10464
have a name like @file{crt0}.  The startup routine may be supplied by
10465
your hardware supplier, or you may have to write your own.
10466
 
10467
@item
10468
A C subroutine library to support your program's
10469
subroutine calls, notably managing input and output.
10470
 
10471
@item
10472
A way of getting your program to the other machine---for example, a
10473
download program.  These are often supplied by the hardware
10474
manufacturer, but you may have to write your own from hardware
10475
documentation.
10476
@end enumerate
10477
 
10478
The next step is to arrange for your program to use a serial port to
10479
communicate with the machine where @value{GDBN} is running (the @dfn{host}
10480
machine).  In general terms, the scheme looks like this:
10481
 
10482
@table @emph
10483
@item On the host,
10484
@value{GDBN} already understands how to use this protocol; when everything
10485
else is set up, you can simply use the @samp{target remote} command
10486
(@pxref{Targets,,Specifying a Debugging Target}).
10487
 
10488
@item On the target,
10489
you must link with your program a few special-purpose subroutines that
10490
implement the @value{GDBN} remote serial protocol.  The file containing these
10491
subroutines is called  a @dfn{debugging stub}.
10492
 
10493
On certain remote targets, you can use an auxiliary program
10494
@code{gdbserver} instead of linking a stub into your program.
10495
@xref{Server,,Using the @code{gdbserver} program}, for details.
10496
@end table
10497
 
10498
The debugging stub is specific to the architecture of the remote
10499
machine; for example, use @file{sparc-stub.c} to debug programs on
10500
@sc{sparc} boards.
10501
 
10502
@cindex remote serial stub list
10503
These working remote stubs are distributed with @value{GDBN}:
10504
 
10505
@table @code
10506
 
10507
@item i386-stub.c
10508
@cindex @file{i386-stub.c}
10509
@cindex Intel
10510
@cindex i386
10511
For Intel 386 and compatible architectures.
10512
 
10513
@item m68k-stub.c
10514
@cindex @file{m68k-stub.c}
10515
@cindex Motorola 680x0
10516
@cindex m680x0
10517
For Motorola 680x0 architectures.
10518
 
10519
@item sh-stub.c
10520
@cindex @file{sh-stub.c}
10521
@cindex Hitachi
10522
@cindex SH
10523
For Hitachi SH architectures.
10524
 
10525
@item sparc-stub.c
10526
@cindex @file{sparc-stub.c}
10527
@cindex Sparc
10528
For @sc{sparc} architectures.
10529
 
10530
@item sparcl-stub.c
10531
@cindex @file{sparcl-stub.c}
10532
@cindex Fujitsu
10533
@cindex SparcLite
10534
For Fujitsu @sc{sparclite} architectures.
10535
 
10536
@end table
10537
 
10538
The @file{README} file in the @value{GDBN} distribution may list other
10539
recently added stubs.
10540
 
10541
@menu
10542
* Stub Contents::       What the stub can do for you
10543
* Bootstrapping::       What you must do for the stub
10544
* Debug Session::       Putting it all together
10545
@end menu
10546
 
10547
@node Stub Contents
10548
@subsection What the stub can do for you
10549
 
10550
@cindex remote serial stub
10551
The debugging stub for your architecture supplies these three
10552
subroutines:
10553
 
10554
@table @code
10555
@item set_debug_traps
10556
@kindex set_debug_traps
10557
@cindex remote serial stub, initialization
10558
This routine arranges for @code{handle_exception} to run when your
10559
program stops.  You must call this subroutine explicitly near the
10560
beginning of your program.
10561
 
10562
@item handle_exception
10563
@kindex handle_exception
10564
@cindex remote serial stub, main routine
10565
This is the central workhorse, but your program never calls it
10566
explicitly---the setup code arranges for @code{handle_exception} to
10567
run when a trap is triggered.
10568
 
10569
@code{handle_exception} takes control when your program stops during
10570
execution (for example, on a breakpoint), and mediates communications
10571
with @value{GDBN} on the host machine.  This is where the communications
10572
protocol is implemented; @code{handle_exception} acts as the @value{GDBN}
10573
representative on the target machine.  It begins by sending summary
10574
information on the state of your program, then continues to execute,
10575
retrieving and transmitting any information @value{GDBN} needs, until you
10576
execute a @value{GDBN} command that makes your program resume; at that point,
10577
@code{handle_exception} returns control to your own code on the target
10578
machine.
10579
 
10580
@item breakpoint
10581
@cindex @code{breakpoint} subroutine, remote
10582
Use this auxiliary subroutine to make your program contain a
10583
breakpoint.  Depending on the particular situation, this may be the only
10584
way for @value{GDBN} to get control.  For instance, if your target
10585
machine has some sort of interrupt button, you won't need to call this;
10586
pressing the interrupt button transfers control to
10587
@code{handle_exception}---in effect, to @value{GDBN}.  On some machines,
10588
simply receiving characters on the serial port may also trigger a trap;
10589
again, in that situation, you don't need to call @code{breakpoint} from
10590
your own program---simply running @samp{target remote} from the host
10591
@value{GDBN} session gets control.
10592
 
10593
Call @code{breakpoint} if none of these is true, or if you simply want
10594
to make certain your program stops at a predetermined point for the
10595
start of your debugging session.
10596
@end table
10597
 
10598
@node Bootstrapping
10599
@subsection What you must do for the stub
10600
 
10601
@cindex remote stub, support routines
10602
The debugging stubs that come with @value{GDBN} are set up for a particular
10603
chip architecture, but they have no information about the rest of your
10604
debugging target machine.
10605
 
10606
First of all you need to tell the stub how to communicate with the
10607
serial port.
10608
 
10609
@table @code
10610
@item int getDebugChar()
10611
@kindex getDebugChar
10612
Write this subroutine to read a single character from the serial port.
10613
It may be identical to @code{getchar} for your target system; a
10614
different name is used to allow you to distinguish the two if you wish.
10615
 
10616
@item void putDebugChar(int)
10617
@kindex putDebugChar
10618
Write this subroutine to write a single character to the serial port.
10619
It may be identical to @code{putchar} for your target system; a
10620
different name is used to allow you to distinguish the two if you wish.
10621
@end table
10622
 
10623
@cindex control C, and remote debugging
10624
@cindex interrupting remote targets
10625
If you want @value{GDBN} to be able to stop your program while it is
10626
running, you need to use an interrupt-driven serial driver, and arrange
10627
for it to stop when it receives a @code{^C} (@samp{\003}, the control-C
10628
character).  That is the character which @value{GDBN} uses to tell the
10629
remote system to stop.
10630
 
10631
Getting the debugging target to return the proper status to @value{GDBN}
10632
probably requires changes to the standard stub; one quick and dirty way
10633
is to just execute a breakpoint instruction (the ``dirty'' part is that
10634
@value{GDBN} reports a @code{SIGTRAP} instead of a @code{SIGINT}).
10635
 
10636
Other routines you need to supply are:
10637
 
10638
@table @code
10639
@item void exceptionHandler (int @var{exception_number}, void *@var{exception_address})
10640
@kindex exceptionHandler
10641
Write this function to install @var{exception_address} in the exception
10642
handling tables.  You need to do this because the stub does not have any
10643
way of knowing what the exception handling tables on your target system
10644
are like (for example, the processor's table might be in @sc{rom},
10645
containing entries which point to a table in @sc{ram}).
10646
@var{exception_number} is the exception number which should be changed;
10647
its meaning is architecture-dependent (for example, different numbers
10648
might represent divide by zero, misaligned access, etc).  When this
10649
exception occurs, control should be transferred directly to
10650
@var{exception_address}, and the processor state (stack, registers,
10651
and so on) should be just as it is when a processor exception occurs.  So if
10652
you want to use a jump instruction to reach @var{exception_address}, it
10653
should be a simple jump, not a jump to subroutine.
10654
 
10655
For the 386, @var{exception_address} should be installed as an interrupt
10656
gate so that interrupts are masked while the handler runs.  The gate
10657
should be at privilege level 0 (the most privileged level).  The
10658
@sc{sparc} and 68k stubs are able to mask interrupts themselves without
10659
help from @code{exceptionHandler}.
10660
 
10661
@item void flush_i_cache()
10662
@kindex flush_i_cache
10663
On @sc{sparc} and @sc{sparclite} only, write this subroutine to flush the
10664
instruction cache, if any, on your target machine.  If there is no
10665
instruction cache, this subroutine may be a no-op.
10666
 
10667
On target machines that have instruction caches, @value{GDBN} requires this
10668
function to make certain that the state of your program is stable.
10669
@end table
10670
 
10671
@noindent
10672
You must also make sure this library routine is available:
10673
 
10674
@table @code
10675
@item void *memset(void *, int, int)
10676
@kindex memset
10677
This is the standard library function @code{memset} that sets an area of
10678
memory to a known value.  If you have one of the free versions of
10679
@code{libc.a}, @code{memset} can be found there; otherwise, you must
10680
either obtain it from your hardware manufacturer, or write your own.
10681
@end table
10682
 
10683
If you do not use the GNU C compiler, you may need other standard
10684
library subroutines as well; this varies from one stub to another,
10685
but in general the stubs are likely to use any of the common library
10686
subroutines which @code{@value{GCC}} generates as inline code.
10687
 
10688
 
10689
@node Debug Session
10690
@subsection Putting it all together
10691
 
10692
@cindex remote serial debugging summary
10693
In summary, when your program is ready to debug, you must follow these
10694
steps.
10695
 
10696
@enumerate
10697
@item
10698
Make sure you have defined the supporting low-level routines
10699
(@pxref{Bootstrapping,,What you must do for the stub}):
10700
@display
10701
@code{getDebugChar}, @code{putDebugChar},
10702
@code{flush_i_cache}, @code{memset}, @code{exceptionHandler}.
10703
@end display
10704
 
10705
@item
10706
Insert these lines near the top of your program:
10707
 
10708
@smallexample
10709
set_debug_traps();
10710
breakpoint();
10711
@end smallexample
10712
 
10713
@item
10714
For the 680x0 stub only, you need to provide a variable called
10715
@code{exceptionHook}.  Normally you just use:
10716
 
10717
@smallexample
10718
void (*exceptionHook)() = 0;
10719
@end smallexample
10720
 
10721
@noindent
10722
but if before calling @code{set_debug_traps}, you set it to point to a
10723
function in your program, that function is called when
10724
@code{@value{GDBN}} continues after stopping on a trap (for example, bus
10725
error).  The function indicated by @code{exceptionHook} is called with
10726
one parameter: an @code{int} which is the exception number.
10727
 
10728
@item
10729
Compile and link together: your program, the @value{GDBN} debugging stub for
10730
your target architecture, and the supporting subroutines.
10731
 
10732
@item
10733
Make sure you have a serial connection between your target machine and
10734
the @value{GDBN} host, and identify the serial port on the host.
10735
 
10736
@item
10737
@c The "remote" target now provides a `load' command, so we should
10738
@c document that.  FIXME.
10739
Download your program to your target machine (or get it there by
10740
whatever means the manufacturer provides), and start it.
10741
 
10742
@item
10743
To start remote debugging, run @value{GDBN} on the host machine, and specify
10744
as an executable file the program that is running in the remote machine.
10745
This tells @value{GDBN} how to find your program's symbols and the contents
10746
of its pure text.
10747
 
10748
@item
10749
@cindex serial line, @code{target remote}
10750
Establish communication using the @code{target remote} command.
10751
Its argument specifies how to communicate with the target
10752
machine---either via a devicename attached to a direct serial line, or a
10753
TCP or UDP port (usually to a terminal server which in turn has a serial line
10754
to the target).  For example, to use a serial line connected to the
10755
device named @file{/dev/ttyb}:
10756
 
10757
@smallexample
10758
target remote /dev/ttyb
10759
@end smallexample
10760
 
10761
@cindex TCP port, @code{target remote}
10762
To use a TCP connection, use an argument of the form
10763
@code{@var{host}:@var{port}} or @code{tcp:@var{host}:@var{port}}.
10764
For example, to connect to port 2828 on a
10765
terminal server named @code{manyfarms}:
10766
 
10767
@smallexample
10768
target remote manyfarms:2828
10769
@end smallexample
10770
 
10771
If your remote target is actually running on the same machine as
10772
your debugger session (e.g.@: a simulator of your target running on
10773
the same host), you can omit the hostname.  For example, to connect
10774
to port 1234 on your local machine:
10775
 
10776
@smallexample
10777
target remote :1234
10778
@end smallexample
10779
@noindent
10780
 
10781
Note that the colon is still required here.
10782
 
10783
@cindex UDP port, @code{target remote}
10784
To use a UDP connection, use an argument of the form
10785
@code{udp:@var{host}:@var{port}}.  For example, to connect to UDP port 2828
10786
on a terminal server named @code{manyfarms}:
10787
 
10788
@smallexample
10789
target remote udp:manyfarms:2828
10790
@end smallexample
10791
 
10792
When using a UDP connection for remote debugging, you should keep in mind
10793
that the `U' stands for ``Unreliable''.  UDP can silently drop packets on
10794
busy or unreliable networks, which will cause havoc with your debugging
10795
session.
10796
 
10797
@end enumerate
10798
 
10799
Now you can use all the usual commands to examine and change data and to
10800
step and continue the remote program.
10801
 
10802
To resume the remote program and stop debugging it, use the @code{detach}
10803
command.
10804
 
10805
@cindex interrupting remote programs
10806
@cindex remote programs, interrupting
10807
Whenever @value{GDBN} is waiting for the remote program, if you type the
10808
interrupt character (often @key{C-C}), @value{GDBN} attempts to stop the
10809
program.  This may or may not succeed, depending in part on the hardware
10810
and the serial drivers the remote system uses.  If you type the
10811
interrupt character once again, @value{GDBN} displays this prompt:
10812
 
10813
@smallexample
10814
Interrupted while waiting for the program.
10815
Give up (and stop debugging it)?  (y or n)
10816
@end smallexample
10817
 
10818
If you type @kbd{y}, @value{GDBN} abandons the remote debugging session.
10819
(If you decide you want to try again later, you can use @samp{target
10820
remote} again to connect once more.)  If you type @kbd{n}, @value{GDBN}
10821
goes back to waiting.
10822
 
10823
 
10824
@node Configurations
10825
@chapter Configuration-Specific Information
10826
 
10827
While nearly all @value{GDBN} commands are available for all native and
10828
cross versions of the debugger, there are some exceptions.  This chapter
10829
describes things that are only available in certain configurations.
10830
 
10831
There are three major categories of configurations: native
10832
configurations, where the host and target are the same, embedded
10833
operating system configurations, which are usually the same for several
10834
different processor architectures, and bare embedded processors, which
10835
are quite different from each other.
10836
 
10837
@menu
10838
* Native::
10839
* Embedded OS::
10840
* Embedded Processors::
10841
* Architectures::
10842
@end menu
10843
 
10844
@node Native
10845
@section Native
10846
 
10847
This section describes details specific to particular native
10848
configurations.
10849
 
10850
@menu
10851
* HP-UX::                       HP-UX
10852
* SVR4 Process Information::    SVR4 process information
10853
* DJGPP Native::                Features specific to the DJGPP port
10854
* Cygwin Native::               Features specific to the Cygwin port
10855
@end menu
10856
 
10857
@node HP-UX
10858
@subsection HP-UX
10859
 
10860
On HP-UX systems, if you refer to a function or variable name that
10861
begins with a dollar sign, @value{GDBN} searches for a user or system
10862
name first, before it searches for a convenience variable.
10863
 
10864
@node SVR4 Process Information
10865
@subsection SVR4 process information
10866
 
10867
@kindex /proc
10868
@cindex process image
10869
 
10870
Many versions of SVR4 provide a facility called @samp{/proc} that can be
10871
used to examine the image of a running process using file-system
10872
subroutines.  If @value{GDBN} is configured for an operating system with
10873
this facility, the command @code{info proc} is available to report on
10874
several kinds of information about the process running your program.
10875
@code{info proc} works only on SVR4 systems that include the
10876
@code{procfs} code.  This includes OSF/1 (Digital Unix), Solaris, Irix,
10877
and Unixware, but not HP-UX or @sc{gnu}/Linux, for example.
10878
 
10879
@table @code
10880
@kindex info proc
10881
@item info proc
10882
Summarize available information about the process.
10883
 
10884
@kindex info proc mappings
10885
@item info proc mappings
10886
Report on the address ranges accessible in the program, with information
10887
on whether your program may read, write, or execute each range.
10888
@ignore
10889
@comment These sub-options of 'info proc' were not included when
10890
@comment procfs.c was re-written.  Keep their descriptions around
10891
@comment against the day when someone finds the time to put them back in.
10892
@kindex info proc times
10893
@item info proc times
10894
Starting time, user CPU time, and system CPU time for your program and
10895
its children.
10896
 
10897
@kindex info proc id
10898
@item info proc id
10899
Report on the process IDs related to your program: its own process ID,
10900
the ID of its parent, the process group ID, and the session ID.
10901
 
10902
@kindex info proc status
10903
@item info proc status
10904
General information on the state of the process.  If the process is
10905
stopped, this report includes the reason for stopping, and any signal
10906
received.
10907
 
10908
@item info proc all
10909
Show all the above information about the process.
10910
@end ignore
10911
@end table
10912
 
10913
@node DJGPP Native
10914
@subsection Features for Debugging @sc{djgpp} Programs
10915
@cindex @sc{djgpp} debugging
10916
@cindex native @sc{djgpp} debugging
10917
@cindex MS-DOS-specific commands
10918
 
10919
@sc{djgpp} is the port of @sc{gnu} development tools to MS-DOS and
10920
MS-Windows.  @sc{djgpp} programs are 32-bit protected-mode programs
10921
that use the @dfn{DPMI} (DOS Protected-Mode Interface) API to run on
10922
top of real-mode DOS systems and their emulations.
10923
 
10924
@value{GDBN} supports native debugging of @sc{djgpp} programs, and
10925
defines a few commands specific to the @sc{djgpp} port.  This
10926
subsection describes those commands.
10927
 
10928
@table @code
10929
@kindex info dos
10930
@item info dos
10931
This is a prefix of @sc{djgpp}-specific commands which print
10932
information about the target system and important OS structures.
10933
 
10934
@kindex sysinfo
10935
@cindex MS-DOS system info
10936
@cindex free memory information (MS-DOS)
10937
@item info dos sysinfo
10938
This command displays assorted information about the underlying
10939
platform: the CPU type and features, the OS version and flavor, the
10940
DPMI version, and the available conventional and DPMI memory.
10941
 
10942
@cindex GDT
10943
@cindex LDT
10944
@cindex IDT
10945
@cindex segment descriptor tables
10946
@cindex descriptor tables display
10947
@item info dos gdt
10948
@itemx info dos ldt
10949
@itemx info dos idt
10950
These 3 commands display entries from, respectively, Global, Local,
10951
and Interrupt Descriptor Tables (GDT, LDT, and IDT).  The descriptor
10952
tables are data structures which store a descriptor for each segment
10953
that is currently in use.  The segment's selector is an index into a
10954
descriptor table; the table entry for that index holds the
10955
descriptor's base address and limit, and its attributes and access
10956
rights.
10957
 
10958
A typical @sc{djgpp} program uses 3 segments: a code segment, a data
10959
segment (used for both data and the stack), and a DOS segment (which
10960
allows access to DOS/BIOS data structures and absolute addresses in
10961
conventional memory).  However, the DPMI host will usually define
10962
additional segments in order to support the DPMI environment.
10963
 
10964
@cindex garbled pointers
10965
These commands allow to display entries from the descriptor tables.
10966
Without an argument, all entries from the specified table are
10967
displayed.  An argument, which should be an integer expression, means
10968
display a single entry whose index is given by the argument.  For
10969
example, here's a convenient way to display information about the
10970
debugged program's data segment:
10971
 
10972
@smallexample
10973
@exdent @code{(@value{GDBP}) info dos ldt $ds}
10974
@exdent @code{0x13f: base=0x11970000 limit=0x0009ffff 32-Bit Data (Read/Write, Exp-up)}
10975
@end smallexample
10976
 
10977
@noindent
10978
This comes in handy when you want to see whether a pointer is outside
10979
the data segment's limit (i.e.@: @dfn{garbled}).
10980
 
10981
@cindex page tables display (MS-DOS)
10982
@item info dos pde
10983
@itemx info dos pte
10984
These two commands display entries from, respectively, the Page
10985
Directory and the Page Tables.  Page Directories and Page Tables are
10986
data structures which control how virtual memory addresses are mapped
10987
into physical addresses.  A Page Table includes an entry for every
10988
page of memory that is mapped into the program's address space; there
10989
may be several Page Tables, each one holding up to 4096 entries.  A
10990
Page Directory has up to 4096 entries, one each for every Page Table
10991
that is currently in use.
10992
 
10993
Without an argument, @kbd{info dos pde} displays the entire Page
10994
Directory, and @kbd{info dos pte} displays all the entries in all of
10995
the Page Tables.  An argument, an integer expression, given to the
10996
@kbd{info dos pde} command means display only that entry from the Page
10997
Directory table.  An argument given to the @kbd{info dos pte} command
10998
means display entries from a single Page Table, the one pointed to by
10999
the specified entry in the Page Directory.
11000
 
11001
@cindex direct memory access (DMA) on MS-DOS
11002
These commands are useful when your program uses @dfn{DMA} (Direct
11003
Memory Access), which needs physical addresses to program the DMA
11004
controller.
11005
 
11006
These commands are supported only with some DPMI servers.
11007
 
11008
@cindex physical address from linear address
11009
@item info dos address-pte @var{addr}
11010
This command displays the Page Table entry for a specified linear
11011
address.  The argument linear address @var{addr} should already have the
11012
appropriate segment's base address added to it, because this command
11013
accepts addresses which may belong to @emph{any} segment.  For
11014
example, here's how to display the Page Table entry for the page where
11015
the variable @code{i} is stored:
11016
 
11017
@smallexample
11018
@exdent @code{(@value{GDBP}) info dos address-pte __djgpp_base_address + (char *)&i}
11019
@exdent @code{Page Table entry for address 0x11a00d30:}
11020
@exdent @code{Base=0x02698000 Dirty Acc. Not-Cached Write-Back Usr Read-Write +0xd30}
11021
@end smallexample
11022
 
11023
@noindent
11024
This says that @code{i} is stored at offset @code{0xd30} from the page
11025
whose physical base address is @code{0x02698000}, and prints all the
11026
attributes of that page.
11027
 
11028
Note that you must cast the addresses of variables to a @code{char *},
11029
since otherwise the value of @code{__djgpp_base_address}, the base
11030
address of all variables and functions in a @sc{djgpp} program, will
11031
be added using the rules of C pointer arithmetics: if @code{i} is
11032
declared an @code{int}, @value{GDBN} will add 4 times the value of
11033
@code{__djgpp_base_address} to the address of @code{i}.
11034
 
11035
Here's another example, it displays the Page Table entry for the
11036
transfer buffer:
11037
 
11038
@smallexample
11039
@exdent @code{(@value{GDBP}) info dos address-pte *((unsigned *)&_go32_info_block + 3)}
11040
@exdent @code{Page Table entry for address 0x29110:}
11041
@exdent @code{Base=0x00029000 Dirty Acc. Not-Cached Write-Back Usr Read-Write +0x110}
11042
@end smallexample
11043
 
11044
@noindent
11045
(The @code{+ 3} offset is because the transfer buffer's address is the
11046
3rd member of the @code{_go32_info_block} structure.)  The output of
11047
this command clearly shows that addresses in conventional memory are
11048
mapped 1:1, i.e.@: the physical and linear addresses are identical.
11049
 
11050
This command is supported only with some DPMI servers.
11051
@end table
11052
 
11053
@node Cygwin Native
11054
@subsection Features for Debugging MS Windows PE executables
11055
@cindex MS Windows debugging
11056
@cindex native Cygwin debugging
11057
@cindex Cygwin-specific commands
11058
 
11059
@value{GDBN} supports native debugging of MS Windows programs, and
11060
defines a few commands specific to the Cygwin port.  This
11061
subsection describes those commands.
11062
 
11063
@table @code
11064
@kindex info w32
11065
@item info w32
11066
This is a prefix of MS Windows specific commands which print
11067
information about the target system and important OS structures.
11068
 
11069
@item info w32 selector
11070
This command displays information returned by
11071
the Win32 API @code{GetThreadSelectorEntry} function.
11072
It takes an optional argument that is evaluated to
11073
a long value to give the information about this given selector.
11074
Without argument, this command displays information
11075
about the the six segment registers.
11076
 
11077
@kindex info dll
11078
@item info dll
11079
This is a Cygwin specific alias of info shared.
11080
 
11081
@kindex dll-symbols
11082
@item dll-symbols
11083
This command loads symbols from a dll similarly to
11084
add-sym command but without the need to specify a base address.
11085
 
11086
@kindex set new-console
11087
@item set new-console @var{mode}
11088
If @var{mode} is @code{on} the debuggee will
11089
be started in a new console on next start.
11090
If @var{mode} is @code{off}i, the debuggee will
11091
be started in the same console as the debugger.
11092
 
11093
@kindex show new-console
11094
@item show new-console
11095
Displays whether a new console is used
11096
when the debuggee is started.
11097
 
11098
@kindex set new-group
11099
@item set new-group @var{mode}
11100
This boolean value controls whether the debuggee should
11101
start a new group or stay in the same group as the debugger.
11102
This affects the way the Windows OS handles
11103
Ctrl-C.
11104
 
11105
@kindex show new-group
11106
@item show new-group
11107
Displays current value of new-group boolean.
11108
 
11109
@kindex set debugevents
11110
@item set debugevents
11111
This boolean value adds debug output concerning events seen by the debugger.
11112
 
11113
@kindex set debugexec
11114
@item set debugexec
11115
This boolean value adds debug output concerning execute events
11116
seen by the debugger.
11117
 
11118
@kindex set debugexceptions
11119
@item set debugexceptions
11120
This boolean value adds debug ouptut concerning exception events
11121
seen by the debugger.
11122
 
11123
@kindex set debugmemory
11124
@item set debugmemory
11125
This boolean value adds debug ouptut concerning memory events
11126
seen by the debugger.
11127
 
11128
@kindex set shell
11129
@item set shell
11130
This boolean values specifies whether the debuggee is called
11131
via a shell or directly (default value is on).
11132
 
11133
@kindex show shell
11134
@item show shell
11135
Displays if the debuggee will be started with a shell.
11136
 
11137
@end table
11138
 
11139
@node Embedded OS
11140
@section Embedded Operating Systems
11141
 
11142
This section describes configurations involving the debugging of
11143
embedded operating systems that are available for several different
11144
architectures.
11145
 
11146
@menu
11147
* VxWorks::                     Using @value{GDBN} with VxWorks
11148
@end menu
11149
 
11150
@value{GDBN} includes the ability to debug programs running on
11151
various real-time operating systems.
11152
 
11153
@node VxWorks
11154
@subsection Using @value{GDBN} with VxWorks
11155
 
11156
@cindex VxWorks
11157
 
11158
@table @code
11159
 
11160
@kindex target vxworks
11161
@item target vxworks @var{machinename}
11162
A VxWorks system, attached via TCP/IP.  The argument @var{machinename}
11163
is the target system's machine name or IP address.
11164
 
11165
@end table
11166
 
11167
On VxWorks, @code{load} links @var{filename} dynamically on the
11168
current target system as well as adding its symbols in @value{GDBN}.
11169
 
11170
@value{GDBN} enables developers to spawn and debug tasks running on networked
11171
VxWorks targets from a Unix host.  Already-running tasks spawned from
11172
the VxWorks shell can also be debugged.  @value{GDBN} uses code that runs on
11173
both the Unix host and on the VxWorks target.  The program
11174
@code{@value{GDBP}} is installed and executed on the Unix host.  (It may be
11175
installed with the name @code{vxgdb}, to distinguish it from a
11176
@value{GDBN} for debugging programs on the host itself.)
11177
 
11178
@table @code
11179
@item VxWorks-timeout @var{args}
11180
@kindex vxworks-timeout
11181
All VxWorks-based targets now support the option @code{vxworks-timeout}.
11182
This option is set by the user, and  @var{args} represents the number of
11183
seconds @value{GDBN} waits for responses to rpc's.  You might use this if
11184
your VxWorks target is a slow software simulator or is on the far side
11185
of a thin network line.
11186
@end table
11187
 
11188
The following information on connecting to VxWorks was current when
11189
this manual was produced; newer releases of VxWorks may use revised
11190
procedures.
11191
 
11192
@kindex INCLUDE_RDB
11193
To use @value{GDBN} with VxWorks, you must rebuild your VxWorks kernel
11194
to include the remote debugging interface routines in the VxWorks
11195
library @file{rdb.a}.  To do this, define @code{INCLUDE_RDB} in the
11196
VxWorks configuration file @file{configAll.h} and rebuild your VxWorks
11197
kernel.  The resulting kernel contains @file{rdb.a}, and spawns the
11198
source debugging task @code{tRdbTask} when VxWorks is booted.  For more
11199
information on configuring and remaking VxWorks, see the manufacturer's
11200
manual.
11201
@c VxWorks, see the @cite{VxWorks Programmer's Guide}.
11202
 
11203
Once you have included @file{rdb.a} in your VxWorks system image and set
11204
your Unix execution search path to find @value{GDBN}, you are ready to
11205
run @value{GDBN}.  From your Unix host, run @code{@value{GDBP}} (or
11206
@code{vxgdb}, depending on your installation).
11207
 
11208
@value{GDBN} comes up showing the prompt:
11209
 
11210
@smallexample
11211
(vxgdb)
11212
@end smallexample
11213
 
11214
@menu
11215
* VxWorks Connection::          Connecting to VxWorks
11216
* VxWorks Download::            VxWorks download
11217
* VxWorks Attach::              Running tasks
11218
@end menu
11219
 
11220
@node VxWorks Connection
11221
@subsubsection Connecting to VxWorks
11222
 
11223
The @value{GDBN} command @code{target} lets you connect to a VxWorks target on the
11224
network.  To connect to a target whose host name is ``@code{tt}'', type:
11225
 
11226
@smallexample
11227
(vxgdb) target vxworks tt
11228
@end smallexample
11229
 
11230
@need 750
11231
@value{GDBN} displays messages like these:
11232
 
11233
@smallexample
11234
Attaching remote machine across net...
11235
Connected to tt.
11236
@end smallexample
11237
 
11238
@need 1000
11239
@value{GDBN} then attempts to read the symbol tables of any object modules
11240
loaded into the VxWorks target since it was last booted.  @value{GDBN} locates
11241
these files by searching the directories listed in the command search
11242
path (@pxref{Environment, ,Your program's environment}); if it fails
11243
to find an object file, it displays a message such as:
11244
 
11245
@smallexample
11246
prog.o: No such file or directory.
11247
@end smallexample
11248
 
11249
When this happens, add the appropriate directory to the search path with
11250
the @value{GDBN} command @code{path}, and execute the @code{target}
11251
command again.
11252
 
11253
@node VxWorks Download
11254
@subsubsection VxWorks download
11255
 
11256
@cindex download to VxWorks
11257
If you have connected to the VxWorks target and you want to debug an
11258
object that has not yet been loaded, you can use the @value{GDBN}
11259
@code{load} command to download a file from Unix to VxWorks
11260
incrementally.  The object file given as an argument to the @code{load}
11261
command is actually opened twice: first by the VxWorks target in order
11262
to download the code, then by @value{GDBN} in order to read the symbol
11263
table.  This can lead to problems if the current working directories on
11264
the two systems differ.  If both systems have NFS mounted the same
11265
filesystems, you can avoid these problems by using absolute paths.
11266
Otherwise, it is simplest to set the working directory on both systems
11267
to the directory in which the object file resides, and then to reference
11268
the file by its name, without any path.  For instance, a program
11269
@file{prog.o} may reside in @file{@var{vxpath}/vw/demo/rdb} in VxWorks
11270
and in @file{@var{hostpath}/vw/demo/rdb} on the host.  To load this
11271
program, type this on VxWorks:
11272
 
11273
@smallexample
11274
-> cd "@var{vxpath}/vw/demo/rdb"
11275
@end smallexample
11276
 
11277
@noindent
11278
Then, in @value{GDBN}, type:
11279
 
11280
@smallexample
11281
(vxgdb) cd @var{hostpath}/vw/demo/rdb
11282
(vxgdb) load prog.o
11283
@end smallexample
11284
 
11285
@value{GDBN} displays a response similar to this:
11286
 
11287
@smallexample
11288
Reading symbol data from wherever/vw/demo/rdb/prog.o... done.
11289
@end smallexample
11290
 
11291
You can also use the @code{load} command to reload an object module
11292
after editing and recompiling the corresponding source file.  Note that
11293
this makes @value{GDBN} delete all currently-defined breakpoints,
11294
auto-displays, and convenience variables, and to clear the value
11295
history.  (This is necessary in order to preserve the integrity of
11296
debugger's data structures that reference the target system's symbol
11297
table.)
11298
 
11299
@node VxWorks Attach
11300
@subsubsection Running tasks
11301
 
11302
@cindex running VxWorks tasks
11303
You can also attach to an existing task using the @code{attach} command as
11304
follows:
11305
 
11306
@smallexample
11307
(vxgdb) attach @var{task}
11308
@end smallexample
11309
 
11310
@noindent
11311
where @var{task} is the VxWorks hexadecimal task ID.  The task can be running
11312
or suspended when you attach to it.  Running tasks are suspended at
11313
the time of attachment.
11314
 
11315
@node Embedded Processors
11316
@section Embedded Processors
11317
 
11318
This section goes into details specific to particular embedded
11319
configurations.
11320
 
11321
 
11322
@menu
11323
* ARM::                         ARM
11324
* H8/300::                      Hitachi H8/300
11325
* H8/500::                      Hitachi H8/500
11326
* i960::                        Intel i960
11327
* M32R/D::                      Mitsubishi M32R/D
11328
* M68K::                        Motorola M68K
11329
@c OBSOLETE * M88K::                        Motorola M88K
11330
* MIPS Embedded::               MIPS Embedded
11331
* PA::                          HP PA Embedded
11332
* PowerPC:                      PowerPC
11333
* SH::                          Hitachi SH
11334
* Sparclet::                    Tsqware Sparclet
11335
* Sparclite::                   Fujitsu Sparclite
11336
* ST2000::                      Tandem ST2000
11337
* Z8000::                       Zilog Z8000
11338
@end menu
11339
 
11340
@node ARM
11341
@subsection ARM
11342
 
11343
@table @code
11344
 
11345
@kindex target rdi
11346
@item target rdi @var{dev}
11347
ARM Angel monitor, via RDI library interface to ADP protocol.  You may
11348
use this target to communicate with both boards running the Angel
11349
monitor, or with the EmbeddedICE JTAG debug device.
11350
 
11351
@kindex target rdp
11352
@item target rdp @var{dev}
11353
ARM Demon monitor.
11354
 
11355
@end table
11356
 
11357
@node H8/300
11358
@subsection Hitachi H8/300
11359
 
11360
@table @code
11361
 
11362
@kindex target hms@r{, with H8/300}
11363
@item target hms @var{dev}
11364
A Hitachi SH, H8/300, or H8/500 board, attached via serial line to your host.
11365
Use special commands @code{device} and @code{speed} to control the serial
11366
line and the communications speed used.
11367
 
11368
@kindex target e7000@r{, with H8/300}
11369
@item target e7000 @var{dev}
11370
E7000 emulator for Hitachi H8 and SH.
11371
 
11372
@kindex target sh3@r{, with H8/300}
11373
@kindex target sh3e@r{, with H8/300}
11374
@item target sh3 @var{dev}
11375
@itemx target sh3e @var{dev}
11376
Hitachi SH-3 and SH-3E target systems.
11377
 
11378
@end table
11379
 
11380
@cindex download to H8/300 or H8/500
11381
@cindex H8/300 or H8/500 download
11382
@cindex download to Hitachi SH
11383
@cindex Hitachi SH download
11384
When you select remote debugging to a Hitachi SH, H8/300, or H8/500
11385
board, the @code{load} command downloads your program to the Hitachi
11386
board and also opens it as the current executable target for
11387
@value{GDBN} on your host (like the @code{file} command).
11388
 
11389
@value{GDBN} needs to know these things to talk to your
11390
Hitachi SH, H8/300, or H8/500:
11391
 
11392
@enumerate
11393
@item
11394
that you want to use @samp{target hms}, the remote debugging interface
11395
for Hitachi microprocessors, or @samp{target e7000}, the in-circuit
11396
emulator for the Hitachi SH and the Hitachi 300H.  (@samp{target hms} is
11397
the default when @value{GDBN} is configured specifically for the Hitachi SH,
11398
H8/300, or H8/500.)
11399
 
11400
@item
11401
what serial device connects your host to your Hitachi board (the first
11402
serial device available on your host is the default).
11403
 
11404
@item
11405
what speed to use over the serial device.
11406
@end enumerate
11407
 
11408
@menu
11409
* Hitachi Boards::      Connecting to Hitachi boards.
11410
* Hitachi ICE::         Using the E7000 In-Circuit Emulator.
11411
* Hitachi Special::     Special @value{GDBN} commands for Hitachi micros.
11412
@end menu
11413
 
11414
@node Hitachi Boards
11415
@subsubsection Connecting to Hitachi boards
11416
 
11417
@c only for Unix hosts
11418
@kindex device
11419
@cindex serial device, Hitachi micros
11420
Use the special @code{@value{GDBN}} command @samp{device @var{port}} if you
11421
need to explicitly set the serial device.  The default @var{port} is the
11422
first available port on your host.  This is only necessary on Unix
11423
hosts, where it is typically something like @file{/dev/ttya}.
11424
 
11425
@kindex speed
11426
@cindex serial line speed, Hitachi micros
11427
@code{@value{GDBN}} has another special command to set the communications
11428
speed: @samp{speed @var{bps}}.  This command also is only used from Unix
11429
hosts; on DOS hosts, set the line speed as usual from outside @value{GDBN} with
11430
the DOS @code{mode} command (for instance,
11431
@w{@kbd{mode com2:9600,n,8,1,p}} for a 9600@dmn{bps} connection).
11432
 
11433
The @samp{device} and @samp{speed} commands are available only when you
11434
use a Unix host to debug your Hitachi microprocessor programs.  If you
11435
use a DOS host,
11436
@value{GDBN} depends on an auxiliary terminate-and-stay-resident program
11437
called @code{asynctsr} to communicate with the development board
11438
through a PC serial port.  You must also use the DOS @code{mode} command
11439
to set up the serial port on the DOS side.
11440
 
11441
The following sample session illustrates the steps needed to start a
11442
program under @value{GDBN} control on an H8/300.  The example uses a
11443
sample H8/300 program called @file{t.x}.  The procedure is the same for
11444
the Hitachi SH and the H8/500.
11445
 
11446
First hook up your development board.  In this example, we use a
11447
board attached to serial port @code{COM2}; if you use a different serial
11448
port, substitute its name in the argument of the @code{mode} command.
11449
When you call @code{asynctsr}, the auxiliary comms program used by the
11450
debugger, you give it just the numeric part of the serial port's name;
11451
for example, @samp{asyncstr 2} below runs @code{asyncstr} on
11452
@code{COM2}.
11453
 
11454
@smallexample
11455
C:\H8300\TEST> asynctsr 2
11456
C:\H8300\TEST> mode com2:9600,n,8,1,p
11457
 
11458
Resident portion of MODE loaded
11459
 
11460
COM2: 9600, n, 8, 1, p
11461
 
11462
@end smallexample
11463
 
11464
@quotation
11465
@emph{Warning:} We have noticed a bug in PC-NFS that conflicts with
11466
@code{asynctsr}.  If you also run PC-NFS on your DOS host, you may need to
11467
disable it, or even boot without it, to use @code{asynctsr} to control
11468
your development board.
11469
@end quotation
11470
 
11471
@kindex target hms@r{, and serial protocol}
11472
Now that serial communications are set up, and the development board is
11473
connected, you can start up @value{GDBN}.  Call @code{@value{GDBP}} with
11474
the name of your program as the argument.  @code{@value{GDBN}} prompts
11475
you, as usual, with the prompt @samp{(@value{GDBP})}.  Use two special
11476
commands to begin your debugging session: @samp{target hms} to specify
11477
cross-debugging to the Hitachi board, and the @code{load} command to
11478
download your program to the board.  @code{load} displays the names of
11479
the program's sections, and a @samp{*} for each 2K of data downloaded.
11480
(If you want to refresh @value{GDBN} data on symbols or on the
11481
executable file without downloading, use the @value{GDBN} commands
11482
@code{file} or @code{symbol-file}.  These commands, and @code{load}
11483
itself, are described in @ref{Files,,Commands to specify files}.)
11484
 
11485
@smallexample
11486
(eg-C:\H8300\TEST) @value{GDBP} t.x
11487
@value{GDBN} is free software and you are welcome to distribute copies
11488
 of it under certain conditions; type "show copying" to see
11489
 the conditions.
11490
There is absolutely no warranty for @value{GDBN}; type "show warranty"
11491
for details.
11492
@value{GDBN} @value{GDBVN}, Copyright 1992 Free Software Foundation, Inc...
11493
(@value{GDBP}) target hms
11494
Connected to remote H8/300 HMS system.
11495
(@value{GDBP}) load t.x
11496
.text   : 0x8000 .. 0xabde ***********
11497
.data   : 0xabde .. 0xad30 *
11498
.stack  : 0xf000 .. 0xf014 *
11499
@end smallexample
11500
 
11501
At this point, you're ready to run or debug your program.  From here on,
11502
you can use all the usual @value{GDBN} commands.  The @code{break} command
11503
sets breakpoints; the @code{run} command starts your program;
11504
@code{print} or @code{x} display data; the @code{continue} command
11505
resumes execution after stopping at a breakpoint.  You can use the
11506
@code{help} command at any time to find out more about @value{GDBN} commands.
11507
 
11508
Remember, however, that @emph{operating system} facilities aren't
11509
available on your development board; for example, if your program hangs,
11510
you can't send an interrupt---but you can press the @sc{reset} switch!
11511
 
11512
Use the @sc{reset} button on the development board
11513
@itemize @bullet
11514
@item
11515
to interrupt your program (don't use @kbd{ctl-C} on the DOS host---it has
11516
no way to pass an interrupt signal to the development board); and
11517
 
11518
@item
11519
to return to the @value{GDBN} command prompt after your program finishes
11520
normally.  The communications protocol provides no other way for @value{GDBN}
11521
to detect program completion.
11522
@end itemize
11523
 
11524
In either case, @value{GDBN} sees the effect of a @sc{reset} on the
11525
development board as a ``normal exit'' of your program.
11526
 
11527
@node Hitachi ICE
11528
@subsubsection Using the E7000 in-circuit emulator
11529
 
11530
@kindex target e7000@r{, with Hitachi ICE}
11531
You can use the E7000 in-circuit emulator to develop code for either the
11532
Hitachi SH or the H8/300H.  Use one of these forms of the @samp{target
11533
e7000} command to connect @value{GDBN} to your E7000:
11534
 
11535
@table @code
11536
@item target e7000 @var{port} @var{speed}
11537
Use this form if your E7000 is connected to a serial port.  The
11538
@var{port} argument identifies what serial port to use (for example,
11539
@samp{com2}).  The third argument is the line speed in bits per second
11540
(for example, @samp{9600}).
11541
 
11542
@item target e7000 @var{hostname}
11543
If your E7000 is installed as a host on a TCP/IP network, you can just
11544
specify its hostname; @value{GDBN} uses @code{telnet} to connect.
11545
@end table
11546
 
11547
@node Hitachi Special
11548
@subsubsection Special @value{GDBN} commands for Hitachi micros
11549
 
11550
Some @value{GDBN} commands are available only for the H8/300:
11551
 
11552
@table @code
11553
 
11554
@kindex set machine
11555
@kindex show machine
11556
@item set machine h8300
11557
@itemx set machine h8300h
11558
Condition @value{GDBN} for one of the two variants of the H8/300
11559
architecture with @samp{set machine}.  You can use @samp{show machine}
11560
to check which variant is currently in effect.
11561
 
11562
@end table
11563
 
11564
@node H8/500
11565
@subsection H8/500
11566
 
11567
@table @code
11568
 
11569
@kindex set memory @var{mod}
11570
@cindex memory models, H8/500
11571
@item set memory @var{mod}
11572
@itemx show memory
11573
Specify which H8/500 memory model (@var{mod}) you are using with
11574
@samp{set memory}; check which memory model is in effect with @samp{show
11575
memory}.  The accepted values for @var{mod} are @code{small},
11576
@code{big}, @code{medium}, and @code{compact}.
11577
 
11578
@end table
11579
 
11580
@node i960
11581
@subsection Intel i960
11582
 
11583
@table @code
11584
 
11585
@kindex target mon960
11586
@item target mon960 @var{dev}
11587
MON960 monitor for Intel i960.
11588
 
11589
@kindex target nindy
11590
@item target nindy @var{devicename}
11591
An Intel 960 board controlled by a Nindy Monitor.  @var{devicename} is
11592
the name of the serial device to use for the connection, e.g.
11593
@file{/dev/ttya}.
11594
 
11595
@end table
11596
 
11597
@cindex Nindy
11598
@cindex i960
11599
@dfn{Nindy} is a ROM Monitor program for Intel 960 target systems.  When
11600
@value{GDBN} is configured to control a remote Intel 960 using Nindy, you can
11601
tell @value{GDBN} how to connect to the 960 in several ways:
11602
 
11603
@itemize @bullet
11604
@item
11605
Through command line options specifying serial port, version of the
11606
Nindy protocol, and communications speed;
11607
 
11608
@item
11609
By responding to a prompt on startup;
11610
 
11611
@item
11612
By using the @code{target} command at any point during your @value{GDBN}
11613
session.  @xref{Target Commands, ,Commands for managing targets}.
11614
 
11615
@end itemize
11616
 
11617
@cindex download to Nindy-960
11618
With the Nindy interface to an Intel 960 board, @code{load}
11619
downloads @var{filename} to the 960 as well as adding its symbols in
11620
@value{GDBN}.
11621
 
11622
@menu
11623
* Nindy Startup::               Startup with Nindy
11624
* Nindy Options::               Options for Nindy
11625
* Nindy Reset::                 Nindy reset command
11626
@end menu
11627
 
11628
@node Nindy Startup
11629
@subsubsection Startup with Nindy
11630
 
11631
If you simply start @code{@value{GDBP}} without using any command-line
11632
options, you are prompted for what serial port to use, @emph{before} you
11633
reach the ordinary @value{GDBN} prompt:
11634
 
11635
@smallexample
11636
Attach /dev/ttyNN -- specify NN, or "quit" to quit:
11637
@end smallexample
11638
 
11639
@noindent
11640
Respond to the prompt with whatever suffix (after @samp{/dev/tty})
11641
identifies the serial port you want to use.  You can, if you choose,
11642
simply start up with no Nindy connection by responding to the prompt
11643
with an empty line.  If you do this and later wish to attach to Nindy,
11644
use @code{target} (@pxref{Target Commands, ,Commands for managing targets}).
11645
 
11646
@node Nindy Options
11647
@subsubsection Options for Nindy
11648
 
11649
These are the startup options for beginning your @value{GDBN} session with a
11650
Nindy-960 board attached:
11651
 
11652
@table @code
11653
@item -r @var{port}
11654
Specify the serial port name of a serial interface to be used to connect
11655
to the target system.  This option is only available when @value{GDBN} is
11656
configured for the Intel 960 target architecture.  You may specify
11657
@var{port} as any of: a full pathname (e.g. @samp{-r /dev/ttya}), a
11658
device name in @file{/dev} (e.g. @samp{-r ttya}), or simply the unique
11659
suffix for a specific @code{tty} (e.g. @samp{-r a}).
11660
 
11661
@item -O
11662
(An uppercase letter ``O'', not a zero.)  Specify that @value{GDBN} should use
11663
the ``old'' Nindy monitor protocol to connect to the target system.
11664
This option is only available when @value{GDBN} is configured for the Intel 960
11665
target architecture.
11666
 
11667
@quotation
11668
@emph{Warning:} if you specify @samp{-O}, but are actually trying to
11669
connect to a target system that expects the newer protocol, the connection
11670
fails, appearing to be a speed mismatch.  @value{GDBN} repeatedly
11671
attempts to reconnect at several different line speeds.  You can abort
11672
this process with an interrupt.
11673
@end quotation
11674
 
11675
@item -brk
11676
Specify that @value{GDBN} should first send a @code{BREAK} signal to the target
11677
system, in an attempt to reset it, before connecting to a Nindy target.
11678
 
11679
@quotation
11680
@emph{Warning:} Many target systems do not have the hardware that this
11681
requires; it only works with a few boards.
11682
@end quotation
11683
@end table
11684
 
11685
The standard @samp{-b} option controls the line speed used on the serial
11686
port.
11687
 
11688
@c @group
11689
@node Nindy Reset
11690
@subsubsection Nindy reset command
11691
 
11692
@table @code
11693
@item reset
11694
@kindex reset
11695
For a Nindy target, this command sends a ``break'' to the remote target
11696
system; this is only useful if the target has been equipped with a
11697
circuit to perform a hard reset (or some other interesting action) when
11698
a break is detected.
11699
@end table
11700
@c @end group
11701
 
11702
@node M32R/D
11703
@subsection Mitsubishi M32R/D
11704
 
11705
@table @code
11706
 
11707
@kindex target m32r
11708
@item target m32r @var{dev}
11709
Mitsubishi M32R/D ROM monitor.
11710
 
11711
@end table
11712
 
11713
@node M68K
11714
@subsection M68k
11715
 
11716
The Motorola m68k configuration includes ColdFire support, and
11717
target command for the following ROM monitors.
11718
 
11719
@table @code
11720
 
11721
@kindex target abug
11722
@item target abug @var{dev}
11723
ABug ROM monitor for M68K.
11724
 
11725
@kindex target cpu32bug
11726
@item target cpu32bug @var{dev}
11727
CPU32BUG monitor, running on a CPU32 (M68K) board.
11728
 
11729
@kindex target dbug
11730
@item target dbug @var{dev}
11731
dBUG ROM monitor for Motorola ColdFire.
11732
 
11733
@kindex target est
11734
@item target est @var{dev}
11735
EST-300 ICE monitor, running on a CPU32 (M68K) board.
11736
 
11737
@kindex target rom68k
11738
@item target rom68k @var{dev}
11739
ROM 68K monitor, running on an M68K IDP board.
11740
 
11741
@end table
11742
 
11743
If @value{GDBN} is configured with @code{m68*-ericsson-*}, it will
11744
instead have only a single special target command:
11745
 
11746
@table @code
11747
 
11748
@kindex target es1800
11749
@item target es1800 @var{dev}
11750
ES-1800 emulator for M68K.
11751
 
11752
@end table
11753
 
11754
[context?]
11755
 
11756
@table @code
11757
 
11758
@kindex target rombug
11759
@item target rombug @var{dev}
11760
ROMBUG ROM monitor for OS/9000.
11761
 
11762
@end table
11763
 
11764
@c OBSOLETE @node M88K
11765
@c OBSOLETE @subsection M88K
11766
@c OBSOLETE
11767
@c OBSOLETE @table @code
11768
@c OBSOLETE
11769
@c OBSOLETE @kindex target bug
11770
@c OBSOLETE @item target bug @var{dev}
11771
@c OBSOLETE BUG monitor, running on a MVME187 (m88k) board.
11772
@c OBSOLETE
11773
@c OBSOLETE @end table
11774
 
11775
@node MIPS Embedded
11776
@subsection MIPS Embedded
11777
 
11778
@cindex MIPS boards
11779
@value{GDBN} can use the MIPS remote debugging protocol to talk to a
11780
MIPS board attached to a serial line.  This is available when
11781
you configure @value{GDBN} with @samp{--target=mips-idt-ecoff}.
11782
 
11783
@need 1000
11784
Use these @value{GDBN} commands to specify the connection to your target board:
11785
 
11786
@table @code
11787
@item target mips @var{port}
11788
@kindex target mips @var{port}
11789
To run a program on the board, start up @code{@value{GDBP}} with the
11790
name of your program as the argument.  To connect to the board, use the
11791
command @samp{target mips @var{port}}, where @var{port} is the name of
11792
the serial port connected to the board.  If the program has not already
11793
been downloaded to the board, you may use the @code{load} command to
11794
download it.  You can then use all the usual @value{GDBN} commands.
11795
 
11796
For example, this sequence connects to the target board through a serial
11797
port, and loads and runs a program called @var{prog} through the
11798
debugger:
11799
 
11800
@smallexample
11801
host$ @value{GDBP} @var{prog}
11802
@value{GDBN} is free software and @dots{}
11803
(@value{GDBP}) target mips /dev/ttyb
11804
(@value{GDBP}) load @var{prog}
11805
(@value{GDBP}) run
11806
@end smallexample
11807
 
11808
@item target mips @var{hostname}:@var{portnumber}
11809
On some @value{GDBN} host configurations, you can specify a TCP
11810
connection (for instance, to a serial line managed by a terminal
11811
concentrator) instead of a serial port, using the syntax
11812
@samp{@var{hostname}:@var{portnumber}}.
11813
 
11814
@item target pmon @var{port}
11815
@kindex target pmon @var{port}
11816
PMON ROM monitor.
11817
 
11818
@item target ddb @var{port}
11819
@kindex target ddb @var{port}
11820
NEC's DDB variant of PMON for Vr4300.
11821
 
11822
@item target lsi @var{port}
11823
@kindex target lsi @var{port}
11824
LSI variant of PMON.
11825
 
11826
@kindex target r3900
11827
@item target r3900 @var{dev}
11828
Densan DVE-R3900 ROM monitor for Toshiba R3900 Mips.
11829
 
11830
@kindex target array
11831
@item target array @var{dev}
11832
Array Tech LSI33K RAID controller board.
11833
 
11834
@end table
11835
 
11836
 
11837
@noindent
11838
@value{GDBN} also supports these special commands for MIPS targets:
11839
 
11840
@table @code
11841
@item set processor @var{args}
11842
@itemx show processor
11843
@kindex set processor @var{args}
11844
@kindex show processor
11845
Use the @code{set processor} command to set the type of MIPS
11846
processor when you want to access processor-type-specific registers.
11847
For example, @code{set processor @var{r3041}} tells @value{GDBN}
11848
to use the CPU registers appropriate for the 3041 chip.
11849
Use the @code{show processor} command to see what MIPS processor @value{GDBN}
11850
is using.  Use the @code{info reg} command to see what registers
11851
@value{GDBN} is using.
11852
 
11853
@item set mipsfpu double
11854
@itemx set mipsfpu single
11855
@itemx set mipsfpu none
11856
@itemx show mipsfpu
11857
@kindex set mipsfpu
11858
@kindex show mipsfpu
11859
@cindex MIPS remote floating point
11860
@cindex floating point, MIPS remote
11861
If your target board does not support the MIPS floating point
11862
coprocessor, you should use the command @samp{set mipsfpu none} (if you
11863
need this, you may wish to put the command in your @value{GDBN} init
11864
file).  This tells @value{GDBN} how to find the return value of
11865
functions which return floating point values.  It also allows
11866
@value{GDBN} to avoid saving the floating point registers when calling
11867
functions on the board.  If you are using a floating point coprocessor
11868
with only single precision floating point support, as on the @sc{r4650}
11869
processor, use the command @samp{set mipsfpu single}.  The default
11870
double precision floating point coprocessor may be selected using
11871
@samp{set mipsfpu double}.
11872
 
11873
In previous versions the only choices were double precision or no
11874
floating point, so @samp{set mipsfpu on} will select double precision
11875
and @samp{set mipsfpu off} will select no floating point.
11876
 
11877
As usual, you can inquire about the @code{mipsfpu} variable with
11878
@samp{show mipsfpu}.
11879
 
11880
@item set remotedebug @var{n}
11881
@itemx show remotedebug
11882
@kindex set remotedebug@r{, MIPS protocol}
11883
@kindex show remotedebug@r{, MIPS protocol}
11884
@cindex @code{remotedebug}, MIPS protocol
11885
@cindex MIPS @code{remotedebug} protocol
11886
@c FIXME! For this to be useful, you must know something about the MIPS
11887
@c FIXME...protocol.  Where is it described?
11888
You can see some debugging information about communications with the board
11889
by setting the @code{remotedebug} variable.  If you set it to @code{1} using
11890
@samp{set remotedebug 1}, every packet is displayed.  If you set it
11891
to @code{2}, every character is displayed.  You can check the current value
11892
at any time with the command @samp{show remotedebug}.
11893
 
11894
@item set timeout @var{seconds}
11895
@itemx set retransmit-timeout @var{seconds}
11896
@itemx show timeout
11897
@itemx show retransmit-timeout
11898
@cindex @code{timeout}, MIPS protocol
11899
@cindex @code{retransmit-timeout}, MIPS protocol
11900
@kindex set timeout
11901
@kindex show timeout
11902
@kindex set retransmit-timeout
11903
@kindex show retransmit-timeout
11904
You can control the timeout used while waiting for a packet, in the MIPS
11905
remote protocol, with the @code{set timeout @var{seconds}} command.  The
11906
default is 5 seconds.  Similarly, you can control the timeout used while
11907
waiting for an acknowledgement of a packet with the @code{set
11908
retransmit-timeout @var{seconds}} command.  The default is 3 seconds.
11909
You can inspect both values with @code{show timeout} and @code{show
11910
retransmit-timeout}.  (These commands are @emph{only} available when
11911
@value{GDBN} is configured for @samp{--target=mips-idt-ecoff}.)
11912
 
11913
The timeout set by @code{set timeout} does not apply when @value{GDBN}
11914
is waiting for your program to stop.  In that case, @value{GDBN} waits
11915
forever because it has no way of knowing how long the program is going
11916
to run before stopping.
11917
@end table
11918
 
11919
@node PowerPC
11920
@subsection PowerPC
11921
 
11922
@table @code
11923
 
11924
@kindex target dink32
11925
@item target dink32 @var{dev}
11926
DINK32 ROM monitor.
11927
 
11928
@kindex target ppcbug
11929
@item target ppcbug @var{dev}
11930
@kindex target ppcbug1
11931
@item target ppcbug1 @var{dev}
11932
PPCBUG ROM monitor for PowerPC.
11933
 
11934
@kindex target sds
11935
@item target sds @var{dev}
11936
SDS monitor, running on a PowerPC board (such as Motorola's ADS).
11937
 
11938
@end table
11939
 
11940
@node PA
11941
@subsection HP PA Embedded
11942
 
11943
@table @code
11944
 
11945
@kindex target op50n
11946
@item target op50n @var{dev}
11947
OP50N monitor, running on an OKI HPPA board.
11948
 
11949
@kindex target w89k
11950
@item target w89k @var{dev}
11951
W89K monitor, running on a Winbond HPPA board.
11952
 
11953
@end table
11954
 
11955
@node SH
11956
@subsection Hitachi SH
11957
 
11958
@table @code
11959
 
11960
@kindex target hms@r{, with Hitachi SH}
11961
@item target hms @var{dev}
11962
A Hitachi SH board attached via serial line to your host.  Use special
11963
commands @code{device} and @code{speed} to control the serial line and
11964
the communications speed used.
11965
 
11966
@kindex target e7000@r{, with Hitachi SH}
11967
@item target e7000 @var{dev}
11968
E7000 emulator for Hitachi SH.
11969
 
11970
@kindex target sh3@r{, with SH}
11971
@kindex target sh3e@r{, with SH}
11972
@item target sh3 @var{dev}
11973
@item target sh3e @var{dev}
11974
Hitachi SH-3 and SH-3E target systems.
11975
 
11976
@end table
11977
 
11978
@node Sparclet
11979
@subsection Tsqware Sparclet
11980
 
11981
@cindex Sparclet
11982
 
11983
@value{GDBN} enables developers to debug tasks running on
11984
Sparclet targets from a Unix host.
11985
@value{GDBN} uses code that runs on
11986
both the Unix host and on the Sparclet target.  The program
11987
@code{@value{GDBP}} is installed and executed on the Unix host.
11988
 
11989
@table @code
11990
@item remotetimeout @var{args}
11991
@kindex remotetimeout
11992
@value{GDBN} supports the option @code{remotetimeout}.
11993
This option is set by the user, and  @var{args} represents the number of
11994
seconds @value{GDBN} waits for responses.
11995
@end table
11996
 
11997
@cindex compiling, on Sparclet
11998
When compiling for debugging, include the options @samp{-g} to get debug
11999
information and @samp{-Ttext} to relocate the program to where you wish to
12000
load it on the target.  You may also want to add the options @samp{-n} or
12001
@samp{-N} in order to reduce the size of the sections.  Example:
12002
 
12003
@smallexample
12004
sparclet-aout-gcc prog.c -Ttext 0x12010000 -g -o prog -N
12005
@end smallexample
12006
 
12007
You can use @code{objdump} to verify that the addresses are what you intended:
12008
 
12009
@smallexample
12010
sparclet-aout-objdump --headers --syms prog
12011
@end smallexample
12012
 
12013
@cindex running, on Sparclet
12014
Once you have set
12015
your Unix execution search path to find @value{GDBN}, you are ready to
12016
run @value{GDBN}.  From your Unix host, run @code{@value{GDBP}}
12017
(or @code{sparclet-aout-gdb}, depending on your installation).
12018
 
12019
@value{GDBN} comes up showing the prompt:
12020
 
12021
@smallexample
12022
(gdbslet)
12023
@end smallexample
12024
 
12025
@menu
12026
* Sparclet File::                Setting the file to debug
12027
* Sparclet Connection::          Connecting to Sparclet
12028
* Sparclet Download::            Sparclet download
12029
* Sparclet Execution::           Running and debugging
12030
@end menu
12031
 
12032
@node Sparclet File
12033
@subsubsection Setting file to debug
12034
 
12035
The @value{GDBN} command @code{file} lets you choose with program to debug.
12036
 
12037
@smallexample
12038
(gdbslet) file prog
12039
@end smallexample
12040
 
12041
@need 1000
12042
@value{GDBN} then attempts to read the symbol table of @file{prog}.
12043
@value{GDBN} locates
12044
the file by searching the directories listed in the command search
12045
path.
12046
If the file was compiled with debug information (option "-g"), source
12047
files will be searched as well.
12048
@value{GDBN} locates
12049
the source files by searching the directories listed in the directory search
12050
path (@pxref{Environment, ,Your program's environment}).
12051
If it fails
12052
to find a file, it displays a message such as:
12053
 
12054
@smallexample
12055
prog: No such file or directory.
12056
@end smallexample
12057
 
12058
When this happens, add the appropriate directories to the search paths with
12059
the @value{GDBN} commands @code{path} and @code{dir}, and execute the
12060
@code{target} command again.
12061
 
12062
@node Sparclet Connection
12063
@subsubsection Connecting to Sparclet
12064
 
12065
The @value{GDBN} command @code{target} lets you connect to a Sparclet target.
12066
To connect to a target on serial port ``@code{ttya}'', type:
12067
 
12068
@smallexample
12069
(gdbslet) target sparclet /dev/ttya
12070
Remote target sparclet connected to /dev/ttya
12071
main () at ../prog.c:3
12072
@end smallexample
12073
 
12074
@need 750
12075
@value{GDBN} displays messages like these:
12076
 
12077
@smallexample
12078
Connected to ttya.
12079
@end smallexample
12080
 
12081
@node Sparclet Download
12082
@subsubsection Sparclet download
12083
 
12084
@cindex download to Sparclet
12085
Once connected to the Sparclet target,
12086
you can use the @value{GDBN}
12087
@code{load} command to download the file from the host to the target.
12088
The file name and load offset should be given as arguments to the @code{load}
12089
command.
12090
Since the file format is aout, the program must be loaded to the starting
12091
address.  You can use @code{objdump} to find out what this value is.  The load
12092
offset is an offset which is added to the VMA (virtual memory address)
12093
of each of the file's sections.
12094
For instance, if the program
12095
@file{prog} was linked to text address 0x1201000, with data at 0x12010160
12096
and bss at 0x12010170, in @value{GDBN}, type:
12097
 
12098
@smallexample
12099
(gdbslet) load prog 0x12010000
12100
Loading section .text, size 0xdb0 vma 0x12010000
12101
@end smallexample
12102
 
12103
If the code is loaded at a different address then what the program was linked
12104
to, you may need to use the @code{section} and @code{add-symbol-file} commands
12105
to tell @value{GDBN} where to map the symbol table.
12106
 
12107
@node Sparclet Execution
12108
@subsubsection Running and debugging
12109
 
12110
@cindex running and debugging Sparclet programs
12111
You can now begin debugging the task using @value{GDBN}'s execution control
12112
commands, @code{b}, @code{step}, @code{run}, etc.  See the @value{GDBN}
12113
manual for the list of commands.
12114
 
12115
@smallexample
12116
(gdbslet) b main
12117
Breakpoint 1 at 0x12010000: file prog.c, line 3.
12118
(gdbslet) run
12119
Starting program: prog
12120
Breakpoint 1, main (argc=1, argv=0xeffff21c) at prog.c:3
12121
3        char *symarg = 0;
12122
(gdbslet) step
12123
4        char *execarg = "hello!";
12124
(gdbslet)
12125
@end smallexample
12126
 
12127
@node Sparclite
12128
@subsection Fujitsu Sparclite
12129
 
12130
@table @code
12131
 
12132
@kindex target sparclite
12133
@item target sparclite @var{dev}
12134
Fujitsu sparclite boards, used only for the purpose of loading.
12135
You must use an additional command to debug the program.
12136
For example: target remote @var{dev} using @value{GDBN} standard
12137
remote protocol.
12138
 
12139
@end table
12140
 
12141
@node ST2000
12142
@subsection Tandem ST2000
12143
 
12144
@value{GDBN} may be used with a Tandem ST2000 phone switch, running Tandem's
12145
STDBUG protocol.
12146
 
12147
To connect your ST2000 to the host system, see the manufacturer's
12148
manual.  Once the ST2000 is physically attached, you can run:
12149
 
12150
@smallexample
12151
target st2000 @var{dev} @var{speed}
12152
@end smallexample
12153
 
12154
@noindent
12155
to establish it as your debugging environment.  @var{dev} is normally
12156
the name of a serial device, such as @file{/dev/ttya}, connected to the
12157
ST2000 via a serial line.  You can instead specify @var{dev} as a TCP
12158
connection (for example, to a serial line attached via a terminal
12159
concentrator) using the syntax @code{@var{hostname}:@var{portnumber}}.
12160
 
12161
The @code{load} and @code{attach} commands are @emph{not} defined for
12162
this target; you must load your program into the ST2000 as you normally
12163
would for standalone operation.  @value{GDBN} reads debugging information
12164
(such as symbols) from a separate, debugging version of the program
12165
available on your host computer.
12166
@c FIXME!! This is terribly vague; what little content is here is
12167
@c basically hearsay.
12168
 
12169
@cindex ST2000 auxiliary commands
12170
These auxiliary @value{GDBN} commands are available to help you with the ST2000
12171
environment:
12172
 
12173
@table @code
12174
@item st2000 @var{command}
12175
@kindex st2000 @var{cmd}
12176
@cindex STDBUG commands (ST2000)
12177
@cindex commands to STDBUG (ST2000)
12178
Send a @var{command} to the STDBUG monitor.  See the manufacturer's
12179
manual for available commands.
12180
 
12181
@item connect
12182
@cindex connect (to STDBUG)
12183
Connect the controlling terminal to the STDBUG command monitor.  When
12184
you are done interacting with STDBUG, typing either of two character
12185
sequences gets you back to the @value{GDBN} command prompt:
12186
@kbd{@key{RET}~.} (Return, followed by tilde and period) or
12187
@kbd{@key{RET}~@key{C-d}} (Return, followed by tilde and control-D).
12188
@end table
12189
 
12190
@node Z8000
12191
@subsection Zilog Z8000
12192
 
12193
@cindex Z8000
12194
@cindex simulator, Z8000
12195
@cindex Zilog Z8000 simulator
12196
 
12197
When configured for debugging Zilog Z8000 targets, @value{GDBN} includes
12198
a Z8000 simulator.
12199
 
12200
For the Z8000 family, @samp{target sim} simulates either the Z8002 (the
12201
unsegmented variant of the Z8000 architecture) or the Z8001 (the
12202
segmented variant).  The simulator recognizes which architecture is
12203
appropriate by inspecting the object code.
12204
 
12205
@table @code
12206
@item target sim @var{args}
12207
@kindex sim
12208
@kindex target sim@r{, with Z8000}
12209
Debug programs on a simulated CPU.  If the simulator supports setup
12210
options, specify them via @var{args}.
12211
@end table
12212
 
12213
@noindent
12214
After specifying this target, you can debug programs for the simulated
12215
CPU in the same style as programs for your host computer; use the
12216
@code{file} command to load a new program image, the @code{run} command
12217
to run your program, and so on.
12218
 
12219
As well as making available all the usual machine registers
12220
(@pxref{Registers, ,Registers}), the Z8000 simulator provides three
12221
additional items of information as specially named registers:
12222
 
12223
@table @code
12224
 
12225
@item cycles
12226
Counts clock-ticks in the simulator.
12227
 
12228
@item insts
12229
Counts instructions run in the simulator.
12230
 
12231
@item time
12232
Execution time in 60ths of a second.
12233
 
12234
@end table
12235
 
12236
You can refer to these values in @value{GDBN} expressions with the usual
12237
conventions; for example, @w{@samp{b fputc if $cycles>5000}} sets a
12238
conditional breakpoint that suspends only after at least 5000
12239
simulated clock ticks.
12240
 
12241
@node Architectures
12242
@section Architectures
12243
 
12244
This section describes characteristics of architectures that affect
12245
all uses of @value{GDBN} with the architecture, both native and cross.
12246
 
12247
@menu
12248
* A29K::
12249
* Alpha::
12250
* MIPS::
12251
@end menu
12252
 
12253
@node A29K
12254
@subsection A29K
12255
 
12256
@table @code
12257
 
12258
@kindex set rstack_high_address
12259
@cindex AMD 29K register stack
12260
@cindex register stack, AMD29K
12261
@item set rstack_high_address @var{address}
12262
On AMD 29000 family processors, registers are saved in a separate
12263
@dfn{register stack}.  There is no way for @value{GDBN} to determine the
12264
extent of this stack.  Normally, @value{GDBN} just assumes that the
12265
stack is ``large enough''.  This may result in @value{GDBN} referencing
12266
memory locations that do not exist.  If necessary, you can get around
12267
this problem by specifying the ending address of the register stack with
12268
the @code{set rstack_high_address} command.  The argument should be an
12269
address, which you probably want to precede with @samp{0x} to specify in
12270
hexadecimal.
12271
 
12272
@kindex show rstack_high_address
12273
@item show rstack_high_address
12274
Display the current limit of the register stack, on AMD 29000 family
12275
processors.
12276
 
12277
@end table
12278
 
12279
@node Alpha
12280
@subsection Alpha
12281
 
12282
See the following section.
12283
 
12284
@node MIPS
12285
@subsection MIPS
12286
 
12287
@cindex stack on Alpha
12288
@cindex stack on MIPS
12289
@cindex Alpha stack
12290
@cindex MIPS stack
12291
Alpha- and MIPS-based computers use an unusual stack frame, which
12292
sometimes requires @value{GDBN} to search backward in the object code to
12293
find the beginning of a function.
12294
 
12295
@cindex response time, MIPS debugging
12296
To improve response time (especially for embedded applications, where
12297
@value{GDBN} may be restricted to a slow serial line for this search)
12298
you may want to limit the size of this search, using one of these
12299
commands:
12300
 
12301
@table @code
12302
@cindex @code{heuristic-fence-post} (Alpha, MIPS)
12303
@item set heuristic-fence-post @var{limit}
12304
Restrict @value{GDBN} to examining at most @var{limit} bytes in its
12305
search for the beginning of a function.  A value of @var{0} (the
12306
default) means there is no limit.  However, except for @var{0}, the
12307
larger the limit the more bytes @code{heuristic-fence-post} must search
12308
and therefore the longer it takes to run.
12309
 
12310
@item show heuristic-fence-post
12311
Display the current limit.
12312
@end table
12313
 
12314
@noindent
12315
These commands are available @emph{only} when @value{GDBN} is configured
12316
for debugging programs on Alpha or MIPS processors.
12317
 
12318
 
12319
@node Controlling GDB
12320
@chapter Controlling @value{GDBN}
12321
 
12322
You can alter the way @value{GDBN} interacts with you by using the
12323
@code{set} command.  For commands controlling how @value{GDBN} displays
12324
data, see @ref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.  Other settings are
12325
described here.
12326
 
12327
@menu
12328
* Prompt::                      Prompt
12329
* Editing::                     Command editing
12330
* History::                     Command history
12331
* Screen Size::                 Screen size
12332
* Numbers::                     Numbers
12333
* Messages/Warnings::           Optional warnings and messages
12334
* Debugging Output::            Optional messages about internal happenings
12335
@end menu
12336
 
12337
@node Prompt
12338
@section Prompt
12339
 
12340
@cindex prompt
12341
 
12342
@value{GDBN} indicates its readiness to read a command by printing a string
12343
called the @dfn{prompt}.  This string is normally @samp{(@value{GDBP})}.  You
12344
can change the prompt string with the @code{set prompt} command.  For
12345
instance, when debugging @value{GDBN} with @value{GDBN}, it is useful to change
12346
the prompt in one of the @value{GDBN} sessions so that you can always tell
12347
which one you are talking to.
12348
 
12349
@emph{Note:}  @code{set prompt} does not add a space for you after the
12350
prompt you set.  This allows you to set a prompt which ends in a space
12351
or a prompt that does not.
12352
 
12353
@table @code
12354
@kindex set prompt
12355
@item set prompt @var{newprompt}
12356
Directs @value{GDBN} to use @var{newprompt} as its prompt string henceforth.
12357
 
12358
@kindex show prompt
12359
@item show prompt
12360
Prints a line of the form: @samp{Gdb's prompt is: @var{your-prompt}}
12361
@end table
12362
 
12363
@node Editing
12364
@section Command editing
12365
@cindex readline
12366
@cindex command line editing
12367
 
12368
@value{GDBN} reads its input commands via the @dfn{readline} interface.  This
12369
@sc{gnu} library provides consistent behavior for programs which provide a
12370
command line interface to the user.  Advantages are @sc{gnu} Emacs-style
12371
or @dfn{vi}-style inline editing of commands, @code{csh}-like history
12372
substitution, and a storage and recall of command history across
12373
debugging sessions.
12374
 
12375
You may control the behavior of command line editing in @value{GDBN} with the
12376
command @code{set}.
12377
 
12378
@table @code
12379
@kindex set editing
12380
@cindex editing
12381
@item set editing
12382
@itemx set editing on
12383
Enable command line editing (enabled by default).
12384
 
12385
@item set editing off
12386
Disable command line editing.
12387
 
12388
@kindex show editing
12389
@item show editing
12390
Show whether command line editing is enabled.
12391
@end table
12392
 
12393
@node History
12394
@section Command history
12395
 
12396
@value{GDBN} can keep track of the commands you type during your
12397
debugging sessions, so that you can be certain of precisely what
12398
happened.  Use these commands to manage the @value{GDBN} command
12399
history facility.
12400
 
12401
@table @code
12402
@cindex history substitution
12403
@cindex history file
12404
@kindex set history filename
12405
@kindex GDBHISTFILE
12406
@item set history filename @var{fname}
12407
Set the name of the @value{GDBN} command history file to @var{fname}.
12408
This is the file where @value{GDBN} reads an initial command history
12409
list, and where it writes the command history from this session when it
12410
exits.  You can access this list through history expansion or through
12411
the history command editing characters listed below.  This file defaults
12412
to the value of the environment variable @code{GDBHISTFILE}, or to
12413
@file{./.gdb_history} (@file{./_gdb_history} on MS-DOS) if this variable
12414
is not set.
12415
 
12416
@cindex history save
12417
@kindex set history save
12418
@item set history save
12419
@itemx set history save on
12420
Record command history in a file, whose name may be specified with the
12421
@code{set history filename} command.  By default, this option is disabled.
12422
 
12423
@item set history save off
12424
Stop recording command history in a file.
12425
 
12426
@cindex history size
12427
@kindex set history size
12428
@item set history size @var{size}
12429
Set the number of commands which @value{GDBN} keeps in its history list.
12430
This defaults to the value of the environment variable
12431
@code{HISTSIZE}, or to 256 if this variable is not set.
12432
@end table
12433
 
12434
@cindex history expansion
12435
History expansion assigns special meaning to the character @kbd{!}.
12436
@ifset have-readline-appendices
12437
@xref{Event Designators}.
12438
@end ifset
12439
 
12440
Since @kbd{!} is also the logical not operator in C, history expansion
12441
is off by default. If you decide to enable history expansion with the
12442
@code{set history expansion on} command, you may sometimes need to
12443
follow @kbd{!} (when it is used as logical not, in an expression) with
12444
a space or a tab to prevent it from being expanded.  The readline
12445
history facilities do not attempt substitution on the strings
12446
@kbd{!=} and @kbd{!(}, even when history expansion is enabled.
12447
 
12448
The commands to control history expansion are:
12449
 
12450
@table @code
12451
@kindex set history expansion
12452
@item set history expansion on
12453
@itemx set history expansion
12454
Enable history expansion.  History expansion is off by default.
12455
 
12456
@item set history expansion off
12457
Disable history expansion.
12458
 
12459
The readline code comes with more complete documentation of
12460
editing and history expansion features.  Users unfamiliar with @sc{gnu} Emacs
12461
or @code{vi} may wish to read it.
12462
@ifset have-readline-appendices
12463
@xref{Command Line Editing}.
12464
@end ifset
12465
 
12466
@c @group
12467
@kindex show history
12468
@item show history
12469
@itemx show history filename
12470
@itemx show history save
12471
@itemx show history size
12472
@itemx show history expansion
12473
These commands display the state of the @value{GDBN} history parameters.
12474
@code{show history} by itself displays all four states.
12475
@c @end group
12476
@end table
12477
 
12478
@table @code
12479
@kindex shows
12480
@item show commands
12481
Display the last ten commands in the command history.
12482
 
12483
@item show commands @var{n}
12484
Print ten commands centered on command number @var{n}.
12485
 
12486
@item show commands +
12487
Print ten commands just after the commands last printed.
12488
@end table
12489
 
12490
@node Screen Size
12491
@section Screen size
12492
@cindex size of screen
12493
@cindex pauses in output
12494
 
12495
Certain commands to @value{GDBN} may produce large amounts of
12496
information output to the screen.  To help you read all of it,
12497
@value{GDBN} pauses and asks you for input at the end of each page of
12498
output.  Type @key{RET} when you want to continue the output, or @kbd{q}
12499
to discard the remaining output.  Also, the screen width setting
12500
determines when to wrap lines of output.  Depending on what is being
12501
printed, @value{GDBN} tries to break the line at a readable place,
12502
rather than simply letting it overflow onto the following line.
12503
 
12504
Normally @value{GDBN} knows the size of the screen from the terminal
12505
driver software.  For example, on Unix @value{GDBN} uses the termcap data base
12506
together with the value of the @code{TERM} environment variable and the
12507
@code{stty rows} and @code{stty cols} settings.  If this is not correct,
12508
you can override it with the @code{set height} and @code{set
12509
width} commands:
12510
 
12511
@table @code
12512
@kindex set height
12513
@kindex set width
12514
@kindex show width
12515
@kindex show height
12516
@item set height @var{lpp}
12517
@itemx show height
12518
@itemx set width @var{cpl}
12519
@itemx show width
12520
These @code{set} commands specify a screen height of @var{lpp} lines and
12521
a screen width of @var{cpl} characters.  The associated @code{show}
12522
commands display the current settings.
12523
 
12524
If you specify a height of zero lines, @value{GDBN} does not pause during
12525
output no matter how long the output is.  This is useful if output is to a
12526
file or to an editor buffer.
12527
 
12528
Likewise, you can specify @samp{set width 0} to prevent @value{GDBN}
12529
from wrapping its output.
12530
@end table
12531
 
12532
@node Numbers
12533
@section Numbers
12534
@cindex number representation
12535
@cindex entering numbers
12536
 
12537
You can always enter numbers in octal, decimal, or hexadecimal in
12538
@value{GDBN} by the usual conventions: octal numbers begin with
12539
@samp{0}, decimal numbers end with @samp{.}, and hexadecimal numbers
12540
begin with @samp{0x}.  Numbers that begin with none of these are, by
12541
default, entered in base 10; likewise, the default display for
12542
numbers---when no particular format is specified---is base 10.  You can
12543
change the default base for both input and output with the @code{set
12544
radix} command.
12545
 
12546
@table @code
12547
@kindex set input-radix
12548
@item set input-radix @var{base}
12549
Set the default base for numeric input.  Supported choices
12550
for @var{base} are decimal 8, 10, or 16.  @var{base} must itself be
12551
specified either unambiguously or using the current default radix; for
12552
example, any of
12553
 
12554
@smallexample
12555
set radix 012
12556
set radix 10.
12557
set radix 0xa
12558
@end smallexample
12559
 
12560
@noindent
12561
sets the base to decimal.  On the other hand, @samp{set radix 10}
12562
leaves the radix unchanged no matter what it was.
12563
 
12564
@kindex set output-radix
12565
@item set output-radix @var{base}
12566
Set the default base for numeric display.  Supported choices
12567
for @var{base} are decimal 8, 10, or 16.  @var{base} must itself be
12568
specified either unambiguously or using the current default radix.
12569
 
12570
@kindex show input-radix
12571
@item show input-radix
12572
Display the current default base for numeric input.
12573
 
12574
@kindex show output-radix
12575
@item show output-radix
12576
Display the current default base for numeric display.
12577
@end table
12578
 
12579
@node Messages/Warnings
12580
@section Optional warnings and messages
12581
 
12582
By default, @value{GDBN} is silent about its inner workings.  If you are
12583
running on a slow machine, you may want to use the @code{set verbose}
12584
command.  This makes @value{GDBN} tell you when it does a lengthy
12585
internal operation, so you will not think it has crashed.
12586
 
12587
Currently, the messages controlled by @code{set verbose} are those
12588
which announce that the symbol table for a source file is being read;
12589
see @code{symbol-file} in @ref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}.
12590
 
12591
@table @code
12592
@kindex set verbose
12593
@item set verbose on
12594
Enables @value{GDBN} output of certain informational messages.
12595
 
12596
@item set verbose off
12597
Disables @value{GDBN} output of certain informational messages.
12598
 
12599
@kindex show verbose
12600
@item show verbose
12601
Displays whether @code{set verbose} is on or off.
12602
@end table
12603
 
12604
By default, if @value{GDBN} encounters bugs in the symbol table of an
12605
object file, it is silent; but if you are debugging a compiler, you may
12606
find this information useful (@pxref{Symbol Errors, ,Errors reading
12607
symbol files}).
12608
 
12609
@table @code
12610
 
12611
@kindex set complaints
12612
@item set complaints @var{limit}
12613
Permits @value{GDBN} to output @var{limit} complaints about each type of
12614
unusual symbols before becoming silent about the problem.  Set
12615
@var{limit} to zero to suppress all complaints; set it to a large number
12616
to prevent complaints from being suppressed.
12617
 
12618
@kindex show complaints
12619
@item show complaints
12620
Displays how many symbol complaints @value{GDBN} is permitted to produce.
12621
 
12622
@end table
12623
 
12624
By default, @value{GDBN} is cautious, and asks what sometimes seems to be a
12625
lot of stupid questions to confirm certain commands.  For example, if
12626
you try to run a program which is already running:
12627
 
12628
@smallexample
12629
(@value{GDBP}) run
12630
The program being debugged has been started already.
12631
Start it from the beginning? (y or n)
12632
@end smallexample
12633
 
12634
If you are willing to unflinchingly face the consequences of your own
12635
commands, you can disable this ``feature'':
12636
 
12637
@table @code
12638
 
12639
@kindex set confirm
12640
@cindex flinching
12641
@cindex confirmation
12642
@cindex stupid questions
12643
@item set confirm off
12644
Disables confirmation requests.
12645
 
12646
@item set confirm on
12647
Enables confirmation requests (the default).
12648
 
12649
@kindex show confirm
12650
@item show confirm
12651
Displays state of confirmation requests.
12652
 
12653
@end table
12654
 
12655
@node Debugging Output
12656
@section Optional messages about internal happenings
12657
@table @code
12658
@kindex set debug arch
12659
@item set debug arch
12660
Turns on or off display of gdbarch debugging info. The default is off
12661
@kindex show debug arch
12662
@item show debug arch
12663
Displays the current state of displaying gdbarch debugging info.
12664
@kindex set debug event
12665
@item set debug event
12666
Turns on or off display of @value{GDBN} event debugging info. The
12667
default is off.
12668
@kindex show debug event
12669
@item show debug event
12670
Displays the current state of displaying @value{GDBN} event debugging
12671
info.
12672
@kindex set debug expression
12673
@item set debug expression
12674
Turns on or off display of @value{GDBN} expression debugging info. The
12675
default is off.
12676
@kindex show debug expression
12677
@item show debug expression
12678
Displays the current state of displaying @value{GDBN} expression
12679
debugging info.
12680
@kindex set debug overload
12681
@item set debug overload
12682
Turns on or off display of @value{GDBN} C@t{++} overload debugging
12683
info. This includes info such as ranking of functions, etc. The default
12684
is off.
12685
@kindex show debug overload
12686
@item show debug overload
12687
Displays the current state of displaying @value{GDBN} C@t{++} overload
12688
debugging info.
12689
@kindex set debug remote
12690
@cindex packets, reporting on stdout
12691
@cindex serial connections, debugging
12692
@item set debug remote
12693
Turns on or off display of reports on all packets sent back and forth across
12694
the serial line to the remote machine.  The info is printed on the
12695
@value{GDBN} standard output stream. The default is off.
12696
@kindex show debug remote
12697
@item show debug remote
12698
Displays the state of display of remote packets.
12699
@kindex set debug serial
12700
@item set debug serial
12701
Turns on or off display of @value{GDBN} serial debugging info. The
12702
default is off.
12703
@kindex show debug serial
12704
@item show debug serial
12705
Displays the current state of displaying @value{GDBN} serial debugging
12706
info.
12707
@kindex set debug target
12708
@item set debug target
12709
Turns on or off display of @value{GDBN} target debugging info. This info
12710
includes what is going on at the target level of GDB, as it happens. The
12711
default is off.
12712
@kindex show debug target
12713
@item show debug target
12714
Displays the current state of displaying @value{GDBN} target debugging
12715
info.
12716
@kindex set debug varobj
12717
@item set debug varobj
12718
Turns on or off display of @value{GDBN} variable object debugging
12719
info. The default is off.
12720
@kindex show debug varobj
12721
@item show debug varobj
12722
Displays the current state of displaying @value{GDBN} variable object
12723
debugging info.
12724
@end table
12725
 
12726
@node Sequences
12727
@chapter Canned Sequences of Commands
12728
 
12729
Aside from breakpoint commands (@pxref{Break Commands, ,Breakpoint
12730
command lists}), @value{GDBN} provides two ways to store sequences of
12731
commands for execution as a unit: user-defined commands and command
12732
files.
12733
 
12734
@menu
12735
* Define::                      User-defined commands
12736
* Hooks::                       User-defined command hooks
12737
* Command Files::               Command files
12738
* Output::                      Commands for controlled output
12739
@end menu
12740
 
12741
@node Define
12742
@section User-defined commands
12743
 
12744
@cindex user-defined command
12745
A @dfn{user-defined command} is a sequence of @value{GDBN} commands to
12746
which you assign a new name as a command.  This is done with the
12747
@code{define} command.  User commands may accept up to 10 arguments
12748
separated by whitespace.  Arguments are accessed within the user command
12749
via @var{$arg0@dots{}$arg9}.  A trivial example:
12750
 
12751
@smallexample
12752
define adder
12753
  print $arg0 + $arg1 + $arg2
12754
@end smallexample
12755
 
12756
@noindent
12757
To execute the command use:
12758
 
12759
@smallexample
12760
adder 1 2 3
12761
@end smallexample
12762
 
12763
@noindent
12764
This defines the command @code{adder}, which prints the sum of
12765
its three arguments.  Note the arguments are text substitutions, so they may
12766
reference variables, use complex expressions, or even perform inferior
12767
functions calls.
12768
 
12769
@table @code
12770
 
12771
@kindex define
12772
@item define @var{commandname}
12773
Define a command named @var{commandname}.  If there is already a command
12774
by that name, you are asked to confirm that you want to redefine it.
12775
 
12776
The definition of the command is made up of other @value{GDBN} command lines,
12777
which are given following the @code{define} command.  The end of these
12778
commands is marked by a line containing @code{end}.
12779
 
12780
@kindex if
12781
@kindex else
12782
@item if
12783
Takes a single argument, which is an expression to evaluate.
12784
It is followed by a series of commands that are executed
12785
only if the expression is true (nonzero).
12786
There can then optionally be a line @code{else}, followed
12787
by a series of commands that are only executed if the expression
12788
was false.  The end of the list is marked by a line containing @code{end}.
12789
 
12790
@kindex while
12791
@item while
12792
The syntax is similar to @code{if}: the command takes a single argument,
12793
which is an expression to evaluate, and must be followed by the commands to
12794
execute, one per line, terminated by an @code{end}.
12795
The commands are executed repeatedly as long as the expression
12796
evaluates to true.
12797
 
12798
@kindex document
12799
@item document @var{commandname}
12800
Document the user-defined command @var{commandname}, so that it can be
12801
accessed by @code{help}.  The command @var{commandname} must already be
12802
defined.  This command reads lines of documentation just as @code{define}
12803
reads the lines of the command definition, ending with @code{end}.
12804
After the @code{document} command is finished, @code{help} on command
12805
@var{commandname} displays the documentation you have written.
12806
 
12807
You may use the @code{document} command again to change the
12808
documentation of a command.  Redefining the command with @code{define}
12809
does not change the documentation.
12810
 
12811
@kindex help user-defined
12812
@item help user-defined
12813
List all user-defined commands, with the first line of the documentation
12814
(if any) for each.
12815
 
12816
@kindex show user
12817
@item show user
12818
@itemx show user @var{commandname}
12819
Display the @value{GDBN} commands used to define @var{commandname} (but
12820
not its documentation).  If no @var{commandname} is given, display the
12821
definitions for all user-defined commands.
12822
 
12823
@kindex show max-user-call-depth
12824
@kindex set max-user-call-depth
12825
@item show max-user-call-depth
12826
@itemx set max-user-call-depth
12827
The value of @code{max-user-call-depth} controls how many recursion
12828
levels are allowed in user-defined commands before GDB suspects an
12829
infinite recursion and aborts the command.
12830
 
12831
@end table
12832
 
12833
When user-defined commands are executed, the
12834
commands of the definition are not printed.  An error in any command
12835
stops execution of the user-defined command.
12836
 
12837
If used interactively, commands that would ask for confirmation proceed
12838
without asking when used inside a user-defined command.  Many @value{GDBN}
12839
commands that normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the
12840
messages when used in a user-defined command.
12841
 
12842
@node Hooks
12843
@section User-defined command hooks
12844
@cindex command hooks
12845
@cindex hooks, for commands
12846
@cindex hooks, pre-command
12847
 
12848
@kindex hook
12849
@kindex hook-
12850
You may define @dfn{hooks}, which are a special kind of user-defined
12851
command.  Whenever you run the command @samp{foo}, if the user-defined
12852
command @samp{hook-foo} exists, it is executed (with no arguments)
12853
before that command.
12854
 
12855
@cindex hooks, post-command
12856
@kindex hookpost
12857
@kindex hookpost-
12858
A hook may also be defined which is run after the command you executed.
12859
Whenever you run the command @samp{foo}, if the user-defined command
12860
@samp{hookpost-foo} exists, it is executed (with no arguments) after
12861
that command.  Post-execution hooks may exist simultaneously with
12862
pre-execution hooks, for the same command.
12863
 
12864
It is valid for a hook to call the command which it hooks.  If this
12865
occurs, the hook is not re-executed, thereby avoiding infinte recursion.
12866
 
12867
@c It would be nice if hookpost could be passed a parameter indicating
12868
@c if the command it hooks executed properly or not.  FIXME!
12869
 
12870
@kindex stop@r{, a pseudo-command}
12871
In addition, a pseudo-command, @samp{stop} exists.  Defining
12872
(@samp{hook-stop}) makes the associated commands execute every time
12873
execution stops in your program: before breakpoint commands are run,
12874
displays are printed, or the stack frame is printed.
12875
 
12876
For example, to ignore @code{SIGALRM} signals while
12877
single-stepping, but treat them normally during normal execution,
12878
you could define:
12879
 
12880
@smallexample
12881
define hook-stop
12882
handle SIGALRM nopass
12883
end
12884
 
12885
define hook-run
12886
handle SIGALRM pass
12887
end
12888
 
12889
define hook-continue
12890
handle SIGLARM pass
12891
end
12892
@end smallexample
12893
 
12894
As a further example, to hook at the begining and end of the @code{echo}
12895
command, and to add extra text to the beginning and end of the message,
12896
you could define:
12897
 
12898
@smallexample
12899
define hook-echo
12900
echo <<<---
12901
end
12902
 
12903
define hookpost-echo
12904
echo --->>>\n
12905
end
12906
 
12907
(@value{GDBP}) echo Hello World
12908
<<<---Hello World--->>>
12909
(@value{GDBP})
12910
 
12911
@end smallexample
12912
 
12913
You can define a hook for any single-word command in @value{GDBN}, but
12914
not for command aliases; you should define a hook for the basic command
12915
name, e.g.  @code{backtrace} rather than @code{bt}.
12916
@c FIXME!  So how does Joe User discover whether a command is an alias
12917
@c or not?
12918
If an error occurs during the execution of your hook, execution of
12919
@value{GDBN} commands stops and @value{GDBN} issues a prompt
12920
(before the command that you actually typed had a chance to run).
12921
 
12922
If you try to define a hook which does not match any known command, you
12923
get a warning from the @code{define} command.
12924
 
12925
@node Command Files
12926
@section Command files
12927
 
12928
@cindex command files
12929
A command file for @value{GDBN} is a file of lines that are @value{GDBN}
12930
commands.  Comments (lines starting with @kbd{#}) may also be included.
12931
An empty line in a command file does nothing; it does not mean to repeat
12932
the last command, as it would from the terminal.
12933
 
12934
@cindex init file
12935
@cindex @file{.gdbinit}
12936
@cindex @file{gdb.ini}
12937
When you start @value{GDBN}, it automatically executes commands from its
12938
@dfn{init files}, normally called @file{.gdbinit}@footnote{The DJGPP
12939
port of @value{GDBN} uses the name @file{gdb.ini} instead, due to the
12940
limitations of file names imposed by DOS filesystems.}.
12941
During startup, @value{GDBN} does the following:
12942
 
12943
@enumerate
12944
@item
12945
Reads the init file (if any) in your home directory@footnote{On
12946
DOS/Windows systems, the home directory is the one pointed to by the
12947
@code{HOME} environment variable.}.
12948
 
12949
@item
12950
Processes command line options and operands.
12951
 
12952
@item
12953
Reads the init file (if any) in the current working directory.
12954
 
12955
@item
12956
Reads command files specified by the @samp{-x} option.
12957
@end enumerate
12958
 
12959
The init file in your home directory can set options (such as @samp{set
12960
complaints}) that affect subsequent processing of command line options
12961
and operands.  Init files are not executed if you use the @samp{-nx}
12962
option (@pxref{Mode Options, ,Choosing modes}).
12963
 
12964
@cindex init file name
12965
On some configurations of @value{GDBN}, the init file is known by a
12966
different name (these are typically environments where a specialized
12967
form of @value{GDBN} may need to coexist with other forms, hence a
12968
different name for the specialized version's init file).  These are the
12969
environments with special init file names:
12970
 
12971
@cindex @file{.vxgdbinit}
12972
@itemize @bullet
12973
@item
12974
VxWorks (Wind River Systems real-time OS): @file{.vxgdbinit}
12975
 
12976
@cindex @file{.os68gdbinit}
12977
@item
12978
OS68K (Enea Data Systems real-time OS): @file{.os68gdbinit}
12979
 
12980
@cindex @file{.esgdbinit}
12981
@item
12982
ES-1800 (Ericsson Telecom AB M68000 emulator): @file{.esgdbinit}
12983
@end itemize
12984
 
12985
You can also request the execution of a command file with the
12986
@code{source} command:
12987
 
12988
@table @code
12989
@kindex source
12990
@item source @var{filename}
12991
Execute the command file @var{filename}.
12992
@end table
12993
 
12994
The lines in a command file are executed sequentially.  They are not
12995
printed as they are executed.  An error in any command terminates
12996
execution of the command file and control is returned to the console.
12997
 
12998
Commands that would ask for confirmation if used interactively proceed
12999
without asking when used in a command file.  Many @value{GDBN} commands that
13000
normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the messages
13001
when called from command files.
13002
 
13003
@value{GDBN} also accepts command input from standard input.  In this
13004
mode, normal output goes to standard output and error output goes to
13005
standard error.  Errors in a command file supplied on standard input do
13006
not terminate execution of the command file --- execution continues with
13007
the next command.
13008
 
13009
@smallexample
13010
gdb < cmds > log 2>&1
13011
@end smallexample
13012
 
13013
(The syntax above will vary depending on the shell used.) This example
13014
will execute commands from the file @file{cmds}. All output and errors
13015
would be directed to @file{log}.
13016
 
13017
@node Output
13018
@section Commands for controlled output
13019
 
13020
During the execution of a command file or a user-defined command, normal
13021
@value{GDBN} output is suppressed; the only output that appears is what is
13022
explicitly printed by the commands in the definition.  This section
13023
describes three commands useful for generating exactly the output you
13024
want.
13025
 
13026
@table @code
13027
@kindex echo
13028
@item echo @var{text}
13029
@c I do not consider backslash-space a standard C escape sequence
13030
@c because it is not in ANSI.
13031
Print @var{text}.  Nonprinting characters can be included in
13032
@var{text} using C escape sequences, such as @samp{\n} to print a
13033
newline.  @strong{No newline is printed unless you specify one.}
13034
In addition to the standard C escape sequences, a backslash followed
13035
by a space stands for a space.  This is useful for displaying a
13036
string with spaces at the beginning or the end, since leading and
13037
trailing spaces are otherwise trimmed from all arguments.
13038
To print @samp{@w{ }and foo =@w{ }}, use the command
13039
@samp{echo \@w{ }and foo = \@w{ }}.
13040
 
13041
A backslash at the end of @var{text} can be used, as in C, to continue
13042
the command onto subsequent lines.  For example,
13043
 
13044
@smallexample
13045
echo This is some text\n\
13046
which is continued\n\
13047
onto several lines.\n
13048
@end smallexample
13049
 
13050
produces the same output as
13051
 
13052
@smallexample
13053
echo This is some text\n
13054
echo which is continued\n
13055
echo onto several lines.\n
13056
@end smallexample
13057
 
13058
@kindex output
13059
@item output @var{expression}
13060
Print the value of @var{expression} and nothing but that value: no
13061
newlines, no @samp{$@var{nn} = }.  The value is not entered in the
13062
value history either.  @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}, for more information
13063
on expressions.
13064
 
13065
@item output/@var{fmt} @var{expression}
13066
Print the value of @var{expression} in format @var{fmt}.  You can use
13067
the same formats as for @code{print}.  @xref{Output Formats,,Output
13068
formats}, for more information.
13069
 
13070
@kindex printf
13071
@item printf @var{string}, @var{expressions}@dots{}
13072
Print the values of the @var{expressions} under the control of
13073
@var{string}.  The @var{expressions} are separated by commas and may be
13074
either numbers or pointers.  Their values are printed as specified by
13075
@var{string}, exactly as if your program were to execute the C
13076
subroutine
13077
@c FIXME: the above implies that at least all ANSI C formats are
13078
@c supported, but it isn't true: %E and %G don't work (or so it seems).
13079
@c Either this is a bug, or the manual should document what formats are
13080
@c supported.
13081
 
13082
@smallexample
13083
printf (@var{string}, @var{expressions}@dots{});
13084
@end smallexample
13085
 
13086
For example, you can print two values in hex like this:
13087
 
13088
@smallexample
13089
printf "foo, bar-foo = 0x%x, 0x%x\n", foo, bar-foo
13090
@end smallexample
13091
 
13092
The only backslash-escape sequences that you can use in the format
13093
string are the simple ones that consist of backslash followed by a
13094
letter.
13095
@end table
13096
 
13097
@node TUI
13098
@chapter @value{GDBN} Text User Interface
13099
@cindex TUI
13100
 
13101
@menu
13102
* TUI Overview::                TUI overview
13103
* TUI Keys::                    TUI key bindings
13104
* TUI Single Key Mode::         TUI single key mode
13105
* TUI Commands::                TUI specific commands
13106
* TUI Configuration::           TUI configuration variables
13107
@end menu
13108
 
13109
The @value{GDBN} Text User Interface, TUI in short,
13110
is a terminal interface which uses the @code{curses} library
13111
to show the source file, the assembly output, the program registers
13112
and @value{GDBN} commands in separate text windows.
13113
The TUI is available only when @value{GDBN} is configured
13114
with the @code{--enable-tui} configure option (@pxref{Configure Options}).
13115
 
13116
@node TUI Overview
13117
@section TUI overview
13118
 
13119
The TUI has two display modes that can be switched while
13120
@value{GDBN} runs:
13121
 
13122
@itemize @bullet
13123
@item
13124
A curses (or TUI) mode in which it displays several text
13125
windows on the terminal.
13126
 
13127
@item
13128
A standard mode which corresponds to the @value{GDBN} configured without
13129
the TUI.
13130
@end itemize
13131
 
13132
In the TUI mode, @value{GDBN} can display several text window
13133
on the terminal:
13134
 
13135
@table @emph
13136
@item command
13137
This window is the @value{GDBN} command window with the @value{GDBN}
13138
prompt and the @value{GDBN} outputs.  The @value{GDBN} input is still
13139
managed using readline but through the TUI.  The @emph{command}
13140
window is always visible.
13141
 
13142
@item source
13143
The source window shows the source file of the program.  The current
13144
line as well as active breakpoints are displayed in this window.
13145
 
13146
@item assembly
13147
The assembly window shows the disassembly output of the program.
13148
 
13149
@item register
13150
This window shows the processor registers.  It detects when
13151
a register is changed and when this is the case, registers that have
13152
changed are highlighted.
13153
 
13154
@end table
13155
 
13156
The source and assembly windows show the current program position
13157
by highlighting the current line and marking them with the @samp{>} marker.
13158
Breakpoints are also indicated with two markers.  A first one
13159
indicates the breakpoint type:
13160
 
13161
@table @code
13162
@item B
13163
Breakpoint which was hit at least once.
13164
 
13165
@item b
13166
Breakpoint which was never hit.
13167
 
13168
@item H
13169
Hardware breakpoint which was hit at least once.
13170
 
13171
@item h
13172
Hardware breakpoint which was never hit.
13173
 
13174
@end table
13175
 
13176
The second marker indicates whether the breakpoint is enabled or not:
13177
 
13178
@table @code
13179
@item +
13180
Breakpoint is enabled.
13181
 
13182
@item -
13183
Breakpoint is disabled.
13184
 
13185
@end table
13186
 
13187
The source, assembly and register windows are attached to the thread
13188
and the frame position.  They are updated when the current thread
13189
changes, when the frame changes or when the program counter changes.
13190
These three windows are arranged by the TUI according to several
13191
layouts.  The layout defines which of these three windows are visible.
13192
The following layouts are available:
13193
 
13194
@itemize @bullet
13195
@item
13196
source
13197
 
13198
@item
13199
assembly
13200
 
13201
@item
13202
source and assembly
13203
 
13204
@item
13205
source and registers
13206
 
13207
@item
13208
assembly and registers
13209
 
13210
@end itemize
13211
 
13212
On top of the command window a status line gives various information
13213
concerning the current process begin debugged.  The status line is
13214
updated when the information it shows changes.  The following fields
13215
are displayed:
13216
 
13217
@table @emph
13218
@item target
13219
Indicates the current gdb target
13220
(@pxref{Targets, ,Specifying a Debugging Target}).
13221
 
13222
@item process
13223
Gives information about the current process or thread number.
13224
When no process is being debugged, this field is set to @code{No process}.
13225
 
13226
@item function
13227
Gives the current function name for the selected frame.
13228
The name is demangled if demangling is turned on (@pxref{Print Settings}).
13229
When there is no symbol corresponding to the current program counter
13230
the string @code{??} is displayed.
13231
 
13232
@item line
13233
Indicates the current line number for the selected frame.
13234
When the current line number is not known the string @code{??} is displayed.
13235
 
13236
@item pc
13237
Indicates the current program counter address.
13238
 
13239
@end table
13240
 
13241
@node TUI Keys
13242
@section TUI Key Bindings
13243
@cindex TUI key bindings
13244
 
13245
The TUI installs several key bindings in the readline keymaps
13246
(@pxref{Command Line Editing}).
13247
They allow to leave or enter in the TUI mode or they operate
13248
directly on the TUI layout and windows.  The TUI also provides
13249
a @emph{SingleKey} keymap which binds several keys directly to
13250
@value{GDBN} commands.  The following key bindings
13251
are installed for both TUI mode and the @value{GDBN} standard mode.
13252
 
13253
@table @kbd
13254
@kindex C-x C-a
13255
@item C-x C-a
13256
@kindex C-x a
13257
@itemx C-x a
13258
@kindex C-x A
13259
@itemx C-x A
13260
Enter or leave the TUI mode.  When the TUI mode is left,
13261
the curses window management is left and @value{GDBN} operates using
13262
its standard mode writing on the terminal directly.  When the TUI
13263
mode is entered, the control is given back to the curses windows.
13264
The screen is then refreshed.
13265
 
13266
@kindex C-x 1
13267
@item C-x 1
13268
Use a TUI layout with only one window.  The layout will
13269
either be @samp{source} or @samp{assembly}.  When the TUI mode
13270
is not active, it will switch to the TUI mode.
13271
 
13272
Think of this key binding as the Emacs @kbd{C-x 1} binding.
13273
 
13274
@kindex C-x 2
13275
@item C-x 2
13276
Use a TUI layout with at least two windows.  When the current
13277
layout shows already two windows, a next layout with two windows is used.
13278
When a new layout is chosen, one window will always be common to the
13279
previous layout and the new one.
13280
 
13281
Think of it as the Emacs @kbd{C-x 2} binding.
13282
 
13283
@kindex C-x s
13284
@item C-x s
13285
Use the TUI @emph{SingleKey} keymap that binds single key to gdb commands
13286
(@pxref{TUI Single Key Mode}).
13287
 
13288
@end table
13289
 
13290
The following key bindings are handled only by the TUI mode:
13291
 
13292
@table @key
13293
@kindex PgUp
13294
@item PgUp
13295
Scroll the active window one page up.
13296
 
13297
@kindex PgDn
13298
@item PgDn
13299
Scroll the active window one page down.
13300
 
13301
@kindex Up
13302
@item Up
13303
Scroll the active window one line up.
13304
 
13305
@kindex Down
13306
@item Down
13307
Scroll the active window one line down.
13308
 
13309
@kindex Left
13310
@item Left
13311
Scroll the active window one column left.
13312
 
13313
@kindex Right
13314
@item Right
13315
Scroll the active window one column right.
13316
 
13317
@kindex C-L
13318
@item C-L
13319
Refresh the screen.
13320
 
13321
@end table
13322
 
13323
In the TUI mode, the arrow keys are used by the active window
13324
for scrolling.  This means they are not available for readline.  It is
13325
necessary to use other readline key bindings such as @key{C-p}, @key{C-n},
13326
@key{C-b} and @key{C-f}.
13327
 
13328
@node TUI Single Key Mode
13329
@section TUI Single Key Mode
13330
@cindex TUI single key mode
13331
 
13332
The TUI provides a @emph{SingleKey} mode in which it installs a particular
13333
key binding in the readline keymaps to connect single keys to
13334
some gdb commands.
13335
 
13336
@table @kbd
13337
@kindex c @r{(SingleKey TUI key)}
13338
@item c
13339
continue
13340
 
13341
@kindex d @r{(SingleKey TUI key)}
13342
@item d
13343
down
13344
 
13345
@kindex f @r{(SingleKey TUI key)}
13346
@item f
13347
finish
13348
 
13349
@kindex n @r{(SingleKey TUI key)}
13350
@item n
13351
next
13352
 
13353
@kindex q @r{(SingleKey TUI key)}
13354
@item q
13355
exit the @emph{SingleKey} mode.
13356
 
13357
@kindex r @r{(SingleKey TUI key)}
13358
@item r
13359
run
13360
 
13361
@kindex s @r{(SingleKey TUI key)}
13362
@item s
13363
step
13364
 
13365
@kindex u @r{(SingleKey TUI key)}
13366
@item u
13367
up
13368
 
13369
@kindex v @r{(SingleKey TUI key)}
13370
@item v
13371
info locals
13372
 
13373
@kindex w @r{(SingleKey TUI key)}
13374
@item w
13375
where
13376
 
13377
@end table
13378
 
13379
Other keys temporarily switch to the @value{GDBN} command prompt.
13380
The key that was pressed is inserted in the editing buffer so that
13381
it is possible to type most @value{GDBN} commands without interaction
13382
with the TUI @emph{SingleKey} mode.  Once the command is entered the TUI
13383
@emph{SingleKey} mode is restored.  The only way to permanently leave
13384
this mode is by hitting @key{q} or @samp{@key{C-x} @key{s}}.
13385
 
13386
 
13387
@node TUI Commands
13388
@section TUI specific commands
13389
@cindex TUI commands
13390
 
13391
The TUI has specific commands to control the text windows.
13392
These commands are always available, that is they do not depend on
13393
the current terminal mode in which @value{GDBN} runs.  When @value{GDBN}
13394
is in the standard mode, using these commands will automatically switch
13395
in the TUI mode.
13396
 
13397
@table @code
13398
@item info win
13399
@kindex info win
13400
List and give the size of all displayed windows.
13401
 
13402
@item layout next
13403
@kindex layout next
13404
Display the next layout.
13405
 
13406
@item layout prev
13407
@kindex layout prev
13408
Display the previous layout.
13409
 
13410
@item layout src
13411
@kindex layout src
13412
Display the source window only.
13413
 
13414
@item layout asm
13415
@kindex layout asm
13416
Display the assembly window only.
13417
 
13418
@item layout split
13419
@kindex layout split
13420
Display the source and assembly window.
13421
 
13422
@item layout regs
13423
@kindex layout regs
13424
Display the register window together with the source or assembly window.
13425
 
13426
@item focus next | prev | src | asm | regs | split
13427
@kindex focus
13428
Set the focus to the named window.
13429
This command allows to change the active window so that scrolling keys
13430
can be affected to another window.
13431
 
13432
@item refresh
13433
@kindex refresh
13434
Refresh the screen.  This is similar to using @key{C-L} key.
13435
 
13436
@item update
13437
@kindex update
13438
Update the source window and the current execution point.
13439
 
13440
@item winheight @var{name} +@var{count}
13441
@itemx winheight @var{name} -@var{count}
13442
@kindex winheight
13443
Change the height of the window @var{name} by @var{count}
13444
lines.  Positive counts increase the height, while negative counts
13445
decrease it.
13446
 
13447
@end table
13448
 
13449
@node TUI Configuration
13450
@section TUI configuration variables
13451
@cindex TUI configuration variables
13452
 
13453
The TUI has several configuration variables that control the
13454
appearance of windows on the terminal.
13455
 
13456
@table @code
13457
@item set tui border-kind @var{kind}
13458
@kindex set tui border-kind
13459
Select the border appearance for the source, assembly and register windows.
13460
The possible values are the following:
13461
@table @code
13462
@item space
13463
Use a space character to draw the border.
13464
 
13465
@item ascii
13466
Use ascii characters + - and | to draw the border.
13467
 
13468
@item acs
13469
Use the Alternate Character Set to draw the border.  The border is
13470
drawn using character line graphics if the terminal supports them.
13471
 
13472
@end table
13473
 
13474
@item set tui active-border-mode @var{mode}
13475
@kindex set tui active-border-mode
13476
Select the attributes to display the border of the active window.
13477
The possible values are @code{normal}, @code{standout}, @code{reverse},
13478
@code{half}, @code{half-standout}, @code{bold} and @code{bold-standout}.
13479
 
13480
@item set tui border-mode @var{mode}
13481
@kindex set tui border-mode
13482
Select the attributes to display the border of other windows.
13483
The @var{mode} can be one of the following:
13484
@table @code
13485
@item normal
13486
Use normal attributes to display the border.
13487
 
13488
@item standout
13489
Use standout mode.
13490
 
13491
@item reverse
13492
Use reverse video mode.
13493
 
13494
@item half
13495
Use half bright mode.
13496
 
13497
@item half-standout
13498
Use half bright and standout mode.
13499
 
13500
@item bold
13501
Use extra bright or bold mode.
13502
 
13503
@item bold-standout
13504
Use extra bright or bold and standout mode.
13505
 
13506
@end table
13507
 
13508
@end table
13509
 
13510
@node Emacs
13511
@chapter Using @value{GDBN} under @sc{gnu} Emacs
13512
 
13513
@cindex Emacs
13514
@cindex @sc{gnu} Emacs
13515
A special interface allows you to use @sc{gnu} Emacs to view (and
13516
edit) the source files for the program you are debugging with
13517
@value{GDBN}.
13518
 
13519
To use this interface, use the command @kbd{M-x gdb} in Emacs.  Give the
13520
executable file you want to debug as an argument.  This command starts
13521
@value{GDBN} as a subprocess of Emacs, with input and output through a newly
13522
created Emacs buffer.
13523
@c (Do not use the @code{-tui} option to run @value{GDBN} from Emacs.)
13524
 
13525
Using @value{GDBN} under Emacs is just like using @value{GDBN} normally except for two
13526
things:
13527
 
13528
@itemize @bullet
13529
@item
13530
All ``terminal'' input and output goes through the Emacs buffer.
13531
@end itemize
13532
 
13533
This applies both to @value{GDBN} commands and their output, and to the input
13534
and output done by the program you are debugging.
13535
 
13536
This is useful because it means that you can copy the text of previous
13537
commands and input them again; you can even use parts of the output
13538
in this way.
13539
 
13540
All the facilities of Emacs' Shell mode are available for interacting
13541
with your program.  In particular, you can send signals the usual
13542
way---for example, @kbd{C-c C-c} for an interrupt, @kbd{C-c C-z} for a
13543
stop.
13544
 
13545
@itemize @bullet
13546
@item
13547
@value{GDBN} displays source code through Emacs.
13548
@end itemize
13549
 
13550
Each time @value{GDBN} displays a stack frame, Emacs automatically finds the
13551
source file for that frame and puts an arrow (@samp{=>}) at the
13552
left margin of the current line.  Emacs uses a separate buffer for
13553
source display, and splits the screen to show both your @value{GDBN} session
13554
and the source.
13555
 
13556
Explicit @value{GDBN} @code{list} or search commands still produce output as
13557
usual, but you probably have no reason to use them from Emacs.
13558
 
13559
@quotation
13560
@emph{Warning:} If the directory where your program resides is not your
13561
current directory, it can be easy to confuse Emacs about the location of
13562
the source files, in which case the auxiliary display buffer does not
13563
appear to show your source.  @value{GDBN} can find programs by searching your
13564
environment's @code{PATH} variable, so the @value{GDBN} input and output
13565
session proceeds normally; but Emacs does not get enough information
13566
back from @value{GDBN} to locate the source files in this situation.  To
13567
avoid this problem, either start @value{GDBN} mode from the directory where
13568
your program resides, or specify an absolute file name when prompted for the
13569
@kbd{M-x gdb} argument.
13570
 
13571
A similar confusion can result if you use the @value{GDBN} @code{file} command to
13572
switch to debugging a program in some other location, from an existing
13573
@value{GDBN} buffer in Emacs.
13574
@end quotation
13575
 
13576
By default, @kbd{M-x gdb} calls the program called @file{gdb}.  If
13577
you need to call @value{GDBN} by a different name (for example, if you keep
13578
several configurations around, with different names) you can set the
13579
Emacs variable @code{gdb-command-name}; for example,
13580
 
13581
@smallexample
13582
(setq gdb-command-name "mygdb")
13583
@end smallexample
13584
 
13585
@noindent
13586
(preceded by @kbd{M-:} or @kbd{ESC :}, or typed in the @code{*scratch*} buffer, or
13587
in your @file{.emacs} file) makes Emacs call the program named
13588
``@code{mygdb}'' instead.
13589
 
13590
In the @value{GDBN} I/O buffer, you can use these special Emacs commands in
13591
addition to the standard Shell mode commands:
13592
 
13593
@table @kbd
13594
@item C-h m
13595
Describe the features of Emacs' @value{GDBN} Mode.
13596
 
13597
@item M-s
13598
Execute to another source line, like the @value{GDBN} @code{step} command; also
13599
update the display window to show the current file and location.
13600
 
13601
@item M-n
13602
Execute to next source line in this function, skipping all function
13603
calls, like the @value{GDBN} @code{next} command.  Then update the display window
13604
to show the current file and location.
13605
 
13606
@item M-i
13607
Execute one instruction, like the @value{GDBN} @code{stepi} command; update
13608
display window accordingly.
13609
 
13610
@item M-x gdb-nexti
13611
Execute to next instruction, using the @value{GDBN} @code{nexti} command; update
13612
display window accordingly.
13613
 
13614
@item C-c C-f
13615
Execute until exit from the selected stack frame, like the @value{GDBN}
13616
@code{finish} command.
13617
 
13618
@item M-c
13619
Continue execution of your program, like the @value{GDBN} @code{continue}
13620
command.
13621
 
13622
@emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-p}.
13623
 
13624
@item M-u
13625
Go up the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument
13626
(@pxref{Arguments, , Numeric Arguments, Emacs, The @sc{gnu} Emacs Manual}),
13627
like the @value{GDBN} @code{up} command.
13628
 
13629
@emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-u}.
13630
 
13631
@item M-d
13632
Go down the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument, like the
13633
@value{GDBN} @code{down} command.
13634
 
13635
@emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-d}.
13636
 
13637
@item C-x &
13638
Read the number where the cursor is positioned, and insert it at the end
13639
of the @value{GDBN} I/O buffer.  For example, if you wish to disassemble code
13640
around an address that was displayed earlier, type @kbd{disassemble};
13641
then move the cursor to the address display, and pick up the
13642
argument for @code{disassemble} by typing @kbd{C-x &}.
13643
 
13644
You can customize this further by defining elements of the list
13645
@code{gdb-print-command}; once it is defined, you can format or
13646
otherwise process numbers picked up by @kbd{C-x &} before they are
13647
inserted.  A numeric argument to @kbd{C-x &} indicates that you
13648
wish special formatting, and also acts as an index to pick an element of the
13649
list.  If the list element is a string, the number to be inserted is
13650
formatted using the Emacs function @code{format}; otherwise the number
13651
is passed as an argument to the corresponding list element.
13652
@end table
13653
 
13654
In any source file, the Emacs command @kbd{C-x SPC} (@code{gdb-break})
13655
tells @value{GDBN} to set a breakpoint on the source line point is on.
13656
 
13657
If you accidentally delete the source-display buffer, an easy way to get
13658
it back is to type the command @code{f} in the @value{GDBN} buffer, to
13659
request a frame display; when you run under Emacs, this recreates
13660
the source buffer if necessary to show you the context of the current
13661
frame.
13662
 
13663
The source files displayed in Emacs are in ordinary Emacs buffers
13664
which are visiting the source files in the usual way.  You can edit
13665
the files with these buffers if you wish; but keep in mind that @value{GDBN}
13666
communicates with Emacs in terms of line numbers.  If you add or
13667
delete lines from the text, the line numbers that @value{GDBN} knows cease
13668
to correspond properly with the code.
13669
 
13670
@c The following dropped because Epoch is nonstandard.  Reactivate
13671
@c if/when v19 does something similar. ---doc@cygnus.com 19dec1990
13672
@ignore
13673
@kindex Emacs Epoch environment
13674
@kindex Epoch
13675
@kindex inspect
13676
 
13677
Version 18 of @sc{gnu} Emacs has a built-in window system
13678
called the @code{epoch}
13679
environment.  Users of this environment can use a new command,
13680
@code{inspect} which performs identically to @code{print} except that
13681
each value is printed in its own window.
13682
@end ignore
13683
 
13684
@include annotate.texi
13685
@include gdbmi.texinfo
13686
 
13687
@node GDB Bugs
13688
@chapter Reporting Bugs in @value{GDBN}
13689
@cindex bugs in @value{GDBN}
13690
@cindex reporting bugs in @value{GDBN}
13691
 
13692
Your bug reports play an essential role in making @value{GDBN} reliable.
13693
 
13694
Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it
13695
may not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help
13696
the entire community by making the next version of @value{GDBN} work better.  Bug
13697
reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @value{GDBN}.
13698
 
13699
In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
13700
information that enables us to fix the bug.
13701
 
13702
@menu
13703
* Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug?
13704
* Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs
13705
@end menu
13706
 
13707
@node Bug Criteria
13708
@section Have you found a bug?
13709
@cindex bug criteria
13710
 
13711
If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
13712
 
13713
@itemize @bullet
13714
@cindex fatal signal
13715
@cindex debugger crash
13716
@cindex crash of debugger
13717
@item
13718
If the debugger gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
13719
@value{GDBN} bug.  Reliable debuggers never crash.
13720
 
13721
@cindex error on valid input
13722
@item
13723
If @value{GDBN} produces an error message for valid input, that is a
13724
bug.  (Note that if you're cross debugging, the problem may also be
13725
somewhere in the connection to the target.)
13726
 
13727
@cindex invalid input
13728
@item
13729
If @value{GDBN} does not produce an error message for invalid input,
13730
that is a bug.  However, you should note that your idea of
13731
``invalid input'' might be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support
13732
for traditional practice''.
13733
 
13734
@item
13735
If you are an experienced user of debugging tools, your suggestions
13736
for improvement of @value{GDBN} are welcome in any case.
13737
@end itemize
13738
 
13739
@node Bug Reporting
13740
@section How to report bugs
13741
@cindex bug reports
13742
@cindex @value{GDBN} bugs, reporting
13743
 
13744
A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products.
13745
If you obtained @value{GDBN} from a support organization, we recommend you
13746
contact that organization first.
13747
 
13748
You can find contact information for many support companies and
13749
individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
13750
distribution.
13751
@c should add a web page ref...
13752
 
13753
In any event, we also recommend that you submit bug reports for
13754
@value{GDBN}.  The prefered method is to submit them directly using
13755
@uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/gdb/bugs/, @value{GDBN}'s Bugs web
13756
page}.  Alternatively, the @email{bug-gdb@@gnu.org, e-mail gateway} can
13757
be used.
13758
 
13759
@strong{Do not send bug reports to @samp{info-gdb}, or to
13760
@samp{help-gdb}, or to any newsgroups.}  Most users of @value{GDBN} do
13761
not want to receive bug reports.  Those that do have arranged to receive
13762
@samp{bug-gdb}.
13763
 
13764
The mailing list @samp{bug-gdb} has a newsgroup @samp{gnu.gdb.bug} which
13765
serves as a repeater.  The mailing list and the newsgroup carry exactly
13766
the same messages.  Often people think of posting bug reports to the
13767
newsgroup instead of mailing them.  This appears to work, but it has one
13768
problem which can be crucial: a newsgroup posting often lacks a mail
13769
path back to the sender.  Thus, if we need to ask for more information,
13770
we may be unable to reach you.  For this reason, it is better to send
13771
bug reports to the mailing list.
13772
 
13773
The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
13774
@strong{report all the facts}.  If you are not sure whether to state a
13775
fact or leave it out, state it!
13776
 
13777
Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
13778
problem and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might
13779
assume that the name of the variable you use in an example does not matter.
13780
Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps the bug is a
13781
stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location where that
13782
name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were different, the contents
13783
of that location would fool the debugger into doing the right thing despite
13784
the bug.  Play it safe and give a specific, complete example.  That is the
13785
easiest thing for you to do, and the most helpful.
13786
 
13787
Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the
13788
bug.  It may be that the bug has been reported previously, but neither
13789
you nor we can know that unless your bug report is complete and
13790
self-contained.
13791
 
13792
Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
13793
bell?''  Those bug reports are useless, and we urge everyone to
13794
@emph{refuse to respond to them} except to chide the sender to report
13795
bugs properly.
13796
 
13797
To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
13798
 
13799
@itemize @bullet
13800
@item
13801
The version of @value{GDBN}.  @value{GDBN} announces it if you start
13802
with no arguments; you can also print it at any time using @code{show
13803
version}.
13804
 
13805
Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
13806
the bug in the current version of @value{GDBN}.
13807
 
13808
@item
13809
The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
13810
version number.
13811
 
13812
@item
13813
What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @value{GDBN}---e.g.
13814
``@value{GCC}--2.8.1''.
13815
 
13816
@item
13817
What compiler (and its version) was used to compile the program you are
13818
debugging---e.g.  ``@value{GCC}--2.8.1'', or ``HP92453-01 A.10.32.03 HP
13819
C Compiler''.  For GCC, you can say @code{gcc --version} to get this
13820
information; for other compilers, see the documentation for those
13821
compilers.
13822
 
13823
@item
13824
The command arguments you gave the compiler to compile your example and
13825
observe the bug.  For example, did you use @samp{-O}?  To guarantee
13826
you will not omit something important, list them all.  A copy of the
13827
Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
13828
 
13829
If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
13830
and then we might not encounter the bug.
13831
 
13832
@item
13833
A complete input script, and all necessary source files, that will
13834
reproduce the bug.
13835
 
13836
@item
13837
A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
13838
incorrect.  For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
13839
 
13840
Of course, if the bug is that @value{GDBN} gets a fatal signal, then we
13841
will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
13842
not notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well not give us
13843
a chance to make a mistake.
13844
 
13845
Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
13846
say so explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
13847
copy of @value{GDBN} is out of synch, or you have encountered a bug in
13848
the C library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your copy might
13849
crash and ours would not.  If you told us to expect a crash, then when
13850
ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for
13851
us.  If you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able
13852
to draw any conclusion from our observations.
13853
 
13854
@item
13855
If you wish to suggest changes to the @value{GDBN} source, send us context
13856
diffs.  If you even discuss something in the @value{GDBN} source, refer to
13857
it by context, not by line number.
13858
 
13859
The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
13860
sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
13861
 
13862
@end itemize
13863
 
13864
Here are some things that are not necessary:
13865
 
13866
@itemize @bullet
13867
@item
13868
A description of the envelope of the bug.
13869
 
13870
Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
13871
which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
13872
changes will not affect it.
13873
 
13874
This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
13875
will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
13876
with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
13877
We recommend that you save your time for something else.
13878
 
13879
Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
13880
of the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
13881
output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
13882
less time, and so on.
13883
 
13884
However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
13885
report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
13886
 
13887
@item
13888
A patch for the bug.
13889
 
13890
A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not omit
13891
the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
13892
a patch is all we need.  We might see problems with your patch and decide
13893
to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
13894
 
13895
Sometimes with a program as complicated as @value{GDBN} it is very hard to
13896
construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
13897
through the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will not be able
13898
to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
13899
 
13900
And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
13901
patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A test case will
13902
help us to understand.
13903
 
13904
@item
13905
A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
13906
 
13907
Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about such
13908
things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
13909
@end itemize
13910
 
13911
@c The readline documentation is distributed with the readline code
13912
@c and consists of the two following files:
13913
@c     rluser.texinfo
13914
@c     inc-hist.texinfo
13915
@c Use -I with makeinfo to point to the appropriate directory,
13916
@c environment var TEXINPUTS with TeX.
13917
@include rluser.texinfo
13918
@include inc-hist.texinfo
13919
 
13920
 
13921
@node Formatting Documentation
13922
@appendix Formatting Documentation
13923
 
13924
@cindex @value{GDBN} reference card
13925
@cindex reference card
13926
The @value{GDBN} 4 release includes an already-formatted reference card, ready
13927
for printing with PostScript or Ghostscript, in the @file{gdb}
13928
subdirectory of the main source directory@footnote{In
13929
@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb/refcard.ps} of the version @value{GDBVN}
13930
release.}.  If you can use PostScript or Ghostscript with your printer,
13931
you can print the reference card immediately with @file{refcard.ps}.
13932
 
13933
The release also includes the source for the reference card.  You
13934
can format it, using @TeX{}, by typing:
13935
 
13936
@smallexample
13937
make refcard.dvi
13938
@end smallexample
13939
 
13940
The @value{GDBN} reference card is designed to print in @dfn{landscape}
13941
mode on US ``letter'' size paper;
13942
that is, on a sheet 11 inches wide by 8.5 inches
13943
high.  You will need to specify this form of printing as an option to
13944
your @sc{dvi} output program.
13945
 
13946
@cindex documentation
13947
 
13948
All the documentation for @value{GDBN} comes as part of the machine-readable
13949
distribution.  The documentation is written in Texinfo format, which is
13950
a documentation system that uses a single source file to produce both
13951
on-line information and a printed manual.  You can use one of the Info
13952
formatting commands to create the on-line version of the documentation
13953
and @TeX{} (or @code{texi2roff}) to typeset the printed version.
13954
 
13955
@value{GDBN} includes an already formatted copy of the on-line Info
13956
version of this manual in the @file{gdb} subdirectory.  The main Info
13957
file is @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb/gdb.info}, and it refers to
13958
subordinate files matching @samp{gdb.info*} in the same directory.  If
13959
necessary, you can print out these files, or read them with any editor;
13960
but they are easier to read using the @code{info} subsystem in @sc{gnu}
13961
Emacs or the standalone @code{info} program, available as part of the
13962
@sc{gnu} Texinfo distribution.
13963
 
13964
If you want to format these Info files yourself, you need one of the
13965
Info formatting programs, such as @code{texinfo-format-buffer} or
13966
@code{makeinfo}.
13967
 
13968
If you have @code{makeinfo} installed, and are in the top level
13969
@value{GDBN} source directory (@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}}, in the case of
13970
version @value{GDBVN}), you can make the Info file by typing:
13971
 
13972
@smallexample
13973
cd gdb
13974
make gdb.info
13975
@end smallexample
13976
 
13977
If you want to typeset and print copies of this manual, you need @TeX{},
13978
a program to print its @sc{dvi} output files, and @file{texinfo.tex}, the
13979
Texinfo definitions file.
13980
 
13981
@TeX{} is a typesetting program; it does not print files directly, but
13982
produces output files called @sc{dvi} files.  To print a typeset
13983
document, you need a program to print @sc{dvi} files.  If your system
13984
has @TeX{} installed, chances are it has such a program.  The precise
13985
command to use depends on your system; @kbd{lpr -d} is common; another
13986
(for PostScript devices) is @kbd{dvips}.  The @sc{dvi} print command may
13987
require a file name without any extension or a @samp{.dvi} extension.
13988
 
13989
@TeX{} also requires a macro definitions file called
13990
@file{texinfo.tex}.  This file tells @TeX{} how to typeset a document
13991
written in Texinfo format.  On its own, @TeX{} cannot either read or
13992
typeset a Texinfo file.  @file{texinfo.tex} is distributed with GDB
13993
and is located in the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}/texinfo}
13994
directory.
13995
 
13996
If you have @TeX{} and a @sc{dvi} printer program installed, you can
13997
typeset and print this manual.  First switch to the the @file{gdb}
13998
subdirectory of the main source directory (for example, to
13999
@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb}) and type:
14000
 
14001
@smallexample
14002
make gdb.dvi
14003
@end smallexample
14004
 
14005
Then give @file{gdb.dvi} to your @sc{dvi} printing program.
14006
 
14007
@node Installing GDB
14008
@appendix Installing @value{GDBN}
14009
@cindex configuring @value{GDBN}
14010
@cindex installation
14011
 
14012
@value{GDBN} comes with a @code{configure} script that automates the process
14013
of preparing @value{GDBN} for installation; you can then use @code{make} to
14014
build the @code{gdb} program.
14015
@iftex
14016
@c irrelevant in info file; it's as current as the code it lives with.
14017
@footnote{If you have a more recent version of @value{GDBN} than @value{GDBVN},
14018
look at the @file{README} file in the sources; we may have improved the
14019
installation procedures since publishing this manual.}
14020
@end iftex
14021
 
14022
The @value{GDBN} distribution includes all the source code you need for
14023
@value{GDBN} in a single directory, whose name is usually composed by
14024
appending the version number to @samp{gdb}.
14025
 
14026
For example, the @value{GDBN} version @value{GDBVN} distribution is in the
14027
@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} directory.  That directory contains:
14028
 
14029
@table @code
14030
@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/configure @r{(and supporting files)}
14031
script for configuring @value{GDBN} and all its supporting libraries
14032
 
14033
@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb
14034
the source specific to @value{GDBN} itself
14035
 
14036
@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/bfd
14037
source for the Binary File Descriptor library
14038
 
14039
@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/include
14040
@sc{gnu} include files
14041
 
14042
@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/libiberty
14043
source for the @samp{-liberty} free software library
14044
 
14045
@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/opcodes
14046
source for the library of opcode tables and disassemblers
14047
 
14048
@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/readline
14049
source for the @sc{gnu} command-line interface
14050
 
14051
@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/glob
14052
source for the @sc{gnu} filename pattern-matching subroutine
14053
 
14054
@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/mmalloc
14055
source for the @sc{gnu} memory-mapped malloc package
14056
@end table
14057
 
14058
The simplest way to configure and build @value{GDBN} is to run @code{configure}
14059
from the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory, which in
14060
this example is the @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} directory.
14061
 
14062
First switch to the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory
14063
if you are not already in it; then run @code{configure}.  Pass the
14064
identifier for the platform on which @value{GDBN} will run as an
14065
argument.
14066
 
14067
For example:
14068
 
14069
@smallexample
14070
cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}
14071
./configure @var{host}
14072
make
14073
@end smallexample
14074
 
14075
@noindent
14076
where @var{host} is an identifier such as @samp{sun4} or
14077
@samp{decstation}, that identifies the platform where @value{GDBN} will run.
14078
(You can often leave off @var{host}; @code{configure} tries to guess the
14079
correct value by examining your system.)
14080
 
14081
Running @samp{configure @var{host}} and then running @code{make} builds the
14082
@file{bfd}, @file{readline}, @file{mmalloc}, and @file{libiberty}
14083
libraries, then @code{gdb} itself.  The configured source files, and the
14084
binaries, are left in the corresponding source directories.
14085
 
14086
@need 750
14087
@code{configure} is a Bourne-shell (@code{/bin/sh}) script; if your
14088
system does not recognize this automatically when you run a different
14089
shell, you may need to run @code{sh} on it explicitly:
14090
 
14091
@smallexample
14092
sh configure @var{host}
14093
@end smallexample
14094
 
14095
If you run @code{configure} from a directory that contains source
14096
directories for multiple libraries or programs, such as the
14097
@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} source directory for version @value{GDBVN}, @code{configure}
14098
creates configuration files for every directory level underneath (unless
14099
you tell it not to, with the @samp{--norecursion} option).
14100
 
14101
You can run the @code{configure} script from any of the
14102
subordinate directories in the @value{GDBN} distribution if you only want to
14103
configure that subdirectory, but be sure to specify a path to it.
14104
 
14105
For example, with version @value{GDBVN}, type the following to configure only
14106
the @code{bfd} subdirectory:
14107
 
14108
@smallexample
14109
@group
14110
cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}/bfd
14111
../configure @var{host}
14112
@end group
14113
@end smallexample
14114
 
14115
You can install @code{@value{GDBP}} anywhere; it has no hardwired paths.
14116
However, you should make sure that the shell on your path (named by
14117
the @samp{SHELL} environment variable) is publicly readable.  Remember
14118
that @value{GDBN} uses the shell to start your program---some systems refuse to
14119
let @value{GDBN} debug child processes whose programs are not readable.
14120
 
14121
@menu
14122
* Separate Objdir::             Compiling @value{GDBN} in another directory
14123
* Config Names::                Specifying names for hosts and targets
14124
* Configure Options::           Summary of options for configure
14125
@end menu
14126
 
14127
@node Separate Objdir
14128
@section Compiling @value{GDBN} in another directory
14129
 
14130
If you want to run @value{GDBN} versions for several host or target machines,
14131
you need a different @code{gdb} compiled for each combination of
14132
host and target.  @code{configure} is designed to make this easy by
14133
allowing you to generate each configuration in a separate subdirectory,
14134
rather than in the source directory.  If your @code{make} program
14135
handles the @samp{VPATH} feature (@sc{gnu} @code{make} does), running
14136
@code{make} in each of these directories builds the @code{gdb}
14137
program specified there.
14138
 
14139
To build @code{gdb} in a separate directory, run @code{configure}
14140
with the @samp{--srcdir} option to specify where to find the source.
14141
(You also need to specify a path to find @code{configure}
14142
itself from your working directory.  If the path to @code{configure}
14143
would be the same as the argument to @samp{--srcdir}, you can leave out
14144
the @samp{--srcdir} option; it is assumed.)
14145
 
14146
For example, with version @value{GDBVN}, you can build @value{GDBN} in a
14147
separate directory for a Sun 4 like this:
14148
 
14149
@smallexample
14150
@group
14151
cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}
14152
mkdir ../gdb-sun4
14153
cd ../gdb-sun4
14154
../gdb-@value{GDBVN}/configure sun4
14155
make
14156
@end group
14157
@end smallexample
14158
 
14159
When @code{configure} builds a configuration using a remote source
14160
directory, it creates a tree for the binaries with the same structure
14161
(and using the same names) as the tree under the source directory.  In
14162
the example, you'd find the Sun 4 library @file{libiberty.a} in the
14163
directory @file{gdb-sun4/libiberty}, and @value{GDBN} itself in
14164
@file{gdb-sun4/gdb}.
14165
 
14166
One popular reason to build several @value{GDBN} configurations in separate
14167
directories is to configure @value{GDBN} for cross-compiling (where
14168
@value{GDBN} runs on one machine---the @dfn{host}---while debugging
14169
programs that run on another machine---the @dfn{target}).
14170
You specify a cross-debugging target by
14171
giving the @samp{--target=@var{target}} option to @code{configure}.
14172
 
14173
When you run @code{make} to build a program or library, you must run
14174
it in a configured directory---whatever directory you were in when you
14175
called @code{configure} (or one of its subdirectories).
14176
 
14177
The @code{Makefile} that @code{configure} generates in each source
14178
directory also runs recursively.  If you type @code{make} in a source
14179
directory such as @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} (or in a separate configured
14180
directory configured with @samp{--srcdir=@var{dirname}/gdb-@value{GDBVN}}), you
14181
will build all the required libraries, and then build GDB.
14182
 
14183
When you have multiple hosts or targets configured in separate
14184
directories, you can run @code{make} on them in parallel (for example,
14185
if they are NFS-mounted on each of the hosts); they will not interfere
14186
with each other.
14187
 
14188
@node Config Names
14189
@section Specifying names for hosts and targets
14190
 
14191
The specifications used for hosts and targets in the @code{configure}
14192
script are based on a three-part naming scheme, but some short predefined
14193
aliases are also supported.  The full naming scheme encodes three pieces
14194
of information in the following pattern:
14195
 
14196
@smallexample
14197
@var{architecture}-@var{vendor}-@var{os}
14198
@end smallexample
14199
 
14200
For example, you can use the alias @code{sun4} as a @var{host} argument,
14201
or as the value for @var{target} in a @code{--target=@var{target}}
14202
option.  The equivalent full name is @samp{sparc-sun-sunos4}.
14203
 
14204
The @code{configure} script accompanying @value{GDBN} does not provide
14205
any query facility to list all supported host and target names or
14206
aliases.  @code{configure} calls the Bourne shell script
14207
@code{config.sub} to map abbreviations to full names; you can read the
14208
script, if you wish, or you can use it to test your guesses on
14209
abbreviations---for example:
14210
 
14211
@smallexample
14212
% sh config.sub i386-linux
14213
i386-pc-linux-gnu
14214
% sh config.sub alpha-linux
14215
alpha-unknown-linux-gnu
14216
% sh config.sub hp9k700
14217
hppa1.1-hp-hpux
14218
% sh config.sub sun4
14219
sparc-sun-sunos4.1.1
14220
% sh config.sub sun3
14221
m68k-sun-sunos4.1.1
14222
% sh config.sub i986v
14223
Invalid configuration `i986v': machine `i986v' not recognized
14224
@end smallexample
14225
 
14226
@noindent
14227
@code{config.sub} is also distributed in the @value{GDBN} source
14228
directory (@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}}, for version @value{GDBVN}).
14229
 
14230
@node Configure Options
14231
@section @code{configure} options
14232
 
14233
Here is a summary of the @code{configure} options and arguments that
14234
are most often useful for building @value{GDBN}.  @code{configure} also has
14235
several other options not listed here.  @inforef{What Configure
14236
Does,,configure.info}, for a full explanation of @code{configure}.
14237
 
14238
@smallexample
14239
configure @r{[}--help@r{]}
14240
          @r{[}--prefix=@var{dir}@r{]}
14241
          @r{[}--exec-prefix=@var{dir}@r{]}
14242
          @r{[}--srcdir=@var{dirname}@r{]}
14243
          @r{[}--norecursion@r{]} @r{[}--rm@r{]}
14244
          @r{[}--target=@var{target}@r{]}
14245
          @var{host}
14246
@end smallexample
14247
 
14248
@noindent
14249
You may introduce options with a single @samp{-} rather than
14250
@samp{--} if you prefer; but you may abbreviate option names if you use
14251
@samp{--}.
14252
 
14253
@table @code
14254
@item --help
14255
Display a quick summary of how to invoke @code{configure}.
14256
 
14257
@item --prefix=@var{dir}
14258
Configure the source to install programs and files under directory
14259
@file{@var{dir}}.
14260
 
14261
@item --exec-prefix=@var{dir}
14262
Configure the source to install programs under directory
14263
@file{@var{dir}}.
14264
 
14265
@c avoid splitting the warning from the explanation:
14266
@need 2000
14267
@item --srcdir=@var{dirname}
14268
@strong{Warning: using this option requires @sc{gnu} @code{make}, or another
14269
@code{make} that implements the @code{VPATH} feature.}@*
14270
Use this option to make configurations in directories separate from the
14271
@value{GDBN} source directories.  Among other things, you can use this to
14272
build (or maintain) several configurations simultaneously, in separate
14273
directories.  @code{configure} writes configuration specific files in
14274
the current directory, but arranges for them to use the source in the
14275
directory @var{dirname}.  @code{configure} creates directories under
14276
the working directory in parallel to the source directories below
14277
@var{dirname}.
14278
 
14279
@item --norecursion
14280
Configure only the directory level where @code{configure} is executed; do not
14281
propagate configuration to subdirectories.
14282
 
14283
@item --target=@var{target}
14284
Configure @value{GDBN} for cross-debugging programs running on the specified
14285
@var{target}.  Without this option, @value{GDBN} is configured to debug
14286
programs that run on the same machine (@var{host}) as @value{GDBN} itself.
14287
 
14288
There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available targets.
14289
 
14290
@item @var{host} @dots{}
14291
Configure @value{GDBN} to run on the specified @var{host}.
14292
 
14293
There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available hosts.
14294
@end table
14295
 
14296
There are many other options available as well, but they are generally
14297
needed for special purposes only.
14298
 
14299
@node Maintenance Commands
14300
@appendix Maintenance Commands
14301
@cindex maintenance commands
14302
@cindex internal commands
14303
 
14304
In addition to commands intended for @value{GDBN} users, @value{GDBN}
14305
includes a number of commands intended for @value{GDBN} developers.
14306
These commands are provided here for reference.
14307
 
14308
@table @code
14309
@kindex maint info breakpoints
14310
@item @anchor{maint info breakpoints}maint info breakpoints
14311
Using the same format as @samp{info breakpoints}, display both the
14312
breakpoints you've set explicitly, and those @value{GDBN} is using for
14313
internal purposes.  Internal breakpoints are shown with negative
14314
breakpoint numbers.  The type column identifies what kind of breakpoint
14315
is shown:
14316
 
14317
@table @code
14318
@item breakpoint
14319
Normal, explicitly set breakpoint.
14320
 
14321
@item watchpoint
14322
Normal, explicitly set watchpoint.
14323
 
14324
@item longjmp
14325
Internal breakpoint, used to handle correctly stepping through
14326
@code{longjmp} calls.
14327
 
14328
@item longjmp resume
14329
Internal breakpoint at the target of a @code{longjmp}.
14330
 
14331
@item until
14332
Temporary internal breakpoint used by the @value{GDBN} @code{until} command.
14333
 
14334
@item finish
14335
Temporary internal breakpoint used by the @value{GDBN} @code{finish} command.
14336
 
14337
@item shlib events
14338
Shared library events.
14339
 
14340
@end table
14341
 
14342
@kindex maint print registers
14343
@kindex maint print raw-registers
14344
@kindex maint print cooked-registers
14345
@item maint print registers
14346
@itemx maint print raw-registers
14347
@itemx maint print cooked-registers
14348
Print @value{GDBN}'s internal register data structures.
14349
 
14350
The command @samp{maint print raw-registers} includes the contents of
14351
the raw register cache; and the command @samp{maint print
14352
cooked-registers} includes the (cooked) value of all registers.
14353
@xref{Registers,, Registers, gdbint, @value{GDBN} Internals}.
14354
 
14355
Takes an optional file parameter.
14356
 
14357
@end table
14358
 
14359
 
14360
@node Remote Protocol
14361
@appendix @value{GDBN} Remote Serial Protocol
14362
 
14363
@menu
14364
* Overview::
14365
* Packets::
14366
* Stop Reply Packets::
14367
* General Query Packets::
14368
* Register Packet Format::
14369
* Examples::
14370
@end menu
14371
 
14372
@node Overview
14373
@section Overview
14374
 
14375
There may be occasions when you need to know something about the
14376
protocol---for example, if there is only one serial port to your target
14377
machine, you might want your program to do something special if it
14378
recognizes a packet meant for @value{GDBN}.
14379
 
14380
In the examples below, @samp{->} and @samp{<-} are used to indicate
14381
transmitted and received data respectfully.
14382
 
14383
@cindex protocol, @value{GDBN} remote serial
14384
@cindex serial protocol, @value{GDBN} remote
14385
@cindex remote serial protocol
14386
All @value{GDBN} commands and responses (other than acknowledgments) are
14387
sent as a @var{packet}.  A @var{packet} is introduced with the character
14388
@samp{$}, the actual @var{packet-data}, and the terminating character
14389
@samp{#} followed by a two-digit @var{checksum}:
14390
 
14391
@smallexample
14392
@code{$}@var{packet-data}@code{#}@var{checksum}
14393
@end smallexample
14394
@noindent
14395
 
14396
@cindex checksum, for @value{GDBN} remote
14397
@noindent
14398
The two-digit @var{checksum} is computed as the modulo 256 sum of all
14399
characters between the leading @samp{$} and the trailing @samp{#} (an
14400
eight bit unsigned checksum).
14401
 
14402
Implementors should note that prior to @value{GDBN} 5.0 the protocol
14403
specification also included an optional two-digit @var{sequence-id}:
14404
 
14405
@smallexample
14406
@code{$}@var{sequence-id}@code{:}@var{packet-data}@code{#}@var{checksum}
14407
@end smallexample
14408
 
14409
@cindex sequence-id, for @value{GDBN} remote
14410
@noindent
14411
That @var{sequence-id} was appended to the acknowledgment.  @value{GDBN}
14412
has never output @var{sequence-id}s.  Stubs that handle packets added
14413
since @value{GDBN} 5.0 must not accept @var{sequence-id}.
14414
 
14415
@cindex acknowledgment, for @value{GDBN} remote
14416
When either the host or the target machine receives a packet, the first
14417
response expected is an acknowledgment: either @samp{+} (to indicate
14418
the package was received correctly) or @samp{-} (to request
14419
retransmission):
14420
 
14421
@smallexample
14422
-> @code{$}@var{packet-data}@code{#}@var{checksum}
14423
<- @code{+}
14424
@end smallexample
14425
@noindent
14426
 
14427
The host (@value{GDBN}) sends @var{command}s, and the target (the
14428
debugging stub incorporated in your program) sends a @var{response}.  In
14429
the case of step and continue @var{command}s, the response is only sent
14430
when the operation has completed (the target has again stopped).
14431
 
14432
@var{packet-data} consists of a sequence of characters with the
14433
exception of @samp{#} and @samp{$} (see @samp{X} packet for additional
14434
exceptions).
14435
 
14436
Fields within the packet should be separated using @samp{,} @samp{;} or
14437
@cindex remote protocol, field separator
14438
@samp{:}.  Except where otherwise noted all numbers are represented in
14439
@sc{hex} with leading zeros suppressed.
14440
 
14441
Implementors should note that prior to @value{GDBN} 5.0, the character
14442
@samp{:} could not appear as the third character in a packet (as it
14443
would potentially conflict with the @var{sequence-id}).
14444
 
14445
Response @var{data} can be run-length encoded to save space.  A @samp{*}
14446
means that the next character is an @sc{ascii} encoding giving a repeat count
14447
which stands for that many repetitions of the character preceding the
14448
@samp{*}.  The encoding is @code{n+29}, yielding a printable character
14449
where @code{n >=3} (which is where rle starts to win).  The printable
14450
characters @samp{$}, @samp{#}, @samp{+} and @samp{-} or with a numeric
14451
value greater than 126 should not be used.
14452
 
14453
Some remote systems have used a different run-length encoding mechanism
14454
loosely refered to as the cisco encoding.  Following the @samp{*}
14455
character are two hex digits that indicate the size of the packet.
14456
 
14457
So:
14458
@smallexample
14459
"@code{0* }"
14460
@end smallexample
14461
@noindent
14462
means the same as "0000".
14463
 
14464
The error response returned for some packets includes a two character
14465
error number.  That number is not well defined.
14466
 
14467
For any @var{command} not supported by the stub, an empty response
14468
(@samp{$#00}) should be returned.  That way it is possible to extend the
14469
protocol.  A newer @value{GDBN} can tell if a packet is supported based
14470
on that response.
14471
 
14472
A stub is required to support the @samp{g}, @samp{G}, @samp{m}, @samp{M},
14473
@samp{c}, and @samp{s} @var{command}s.  All other @var{command}s are
14474
optional.
14475
 
14476
@node Packets
14477
@section Packets
14478
 
14479
The following table provides a complete list of all currently defined
14480
@var{command}s and their corresponding response @var{data}.
14481
 
14482
@table @r
14483
 
14484
@item @code{!} --- extended mode
14485
@cindex @code{!} packet
14486
 
14487
Enable extended mode.  In extended mode, the remote server is made
14488
persistent.  The @samp{R} packet is used to restart the program being
14489
debugged.
14490
 
14491
Reply:
14492
@table @samp
14493
@item OK
14494
The remote target both supports and has enabled extended mode.
14495
@end table
14496
 
14497
@item @code{?} --- last signal
14498
@cindex @code{?} packet
14499
 
14500
Indicate the reason the target halted.  The reply is the same as for
14501
step and continue.
14502
 
14503
Reply:
14504
@xref{Stop Reply Packets}, for the reply specifications.
14505
 
14506
@item @code{a} --- reserved
14507
 
14508
Reserved for future use.
14509
 
14510
@item @code{A}@var{arglen}@code{,}@var{argnum}@code{,}@var{arg}@code{,@dots{}} ---  set program arguments @strong{(reserved)}
14511
@cindex @code{A} packet
14512
 
14513
Initialized @samp{argv[]} array passed into program. @var{arglen}
14514
specifies the number of bytes in the hex encoded byte stream @var{arg}.
14515
See @code{gdbserver} for more details.
14516
 
14517
Reply:
14518
@table @samp
14519
@item OK
14520
@item E@var{NN}
14521
@end table
14522
 
14523
@item @code{b}@var{baud} --- set baud @strong{(deprecated)}
14524
@cindex @code{b} packet
14525
 
14526
Change the serial line speed to @var{baud}.
14527
 
14528
JTC: @emph{When does the transport layer state change?  When it's
14529
received, or after the ACK is transmitted.  In either case, there are
14530
problems if the command or the acknowledgment packet is dropped.}
14531
 
14532
Stan: @emph{If people really wanted to add something like this, and get
14533
it working for the first time, they ought to modify ser-unix.c to send
14534
some kind of out-of-band message to a specially-setup stub and have the
14535
switch happen "in between" packets, so that from remote protocol's point
14536
of view, nothing actually happened.}
14537
 
14538
@item @code{B}@var{addr},@var{mode} --- set breakpoint @strong{(deprecated)}
14539
@cindex @code{B} packet
14540
 
14541
Set (@var{mode} is @samp{S}) or clear (@var{mode} is @samp{C}) a
14542
breakpoint at @var{addr}.  @emph{This has been replaced by the @samp{Z}
14543
and @samp{z} packets.}
14544
 
14545
@item @code{c}@var{addr} --- continue
14546
@cindex @code{c} packet
14547
 
14548
@var{addr} is address to resume.  If @var{addr} is omitted, resume at
14549
current address.
14550
 
14551
Reply:
14552
@xref{Stop Reply Packets}, for the reply specifications.
14553
 
14554
@item @code{C}@var{sig}@code{;}@var{addr} --- continue with signal
14555
@cindex @code{C} packet
14556
 
14557
Continue with signal @var{sig} (hex signal number).  If
14558
@code{;}@var{addr} is omitted, resume at same address.
14559
 
14560
Reply:
14561
@xref{Stop Reply Packets}, for the reply specifications.
14562
 
14563
@item @code{d} --- toggle debug @strong{(deprecated)}
14564
@cindex @code{d} packet
14565
 
14566
Toggle debug flag.
14567
 
14568
@item @code{D} --- detach
14569
@cindex @code{D} packet
14570
 
14571
Detach @value{GDBN} from the remote system.  Sent to the remote target
14572
before @value{GDBN} disconnects.
14573
 
14574
Reply:
14575
@table @samp
14576
@item @emph{no response}
14577
@value{GDBN} does not check for any response after sending this packet.
14578
@end table
14579
 
14580
@item @code{e} --- reserved
14581
 
14582
Reserved for future use.
14583
 
14584
@item @code{E} --- reserved
14585
 
14586
Reserved for future use.
14587
 
14588
@item @code{f} --- reserved
14589
 
14590
Reserved for future use.
14591
 
14592
@item @code{F} --- reserved
14593
 
14594
Reserved for future use.
14595
 
14596
@item @code{g} --- read registers
14597
@anchor{read registers packet}
14598
@cindex @code{g} packet
14599
 
14600
Read general registers.
14601
 
14602
Reply:
14603
@table @samp
14604
@item @var{XX@dots{}}
14605
Each byte of register data is described by two hex digits.  The bytes
14606
with the register are transmitted in target byte order.  The size of
14607
each register and their position within the @samp{g} @var{packet} are
14608
determined by the @value{GDBN} internal macros @var{REGISTER_RAW_SIZE}
14609
and @var{REGISTER_NAME} macros.  The specification of several standard
14610
@code{g} packets is specified below.
14611
@item E@var{NN}
14612
for an error.
14613
@end table
14614
 
14615
@item @code{G}@var{XX@dots{}} --- write regs
14616
@cindex @code{G} packet
14617
 
14618
@xref{read registers packet}, for a description of the @var{XX@dots{}}
14619
data.
14620
 
14621
Reply:
14622
@table @samp
14623
@item OK
14624
for success
14625
@item E@var{NN}
14626
for an error
14627
@end table
14628
 
14629
@item @code{h} --- reserved
14630
 
14631
Reserved for future use.
14632
 
14633
@item @code{H}@var{c}@var{t@dots{}} --- set thread
14634
@cindex @code{H} packet
14635
 
14636
Set thread for subsequent operations (@samp{m}, @samp{M}, @samp{g},
14637
@samp{G}, et.al.).  @var{c} depends on the operation to be performed: it
14638
should be @samp{c} for step and continue operations, @samp{g} for other
14639
operations.  The thread designator @var{t@dots{}} may be -1, meaning all
14640
the threads, a thread number, or zero which means pick any thread.
14641
 
14642
Reply:
14643
@table @samp
14644
@item OK
14645
for success
14646
@item E@var{NN}
14647
for an error
14648
@end table
14649
 
14650
@c FIXME: JTC:
14651
@c   'H': How restrictive (or permissive) is the thread model.  If a
14652
@c        thread is selected and stopped, are other threads allowed
14653
@c        to continue to execute?  As I mentioned above, I think the
14654
@c        semantics of each command when a thread is selected must be
14655
@c        described.  For example:
14656
@c
14657
@c        'g':    If the stub supports threads and a specific thread is
14658
@c                selected, returns the register block from that thread;
14659
@c                otherwise returns current registers.
14660
@c
14661
@c        'G'     If the stub supports threads and a specific thread is
14662
@c                selected, sets the registers of the register block of
14663
@c                that thread; otherwise sets current registers.
14664
 
14665
@item @code{i}@var{addr}@code{,}@var{nnn} --- cycle step @strong{(draft)}
14666
@anchor{cycle step packet}
14667
@cindex @code{i} packet
14668
 
14669
Step the remote target by a single clock cycle.  If @code{,}@var{nnn} is
14670
present, cycle step @var{nnn} cycles.  If @var{addr} is present, cycle
14671
step starting at that address.
14672
 
14673
@item @code{I} --- signal then cycle step @strong{(reserved)}
14674
@cindex @code{I} packet
14675
 
14676
@xref{step with signal packet}.  @xref{cycle step packet}.
14677
 
14678
@item @code{j} --- reserved
14679
 
14680
Reserved for future use.
14681
 
14682
@item @code{J} --- reserved
14683
 
14684
Reserved for future use.
14685
 
14686
@item @code{k} --- kill request
14687
@cindex @code{k} packet
14688
 
14689
FIXME: @emph{There is no description of how to operate when a specific
14690
thread context has been selected (i.e.@: does 'k' kill only that
14691
thread?)}.
14692
 
14693
@item @code{K} --- reserved
14694
 
14695
Reserved for future use.
14696
 
14697
@item @code{l} --- reserved
14698
 
14699
Reserved for future use.
14700
 
14701
@item @code{L} --- reserved
14702
 
14703
Reserved for future use.
14704
 
14705
@item @code{m}@var{addr}@code{,}@var{length} --- read memory
14706
@cindex @code{m} packet
14707
 
14708
Read @var{length} bytes of memory starting at address @var{addr}.
14709
Neither @value{GDBN} nor the stub assume that sized memory transfers are
14710
assumed using word alligned accesses. FIXME: @emph{A word aligned memory
14711
transfer mechanism is needed.}
14712
 
14713
Reply:
14714
@table @samp
14715
@item @var{XX@dots{}}
14716
@var{XX@dots{}} is mem contents. Can be fewer bytes than requested if able
14717
to read only part of the data.  Neither @value{GDBN} nor the stub assume
14718
that sized memory transfers are assumed using word alligned
14719
accesses. FIXME: @emph{A word aligned memory transfer mechanism is
14720
needed.}
14721
@item E@var{NN}
14722
@var{NN} is errno
14723
@end table
14724
 
14725
@item @code{M}@var{addr},@var{length}@code{:}@var{XX@dots{}} --- write mem
14726
@cindex @code{M} packet
14727
 
14728
Write @var{length} bytes of memory starting at address @var{addr}.
14729
@var{XX@dots{}} is the data.
14730
 
14731
Reply:
14732
@table @samp
14733
@item OK
14734
for success
14735
@item E@var{NN}
14736
for an error (this includes the case where only part of the data was
14737
written).
14738
@end table
14739
 
14740
@item @code{n} --- reserved
14741
 
14742
Reserved for future use.
14743
 
14744
@item @code{N} --- reserved
14745
 
14746
Reserved for future use.
14747
 
14748
@item @code{o} --- reserved
14749
 
14750
Reserved for future use.
14751
 
14752
@item @code{O} --- reserved
14753
 
14754
Reserved for future use.
14755
 
14756
@item @code{p}@var{n@dots{}} --- read reg @strong{(reserved)}
14757
@cindex @code{p} packet
14758
 
14759
@xref{write register packet}.
14760
 
14761
Reply:
14762
@table @samp
14763
@item @var{r@dots{}.}
14764
The hex encoded value of the register in target byte order.
14765
@end table
14766
 
14767
@item @code{P}@var{n@dots{}}@code{=}@var{r@dots{}} --- write register
14768
@anchor{write register packet}
14769
@cindex @code{P} packet
14770
 
14771
Write register @var{n@dots{}} with value @var{r@dots{}}, which contains two hex
14772
digits for each byte in the register (target byte order).
14773
 
14774
Reply:
14775
@table @samp
14776
@item OK
14777
for success
14778
@item E@var{NN}
14779
for an error
14780
@end table
14781
 
14782
@item @code{q}@var{query} --- general query
14783
@anchor{general query packet}
14784
@cindex @code{q} packet
14785
 
14786
Request info about @var{query}.  In general @value{GDBN} queries have a
14787
leading upper case letter.  Custom vendor queries should use a company
14788
prefix (in lower case) ex: @samp{qfsf.var}.  @var{query} may optionally
14789
be followed by a @samp{,} or @samp{;} separated list.  Stubs must ensure
14790
that they match the full @var{query} name.
14791
 
14792
Reply:
14793
@table @samp
14794
@item @var{XX@dots{}}
14795
Hex encoded data from query.  The reply can not be empty.
14796
@item E@var{NN}
14797
error reply
14798
@item
14799
Indicating an unrecognized @var{query}.
14800
@end table
14801
 
14802
@item @code{Q}@var{var}@code{=}@var{val} --- general set
14803
@cindex @code{Q} packet
14804
 
14805
Set value of @var{var} to @var{val}.
14806
 
14807
@xref{general query packet}, for a discussion of naming conventions.
14808
 
14809
@item @code{r} --- reset @strong{(deprecated)}
14810
@cindex @code{r} packet
14811
 
14812
Reset the entire system.
14813
 
14814
@item @code{R}@var{XX} --- remote restart
14815
@cindex @code{R} packet
14816
 
14817
Restart the program being debugged.  @var{XX}, while needed, is ignored.
14818
This packet is only available in extended mode.
14819
 
14820
Reply:
14821
@table @samp
14822
@item @emph{no reply}
14823
The @samp{R} packet has no reply.
14824
@end table
14825
 
14826
@item @code{s}@var{addr} --- step
14827
@cindex @code{s} packet
14828
 
14829
@var{addr} is address to resume.  If @var{addr} is omitted, resume at
14830
same address.
14831
 
14832
Reply:
14833
@xref{Stop Reply Packets}, for the reply specifications.
14834
 
14835
@item @code{S}@var{sig}@code{;}@var{addr} --- step with signal
14836
@anchor{step with signal packet}
14837
@cindex @code{S} packet
14838
 
14839
Like @samp{C} but step not continue.
14840
 
14841
Reply:
14842
@xref{Stop Reply Packets}, for the reply specifications.
14843
 
14844
@item @code{t}@var{addr}@code{:}@var{PP}@code{,}@var{MM} --- search
14845
@cindex @code{t} packet
14846
 
14847
Search backwards starting at address @var{addr} for a match with pattern
14848
@var{PP} and mask @var{MM}.  @var{PP} and @var{MM} are 4 bytes.
14849
@var{addr} must be at least 3 digits.
14850
 
14851
@item @code{T}@var{XX} --- thread alive
14852
@cindex @code{T} packet
14853
 
14854
Find out if the thread XX is alive.
14855
 
14856
Reply:
14857
@table @samp
14858
@item OK
14859
thread is still alive
14860
@item E@var{NN}
14861
thread is dead
14862
@end table
14863
 
14864
@item @code{u} --- reserved
14865
 
14866
Reserved for future use.
14867
 
14868
@item @code{U} --- reserved
14869
 
14870
Reserved for future use.
14871
 
14872
@item @code{v} --- reserved
14873
 
14874
Reserved for future use.
14875
 
14876
@item @code{V} --- reserved
14877
 
14878
Reserved for future use.
14879
 
14880
@item @code{w} --- reserved
14881
 
14882
Reserved for future use.
14883
 
14884
@item @code{W} --- reserved
14885
 
14886
Reserved for future use.
14887
 
14888
@item @code{x} --- reserved
14889
 
14890
Reserved for future use.
14891
 
14892
@item @code{X}@var{addr}@code{,}@var{length}@var{:}@var{XX@dots{}} --- write mem (binary)
14893
@cindex @code{X} packet
14894
 
14895
@var{addr} is address, @var{length} is number of bytes, @var{XX@dots{}}
14896
is binary data.  The characters @code{$}, @code{#}, and @code{0x7d} are
14897
escaped using @code{0x7d}.
14898
 
14899
Reply:
14900
@table @samp
14901
@item OK
14902
for success
14903
@item E@var{NN}
14904
for an error
14905
@end table
14906
 
14907
@item @code{y} --- reserved
14908
 
14909
Reserved for future use.
14910
 
14911
@item @code{Y} reserved
14912
 
14913
Reserved for future use.
14914
 
14915
@item @code{z}@var{t}@code{,}@var{addr}@code{,}@var{length} --- remove break or watchpoint @strong{(draft)}
14916
@cindex @code{z} packet
14917
 
14918
@xref{insert breakpoint or watchpoint packet}.
14919
 
14920
@item @code{Z}@var{t}@code{,}@var{addr}@code{,}@var{length} --- insert break or watchpoint @strong{(draft)}
14921
@anchor{insert breakpoint or watchpoint packet}
14922
@cindex @code{Z} packet
14923
 
14924
@var{t} is type: @samp{0} - software breakpoint, @samp{1} - hardware
14925
breakpoint, @samp{2} --- write watchpoint, @samp{3} - read watchpoint,
14926
@samp{4} - access watchpoint; @var{addr} is address; @var{length} is in
14927
bytes.  For a software breakpoint, @var{length} specifies the size of
14928
the instruction to be patched.  For hardware breakpoints and watchpoints
14929
@var{length} specifies the memory region to be monitored.  To avoid
14930
potential problems with duplicate packets, the operations should be
14931
implemented in an idempotent way.
14932
 
14933
Reply:
14934
@table @samp
14935
@item E@var{NN}
14936
for an error
14937
@item OK
14938
for success
14939
@item @samp{}
14940
If not supported.
14941
@end table
14942
 
14943
@end table
14944
 
14945
@node Stop Reply Packets
14946
@section Stop Reply Packets
14947
@cindex stop reply packets
14948
 
14949
The @samp{C}, @samp{c}, @samp{S}, @samp{s} and @samp{?} packets can
14950
receive any of the below as a reply.  In the case of the @samp{C},
14951
@samp{c}, @samp{S} and @samp{s} packets, that reply is only returned
14952
when the target halts.  In the below the exact meaning of @samp{signal
14953
number} is poorly defined.  In general one of the UNIX signal numbering
14954
conventions is used.
14955
 
14956
@table @samp
14957
 
14958
@item S@var{AA}
14959
@var{AA} is the signal number
14960
 
14961
@item @code{T}@var{AA}@var{n...}@code{:}@var{r...}@code{;}@var{n...}@code{:}@var{r...}@code{;}@var{n...}@code{:}@var{r...}@code{;}
14962
@cindex @code{T} packet reply
14963
 
14964
@var{AA} = two hex digit signal number; @var{n...} = register number
14965
(hex), @var{r...}  = target byte ordered register contents, size defined
14966
by @code{REGISTER_RAW_SIZE}; @var{n...} = @samp{thread}, @var{r...} =
14967
thread process ID, this is a hex integer; @var{n...} = (@samp{watch} |
14968
@samp{rwatch} | @samp{awatch}, @var{r...} = data address, this is a hex
14969
integer; @var{n...} = other string not starting with valid hex digit.
14970
@value{GDBN} should ignore this @var{n...}, @var{r...} pair and go on
14971
to the next.  This way we can extend the protocol.
14972
 
14973
@item W@var{AA}
14974
 
14975
The process exited, and @var{AA} is the exit status.  This is only
14976
applicable to certain targets.
14977
 
14978
@item X@var{AA}
14979
 
14980
The process terminated with signal @var{AA}.
14981
 
14982
@item N@var{AA};@var{t@dots{}};@var{d@dots{}};@var{b@dots{}} @strong{(obsolete)}
14983
 
14984
@var{AA} = signal number; @var{t@dots{}} = address of symbol
14985
@code{_start}; @var{d@dots{}} = base of data section; @var{b@dots{}} =
14986
base of bss section.  @emph{Note: only used by Cisco Systems targets.
14987
The difference between this reply and the @samp{qOffsets} query is that
14988
the @samp{N} packet may arrive spontaneously whereas the @samp{qOffsets}
14989
is a query initiated by the host debugger.}
14990
 
14991
@item O@var{XX@dots{}}
14992
 
14993
@var{XX@dots{}} is hex encoding of @sc{ascii} data.  This can happen at
14994
any time while the program is running and the debugger should continue
14995
to wait for @samp{W}, @samp{T}, etc.
14996
 
14997
@end table
14998
 
14999
@node General Query Packets
15000
@section General Query Packets
15001
 
15002
The following set and query packets have already been defined.
15003
 
15004
@table @r
15005
 
15006
@item @code{q}@code{C} --- current thread
15007
 
15008
Return the current thread id.
15009
 
15010
Reply:
15011
@table @samp
15012
@item @code{QC}@var{pid}
15013
Where @var{pid} is a HEX encoded 16 bit process id.
15014
@item *
15015
Any other reply implies the old pid.
15016
@end table
15017
 
15018
@item @code{q}@code{fThreadInfo} -- all thread ids
15019
 
15020
@code{q}@code{sThreadInfo}
15021
 
15022
Obtain a list of active thread ids from the target (OS).  Since there
15023
may be too many active threads to fit into one reply packet, this query
15024
works iteratively: it may require more than one query/reply sequence to
15025
obtain the entire list of threads.  The first query of the sequence will
15026
be the @code{qf}@code{ThreadInfo} query; subsequent queries in the
15027
sequence will be the @code{qs}@code{ThreadInfo} query.
15028
 
15029
NOTE: replaces the @code{qL} query (see below).
15030
 
15031
Reply:
15032
@table @samp
15033
@item @code{m}@var{id}
15034
A single thread id
15035
@item @code{m}@var{id},@var{id}@dots{}
15036
a comma-separated list of thread ids
15037
@item @code{l}
15038
(lower case 'el') denotes end of list.
15039
@end table
15040
 
15041
In response to each query, the target will reply with a list of one or
15042
more thread ids, in big-endian hex, separated by commas.  @value{GDBN}
15043
will respond to each reply with a request for more thread ids (using the
15044
@code{qs} form of the query), until the target responds with @code{l}
15045
(lower-case el, for @code{'last'}).
15046
 
15047
@item @code{q}@code{ThreadExtraInfo}@code{,}@var{id} --- extra thread info
15048
 
15049
Where @var{id} is a thread-id in big-endian hex.  Obtain a printable
15050
string description of a thread's attributes from the target OS.  This
15051
string may contain anything that the target OS thinks is interesting for
15052
@value{GDBN} to tell the user about the thread.  The string is displayed
15053
in @value{GDBN}'s @samp{info threads} display.  Some examples of
15054
possible thread extra info strings are ``Runnable'', or ``Blocked on
15055
Mutex''.
15056
 
15057
Reply:
15058
@table @samp
15059
@item @var{XX@dots{}}
15060
Where @var{XX@dots{}} is a hex encoding of @sc{ascii} data, comprising
15061
the printable string containing the extra information about the thread's
15062
attributes.
15063
@end table
15064
 
15065
@item @code{q}@code{L}@var{startflag}@var{threadcount}@var{nextthread} --- query @var{LIST} or @var{threadLIST} @strong{(deprecated)}
15066
 
15067
Obtain thread information from RTOS.  Where: @var{startflag} (one hex
15068
digit) is one to indicate the first query and zero to indicate a
15069
subsequent query; @var{threadcount} (two hex digits) is the maximum
15070
number of threads the response packet can contain; and @var{nextthread}
15071
(eight hex digits), for subsequent queries (@var{startflag} is zero), is
15072
returned in the response as @var{argthread}.
15073
 
15074
NOTE: this query is replaced by the @code{q}@code{fThreadInfo} query
15075
(see above).
15076
 
15077
Reply:
15078
@table @samp
15079
@item @code{q}@code{M}@var{count}@var{done}@var{argthread}@var{thread@dots{}}
15080
Where: @var{count} (two hex digits) is the number of threads being
15081
returned; @var{done} (one hex digit) is zero to indicate more threads
15082
and one indicates no further threads; @var{argthreadid} (eight hex
15083
digits) is @var{nextthread} from the request packet; @var{thread@dots{}}
15084
is a sequence of thread IDs from the target.  @var{threadid} (eight hex
15085
digits).  See @code{remote.c:parse_threadlist_response()}.
15086
@end table
15087
 
15088
@item @code{q}@code{CRC:}@var{addr}@code{,}@var{length} --- compute CRC of memory block
15089
 
15090
Reply:
15091
@table @samp
15092
@item @code{E}@var{NN}
15093
An error (such as memory fault)
15094
@item @code{C}@var{CRC32}
15095
A 32 bit cyclic redundancy check of the specified memory region.
15096
@end table
15097
 
15098
@item @code{q}@code{Offsets} --- query sect offs
15099
 
15100
Get section offsets that the target used when re-locating the downloaded
15101
image.  @emph{Note: while a @code{Bss} offset is included in the
15102
response, @value{GDBN} ignores this and instead applies the @code{Data}
15103
offset to the @code{Bss} section.}
15104
 
15105
Reply:
15106
@table @samp
15107
@item @code{Text=}@var{xxx}@code{;Data=}@var{yyy}@code{;Bss=}@var{zzz}
15108
@end table
15109
 
15110
@item @code{q}@code{P}@var{mode}@var{threadid} --- thread info request
15111
 
15112
Returns information on @var{threadid}.  Where: @var{mode} is a hex
15113
encoded 32 bit mode; @var{threadid} is a hex encoded 64 bit thread ID.
15114
 
15115
Reply:
15116
@table @samp
15117
@item *
15118
@end table
15119
 
15120
See @code{remote.c:remote_unpack_thread_info_response()}.
15121
 
15122
@item @code{q}@code{Rcmd,}@var{command} --- remote command
15123
 
15124
@var{command} (hex encoded) is passed to the local interpreter for
15125
execution.  Invalid commands should be reported using the output string.
15126
Before the final result packet, the target may also respond with a
15127
number of intermediate @code{O}@var{output} console output packets.
15128
@emph{Implementors should note that providing access to a stubs's
15129
interpreter may have security implications}.
15130
 
15131
Reply:
15132
@table @samp
15133
@item OK
15134
A command response with no output.
15135
@item @var{OUTPUT}
15136
A command response with the hex encoded output string @var{OUTPUT}.
15137
@item @code{E}@var{NN}
15138
Indicate a badly formed request.
15139
@item @samp{}
15140
When @samp{q}@samp{Rcmd} is not recognized.
15141
@end table
15142
 
15143
@item @code{qSymbol::} --- symbol lookup
15144
 
15145
Notify the target that @value{GDBN} is prepared to serve symbol lookup
15146
requests.  Accept requests from the target for the values of symbols.
15147
 
15148
Reply:
15149
@table @samp
15150
@item @code{OK}
15151
The target does not need to look up any (more) symbols.
15152
@item @code{qSymbol:}@var{sym_name}
15153
The target requests the value of symbol @var{sym_name} (hex encoded).
15154
@value{GDBN} may provide the value by using the
15155
@code{qSymbol:}@var{sym_value}:@var{sym_name} message, described below.
15156
@end table
15157
 
15158
@item @code{qSymbol:}@var{sym_value}:@var{sym_name} --- symbol value
15159
 
15160
Set the value of @var{sym_name} to @var{sym_value}.
15161
 
15162
@var{sym_name} (hex encoded) is the name of a symbol whose value the
15163
target has previously requested.
15164
 
15165
@var{sym_value} (hex) is the value for symbol @var{sym_name}.  If
15166
@value{GDBN} cannot supply a value for @var{sym_name}, then this field
15167
will be empty.
15168
 
15169
Reply:
15170
@table @samp
15171
@item @code{OK}
15172
The target does not need to look up any (more) symbols.
15173
@item @code{qSymbol:}@var{sym_name}
15174
The target requests the value of a new symbol @var{sym_name} (hex
15175
encoded).  @value{GDBN} will continue to supply the values of symbols
15176
(if available), until the target ceases to request them.
15177
@end table
15178
 
15179
@end table
15180
 
15181
@node Register Packet Format
15182
@section Register Packet Format
15183
 
15184
The following @samp{g}/@samp{G} packets have previously been defined.
15185
In the below, some thirty-two bit registers are transferred as
15186
sixty-four bits.  Those registers should be zero/sign extended (which?)
15187
to fill the space allocated.  Register bytes are transfered in target
15188
byte order.  The two nibbles within a register byte are transfered
15189
most-significant - least-significant.
15190
 
15191
@table @r
15192
 
15193
@item MIPS32
15194
 
15195
All registers are transfered as thirty-two bit quantities in the order:
15196
32 general-purpose; sr; lo; hi; bad; cause; pc; 32 floating-point
15197
registers; fsr; fir; fp.
15198
 
15199
@item MIPS64
15200
 
15201
All registers are transfered as sixty-four bit quantities (including
15202
thirty-two bit registers such as @code{sr}).  The ordering is the same
15203
as @code{MIPS32}.
15204
 
15205
@end table
15206
 
15207
@node Examples
15208
@section Examples
15209
 
15210
Example sequence of a target being re-started.  Notice how the restart
15211
does not get any direct output:
15212
 
15213
@smallexample
15214
-> @code{R00}
15215
<- @code{+}
15216
@emph{target restarts}
15217
-> @code{?}
15218
<- @code{+}
15219
<- @code{T001:1234123412341234}
15220
-> @code{+}
15221
@end smallexample
15222
 
15223
Example sequence of a target being stepped by a single instruction:
15224
 
15225
@smallexample
15226
-> @code{G1445@dots{}}
15227
<- @code{+}
15228
-> @code{s}
15229
<- @code{+}
15230
@emph{time passes}
15231
<- @code{T001:1234123412341234}
15232
-> @code{+}
15233
-> @code{g}
15234
<- @code{+}
15235
<- @code{1455@dots{}}
15236
-> @code{+}
15237
@end smallexample
15238
 
15239
@include gpl.texi
15240
 
15241
@include fdl.texi
15242
 
15243
@node Index
15244
@unnumbered Index
15245
 
15246
@printindex cp
15247
 
15248
@tex
15249
% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo.  In the
15250
% meantime:
15251
\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
15252
\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
15253
\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
15254
\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
15255
\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
15256
\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/},}
15257
\centerline{{\bf\fontname\tenbf}, and}
15258
\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
15259
\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
15260
\page\colophon
15261
% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 1991.
15262
@end tex
15263
 
15264
@bye

powered by: WebSVN 2.1.0

© copyright 1999-2024 OpenCores.org, equivalent to Oliscience, all rights reserved. OpenCores®, registered trademark.